JP6754309B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a display device (display means) capable of displaying a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information, and a state advantageous to the player is generated according to the result of the variable display game. What is possible is known.
In this type of gaming machine, for example, as described in Patent Document 1, various effects including a notice suggesting the result of the variable display game are provided as the effect of the variable display game. It is done in.

JP, 2013-192622, A

By the way, in this type of gaming machine, the production is diversified, but for example, a more dynamic and interesting production is required.
The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a high degree of interest in gaming.

The invention according to claim 1
A game machine capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed in the display area of the display means on condition that a start prize has been won.
A start storage means that extracts determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the start prize and stores it as start memory of the variable display game.
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control for executing the variable display game is performed, and one start memory corresponding to the variable display game corresponds to the execution of the variable display game. Variable display game control means that controls the elimination of
The start memory display corresponding to the variable display game being executed can be used as the variable start memory display to execute an animation display in which the animation of a predetermined cycle is repeated in the variable start memory display area, and is stored in the start storage means. It is provided with an effect control means capable of executing an animation display in which an animation of a predetermined cycle is repeated in a start memory display area as a standby start memory display corresponding to the start memory.
The start storage means ranks and stores the start memory in the order of occurrence, and stores the start memory.
The variable display game control means ranks one of the remaining start memories as the variable display game corresponding to the oldest start memory among the start memories stored in the start storage means is executed. It is a configuration that performs shift processing that moves up one by one.
The effect control means
The variable start memory display can be displayed in a special mode different from the standby start memory display, and the animation display in the special mode is synchronized with the animation display of the standby start memory display. It is possible to display
When a new start memory is generated while executing the animation display of the waiting start memory display corresponding to the previous start memory, regardless of the mode of the animation display of the waiting start memory display corresponding to the previous start memory. In response to the occurrence of the new start memory , the animation display of the standby start memory display corresponding to the new start memory is executed from the beginning.
Corresponding to the execution of the shift process, the waiting start memory display corresponding to the new start memory using the same image as the animation display of the waiting start memory display corresponding to the previous start memory . By performing the animation display, the animation display of the waiting start memory display corresponding to the previous start memory and the animation display of the waiting start memory display corresponding to the new start memory can be synchronized. possible der is,
It is possible to change the display mode of the variable start memory display and the standby start memory display according to the effect mode.
Even when the presentation mode is a display mode of the change in the start memory display and the standby starting memory display is changed is switched, Ru can der to perform animation display for the same period as before It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a high degree of interest in gaming.

It is a front side perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control system (mainly a game control device) of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a game control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a game control device. It is a flowchart which shows the checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the initial value random number update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the input process. It is a flowchart which shows the switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows the output process. It is a flowchart which shows the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning number counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game machine state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the common process of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure hold information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening switch monitoring process. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the usual processing. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the normal process transition setting process 1. It is the flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process (special figure 1, special figure 2) during special figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process while displaying a special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability fluctuation number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode information check process. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process 1 in a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process 1 during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process while opening a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening residual ball processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing of the remaining ball of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process 2 in a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process transition setting process. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end setting process 1 and 2. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the normal process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit fanfare middle processing and small hit middle processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit middle processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit residual ball processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit remaining ball processing and small hit end processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the normal process transition setting process 3. It is a flowchart which shows the effect command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol variation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution process and 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the Fukuden prize switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the change of a normal map and the process during the display of a normal map transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during display of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the middle process transition setting process per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the middle of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric residual sphere processing and the end processing per ordinary figure transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the end process per ordinary figure and the ordinary process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the external information editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the external information editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the main prize ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the start port signal editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting demo setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the scenario data setting process for waiting for a customer. It is a flowchart which shows the scenario data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball lending information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the reach start effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows SD1 fluctuation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the scenario setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the scenario analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the scenario analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the motion registration process. It is a flowchart which shows the motion data initialization process 1 and 2. It is a flowchart which shows the motion deletion processing and motion continuation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the constant weight processing and variable weight processing. It is a flowchart which shows PB wait processing and PB determination branch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol back calculation replacement processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation scenario switching process. It is a flowchart which shows the iterative process and the end process. It is a flowchart which shows the motion control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the motion command execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the motion command execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the bitmap addition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the moving image addition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1-point designation object movement processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect type specification processing and effect parameter specification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the object deletion process and the object change process. It is a flowchart which shows the object moving image decoding process. It is a flowchart which shows the behavior index setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect display editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect display editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect display editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the character drawing process. It is a flowchart which shows the display left symbol conversion processing, PB color conversion processing, and reach character conversion processing. It is a front view of a game board (a movable accessory is in an upright state). It is a figure which shows the start port distribution device. It is a figure explaining the operation of the start port distribution device. It is a figure which shows an example of the still image ROM member list table. It is a figure which shows an example of the moving image ROM member list table. It is a figure which shows an example of the list table for motion. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the scenario table at the time of a customer waiting demonstration. Special Figure 1 It is a figure which shows the specific example of the scenario table at the time of a normal fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the motion table at the start of a normal fluctuation of the left symbol. It is a figure which shows the display example at the start of the left symbol change. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the present symbol, the previous symbol, and the next symbol at the time of normal fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the specific example (connection example) of the motion table at the time of a normal fluctuation of the left symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of a scenario at the time of a push button notice and a motion table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the scenario table at the time of a variable display ending. It is a figure explaining the display layer. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure explaining the state of an image and a display layer. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table. It is a figure explaining the state of an image and a display layer. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a flowchart which shows the reduction effect control processing. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a timing chart explaining the synchronization of the hold (start memory) display. It is a flowchart which shows the hold effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the hold effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect display. It is a figure explaining the hold (start memory) animation timer. It is a flowchart which shows the hold effect setting process.

Hereinafter, as Example 1 of the present invention, a mode example when applied to a pachinko machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
A. Front configuration of pachinko machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 1 of this example.
The pachinko machine 1 has a machine frame 2 fixed to an island on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and a machine frame 2 rotatably supported by a hinge portion 3 with respect to the machine frame 2. It is provided with a front frame 4 that can be opened and closed. A game board 20 (shown in FIGS. 2 and 3) is attached to the front frame 4. The game board 20 is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 4.

Further, a glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to cover the upper front surface thereof so as to be openable and closable. The game area 22 described later of the game board 20 can be visually recognized from the front through the glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be used, the reference numerals are omitted) held by the glass frame 5. Further, the glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be openable and closable.
Here, the front frame 4 is referred to by the name of the game frame (or the main body frame), and the glass frame 5 is sometimes referred to by the name of the front frame, but in this embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 will be described. doing.
An operation panel 6 is provided on the lower side of the glass frame 5.
The pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a CR unit (also referred to as a card-type ball lending control unit or a card unit) as a game medium lending device (ball lending machine), but the illustration is omitted here. This CR unit is connected to a payout control device 200 (shown in FIG. 4) described later via a card unit connection board (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 has a game nail planted on the front surface of a plate-shaped base material (so-called veneer), and a game area is formed by surrounding a substantially circular area on the front surface with a guide rail 21. 22 is formed. The game area 22 is an area for determining whether the game is out or safe (determining whether or not a prize has been won) while dropping the driven game ball from above, and when the game ball enters the winning opening and becomes effectively safe. Is configured so that a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to an upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 (that is, discharged as a prize ball).
Further, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) of the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed on the edge of the front frame 4 on the opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1).

Further, the upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 temporarily holds the game ball before launch, which is discharged as a prize ball or a rental ball. A push-button type effect button 9 operated by the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 7. The effect button 9 has a built-in effect button switch (effect button SW46) described later. Further, a touch panel 9a for receiving a contact operation input from a player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 9.
Further, the operation panel 6 is provided with a lower plate 10 on which the game ball of the upper plate 7 can be moved by the operation of the player, and a launch operation handle 11 (operation unit) for launching the game ball. .. Here, the launch operation handle 11 is provided with a touch switch 11a (also referred to as a touch sensor) for detecting whether or not a player's hand or the like is touching (touching) the launch operation handle 11. If the touch switch 11a detects that there is contact with the firing operation handle 11, it can be determined that the player is playing (that is, firing the game ball). The touch switch 11a corresponds to a contact detecting means.
Further, what is indicated by reference numerals 12a and 12b in FIG. 1 is a speaker that outputs sound effects and the like. Of these, reference numeral 12a is an upper speaker provided on both the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5. Reference numeral 12b is a lower speaker provided at the right end of the operation panel 6 (right side of the lower plate 10).

In the present embodiment, the touch panel 9a is provided integrally with the effect button 9, but the touch panel 9a may be separate from the effect button 9. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 9. A touch panel 9a may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.
Further, on the right side of the effect button 9, there is a ball lending button 16 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 17. Balance display section that displays the balance of the prepaid card (not shown)
Etc. are provided. In the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of this embodiment, the launching device (not shown) is supplied from the upper plate 7 by the player rotating the operation unit (launching operation handle 11). Is fired toward the game area 22 on the front surface of the game board 20. Further, when the player operates the effect button 9 or the touch panel 9a, the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display unit 41a (see FIG. 2) of the display device 41. It is possible to perform other effects.
Further, in FIG. 1, what is indicated by reference numeral 13 is a decorative lamp whose light emitting source is LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the left and right sides of the front surface of the glass frame 5, and what is indicated by reference numeral 14 is the decorative lamp 13 on the right side thereof. It is a logo display portion 14 (a portion for displaying the brand of the pachinko machine) formed on the side portion of the machine. In addition to this, a moving light may be provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The moving light includes an LED as a light emitting source and a motor as a driving source. Here, if the decoration mechanism is divided by the concept of the board and the frame of the pachinko machine 1, the decoration lamp 13 and the moving light constitute the frame decoration device 43 (decoration device on the frame side) shown in FIG. 5, and the moving light. Also constitutes a frame effect device (frame side effect device) (not shown).

B. Front configuration of the game board In FIG. 2, reference numeral 21 is a guide rail of the game board 20, and as described above, the game area 22 is formed by surrounding the substantially circular area on the front surface of the game board with the guide rail 21. ing.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game area 22 includes an out-ball inflow port 23, a center case 24, a start port distribution device 600 (including the special figure 1 start port 607 and the special figure 2 start port 608 described later), and a normal one. Ordinary variable winning device 26 (including starting winning opening 26a) as an electric accessory (general electric), variable winning device 27, general winning opening 28 to 31, general drawing starting gate 32, warp entrance 33, indicator lamp section 34, many The game nails (not shown) are provided. Further, a batch display device 35 is provided outside the game area 22 of the game board 20. It should be noted that the game nails are those in which the game balls that have jumped into the upper part of the game area 22 flow down while hitting them, and a plurality of game nails are planted in the game area excluding the attachment portion such as the center case.

The center case 24 is a member (game effect component) that surrounds the front periphery of the display unit 41a (shown in FIG. 2) of the display device 41 (shown in FIG. 5) attached to the back side of the game board 20. Although a part of the center case 24 is not shown, the center case 24 has lamps that use LEDs as a light emitting source for effect or decoration, and a movable role that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41. An object (an accessory having a movable part operated by a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid) is provided. In the case of this example, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 130, the movable accessory 700 has a decorative portion 701 having a rose flower motif, the upper movable accessory 801 and the left movable accessory. An object 802 and a right movable accessory 803 are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 130, the movable accessory 700 is provided with a substantially disk-shaped decorative portion 701 having a decoration representing a rose flower on the surface thereof and the decorative portion 701 integrally provided on the tip side thereof. It has an arm unit 703, and the decorative unit 701 is movable with respect to the display unit 41a (display screen, display area) of the display device 41 (display means). Specifically, the movable accessory 700 is provided in the lower part of the center case 24, and the arm portion 703 can swing along the front surface of the display portion 41a by a mechanism and a drive source (not shown). At least, as shown in FIG. 130, the arm portion 703 and the decorative portion 701 are in an upright state, and as shown in FIG. 2, the arm portion 703 and the decorative portion 701 are tilted substantially horizontally to the left (as shown in FIG. 2). It is possible to displace and stop between the normal state) and the state between the standing state and the initial state (for example, a state inclined at an angle of 40 degrees). Then, in the upright state, the decorative portion 701 is exposed to the front surface so as to partially cover the lower front surface of the display unit 41a (display screen, display area) (becomes visible to the player), while in the initial state. The decorative portion 701 (at least the main portion thereof) is hidden in the lower left portion of the center case 24 and is not exposed to the front surface (not visible to the player).

The upper movable accessory 801 is provided on the upper side in the center case 24, and a movable effect member imitating a rose flower, which is the theme of the game board 20 of this example, falls or rotates on the front side of the display unit 41a. It is a movable accessory that can be moved. The left movable accessory 802 is provided on the left side when viewed from the front inside the center case 24, and a movable effect member imitating a vine of a rose can be moved, for example, in parallel to the front side of the display unit 41a. It is a character. The right movable accessory 803 is provided on the right side when viewed from the front inside the center case 24, and a movable effect member imitating a vine of a rose can be moved, for example, in parallel to the front side of the display unit 41a. It is a character. The movable accessory such as the upper movable accessory 801 and the left movable accessory 802, and the right movable accessory 803 are not limited to such an embodiment, and various modifications can be made. For example, even in a mode in which the upper, left, and right movable effect members are rotationally moved or moved in parallel so as to be interlocked and can be united on the front surface of the display unit 41a (a mode in which they are united to form a large rose). Good. Further, the upper movable accessory 801 and the left movable accessory 802, and the right movable accessory 803 may move in conjunction with the movable accessory 700 to express something.

The lamps for directing or decorating are also provided in a portion of the game board 20 other than the center case 24 (may be outside the game area 22). Further, the lamps for effect or decoration (including the lamp of the display lamp unit 34 in this example) provided on the game board 20 (including the center case 24) correspond to the effect mechanism on the board side, and the board. The decoration device 42 (shown in FIG. 5) is configured. Further, the movable accessory provided in the center case 24 (for example, the movable accessory 700, the upper movable accessory 801 and the left movable accessory 802, the right movable accessory 803) corresponds to the effect mechanism on the board side, and is a board. The effect device 44 (shown in FIG. 5) is configured. The movable accessory constituting the board effect device 44 may be provided at a place other than the center case 24 of the game board 20.

Next, the starting port sorting device 600 and the normal variable winning device 26 are starting winning devices including the starting winning opening of the special figure as described later, and in this example, the starting port sorting device 600 as shown in FIG. Is arranged below the center of the center case 24, and the ordinary variable winning device 26 is arranged on the upper right side of the starting port distribution device 600 (below the right side of the center case 24).
The front surface of the start port distribution device 600 is covered with a decorative cover 601, and as will be described later, a game ball flowing in from the upper surface is placed inside (the back side of the decorative cover 601). It is a winning device that flows into the starting port 608 (shown in FIG. 131). The details of the start port distribution device 600 will be described later. Further, the ordinary variable winning device 26 has one starting winning opening 26a.
Here, the special drawing 1 starting port 607, the special drawing 2 starting port 608, and the starting winning opening 26a function as a special drawing starting winning opening (sometimes referred to as a starting opening or a starting area) as described later. Mouth (winning area). Strictly speaking, there is a starting area (a region where the game ball is detected as a starting prize) inside the starting winning opening, and when the game ball enters the starting winning opening, it is detected as a starting winning. The inflow port of the game ball on the upper surface of the start port distribution device 600 (game ball inflow port 606 described later; FIG. 131) is always open, and the game machine flowing into the start port distribution device 600 from here is started in FIG. Win a prize in either the opening 607 or the special drawing 2 starting opening 608. The start winning opening 26a of the normal variable winning device 26 is in a state where a prize can be won when the opening / closing member 26b described later is opened (an open state in which the possibility of winning a game ball is high), and when the opening / closing member 26b is closed, a prize is won. It becomes an impossible state (a closed state in which the winning possibility of the game ball is lower than the open state, the winning possibility may be zero, and in this embodiment, the winning possibility is zero).

The ordinary variable winning device 26 is a device (so-called mini-attacker) having a starting winning opening 26a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 26b (opening / closing door), and is also referred to as an ordinary electric accessory (Public electric). In the following, "opening of the normal variable winning device 26", "opening of the general electric power", "opening of the starting winning opening 26a", and "opening of the opening / closing member 26b" all mean that the opening / closing member 26b is in the open state. Means to do. The normal variable winning device 26 may be of a type in which the starting winning opening 26a is opened and closed by an opening / closing member that opens in an inverted C shape.

Further, the variable winning device 27 is provided below the normal variable winning device 26 (to the right of the starting port distribution device 600) in this example, and has a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 27b (opening / closing door). It is a device (so-called attacker). The big winning opening 27a is opened on condition that it becomes a big hit, which will be described later, and a game ball can win a prize. The opening / closing member 27b is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 133 (FIG. 4). Here, although only one variable winning device (special variable winning device) including the large winning opening is illustrated in FIG. 2, there may be a plurality of modes in which the special variable winning device is present in the game area 22. .. Further, this special variable winning device may be of a type in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by an opening / closing member that opens in an inverted C shape.

The warp entrance 33 is formed on the left side of the center case 24, and a game ball flowing down the left side of the center case 24 can flow in. The game ball flowing in from the warp inlet 33 is guided to the stage 24a provided at the bottom of the center case 24 via a warp flow path (not shown) in the center case 24. The game ball guided to the stage 24a flows down from the center case 24 through rolling on the stage 24a, and flows into, for example, the start port distribution device 600 depending on the flow position.
The indicator lamp unit 34 is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps whose light emitting source is an LED, and performs the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 and the hold display (display of the number of held start winning memories).

The display device 41 (effect means, display means) is configured to include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is usually referred to as a variable display device. As the name of the display device 41, for example, a special symbol display device, a special symbol display device, a symbol variation device, a variable symbol display device, an identification information variation device, and an identification information variation display device are used as names of members having the same function. There are various types, but those with the same function are in the same category.
The display device 41 has a display unit 41a (display screen, display area) capable of displaying identification information (referred to as a special figure) such as numbers and characters, and can display a plurality of columns of special figures. For example, special figures are displayed in three vertical columns on the left side, center, and right side, and special figures consisting of numbers and letters are displayed in a stopped state (stop display) in each column, or in a fluctuating state (for example, in the vertical direction). It is possible to display (that is, variable display) in a scrolling state.
Further, on the display unit 41a, an image for directing or information notification such as a background image or a character image can be displayed separately from the above special figure.

Further, an image corresponding to a so-called ordinary figure may be configured to be displayed on the display device 41. However, when the normal drawing is displayed on the display device 41, it is a decorative general drawing. When the display device 41 is configured to display a normal figure, the display device 41 corresponds to a normal symbol variable display device.
Here, the special figure is the identification information (special symbol) that is variablely displayed in the variable display game related to the big hit, and the normal figure is the variable display game that is variablely displayed in the variable display game related to the normal figure hit (not the big hit). Identification information (ordinary design).
In this example, the normal drawing is not displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device 41, but is displayed on the batch display device 35. The general drawing displayed on the batch display device 35 is referred to as a general drawing as described later.

As described above, the batch display device 35 (details will be described later) also displays the normal drawing in addition to the special drawing, and the normal drawing game will be described as follows.
When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 32, a variable display game of the normal map (hereinafter referred to as a variable display game of the normal map) is played by the batch display device 35, and the stopped normal map is predetermined. In this mode (specific display mode), a privilege called a normal figure hit is given.
When the display device 41 is configured to display the normal figure, the display device 41 displays the normal figure (decorative normal figure) in a variable manner on the screen of the display device 41. However, a unique general-purpose display may be arranged separately from the display device 41.

When it hits a normal figure, a game is played in which the opening / closing member 26b of the normally variable winning device 26 is temporarily held for a predetermined opening time in an open state, and the game ball becomes easier to start winning. The number of times the special figure variation display game is played increases, and the possibility of becoming a big hit increases.
Further, during the variable display game of the normal figure, when a game ball further wins the normal figure start gate 32, the display of the batch display device 35 described later executes the hold display of the normal figure start memory, for example, 4 Up to the number is stored, and after the end of the variable display game of the normal map, the variable display game of the normal map is repeated based on the memory. In addition, if the probability of the normal figure is set to high, it becomes easier to hit the normal figure.
The hold display of the normal map start memory displayed by the display device of the batch display device 35 is the normal map start memory. In addition to the batch display device 35, a unique normal drawing start memory display for displaying the decorative normal drawing start memory may be arranged in the game area 22.

Here, the time saving will be explained as follows.
Time reduction is an abbreviation of "time reduction", and after the big hit, the fluctuation time of special figures and ordinary figures is shortened more than usual to improve time efficiency, and the probability of hitting ordinary figures is increased to increase the probability of hitting a normal figure. ) By opening the start winning opening 26a (including making the opening time of the public train longer than usual) to support the winning of the starting opening, it is possible to hold up to the number of times the variable display game of the specified special figure is played. It is a function to efficiently change the special figure without reducing the number of balls (number of balls). That is, the time reduction is, in a narrow sense, to shorten the fluctuation time of special figures and ordinary figures more than usual, but it is specially performed in the so-called ordinary electric support state (electric support state) that increases the possibility of winning a prize in the ordinary electric train. It may also mean the entire control. As described above, the special control performed in the normal power support state is a control that changes the normal map fluctuation pattern (normal map fluctuation time, normal map stop time, etc.) in favor of the player (for example, shortens the normal map fluctuation time). Control to increase the probability of hitting the normal figure, control to change the opening pattern of the normal power (opening time, number of opening, etc.) in favor of the player (for example, control to lengthen the opening time, or control to increase the number of opening) ) Any one or more.

Next, the batch display device 35 displays a so-called normal figure, a special figure, a special figure, a hold display of the start memory of the normal figure (in some cases, a special figure hold display, a normal figure hold display), and a game. It displays the status, for example, a plurality of indicators using LEDs as light emitting sources (for example, an indicator consisting of one small lamp, or a display of, for example, 7 segments capable of displaying numbers as this special figure). It is composed of vessels). For example, among the LED segments in the batch display device 35, the one displaying the special figure 1 is arranged as the special figure 1 display, and the one displaying the special figure 2 is arranged as the special figure 2 display.
The hold display of the start memory (in some cases, simply referred to as "start memory display" or "hold display") is for notifying the number of start memories held in a state where the variable display game has not been executed. It is a display, and is generally displayed by lighting a lamp or the like for each start memory. That is, if there are three start memories, it is performed by turning on the three lamps or displaying the three figures. However, not only the start memory in which the variable display game has not been executed but also the start memory in which the variable display game is being executed may be displayed. For example, in the display unit 41a (display area) of the variable display device 41 that displays the variable of the special figure, as a kind of effect, the start memory during the execution of the variable display game may also be displayed as pending during the change. In a broad sense, this display is also a start memory display (hold display).

Further, while what is displayed by the display device of the batch display device 35 is the special drawing or the general drawing (formal special drawing or general drawing), the display unit 41a of the above-mentioned variable display device 41, etc. The display of the special drawing and the general drawing (however, when the configuration for displaying the general drawing on the variable display device 41 is adopted) performed in the above is a dummy display for the player's production. For this reason, from the player's point of view, the special map and the general map refer to this dummy display. In the following, when emphasizing that this dummy display is used, it will be referred to as, for example, "decorative special drawing" and "decorative general drawing".
As described above, the batch display device 35 is not intended for players, but is used for inspection of the game board 20 and the like. The display of the start memory of the special figure for the player (special figure hold display) is, for example, a display unit 41a of the variable display device 41 or a plurality of lamps provided on the game board 20 (in this example, for example, the above-mentioned display lamps). It is done by a part of the lamps of part 34).

Next, the configuration and operation of the start port distribution device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. 13 (a), 132 (a), and 132 (b) are front views of the start port sorting device 600 with the decorative cover 601 removed. Further, FIG. 131 (b) is a top view of the distribution member 603 and the like, which will be described later, as viewed from above.
In addition to the decorative cover 601 (shown in FIG. 2) described above, the starting port sorting device 600 includes a base member 602, a sorting member 603, a base member side magnet 604, and a sorting member side magnet shown in FIG. 131 (a). Has 605.
The base member 602 is a box-shaped member as a whole, and a game ball inflow port 606 through which a game ball (pachinko ball) can flow in from above is formed on the upper surface thereof. Special drawing 1 starting port 607 and special drawing 2 starting port 608 are provided side by side at the lower left and lower right positions of the component member 603).

The distribution member 603 is arranged in the base member 602 at a position substantially directly below the game ball inflow port 606, and has a rotation axis 603a in the front-rear direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 131 (a)) perpendicular to the game board surface. It is attached to the base member 602 so as to be rotatable by a predetermined angle about the central axis. Here, the predetermined angle is an angle range from a left-sided state to a right-sided state, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 131 (a), a distribution plate-shaped portion 610, a left guide wall portion 611, and a right guide wall portion 612 are located on the front surface side of the distribution member 603 and on the outer peripheral side of the rotation shaft 603a. It is provided. The left and right sides of the distribution plate-shaped portion 610 are parallel to the front-rear direction perpendicular to the game board surface, and when viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 131 (a), the distribution plate-shaped portion 610 extends in the radial direction from the vicinity of the outer circumference of the rotation shaft 603a. The distribution member side magnet 605 is fixed at a position on the back side of the tip end portion of the distribution plate-shaped portion 610. The game ball that has flowed down from the game ball inflow port 606 is configured to flow down to either one of the left and right sides of the distribution plate-shaped portion 610. Further, the left side guide wall portion 611 and the right side guide wall portion 612 have their upper surfaces parallel to each other in the front-rear direction perpendicular to the game board surface, and the game ball flowing down from the game ball inflow port 606 is the left side guide wall portion 611 or the right side. It is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of any one of the guide wall portions 612. Further, in the neutral state in which the distribution plate-shaped portion 610 faces straight upward when viewed from the front, the left guide wall portion 611 is located on the lower left side (left side of the rotation axis 603a) of the distribution plate-shaped portion 610, and the left side thereof. The upper surface of the guide wall portion 611 extends diagonally downward to the left from the vicinity of the outer circumference of the rotation shaft 603a, while the right guide wall portion 612 is located on the lower right side of the distribution plate-shaped portion 610 (on the right side of the rotation shaft 603a). However, the upper surface of the right guide wall portion 612 is configured to extend diagonally downward to the right from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rotation shaft 603a.

The base member side magnet 604 and the distribution member side magnet 605 are permanent magnets, and as shown in FIG. 131 (b), the base member side magnet 604 is directly below the game ball inflow port 606 on the inner surface of the back side of the base member 602. In the neutral state, the distribution member side magnet 605 is positioned to face substantially directly in front of the base member side magnet 604 (neutral position). Further, the distribution member side magnet 605 is fixed at a position (the position on the back side of the tip end portion of the distribution plate-shaped portion 610) on the back surface side of the distribution member 603, which is separated from the central axis of the rotation shaft 603a by a predetermined dimension. Note that FIG. 131 (b) shows only the periphery of the base member side magnet 604 and the distribution member side magnet 605 (including the special drawing 1 starting port 607 and the special drawing 2 starting port 608) in order to avoid complication. Others are not shown.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 132A and 132B, the distribution member side magnet 605 faces substantially directly in front of the base member side magnet 604 as the distribution member 603 rotates with respect to the base member 602. It has a configuration that allows it to swing left and right by a predetermined angle around the position (neutral position). Here, the base member side magnet 604 and the distribution member side magnet 605 are fixed in such a posture that the sides facing each other have the same poles, and are configured to repel each other by magnetic force. Further, the game ball that has flowed down from the game ball inflow port 606 to the inside of the start port distribution device 600 (that is, the inside of the base member 602) is at the position indicated by the reference numeral P in FIG. 131 (b) (the front surface of the distribution member 603). It is configured to first fall to the side (position directly below the game ball inflow port 606).

In the start port distribution device 600 having the above configuration, by setting the detailed dimensions and positional relationships of each part, the following game ball P swings even though it is configured without a drive source such as a motor. Minute operation is realized. That is, in the natural state in which the game ball P does not flow in, the distribution member 603 is in a rightward state in which the distribution member side magnet 605 is on the right side of the base member side magnet 604 when viewed from the front due to the repulsion due to the magnetic force. Either the state shown in 131 (a)) or the state in which the distribution member side magnet 605 is on the left side of the base member side magnet 604 when viewed from the front (the state opposite to that in FIG. 131 (a)). It has stopped at. That is, in the natural state where the game ball P does not flow in, the distribution member 603 is maintained in a state other than the above-mentioned neutral position (the right-sided state or the left-sided state) due to the repulsion by the magnetic force. However, when the game ball P flows in from the game ball inflow port 606 and falls, the game ball P falls to either the left side or the right side when viewed from the front of the distribution plate-shaped portion 610, and the left side guide wall portion 611 or the right side. By abutting on the upper surface of any one of the guide wall portions 612 and pushing down the guide wall portion 612, rotation of the distribution member 603 in one direction (that is, rotational movement of the distribution member side magnet 605) occurs, and accompanying this. As shown in FIGS. 132 (a) or 132 (b), the dropped game ball P is distributed to either the special drawing 1 starting port 607 or the special drawing 2 starting port 608 and flows in (winning). Then, by the operation when the game ball P enters any of the starting ports in this way, the distribution member 603 switches from the right-sided state to the left-sided state, or conversely, from the left-sided state to the right-sided state, and the game ball P Each time the player enters from the game ball inflow port 606 and falls, the same operations having different directions are alternately performed. That is, due to such an operation of the start port distribution device 600, the game balls flowing into the game ball inflow port 606 alternately flow into the special figure 1 start port 607 or the special figure 2 start port 608. In other words, if the game ball flowing into the game ball inflow port 606 wins a prize in the special figure 1 start port 607, the game ball flowing into the game ball inflow port 606 next wins a prize in the special figure 2 start port 608, and the game Assuming that the game ball flowing into the ball inflow port 606 wins the special figure 2 start port 608, the game ball flowing into the game ball inflow port 606 next wins the special figure 1 start port 607.

C. Configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine Next, FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the back side of the game board 20 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.
The main parts of the back mechanism in the pachinko machine 1 are a storage tank (not shown), a taxiway (not shown), a payout unit (not shown), a card unit connection board (not shown), and an external information terminal board 55 (not shown). (4), payout control device 200 (shown in FIG. 4), game control device 100, effect control device 300, power supply device 500 (shown in FIG. 4), and the like. Of these, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 are provided on the back surface of the game board 20 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 3, the box of the effect control device 300 cannot be seen directly, and the box for accommodating the substrate of the effect control device 300 is arranged behind the cover member (not shown). The cover member has a function of preventing the game ball from entering the back surface of the game machine, and has a structure that can be opened and closed like a door, for example. However, as shown in FIG. 3, the volume switch (volume SW) 388 of the effect control device 300 and the setting confirmation LED 339 are exposed on the back surface side of the game board 20, for example, a worker in a game machine manufacturing factory or a game shop. The structure is such that the store clerk can operate the volume SW338 while looking at the setting confirmation LED 339. The volume switch 388 sets the volume or volume range of the sound output from the speakers 12a and 12b, and the setting confirmation LED 339 lights up when the volume SW338 reaches a predetermined operation position. That is, if the set value changed by the volume SW338 does not match the default set value registered in the backup RAM (for example, FeRAM327 described later) due to the control (not shown) of the effect control device 300, the setting confirmation LED 339 Is turned off, and when the set value changed by the volume SW338 matches the default set value, the setting confirmation LED 339 is turned on. In this way, by turning on the setting confirmation LED 339 in the default setting, the operator does not need to see a small number on the scale of the volume SW338 (or even if this number cannot be seen), and the volume SW338 is defaulted. It is extremely easy to switch to the setting of.

The storage tank stores the balls before they are discharged in advance. The shortage of the number of balls in this storage tank is detected by a replenishment sensor (not shown), and when the number is insufficient, it is detected by a device called a chute of the island facility. The ball is replenished. The balls in the storage tank are guided by the taxiway and discharged to the above-mentioned upper plate 7 by the discharge unit. The payout unit can discharge a number of game balls according to the amount of rotation of the built-in payout motor, and the game balls paid out toward the upper plate 7 by the payout unit are payout ball detection switches (not shown). ) Is detected.
The external information terminal board 55 has a function as a relay terminal board (external terminal board) when various information of the pachinko machine 1 is sent to the management device of the hall.

The payout control device 200 performs control (including control of the payout unit) necessary for payout of game balls (both prize ball payout and loan ball payout), and is a circuit that realizes this control function within a predetermined case. The board is housed and configured. As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control device 200 is connected to the game control device 100 and discharges a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls to the upper plate 7 based on the payout control command transmitted from the game control device 100. Controls the payout of prize balls. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout of balls to be discharged to the upper plate 7 as a predetermined number of game balls based on the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal from the card unit.
The game control device 100 controls a solenoid or the like arranged on the game board 20 and sends control information (commands) to other control devices to comprehensively manage and control the progress of the game ( A substrate on which a circuit including a microcomputer that performs these controls is formed is housed in a predetermined case (described in detail later).

The effect control device 300 controls the display device 41, the decorative lamp, the effect device, and the speakers 12a and 12b based on the command transmitted from the game control device 100, and this control function is provided in a predetermined case. The circuit board to be realized is housed and configured.
The card unit connection board is a board for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the CR unit (card unit) side for renting a ball. If the above wiring connection is not made on the card unit connection board, the pachinko machine 1 is controlled so that the game ball cannot be launched.
Generally, when changing the model of a pachinko machine, the entire pachinko machine except the card unit is replaced, or the frame side (including the payout control device) of the pachinko machine is left on the game board side (game board and game). In some cases, only the main control device (including the main control device such as the control device) is replaced.

D. Configuration of Control System Next, the control system of the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 5. In the figure and the following description, "SW" means a switch. Further, in the drawing, when the name of the member is long, it becomes difficult to show it, so it may be shortened (shown) as appropriate.
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 100, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, a launch control device (not shown), and a power supply device 500 as main components of the control system.

(Game control device related)
First, the configuration of the game control device 100 of the pachinko machine 1 and the devices connected to the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls the game, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 101 and an inspection device connection terminal (not shown). There is. The game control device 100 corresponds to a control device or a control means. The detailed configuration of the game control device 100 will be described later.
The inspection device connection terminal is configured to include, for example, a photocoupler 179 (shown in FIG. 4), and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the game microcomputer 101 is connected to the inspection device 185. ..

The game control device 100 includes a first start port switch 120 (start port 1 switch in FIG. 4), a second start port switch 121 (start port 2 switch in FIG. 4), a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, and a big prize. Detection signals are input from the mouth switch 124, the magnetic sensor 126, the panel radio wave sensor 127, the glass frame opening detection switch 211, and the front frame opening detection switch 212 (main body frame opening detection switch in FIG. 4).
Here, the first start port switch 120 is a sensor for detecting a winning ball that has won one by one in the special figure 1 starting port 607, and the second starting port switch 121 is the starting winning port 26a or Special figure 2 This is a sensor for detecting winning balls that detects the winning game balls one by one in the starting port 608. In the case of this example, the second starting opening switch 121 (starting opening 2 switch) is described as being common to the starting winning opening 26a and the special drawing 2 starting opening 608, but the starting winning opening 26a and the special drawing 2 A total of two may be provided separately from the starting port 608.
The large winning opening switch 124 is a similar sensor (so-called count switch) that detects a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27. When there are a plurality of large winning openings, the large winning opening switches 124 are provided with one or two of each, x as a whole.
Further, the winning opening switch 123 is a similar sensor provided for the general winning opening 28 to 31, and when there are n general winning openings, one is provided for each, and n are provided as a whole. In addition, instead of providing one sensor for each of the general winning openings, one sensor may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings as a whole. The gate switch 122 is a sensor that detects game balls passing through the normal drawing start gate 32 one by one.
Each of the above sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, 124 that detects these game balls is a proximity switch in this example, and is a circuit for outputting a negative logic detection signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V. It is configured.

Further, the magnetic sensor 126 and the panel radio wave sensor 127 are sensors provided on the back surface of the game board 20 or the like to detect fraud by magnetism or radio waves. For example, the magnetic sensor 126 is arranged in each of the general winning openings 28, 30, 31 in the game board 20 and the large winning openings 27a of the variable winning device 27 (that is, arranged in four places), and the general winning openings 28, 30, 31, It is a sensor for detecting fraud such as stacking game balls around the large winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 using a magnet to facilitate winning in each winning opening. The magnetic sensor 126 may be arranged at more locations than the four locations as described above.
When there are k installation locations, one magnetic sensor 126 is provided for each, and k magnetic sensors 126 are provided as a whole. Similarly, when there are m of the panel radio wave sensors 127, one is provided for each, and m as a whole are provided.
Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 211 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine is open. The front frame (main body frame) opening detection switch 212 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 4 to which the glass frame 5 is attached is open.
The game control device 100 is provided with proximity I / F 163 for processing signals from the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, and 127, which will be described in detail later.

Here, the electronic components such as the game control device 100 and the solenoids 132 and 133, which will be described later, driven by the game control device 100, have a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 500. Supplied and made operational.
The power supply device 500 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from the voltage of DC32V. Unit 501, backup power supply unit 502 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM (RAM 101C described later) of the game microcomputer 101 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit that causes the game control device 100 to generate and recover from a power failure. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 503 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal to be notified.

The RAM clear switch (RAM initialization switch) 504 for initializing the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 101 is provided in the game control device 100 in this example, but this RAM clear switch (RAM initial) (Switch) 504 may be provided in the power supply device 500.
Further, in the first embodiment, the power supply device 500 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, , It may be configured to be provided on the main board. Since the game board 20 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are provided on a board different from the power supply device 500 or the main board in this way. As a result, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the replacement target when changing the model.

The backup power supply unit 502 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 101 (particularly the built-in RAM 101C) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 503 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 501, and when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power failure and changes (for example, turns on) the power failure monitoring signal. At the same time, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

The initialization switch signal is output from the RAM clear switch 504, and the initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 is turned on, and is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 is turned on, and is a user in the gaming microcomputer 101. Information stored in a RAM area such as the work RAM 101C and a similar RAM area in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized.
In the case of this example, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeated in the main loop of the main program executed by the game microcomputer 101 and the payout microcomputer (microcomputer of the payout control device 200). It is read. The reset signal is a kind of forced read signal and resets the entire control system.

Next, the game control device 100 is connected to the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, the general electric solenoid 132, the large winning opening solenoid 133, and the batch display device 35.
Further, the game control device 100 can be connected to a test firing test device (connected at the time of testing in a testing institution) (not shown) via a relay board 170. The test firing test device is such that a certification body conducts a test firing test of a game machine.
Further, from the game control device 100, the external information of the game control device 100 is output to the management device as an external device via the external information terminal board 55.
The external information terminal board 55 is connected to the game control device 100 by a cable, and relays when transmitting external information to a management device (not shown, for example, a device called a hall computer) as an external device.
The management device collects information (for example, external information) from a large number of pachinko machines installed in amusement stores, and performs processing such as arithmetic processing and total display of information necessary for sales.

Here, as the external information, for example, a signal for notifying the signal input to the game control device 100 to the outside, a big hit signal for notifying the big hit generated in the process of the game progress, and a condition for rotating the symbol (special figure). The start port signal for notifying the winning of the starting port, the symbol confirmation number signal for notifying the rotation of the symbol triggered by the start of rotation of the symbol, or the stop of rotation of the symbol, and the gaming state are in a state advantageous to the player. It is a signal for notifying the outside, such as a privilege state signal indicating (so-called probability change state, time saving state), and these are collectively referred to as a game machine state signal.
Further, data (for example, a payout command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 by serial communication. On the other hand, the payout control device 200 outputs the payout abnormality status signal, the shoot ball out switch signal, the overflow switch signal, the frame radio wave invalid signal, the payout busy signal, and the touch switch signal to the game control device 100. The contents of each signal will be described later.

Next, a solenoid and the like connected to the game control device 100 will be described.
The normal electric solenoid 132 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member 26b of the normal variable winning device 26, the large winning opening solenoid 133 is a solenoid that opens / closes the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27, and the batch display device 35 is the so-called general display device 35 as described above. It displays a figure, a special figure, a hold display of the start memory of the special figure and the normal figure, and a display of the game state.
In addition, data (commands) are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication.

(Production control device related)
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the device connected to the effect control device 300 will be described.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer 311, a VDP 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on a display device 41, a sound source LSI 313 that controls output of various melody and sound effects, and the like. However, the detailed configuration will be described later in FIG. The effect control device 300 corresponds to a control device and a control means.
The effect control device 300 analyzes the control command (consisting of MODE and ACTION data described later) from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, determines the effect content, and controls the content of the output image of the display device 41. Alternatively, the sound source LSI 313 is instructed to drive the speakers 12a and 12b to produce sound effects, and the above-mentioned board decoration device 42, frame decoration device 43, and board effect device 44 are driven and controlled. Execute the process. Further, when the effect control device 300 receives an error notification instruction from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 outputs a signal to the error notification LED (not shown) to turn it on.
Here, in addition to the single command (for example, the stop command), the command transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 does not start the effect independently, and is effective as a group. There is something to do, for example, "variation pattern command + symbol specification command" at the start of special figure fluctuation.

To explain the main commands in addition to the above, there is a probability information command. This is prepared in response to the special figure game mode flag (see steps S25, S30, S694, S779, A248, etc. described later), and is a flag that reflects the probability state at that time.
Even if, for example, the effect control device 300 receives the probability information command transmitted from the game control device 100, the screen of the display device 41 does not change immediately by the command alone, but is internal for producing the screen. All you have to do is change the parameters. After that, when a command that changes the screen (variable system, customer waiting demo command, etc.) is received, it is reflected as the probability state at that time.
In addition, since it is determined that the probability is low during the big hit, the internal parameters may be forcibly rewritten to the low probability when the big hit command is received without receiving the probability information command.
Information that can be obtained by the probability information command includes, for example, the following.
・ "Low probability, time saving (referring to so-called 100 rotations, etc.)"
・ "High probability, time saving (during so-called probability change)"
Here, the "probability information" in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) includes not only "probability change or not" but also "time saving or not" information. The state of the game machine is roughly divided into four types: "low probability / no time reduction", "low probability / time reduction", "high probability / time reduction", and "high probability / no time reduction". In this embodiment, three of the above types (for example, those excluding "low probability / no time saving") are used, and the probability information command further includes information on the effect mode (described later). The probability information command is transmitted from the game control device 100 at the timing when each state changes.
The command communication may be a serial communication method or a parallel communication method. In this embodiment, a serial communication method is adopted as command communication.

(Payout control device related)
Next, the configuration of the payout control device 200 and the equipment connected to the payout control device 200 will be described.
Although not shown, the payout control device 200 includes a payout microcomputer (referred to as a payout microcomputer), an error number indicator, and an error release switch, which control the payout of game balls (prize ball payout or loan ball payout). It is equipped with an inspection device connection terminal. The payout control device 200 corresponds to a control device.
Here, the inspection device connection terminal is a terminal that includes, for example, a photocoupler, and is connected to a cable for transmitting various information related to payout obtained from the payout microcomputer to the inspection device. When there is an error in the payout control process, the error number indicator lights a specific number according to the content of the error. The error release switch outputs a signal to release the error when it is operated, such as when there is an error in the payout control process and the process is stopped.

Devices connected to the input side of the payout control device 200 include an overflow switch, a frame radio wave sensor, a payout ball detection switch, and a shoot ball out switch, although not shown.
Here, the overflow switch is a switch that detects that the game balls of the lower plate 10 are excessive, and the frame radio wave sensor is a sensor provided on the front frame 4 or the glass frame 5 for detecting abnormal radio waves such as fraud, and payout. The ball detection switch is a switch that detects game balls (prize balls or rental balls) that are paid out toward the upper plate 7 by the above-mentioned payout unit, and the shoot ball out switch is a shoot that supplies the game balls to the above-mentioned storage tank. It is a switch that detects that there is no game ball in.
The frame radio wave sensor is a sensor that detects fraud such as acquiring a predetermined number or more of game balls by preventing the sensor from reacting with radio waves when the payout ball passes through the payout ball detection switch. The frame radio wave sensor may detect other illegal radio waves.

Although not shown, the devices connected to the output side of the payout control device 200 are the payout motor of the payout unit, the card unit connection board, the launch control device, and the external information terminal board 55 (shown in FIG. 4). ).
The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 100, and controls for paying out the prize balls. Further, the payout control device 200 drives a payout motor based on a BRQ signal (rental request signal) or the like from a card unit (CR unit) connected to the card unit connection board, and pays out the rental ball. Take control.

An operation panel board (not shown) is connected to the card unit connection board, and the operation panel board is a ball lending LED, a balance indicator, a ball lending switch, and a return switch (ball lending switch) provided in the pachinko machine 1. (All not shown) etc. are connected. The operation panel board receives signals from the ball lending LED, balance indicator, etc. from the card unit (CR unit), and also sends operation signals from the ball lending switch and return switch to the card unit (CR unit) to pay out the ball lending. The necessary control is performed. Here, the ball lending switch is a switch that is operated by operating the ball lending button 16 (FIG. 1) described above. The return switch is a switch that is operated by operating the discharge button 17 (FIG. 1) described above.
Although not shown, the RAM area of the payout control device 200 is also configured to supply backup power from the power supply device 500 in the event of a power failure.

The payout control device 200 outputs a prize ball signal (information on the number of balls paid out as prize balls) created based on the payout command received from the game control device 100 to the management device as an external device via the external information terminal board 55. To do.
The external information terminal board 55 is also connected to the payout control device 200 by a cable, and relays when the prize ball signal is transmitted to the management device as the external device.

The launch control device (not shown) receives the necessary power supply from the payout control device 200, and also receives a launch permission signal and a power failure detection signal. The launch control device controls the launch motor of the launch device that launches the game ball according to the operation of the launch operation handle 11, and the launch control device includes a touch switch 11a and a launch stop switch (not shown) provided on the launch operation handle 11. The signal from is input. The launch stop switch temporarily stops the launch of the game ball and is operated by the player. The touch switch 11a detects whether or not the player's hand or the like is touching the firing operation handle 11, and corresponds to the contact detecting means. In this embodiment, the detection information of the touch switch 11a (contact detection means) is transmitted from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100 as a touch switch signal (shown in FIG. 4), and further, the game control device 100 controls the effect. It is configured to be transmitted as command data to the device 300 (see the game machine status check process described later). As a result, the effect control device 300 is configured to be able to constantly monitor the presence or absence of contact with the launch operation handle 11 (operation unit) of the player.

Next, the detailed configuration of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control device 100 is a main control device that comprehensively controls the game, corresponds to a main board (that is, a circuit formed on the main board), and specifically comprises the circuit shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the game control device 100 includes a CPU unit 150 having a game microcomputer (that is, a game microcomputer) 101, an input unit 151 having an input port and the like, and an output unit 152 having an output port and the like. It is composed of a data bus 153 or the like that connects the CPU unit 150, the input unit 151, and the output unit 152.

The CPU unit 150 includes a gaming microcomputer 101 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and oscillates to generate an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has a circuit 113. A signal (starting prize detection signal) from the proximity I / F 163, which will be described later, is input to the game microcomputer 101, and the CPU unit 150 is further provided with an inverting circuit including an inverter that logically inverts this signal. May be good.
The game microcomputer 101 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 101A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 101B, and a RAM (random access memory) 101C that can be read and written at any time. The ROM 101B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 101C stores the work area of the CPU 101A, various signals, and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 101B or the RAM 101C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

The CPU 101A executes a game control program in the ROM 101B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and the Fuden solenoid 132, the grand prize opening solenoid 133, and the batch display device 35. The entire pachinko machine 1 is controlled by generating a drive signal of the machine.
Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 101 includes a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, a hit random number for determining a hit in a normal figure variation display game, and the like. Random number generation circuit for hardware generation, and update timing of timer interrupt signal and random number generation circuit with a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for CPU 101A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. It is equipped with a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a clock.

Here, the electronic components such as the game control device 100, the normal electric solenoid 132 driven by the game control device 100, and the grand prize opening solenoid 133 have predetermined levels such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 500. DC voltage is supplied to enable operation.

Next, the input unit 151 of the game control device 100 is provided with a first input port 160, a second input port 161 and a third input port 162 as input ports. The input unit 151 includes a first start port switch 120, a second start port switch 121, a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a large winning port switch 124, a magnetic sensor 126, a panel radio wave sensor 127, and a glass frame open detection switch. The detection signals from 211 and the front frame (main body frame) open detection switch 212 are input.
The input unit 151 is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 163 that converts the detection signals input from the switches 120 to 124 and 127 into 0V-5V positive logic signals. Since the input range of the proximity I / F163 is 7V-11V, the lead wires of the proximity switches (each of the above switches 120 to 124, 127) are illegally shorted, the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead is read. An abnormal state such as a line being cut and floating can be detected, and when such an abnormal state is detected, an abnormality detection signal is output. Further, in order to enable the signal level conversion function as described above, the proximity I / F 163 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to the voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 500. ing.

Here, a part of the output (excluding the abnormality detection signal) of the proximity I / F 163 (output from each of the above switches 120 to 124) is supplied to the third input port 162, and the game microcomputer is supplied via the data bus 153. At the same time as being read by 101, it is supplied from the game control device 100 as the main board to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 170.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 127 is supplied to the second input port 161 and read into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, the detection signals of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 101 in addition to the third input port 162 without an inverting circuit. ing. It is necessary to provide an inverting circuit here because the signal input terminal of the game microcomputer 101 assumes that a signal from a microswitch or the like is input, and negative logic, that is, a low level (0V) is an effective level. This is the case when it is designed to detect as. In this example, since the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 can detect positive logic as an effective level, the inverting circuit is unnecessary.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F163, the above-mentioned abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of each switch 120 to 124 or the sensor 127 is detected in the proximity I / F163 is supplied to the second input port 161 and data. It is read into the game microcomputer 101 via the bus 153.

Next, a signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 211, a front frame (main body frame) opening detection switch 212, and a signal from the magnetic sensor 126 are input to the second input port 161 and a signal from the panel radio wave sensor 127. Is input via the proximity I / F163, and the abnormality detection signal is input from the proximity I / F163.
In addition, when the magnetic sensor 126 is described, although the magnetic sensor 126 is shown as one in FIG. 4, this is only one input to the game control device 100, and actually there are a plurality of magnetic sensors 126. Magnetic sensors (4 in this example) are mounted and wired or connected on a relay board (existing between the sensor and the main board, not shown).
Here, the data held by the second input port 161 asserts the corresponding enable signal (not shown) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 161 by the gaming microcomputer 101 (effective level). It can be read (as well as other ports) by changing to).

On the other hand, a signal from the payout control device 200 and a signal from the RAM initialization switch 504 (initialization switch signal) are input to the first input port 160. Then, these signals are supplied from the first input port 160 to the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. The signals from the payout control device 200 include a frame radio wave illegal signal, a payout busy signal, a payout abnormality status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow. There is the touch switch signal mentioned above. Here, the overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 10 (it is full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor (not shown) provided on the front frame 4 or the like detecting the radio wave. As described above, the touch switch signal is a signal output by the touch switch 11a described above when the player's hand or the like comes into contact with the firing operation handle 11.

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands. This payout busy signal is basically a signal that is turned on when the payout operation of the game ball (prize ball or rental ball) is executed, unless an error related to the payout operation of the game ball has occurred. Therefore, no error has occurred (that is, the payout abnormality status signal, the shoot ball out switch signal, the overflow switch signal, etc. are not turned on), and the game control device 100 issues a prize ball payout command. If this payout busy signal is set (if it is on) in a state where the prize ball payout is not instructed by transmitting to 200, it is determined that the game control device 100 has executed the payout ball lending operation. Can be done.

Further, the input unit 151 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit (Schmitt buffer) 164 for inputting a power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 500, a signal such as a reset signal, or the like to the game microcomputer 101 or the like. The 164 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 500, the power failure monitoring signal is once input to the first input port 160, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 101 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 164 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 101, and each port of the output unit 152 (ports 175, 176, 177, which will be described later). It is supplied to 180). Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 170 without going through the output unit 152 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 170 in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows.
Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 170. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the input ports 160 to 162 of the input unit 151. The data set in each port of the output unit 152 by the gaming microcomputer 101 just before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 151 just before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 101 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 101.

Next, the output unit 152 of the game control device 100 includes a first port 175, a second port 176, a third port 177, and a fourth port 180 as output ports connected to the data bus 153. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 by serial communication via the Schmitt buffer (Schmitt trigger buffer) 173.
The Schmidt buffer 173 is a data signal from the game control device 100 in order to prevent a signal from being input to the game control device 100 from the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, that is, to ensure one-way communication. Is a unidirectional buffer that only allows output to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300.

The first port 175 is an output port for outputting each opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 133 for opening / closing the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27 and the general electric solenoid 132 for opening / closing the opening / closing member 26b of the normal variable winning device 26. Is.
The second port 176 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 35.
The third port 177 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the batch display device 35 is connected.
The fourth port 180 is an output port for outputting external information about the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal. The information output from the external information terminal board 55 is supplied to, for example, an information collection terminal or a management device installed in a game store. Further, a photo relay 55a is mounted on the external information terminal plate 55, and external information is transmitted to a management device (not shown) as an external device via the photo relay 55a. Since the photocoupler has polarity, it is necessary to pay attention to the connection, but if the photo relay 55a is used as described above, the polarity is unnecessary and there is an advantage that it is convenient.

It should be noted that the output unit 152 outputs data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game and a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot to the test firing test device of the accreditation body which is connected to the data bus 153 via the relay board 170. The buffer 174 to be mounted is configured to be mountable. This buffer 174 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device 100 (main board) of the pachinko machine 1 as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signals of switches 120 to 124 that do not need to be processed, such as the start port SW output from the proximity I / F163, pass through the buffer 174 by pattern branching on the proximity I / F163 output side shown in FIG. Instead, it is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 170.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 126 and the panel radio wave sensor 127, is once taken into the game microcomputer 101 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 153 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 174 and the relay board 170 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 170 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 174 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from the gaming microcomputer 101 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 170, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus. It has become.

Further, the output unit 152 is provided with a plurality of drive circuits (first driver 178a to fourth driver 178d). The first driver 178a receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 133 and the normal electric solenoid 132 output from the first port 175, and generates and outputs the respective solenoid drive signals. The second driver 178b outputs an on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 35 output from the second port 176. The third driver 178c outputs an on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 35 output from the third port 177. The fourth driver 178d outputs an external information signal supplied from the fourth port 180 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 55.

The first driver 178a is supplied with DC32V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 500 so that the large winning opening solenoid 133 and the normal electric solenoid 132 operating at 32V can be driven.
Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 178b that drives the segment line. Further, since the third driver 178c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V. In the batch display device 35, a second driver 178b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the predetermined LED via the segment line, and a third driver 178c that outputs the ground potential causes the cathode terminal of the predetermined LED. When the current is drawn from the segment wire, the power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic drive method, and the predetermined LED is turned on. Further, since the fourth driver 178d gives a level of 12V to the external information signal, DC12V is supplied.

Further, the output unit 152 is provided with a photocoupler 179 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 185. The photocoupler 179 is configured so that the game microcomputer 101 can communicate with the inspection device 185 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 160 to 162 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the device connected to the effect control device 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 101, and image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the CPU 311. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the above, a sound source LSI 313 that controls sound output for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 12a and 12b, and a signal conversion circuit 315. ..
Here, in addition to the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311, a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) that exclusively performs image control under the control of the CPU 311 is arranged to include two CPUs, and VDP is a command from the 2nd CPU. Although it is possible to adopt a configuration in which image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 is performed according to the data and data, in this embodiment, only the high-performance CPU 311 is provided, which is advantageous in terms of arrangement space and cost. ing.

The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 stores a PROM (programmable read-only memory) 321 that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 326 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A holdable FeRAM 327, an RTC (real time clock) 325, and a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 328 are connected, and a VDP 312 is connected.
The RTC325 is a clock element that ticks the time, and can be set to the actual time by setting, and the clock signal is sent to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 uses the signal from the RTC325, for example. It is possible to control the time-related effects such as event announcements and special effects at amusement stores.

On the other hand, the VDP 312 is connected to the VRAM 329 in addition to the image ROM 322 in which the character image and the video data are stored, and the sound source LSI 313 is connected to the audio ROM 323 in which the audio data is stored. A plurality of moving images (movies) or the like are stored as video data in the image ROM 322.
Here, the character data is stored in the image ROM 322, but the motion data representing the movement information of the character and the scenario data defining the connection of the motion data are stored in the PROM 321.
The image ROM 322 corresponds to the character data storage means, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 corresponds to the motion table storage means and the scenario table storage means.

The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes an effect command (data signal output from the buffer 173), which is a control command from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, determines the effect content, and outputs the display device 41. It executes processing such as instructing the content of the image, instructing the sound source LSI 313 of the reproduced sound, and driving control of the board decoration device 42, the frame decoration device 43, and the board effect device 44 described above.
Here, in the present embodiment, the display device 41, the board decoration device 42, the frame decoration device 43, the board effect device 44, the speakers 12a, 12b, and the like constitute the effect means.

For example, when executing a variable display game, a command including data of a combination of stop symbols (result mode) and data of a reach system (or variable time) from the game control device 100 (for example, a variable pattern command described later). However, the main control microcomputer 311 receives the transmission to the effect control device 300, selects the stop mode and the fluctuation mode satisfying the fluctuation time, and displays the display device 41 via the VDP 312. It is configured to control a special figure variation display game in which a predetermined special figure is variablely displayed and finally a specific combination of symbols (result mode) is derived and displayed.
The mode such as the variation display of the special figure actually executed by the control of the effect control device 300 may be uniquely determined by the command from the game control device 100, but the conditions given by the above command may be determined. Within the range, the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 is configured to finally select the mode by random number extraction or the like (the effect control device 300 is also configured to select the mode with some discretion). There is.

Here, as the RAM that provides the work area of the main control microcomputer 311, there is also the RAM 311a inside the chip.
Further, the main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 313 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 313 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 12a and the lower speaker 12b described above, and the sound generated by the sound source LSI 313 is transmitted to the upper speaker via the amplifier circuit 337. It is output from 12a and the lower speaker 12b.
It should be noted that the main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 313 may be configured to send and receive commands and data by a handshake method. In that case, the call signal CTS and the response signal RTS are exchanged.

Further, although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. In general, by transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.
The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, in addition to the image ROM 322 and VRAM 329 described above, a signal conversion circuit 315 is also connected to the VDP 312. Here, the VRAM 329 is an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 322. Further, the signal conversion circuit 315 is a circuit that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The VRAM 329 and the signal conversion circuit 315 may be provided in the VDP 312.

Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 315, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 315. Is displayed.
From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the lamps provided on the glass frame 5 and the game board 20, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission / reception timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM to the main control microcomputer 311. A wait signal WAIT or the like for notifying is also input.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface circuit (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command (data signal output from the buffer 173) transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100. ing. The main control microcomputer 311 receives control commands (directing commands) from the game microcomputer 101, such as a customer waiting demo command and a fluctuation pattern command, via the command I / F331.

The command transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 is stored in the RAM 311a or the RAM 326 as needed.
Further, since the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Has been done.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the LED of the panel decoration device 42, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls the LED of the frame decoration device 43, and the panel. A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the motor and solenoid of the effect device 44 is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 are connected to the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 via the address / data bus 340. A light emitting source other than the LED may be used as the light emitting source of the board decoration device 42 and the frame decoration device 43. Further, the glass frame 5 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a moving light or a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. You may be.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with a SW input circuit 336.
The SW input circuit 336 includes an on / off state of the effect button SW46 built in the effect button 9 provided on the glass frame 5, an operation state of the touch panel 9a provided on the glass frame 5, and a motor of the board effect device 44. This is a circuit that detects the on / off state of the effect effect SW (effect motor SW) 47 that detects the initial position of the main control microcomputer 311 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
The volume SW338 described above is also connected to the SW input circuit 336. The SW input circuit 336 detects the state of the volume SW 338 described above and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
In the case of this example, the setting confirmation LED 339 described with reference to FIG. 3 is controlled by the main control microcomputer 311 via the board decoration LED control circuit 332 described above as one of the elements constituting the board decoration device 42. It has a structure of

The normal power supply unit 501 of the power supply device 500 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. In addition to DC32V, DC12V for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, and DC5V for driving the power supply voltage of the command I / F331, a voltage of DC15V for driving the above-mentioned LEDs and speakers 12a and 12b is generated. It is configured as follows. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 501.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, the reset signal is output from the main control microcomputer 311 as a VDPRESET signal to the VDP312, a SNDRESET signal to the sound source LSI 313 and the amplifier circuit 337, and an IORESET signal to each control circuit 332 to 334. It is supplied to each of the 300 devices and puts these devices in the reset state.
The RAM (at least one of the RAM 311a and the RAM 326) of the effect control device 300 may also be configured to supply backup power from the backup power supply unit 502 of the power supply device 500 in the event of a power failure.
Further, a cooling FAN 48 for cooling various parts of the game machine 1 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 48 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.
Further, in this embodiment, it is configured to have a function of generating and supplying a reset signal for the VDP 312 by using a general-purpose port of the main control microcomputer 311. As a result, it is possible to improve the cooperation between the operations of the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312.

In the case of this example, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board). As described above, the effect control device 300 (sub-control board) that controls the display device 41 controls speakers, lamps, moving parts for decoration, and the like, and is a main board that constitutes the game control device 100. Indirectly controls the movable part or the like by sending a control command to the sub control board. Therefore, the hardware configuration such as the wiring pattern of the main board is basically the same even if the model is different, and by installing the game program for each model on the game machine microcomputer 101, the main board is technically used as a model. Can be shared even if the brand is different.

E. Outline of the game Next, the outline of the game performed by the pachinko machine 1 of this example and the flow of the game will be described.
First, at the beginning of the game (or before the start of the game), the customer waiting state (during demonstration) is in the customer waiting state, and the command for instructing the display of the customer waiting screen is the buffer of the game control device 100 (buffer in FIG. 4). It is transmitted from (corresponding to 173) to the effect control device 300, and a customer waiting screen (moving image or still image) is displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device. In this customer waiting state, the movable accessory 700 is in the initial state (substantially horizontally collapsed state) shown in FIG.

Then, the game ball driven into the game area 22 via the guide rail 21 is any one of the special drawing starting winning openings (special drawing 1 starting opening 607, special drawing 2 starting opening 608, and starting winning opening 26a). ) (That is, when there is a start prize for the special figure), a command for commanding the variable display of the special figure is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the special figure (numbers, characters) is displayed on the display unit 41a. , Symbols, patterns, and other identification information) are displayed to fluctuate (for example, scroll) (so-called variable display), and a special figure variable display game (hereinafter referred to as a special figure variable display game) is performed. ..

Then, if the stop result mode of this special figure variation display game (combination of special figures derived by the variation display) is a special result mode (for example, doublet such as "3, 3, 3"), it is called a big hit. Benefits are given to the player. In terms of control, for example, on condition that there is a start prize, a value such as a jackpot random number is extracted and stored, and the extracted and stored random number value and a preset determination value are compared and determined at the time of determination. Based on the comparison determination result, it is determined in advance whether or not to make a big hit, and the above-mentioned special figure variation display game is started according to this determination.
Further, in the normal mode, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode among the special result modes (for example, doublets of "7, 7, 7"), the jackpot is obtained and after the jackpot game. (After the special prize period described later), the game state shifts from the normal mode to the probability change mode. In this probability variation mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the big hit probability of the special figure). In some cases, so-called time reduction (such as shortening the variable display time of special figures or the like to increase the frequency of the variable display game and make it easier to hit) is also performed.

When the jackpot hits and shifts to the jackpot state, the jackpot 27a of the variable winning device 27 goes through the specified time (the period during which the output of the sound effect that produces the jackpot is executed). For example, within a range not exceeding 30 seconds), for example, an opening operation (big hit round) that is temporarily opened only for a period up to 10 winnings is performed. Then, this opening operation is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. Further, in this big hit state, a command for directing the display of the big hit screen for producing the big hit state and notifying the player of the number of big hit rounds is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the display unit. In 41a, such a display during the jackpot is executed.

The special prize period is the period during which the jackpot is in state (the fanfare period, the jackpot round with the jackpot open, the interval period between the jackpot round and the next jackpot round, and the ending period). Corresponds to.
Further, as the number of rounds of the jackpot, for example, a 15-round jackpot is usually the main jackpot, but a 16R jackpot may be generated as a premier, or another configuration (for example, 6R or 4R) may be used. In addition, there may be a two-round jackpot or the like as a so-called sudden probability (a sudden probability change in which the jackpot probability changes via a jackpot with a small number of balls).
Further, when there is a second variable winning device, if the stop result mode of the variable display game by the display device 41 becomes a special mode (for example, a special item such as "3, special symbol, 3"), it is a special jackpot. An opening operation (big hit round) in which a privilege called is generated and the opening / closing member of the second variable winning device is temporarily opened for a period up to, for example, 5 prizes within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 30 seconds). Is done. Then, this opening operation is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

On the other hand, when a game ball further wins in any of the start winning openings of the special figure during the variable display game of the special figure or during the big hit, the display unit 41a or the like displays the start memory of the special figure on hold. For example, up to 4 games are stored, and after the variable display game or the jackpot state is completed, the variable display game of the above special figure is repeated based on the start memory, or the game returns to the customer waiting state (during the customer waiting demo production). To do.
That is, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, it shifts to the big hit state, if the variable display game ends with a miss and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again, and the variable display game ends with a miss and there is no start memory. For example, the game returns to the waiting state for customers, and if the jackpot ends and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again, and if the jackpot ends and there is no start memory, the game returns to the waiting state for customers.

In this embodiment, for example, two types of special figure start memory (special figure start memory) are displayed (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display), and there are two types of special figure variation display games. The variable display game (first variable display game and second variable display game) is executed. That is, when a special figure start prize (first start prize) occurs when the game ball enters the special figure 1 start port 607, the display device 41 plays the first variable display game by the variable display of special figure 1. Then, when the game ball wins the special figure 1 start port 607 during any of the special figure fluctuation display games, one first start memory (starting memory corresponding to the special figure 1 hold display) is stored in this. On the other hand, after the end of the special figure variation display game or the like, the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41.

Further, if there is a special figure start prize (second start prize) due to the game ball entering the start winning opening 26a (starting port of Fuden) or the special drawing 2 starting opening 608, the display device 41 shows the special drawing 2 A second variable display game with variable display is played. Then, when the game ball wins the start winning opening 26a or the special drawing 2 starting opening 608 during any of the special drawing fluctuation display games, one second starting memory (starting memory corresponding to the special drawing 2 hold display) is provided. It is stored, and on the other hand, after the end of the special figure variation display game or the like, the display device 41 is configured to perform the second variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 2.
When both the first start memory and the second start memory are available, either the first variable display game or the second variable display game is executed first according to a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second variation display game corresponding to the start winning opening 26a and the special figure 2 start port 608 is preferentially played (that is, a mode in which the second start memory is preferentially digested), or two types of variations. There may be a mode in which the display games are played in the order of winning.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 32 during the game, a variable display game of the normal map (hereinafter referred to as a variable display game of the normal map) is played by the display unit 41a or the like. .. Then, if the result of the normal map variation display game (stopped normal map) is a predetermined mode (specific display mode), a privilege called a normal map hit is given.
At this point of view, a game is performed in which the opening / closing member 26b that opens / closes the starting winning opening 26a is temporarily held for a predetermined opening time in the open state. This makes it easier for the game ball to start and win a prize, and the number of times the special figure variable display game is played increases accordingly, increasing the possibility of a big hit.
Further, during the variable display game of the normal figure, when a game ball is further won in the normal figure start gate 32, the batch display device 35 executes the hold display of the normal figure start memory, and for example, up to four are stored. After the end of the variable display game of the normal map, the variable display game of the normal map is repeated based on the memory.

F. Operation of Control System Next, the control contents of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 87.
The control processing executed by the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 mainly consists of the main processing shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 10 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms). Become.
First, the concept of the main configuration used in the explanation of the following flowchart is as follows.
(B) Display device for special figures As described above, the batch display device 35 displays the special figure and the normal figure. In the following flowchart of the game control device 100, the special figure refers to the "main special figure" displayed on the batch display device 35 in principle. Further, when referring to the dummy display for the effect for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as a "decorative special drawing". However, when explaining the game machine, if necessary, it may be explained including a "decorative special drawing".

(B) Display device for general map In the following flowchart of the game control device 100, the general map refers to the "genuine map" displayed on the batch display device 35 in principle. Further, when the display device 41 adopts a configuration in which a normal drawing is displayed and refers to a dummy display for a player's effect displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as, for example, a "decorative general drawing".
However, in this embodiment, the display device 41 does not display such a display of a normal drawing. In addition, a display device for displaying a normal map (here, a decorative general map) may be provided. In explaining the game machine, if necessary, the explanation may include a device for displaying a "decorative drawing".
(C) Fuden The device corresponding to Fuden is the ordinary variable winning device 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (Public).
In addition, as described above, special control (control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal map, etc.) that makes it easier to win a prize is performed to support the start winning, but this is supported by the normal train (or It is sometimes called simply electric support).

(D) Special figure memory In the following flowchart of the game control device 100, in the case of special figure hold (sometimes simply referred to as "hold"), special figure memory, or special figure start memory, in principle, the batch display device 35 It points to the "memory of this special figure" displayed in. Further, when referring to the dummy display for the effect for the player displayed on the display device 41 or the like, it is referred to as "decorative special figure reservation" or "decorative special figure memory".
(E) Fuzu memory In the following flowchart of the game control device 100, in the case of Fuzu hold, Fuzu memory, or Fuzu start memory, in principle, "this Fuzu memory" displayed on the batch display device 35. Pointing towards. Further, when referring to the dummy display for the effect for the player displayed on the display device 41 or the like, it is referred to as "decorative drawing hold" or "decorative drawing memory".
However, in this embodiment, the display device 41 does not display such a start memory display of the normal drawing. In addition, a display for displaying the start memory of the normal map (here, the decorative normal map memory) may be provided. In explaining the game machine, if necessary, the explanation may include a device for displaying "decorative general drawing memory".
(F) Variable winning device The variable winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 27b. The variable winning device 27 may be referred to as a special variable winning device in order to distinguish it from the ordinary variable winning device 26.

[Main processing of game control device]
First, the main processing of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7.
This main process starts based on the fact that the gaming microcomputer 101 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 500 is turned on, a reset signal is sent from the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on) to the game control device 100. When the reset terminal of the game microcomputer 101 is turned on and then the reset signal is released, the game microcomputer 101 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released to start the gaming microcomputer 101. Further, when the operator intends to initialize the user work RAM or the like (for example, RAM 101C) of the game control device 100, the power source is operated while turning on the RAM clear switch 504 (initialization switch) of the game control device 100. The switch needs to be turned on.

When the game microcomputer 101 starts up, it first performs a process of disabling interrupts (step S1), and then sets a stack pointer that is the start address of an area that saves values such as registers when an interrupt occurs. The process (step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is set as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step S4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 160) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can be prevented from missing a command. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

The initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 504 is input to the first input port 160, and it is initialized by reading the state of the first input port 160 before the start of the standby time. The operation of the switch (RAM initialization switch 504) can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch can be continuously operated from the power-on until the standby time elapses. There is a need to. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power supply delay timer (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 500 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9). Even when the power supply delay timer is set in step S7 and the timer is in the process of counting, the power failure monitoring in step S9 is performed.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; YES), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; NO), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; YES), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is cut off. Wait for the power outage. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, since the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time, a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 forming the main control means is delayed. It becomes possible to deal with the trouble at the time of turning on the power appropriately. Note that access to the RAM (for example, RAM101C) is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained. Therefore, a backup occurs when a power failure occurs here. There is no need to perform any processing. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; NO), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and then the timer value is 0. It is determined whether or not there is (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; NO), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). If the timer value is 0 (step S12; YES), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (output a signal corresponding to "0" of the binary signal: that is, set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).
Here, the RWM refers to the RAM 101C in this embodiment, but the RWM is not limited to the RAM, and a readable / writable storage element such as an EEPROM may be included as the RWM.
Since each output port is set off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port by software, but step S14 is provided here just in case. ..

Subsequently, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 101, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15). That is, since it is necessary to perform serial communication with the effect control device 300 and the like, the serial port is set to be used.
Next, it is determined whether the initialization switch (RAM initialization switch 504) is turned on from the state of the first input port 160 read earlier (step S16). This determines whether or not the initialization switch is turned on based on the state of the initialization switch signal. If the initialization switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S26, and if it is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S17. ..
In addition, in step S26, when the initialization switch is turned on and the game microcomputer 101 is activated, the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area 2 of the RWM are normal in each of steps S17 and S18 described later. It is a case where it is determined that the checksum is not normal, or a case where it is determined that the checksum is not normal in step S20 described later. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S26, processing such as initializing the data in the RWM of the gaming microcomputer 101 is performed in steps S26 to S30.

If the initialization switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S17 to check whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 of the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah), and the check result in step S17. If it is determined that is not normal, the process jumps to step S26. On the other hand, if the check result in step S17 is normal, in the following step S18, it is checked whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 of the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). Then, if the check result is not normal in step S18, the process jumps to step S26, and if the check result is normal, the process proceeds to step S19.
As described above, if the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are all normal, it is determined that the power failure has been restored and the process proceeds to step S19. On the other hand, if the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are abnormal (if they are not stored normally), the process jumps to step S26 assuming that the power is normally turned on.
The power failure inspection area check data 1 and 2 are set in steps S41 and 42 described later. In these steps S17 and 18, since it is determined whether or not the power failure has been restored by the plurality of check data 1 and 2, the determination as to whether or not the power failure has been restored is highly reliable.

Next, in step S19, the checksum of the RWM data is calculated, and in step S20, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum when the power is cut off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (matches). If this checksum is not normal (that is, when the RWM data is corrupted), the process proceeds to step S26, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG. 7, and the power failure is normal. Performs processing when recovered.
In step S21, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized. The areas to be initialized here are power failure inspection areas 1 and 2, checksum areas, and areas related to error fraud monitoring. The area related to error fraud monitoring includes, for example, the following areas.
・ Door of external information area ・ Frame opening signal, security signal ・ Game machine error status signal in test signal area ・ Status scan counter (game frame status monitoring scan counter)
・ Front frame (glass frame) open monitoring area ・ Game frame (front frame) open monitoring area ・ Shoot ball out monitoring area ・ Overflow monitoring area ・ Payout abnormality monitoring area ・ Switch 1 and 2 abnormality monitoring area ・ Large winning opening illegal winning monitoring Area / Fuden fraud monitoring area / Magnet fraud monitoring area / Radio wave fraud monitoring area / Grand prize opening fraud monitoring area / Fuden fraud monitoring area

In step S21, the busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is confirmed. It is an indefinite state indicating that there is no such thing. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal indicating the presence or absence of contact with the firing operation handle 11 is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

After passing through step S21, the area in the RWM that stores the gaming state is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high-probability state (step S22). Here, if the probability is not high (step S22; NO), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. When the probability is high (step S22; YES), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), for example, the high probability notification LED (not shown) provided in the batch display device 35 is turned on (not shown). Lit) Save the data in the segment area (step S24). As a result, the measures corresponding to the current high-probability state are performed, and for example, the high-probability notification LED provided in the batch display device 35 is turned on to display the high-probability state.

Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S25), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (if there is a customer waiting, a customer waiting demo screen command, other than that) If so, send multiple commands such as the command on the recovery screen). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps S16, S17, S18, and S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to the access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area in which a value other than the value (0) written in step S27 is used as an initial value, and in this embodiment, it is an area related to the customer waiting demo and the setting of the production mode. is there. Specific examples of these regions are as follows, for example.
<Area to be initialized>
-Customer waiting demo flag area (used in step S472, etc. described later)
-Production mode transition information area (area where production mode transition information is saved in step S529 or the like described later)
-Security signal control timer (used in step C68, etc. described later)
-Next mode transition information area (see step S778, etc. described later)
-Special figure game mode flag area (see step S759 described later)
-Special figure game mode flag save area (see step S701, etc. described later)

Next, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and a predetermined time (customer waiting demo screen is displayed). For example, (for 30 seconds), a plurality of commands such as (command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.
When the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted, the effect control device 300 performs initialization such as setting the operating position of the motor of the effect device to the initial position, and starts the effect of notifying that the RWM has been cleared. To do.

By the way, when the process proceeds from step S25 or step S30 to step S31, in step S31, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) is performed.
The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 101. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 101A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit in the gaming microcomputer 101 is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 101A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. That is, in the process of step S32, the hard random number bit transposition pattern is set, and the big hit random number bit transposition is also performed.
Here, the bit transposition pattern refers to a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition). It is a defined pattern. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

Next, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted and saved in the predetermined area of the RWM as the initial values (start values) of the corresponding initial random numbers (start value). Step S33). In the case of this embodiment, as various initial value random numbers, the initial value random numbers (that is, the big hit symbol initial value random numbers, the small hit symbol initial values) of the random numbers (big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers) that determine the hit symbol of the special symbol Random number), initial value random number of random number (hit random number) that determines the hit of the normal figure (that is, hit initial value random number), initial value random number of the random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (hit symbol random number) (that is, hit There is a symbol initial value random number). As for the random numbers related to the normal figure, the word "normal figure" may be omitted, for example, "random number per normal figure" is simply referred to as "random number per hit".

In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 101A used in this embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is set to the initial value of various initial value random numbers in step S33. By setting (start value), the regularity of random numbers updated by software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Next, the interrupt is permitted in step S34, and the initial value random number update process is performed in the next step S35. The initial value random number update process is for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers so that it becomes difficult to intentionally aim for a big hit etc. by measuring the timing of launching the game ball. is there.
In the initial value random number update process in step S35, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and when such a method is adopted, both are initialized. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt, but as in this embodiment. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which simplifies the main processing. It has the advantage of being converted.

Further, although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit in the CPU 101A. Is configured to generate. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing, which is a unit. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value change method" in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (updated by software) every time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or a random type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.
Further, when there are two types of special figures, the random numbers related to the special figure may be common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or may be provided separately, but will be described as being common in this embodiment. ing.

Next, the process proceeds to step S36, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 500 is read via the port and the data bus, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (for example, twice) is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is generated in the next step S37. Is turned on, and if it is turned on, the process proceeds to step S38 for the final determination of the power failure, and if it is not turned on, the process returns to step S35. During the normal operation, steps S35 to S37 are repeated.
That is, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; NO), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

Then, when the process proceeds to step S38, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks, and if the determination result is positive, it is finally determined that a power failure has occurred and the process proceeds to step S39. If it is negative, it cannot be determined that a power failure has occurred, and the process returns to step S37.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, the power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the processing being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step S39. However, in the configuration of this example, since the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal is checked multiple times in step S38, the power failure monitoring signal is temporarily and momentarily turned on due to noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred. There is an advantage that it will not be mistakenly determined that a power failure has occurred.

Then, in step S39, after prohibiting interrupts, all outputs are turned off in the next step S40 (off data is output to all output ports), and then power failure information setting processing is executed in steps S41 and S42. To do. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 described above is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 in step S41, and the power failure inspection area check data 2 described above is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 in step S42.
After step S42, the checksum calculated in step S44 is saved in a predetermined checksum area after the process of calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off is performed in the next step S43.
Next, in step S45, access to the RWM is prohibited, and then the device waits (waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off).
In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure recovery inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined when the power is turned on again.
The power failure processing in steps S39 to S45 is performed before the power supply voltage drops below the operating voltage of the gaming microcomputer 101 due to the power failure.

[Checksum calculation process]
Next, the checksum calculation process (steps S19, S43) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address in step S51, and the number of repetitions is set in step S52. The number of repetitions is set according to the number of bytes of the RWM used. Next, after setting "0" as the calculated value in step S53, the calculated value + the content of the calculated address is calculated as a new calculated value in step S54. In this way, the contents of each address are added as calculated values. Next, in step S55, the calculated address is updated by "+1", in step S56, the number of repetitions is updated by "-1" to check whether the calculation is completed, and in step S57, it is determined whether or not the calculation is completed. If the determination result in step S57 is NO, the process returns to step S54 and the routine is repeated. Then, when the number of repetitions = the number of bytes of RWM, it is determined that the calculation is completed, the process exits from step S57 to YES, and the routine ends.
In this way, the checksum is calculated when the power of the RWM is cut off.

[Initial value random number update process]
Next, the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the initial value random number of the big hit symbol (step S61), a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the initial value random number of the small hit symbol (step S62), and hitting The process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the initial value random number (step S63) and the process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the hit symbol initial value random number (step S64) are sequentially performed.
Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol of the special figure, and is updated in the range of 0 to 99, as described above. Further, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game, and is updated in the range of 0 to 250. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers is increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIG.
In this timer interrupt processing, the periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 101A by the processing of steps S31 and S34 in the main processing described above, and an interrupt (timer interrupt) is generated. Starts with. When this timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 101, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When this timer interrupt process is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S70). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S71). In step S71, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different.
Next, the input process is executed in step S72. In this input process, the detection signals (states of each input port) of the above-mentioned sensors (starting port switches 120, 121, gate switch 122, winning port switch 123, large winning port switch 124, etc.) are read. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined for each timer interrupt cycle, and when the output value of the same level continues for the specified number of times (for example, twice) or more, the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as a deterministic value of the signal. When it is read that any of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.

Next, in step S73, an output process is executed in which the output data set in each step described later is set in the corresponding output port and output. This is a process for controlling the drive of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 133, solenoid solenoid 132) based on the output data set in various processes.
When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 of the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing (see step S138a described later), and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. It is said that. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (also the launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also It is generated in the payout control device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, in step S74, the payout command transmission process is performed. This is a process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer of the gaming microcomputer 101 to the payout control device 200 in various processes.
Next, the random number update processes 1 and 2 are executed in steps S75 and S76, respectively. Details will be described later, but in the random number update process 1, the initial value setting of each random number (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, normal figure hit random number, normal figure hit symbol random number) by the initial value random number, random number update process 2 Then, the fluctuation pattern random number is updated by the software. Of these, according to the random number update process 1, the initial value of each random number is updated by the above-mentioned "initial value change method". Further, according to the random number update process 2, the fluctuation pattern random number changes every time the timer interrupt processing routine is repeated, and the extracted value of the fluctuation pattern random number keeps at randomness.

In this example, there are three types of variable pattern random numbers, variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3. Of these, the variation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the latter half variation (variation after the start of reach), and the variation pattern random number 2 is the distribution of detailed effects (for example, plus 1 frame) from the reach system. Is a random number for performing the special figure stop or the special figure stops at minus one frame), and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the mode of the first half fluctuation (variation before the start of reach). is there. Further, the fluctuation pattern random number may directly determine all the fluctuation modes, but in this example, the effect control device 300 determines the specific mode. For example, only the fluctuation time and the reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the effect control device 300 determines a specific fluctuation mode based on the determined fluctuation time and reach system.

Next, in step S77, the winning opening switch monitoring process and the state monitoring process are executed. The winning opening switch monitoring process monitors the input flags set as described above (starting opening switches 120 and 121 of the special figure, winning opening switch 123, and large winning opening switch 124), for example, inputting the large winning opening switch 124. When the flag is set, processing such as preparation for requesting the payout control device 200 to pay out 15 prize balls is executed. In addition, the status monitoring process includes undetected errors of the above-mentioned sensors, excessive error of prize ball ejection, the open state of the glass frame 5, and illegal prizes other than when the large prize opening 27a and the public train 26 are open. It is a process for monitoring.

Next, in step S78, the special figure game processing is performed. In this special figure game processing, comprehensive control of the entire variable display game of the special figure is performed. That is, when the fluctuation start condition (start condition of the fluctuation display game) is satisfied, the process of determining the jackpot random number, the process of setting the combination of the stop symbols of the special figure (result mode), and the process of setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure. Is performed (details will be described later).
Here, when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, when there is a start opening prize in the waiting state and the fluctuation display game is started, the fluctuation display game ends with a miss and the start memory is stored, and the fluctuation display game is executed again. There are three types when the jackpot ends, there is a start memory, and the variable display game is executed again.
Further, in this special figure game process, a process of setting various output data related to the variable display game of the special figure is also performed. That is, for example, the content (command data) of the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 or the like is set according to the game state of the variable display game of the special figure.

Next, in step S79, processing for the variable display game of the normal figure is performed. That is, a process of setting the content of a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 or the like is performed according to the state of the variable display game of the normal drawing.
Next, in step S80, the segment LED editing process is executed. This is to display the special figure symbol determined in the special figure game process of step S78, the normal figure symbol determined in the normal figure game process of step S79, and other information on the main special figure of the batch display device 35. This is a process for displaying on a device (LED, 7-segment display).
Next, in step S81, the magnet fraud monitoring process is executed. This is to check the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 126 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. For example, if the input flag of the magnetic sensor 126 is set, it is assumed that a magnetic error has occurred, and a predetermined process ( Execute preparation of fraudulent notification command, etc.).

Next, in step S82, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is executed. This is to check the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 127 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. For example, if the input flag of the panel radio wave sensor 127 is set, it is assumed that fraud using radio waves has occurred. , Executes a predetermined process (preparation of an unauthorized notification command, etc.).
Next, in step S83, the external information editing process is executed. This is for editing the data to be output from the game control device 100 to the outside.
When step S83 is passed, the timer interrupt process is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Input processing]
Next, the input process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 160 is read (step S91). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S92).
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 160) are as follows.
・ Frame radio wave illegal signal (bit 0)
・ Payout busy signal (bit 1)
-Payout error status signal (bit 2)
・ Shoot ball out switch signal (bit 3)
-Overflow switch signal (bit 4)
・ Touch switch signal (bit 5)
-RAM initialization switch (bit 6)
・ Power failure monitoring signal (bit 7)
The bits 6 and 7 are treated as unused in this input process and are cleared in step S92.

Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S93).
Next, in step S94, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 161 is prepared, and in step S95, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared.
Here, "preparation" in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or other memory.
Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S96, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S97. For example, since the panel radio wave sensor 127 needs to invert the detection signal, bit data such as such a sensor / switch is prepared.
Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. These data have the same name in the flowchart, but are different data for each input port. However, as a result, the data may have the same value.

Next, the switch reading process is performed in step S98.
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 2 (second input port 161) are as follows.
・ Panel radio wave sensor (bit 0) (inverted bit):
-Switch abnormality detection signal (bit 1): "Abnormality detection signal" in FIG.
-Magnetic sensor (bit 2):
・ Glass frame open detection switch (bit 3)
・ Front frame (main body frame) open detection switch (bit 4)
・ Unused (bits 5 to 7)

Next, in step S99, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 162 is prepared, in step S100, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared, and in step S101, unused bit data is prepared. After that, the bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S102, the switch reading process is further performed in step S103, and the input process is completed.
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 3 (third input port 162) are as follows.
-Starting port 2 switch (bit 0): 2nd starting port switch 121
-Starting port 1 switch (bit 1): First starting port switch 120
-Left winning opening switch (bit 2): winning opening switch 123-1
-Right winning opening switch (bit 3): winning opening switch 123-2
-Gate switch (bit 4): Gate switch 122
-Large winning opening switch (bit 5): Large winning opening switch 124
・ Unused (bits 6 to 7)
As shown in FIG. 4, the signals of the switches of bits 0 to 5 are subjected to a test firing test via the relay board 170 by pattern branching on the input side (output side of the proximity I / F163) of the third input port 162. It is configured to be output as a test signal to the device. That is, the signal of the starting port 2 switch (bit 0) is the "starting port 2 winning signal" and the "normal electric accessory 1 winning signal 1", and the signal of the starting port 1 switch (bit 1) is the "starting port 1 winning signal". The signal of the left winning opening switch (bit 2) is the "normal winning opening 1 winning signal", and the signal of the right winning opening switch (bit 3) is the "normal winning opening 2 winning signal", and the gate switch (bit 4). ) Signal is output to the test firing test device as "gate passage signal 1 related to normal symbol 1", and the signal of the large winning opening switch (bit 5) is output as "special electric accessory 1 winning signal 1". It has become.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the switch reading process (steps S98, S103) in the above-mentioned input process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the switch reading process, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step S111). This corresponds to the first reading. Next, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S112), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S113), and then the target switch control area in the RWM Save (store) in the port input state 1 (step S114). After that, it waits for the delay time (0.1 ms; s represents seconds) until the second reading elapses (step S115).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step S116). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S117), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S118), and then the port input state of the target switch control area. Save (store) in 2 (step S119). After that, the bits changed in the first and second readings, that is, the signals are detected, and a definite bit pattern is created (step S120). Specifically, among the states of the input port to be read, a definite bit pattern is created in which bits having the same state as the first and second times are set to "1" and bits having different states are set to "0". Next, the logical product of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken and used as the fixed bit this time (step S121).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 0 and the bits having different states are 1 in the first and second reads (step S122), and the logical product of the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt. Is used as the last holding bit (step S123). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the fixed bit this time and the held bit last time are combined and saved in the RWM as the fixed state this time (step S124), the exclusive OR of the fixed state of the previous time and the fixed state this time is taken, and saved in the RWM as the rising edge (step S124). Step S125), the switch reading process is terminated.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read by reading the switch once for each interrupt process and comparing it with the result of the previous read to change the signal. There is a method to judge whether or not it has been done, but if it is done so, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct judgment may not be made. In addition, since the input pulse of the switch must be held for more than twice the timer interrupt cycle by simple calculation, the design of the electric circuit to extend the pulse and the speed of the game ball passing through the switch are slowed down. It is necessary to design the structure of the spherical flow path.
On the other hand, as in this embodiment, the amount that can be processed in the interrupt by extending the timer interrupt cycle by performing the switch read processing twice in one interrupt processing with a predetermined time difference. It is possible to achieve both the increase and the ease of structural design, etc., and avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the output process (step S73) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the output process, first, all the output data of the port 176 (see FIG. 4) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 35 is turned off (step S131). Subsequently, the data to be output to the first port 175 having the function of outputting the data of the large winning opening solenoid 133 and the normal electric solenoid 132 is synthesized and output (step S132).
Next, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 35 is updated (updated (+1) in the range of 0 to 3) (step S133), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated. The output data of the digit line of the above is acquired (step S134). Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S134a). The external information synthesized here is the "door / frame opening signal" (that is, the opening signal of the glass frame 5 (door) / front frame 4 (frame)) and the "security signal" (when various frauds are occurring and RAM. There is a signal that is output for a predetermined time when the power is turned on by clearing).
In the present application, "acquiring" data in the control process means extracting data from the ROM (ROM101B in the game control device 100 of this example).

After that, the data synthesized in step S134a is output to the digit output port (third port 177) and the external information output port (fourth port 180) (step S135). The third port 177 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the batch display device 35 is connected.
Next, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment data area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S136), and the loaded segment output data is output to the segment output port (second port 176) (2nd port 176). Step S137). The second port 176 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 35.
In the present application, as in step S136, “loading” data in the control process means extracting data from the RAM (RAM 101C in the game control device 100 of this example).
Further, the process up to step S137 dynamically turns on the predetermined LED in the batch display device 35, and the display executed by this lighting includes, for example, a special symbol display, a normal symbol display, and a special symbol hold. There are display, general map hold display, round display, game status display (time saving display, high probability display), etc.

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 55 is synthesized (step S138), the synthesized data and the output data of the launch permission are further synthesized (step S138a), and the data synthesized in step S138a is combined with the external information. The data is output to the port for outputting the emission permission signal (fourth port 180) (step S138b). The fourth port 180 outputs information about the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal, and also outputs a launch permission signal from the game control device 100 to the launch control device via the payout control device 200. It is an output port for outputting to.
The external information synthesized in step S138 is "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "symbol confirmation number signal", and "starting port". There are "Signal" and "Main prize ball signal".

Next, the output data 1 to 3 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 1 provided on the relay board 170 (step S139). After that, the output data 4 to 6 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 2 provided on the relay board 170 (step S140).
Next, the output data 7 to 8 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 3 provided on the relay board 170 (step S141). Further, the output data 9 to 10 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 4 provided on the relay board 170 (step S142). Further, the output data 11 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 5 provided on the relay board 170 (step S143), and FIG. 13 Ends the output processing of.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S74) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. Briefly, in FIG. 14, the left column (steps S151 to S161) is a process of updating (increasing) the number of output of the main prize ball signal, and the right column (steps S162 to S172) is a process of transmitting a payout command. ..
In this payout command transmission process, first, a prize number counter area 2 in which a plurality of storage areas as prize number counters are provided for each prize ball number (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Among the counters of the above, it is determined whether or not the counter in the winning number counter area 2 to be checked has a count number other than “0” (step S151).
The structure of the winning number counter area 2 (also shown in FIG. 14) is as follows, for example.
・ 3 prize ball counter ・ 10 prize ball counter ・ 14 prize ball counter Each prize number counter can store up to 255 prizes, and in the check of the prize number counter area 2, the above-mentioned counter is displayed from above. Check in order (from the 3 prize ball counter).

Returning to the flow, when there is no count number (step S151: NO), the address of the counter of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S152), and the count number of all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 is updated. It is determined whether or not the check of is completed (step S153). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S153; YES), the process proceeds to step S162. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S153; NO), the process returns to step S151 and the above process is repeated.

Further, when it is determined in step S151 that there is a count number (step S151; YES), the count number of the target winning number counter is subtracted (-1) (step S154), and the winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts (for example, 3, 10, or 14) corresponding to the address is acquired (step S155).
After passing through step S155, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the number of payouts acquired in step S155 are added (step S156). As the value of the prize ball remaining number area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number (10 in this case) which is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored, and in this processing, the prize is awarded. Add the value of the number of newly generated prize balls to the value of the remaining number of balls area. Then, the added value is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S157).

After that, 10 which is a predetermined number as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value in the prize ball remaining number region (step S158), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S159). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S159; NO), the update of the remaining number of main prize balls is completed and the process proceeds to step S162. If the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S159; YES), the value in the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step S160), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step). S161), the process returns to step S158.

In the process of updating the remaining number of main prize balls (mainly in steps S156 to S161), every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case), an external device is used. Set the main prize ball signal to be output to. That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the step S160 is executed and the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is incremented by 1. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the external device (management device of the game store, etc.) receives a prize ball every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). Signals are output, and by collating these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts. That is, in the process of updating the remaining number of main prize balls, the game control device 100 transmits a prize ball signal to an external device based on the payout schedule, so that the actual payout (the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200) ) Is a process performed to ensure consistency with.
The prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100, which is the main board, for every 10 scheduled payouts, and 1 pulse is output from the payout control device 200, which is the payout board, for every 10 payouts. ing.

Next, when it is determined that all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 do not have a count number and the checks of all the counters are completed (step S153; YES), or the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S159; NO). ), If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the timer is updated by -1 (step S162), and then it is determined whether the timer has become 0 (time up) (step S163). If it is determined in this determination that the timer (payout command transmission timer) has timed up (step S163; YES), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timer has not timed up (step S163; NO), it is determined whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S164). Then, when it is determined that the payout busy signal is busy (step S164; YES), this payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the payout busy signal is not busy (step S164; NO), the process proceeds to step S165 in order to check the winning number counter area 1 described later.
In the determination in step S164, instead of looking at the state of the port of the first input port 160, the payout busy signal flag set in the input process of FIG. 10 is seen when the on state of the payout busy signal is detected. Judgment is made.

Then, in step S165, each of the prize number counter areas 1 in which a plurality of storage areas as prize number counters are provided for each prize ball number (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Among the counters, it is determined whether or not the counter in the winning number counter area 1 to be checked has a count number other than “0” (step S165).
The structure of the winning number counter area 1 (also shown in FIG. 14) is as follows, for example.
・ 3 prize ball counter ・ 10 prize ball counter ・ 14 prize ball counter Each prize number counter can store up to 65535 prizes, and in the check of the prize number counter area 1, the above-mentioned counter is displayed from above. Check in order (from the 3 prize ball counter). The difference between the winning number counter area 2 and the winning number counter area 1 described above is the storage capacity of each counter.

Returning to the flow, when there is no count number (step S165: NO), the address of the counter of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S166), and the count number of all the counters in the winning number counter area 1 is updated. It is determined whether or not the check of is completed (step S167). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S167; YES), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S167; NO), the process returns to step S165 and the above process is repeated.

If it is determined in step S165 that there is a count number (step S165; YES), the count number of the target winning number counter is subtracted (-1) (step S168), and the winning number counter area 1 The payout number command corresponding to the address is acquired (step S169), and the acquired payout number command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S170). Then, after passing through step S170, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area used in steps S162 and S163 (step S171), and the data of the request flag (payout request flag) is saved in the payout request flag area (step S171). The information indicating that the flag has been set) is saved (step S172), and this command transmission process is terminated. Here, in step S172, in the game control device 100, it is possible to determine by another process that oneself (game control device 100) has requested the payout control device 200 to pay out (commanded the payout operation of the prize ball). In order to do so, the data of the payout request flag is set (the flag is set).

By the processing of steps S162 to S171 described above, a payout number command (a type of payout command) instructing payout of the game ball (prize ball) corresponding to the winning is transmitted to the payout control device 200, and the payout control device 200 sends this payout. Pay out game balls (prize balls) based on several commands. As described above, the payout number command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but is transmitted after a predetermined time (for example, 200 ms) has passed. Further, the fact that the payout control board side is in a state where the prize ball can be paid out (that is, the payout busy signal is not busy) is also a necessary condition for transmitting the payout number command.

The payout busy signal is turned on (during busy) on condition that one or more of the following states are set.
・ During payout operation ・ During ball lending operation ・ During shoot ball out error ・ During overflow error ・ During frame radio wave fraud ・ Abnormality of payout ball detection switch (during abnormality of switch that monitors paid out ball)
-Insufficient payout error-Overpayment error-Count of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board (number of unpaid prize balls = remaining number of acquired game balls)
When there is (= not 0), etc.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S75) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process of FIG. ..
In the random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S185).

When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S185; NO), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S191). When the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S185; YES), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S186), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is supported. It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be used (step S187). After that, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S191).

When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S191; NO), it is determined whether the hit random number of the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S194). If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S191; YES), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S192), and the next initial initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S193). After that, it is determined whether the hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S194).

When the hit random number of the normal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S194; NO), it is determined whether the hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S197). If the hit random number of the normal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S194; YES), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S195), and the next initial value of the loaded normal figure hit random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S196). After that, it is determined whether the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S197).

When the hit symbol random number of the normal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S197; NO), the random number update process 1 is terminated. If the hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S197; YES), the hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S198), and the next initial value of the loaded hit symbol random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S199), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S76) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.
In this embodiment, although it has been described that there are three types of fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3, 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers) are used as fluctuation pattern random numbers. There is a random number 1), and the random number update process 2 of FIG. 16 targets both of them as update targets, and switches the update target each time an interrupt occurs and processes them. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S201). Here, the update is performed in the range of 0 to 3.
The types of random numbers to be updated are as follows.
・ When 0: Fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper)
・ When 1: Fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower)
・ When 2: Fluctuation pattern random number 2
・ When 3: Fluctuation pattern random number 3
Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S202). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the referenced table based on the calculated address (step S203). The table referenced at this time stores an upper limit value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has completed a cycle.
Here, the effect random number update table contains data for the types of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks), and the details are as follows.
・ Upper limit judgment value ・ Mask value of M1 counter ・ Type information of random number area to be updated (details below)
1-byte random number 2-byte random number (upper)
2-byte random number (lower)
-Update area address

Subsequently, the value of the M1 counter in the gaming microcomputer 101 is loaded (step S204), the mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired from the corresponding effect random number update table, and the value of the M1 counter is masked. (Step S205).
Since the microcomputer assumed as the game microcomputer 101 in this embodiment does not have a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as an R register), an M1 counter is used instead. Here, the R register is a register that is used for refreshing the DRAM provided in the Z80 series microcomputer and the value is constantly updated, and a random value is acquired each time the value is read. The M1 counter is a counter whose value is updated every time a program instruction is fetched, and is a counter whose value changes every time it is read, like the R register. When the gaming microcomputer 101 has an R register, the R register may be used instead of the M1 counter. In any case, the random number can be given randomness by using the value of the M1 counter or the R register.

Further, the mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter (or R register, the same applies hereinafter), and When updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, it is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number.
As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4-bit is illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is checked whether the random number area to be updated is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S206). If it is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S206; YES), the process proceeds to step S207, and the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value (hereinafter, this is referred to as a masked value) is "1". Is added to the added value (upper), and "0" is used as the added value (lower), and the process proceeds to step S208.
The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition.
On the other hand, if the random number area to be updated is a lower-order or 1-byte random number of a 2-byte random number (step S206; NO), it branches to step S209, "0" is set as an addition value (upper), and "1" is set as the mask value. The added value is set as the added value (lower), and the process proceeds to step S208.

In the next step S208, it is checked whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is a 2-byte random number. Here, if it is not a 2-byte random number, the process jumps to step S210 (step S208; NO). On the other hand, when the random number region is a 2-byte random number, the process proceeds to step S211 (step S208; YES). In step S210, “0” is set as a random number value (upper), and the value obtained by adding “1” to the mask value is set as the value (lower) of the random number region to be updated, and the process proceeds to step S212.
When the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the process proceeds to step S212 with the value of the random number area (2 bytes) to be updated as the random number value in step S211.

Next, in step S212, a value obtained by adding the added value determined in steps S207 and S209 to the random number value is calculated to obtain a new random number value, and whether or not this random number value exceeds the upper limit determination value acquired in step S203 is determined. Determine (step S213).
If the newly calculated random number value exceeds the upper limit determination value, the upper limit determination value is subtracted from the calculated random number value to obtain the current random number value (step S214), and then the process proceeds to step S215. On the other hand, if the newly calculated random number value does not exceed the upper limit determination value, the calculated random number value is set as the current random number value, and step S214 is jumped to proceed to step S215.
In step S215, the lower part of the random number value is saved in the corresponding random number area. Here, it is saved in either the 1-byte random number area or the lower area of the 2-byte random number. Then, it is checked whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S216), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step S216; YES), the upper part of the random number value is the upper part of the random number area (2-byte random number (upper) side). Save to (step S217). Here, it is saved in the upper area of the 2-byte random number. After passing through step S217, the random number update process 2 is terminated.
On the other hand, if the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S216; NO), step S217 is jumped, the process is not performed, and the random number update process 2 is terminated.

In this way, the CPU 101A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Further, as the fluctuation pattern, as will be described later, a fluctuation pattern of “no reach”, a fluctuation pattern (reach fluctuation mode) in various reach states such as “normal reach” and a large number of “special (SP) reach” are defined. ing.
Therefore, the CPU 101A is based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting area (special figure 1 starting port 607, special drawing 2 starting port 608, or starting winning hole 26a) of the starting port distribution device 600 or the normal variable winning device 26. Among the various extracted random numbers, it serves as a random number updating means for updating the reach variation mode determination random number (variation pattern random number) for determining the reach variation mode in the reach state.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning port switch / state monitoring process (step S77) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning port switch / status monitoring process is a process of monitoring whether or not there is a signal input (signal change) from a switch provided in each winning port, and monitoring an error.

In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, detection from the winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, one large winning opening switch 124) corresponding to one large winning opening switch 124 in the large winning opening (variable winning device 27). Data indicating the number of the port to which the signal is input, the bit position in the port of the signal, and the like are stored) (step S221). The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has one large winning opening, but in this embodiment, two large winning opening switches 124 are provided, and any of the game balls that have flowed into the large winning opening of the variable winning device 27. Since it is detected by the large winning opening switch 124 of the above, here, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 124 is prepared.
Next, even though the large winning opening is not open, the large winning opening is monitored for illegal winning, and the fraud & winning monitoring process (step S222) for detecting a normal winning is executed.

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 124 in the large winning opening (variable winning opening device 27) is prepared (step S223), and it is monitored for illegal winning and a normal winning is obtained. The fraud & winning monitoring process (step S224) to be detected is executed.
As described above, there are two large winning opening switches 124, and there are two large winning opening switches 124 arranged in the large winning opening 27a.
Next, the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch in the Fuden is prepared (step S227). As the winning port switch in the Fuden, there is a second starting port switch 121 that detects the winning of the starting winning opening 26a of the ordinary variable winning device 26 as the Fuden.
Next, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S228) for detecting a normal winning is executed while monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning.

After that, a winning opening monitoring table of a winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring (for example, a list showing switches that do not require fraud monitoring) is prepared (step S229). Examples of the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring include the first starting opening switch 120 and the winning opening switch 123 provided for the general winning opening 28 to 31. For the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, fraud monitoring is not performed, but the winning detection process is performed. Therefore, in step S229, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for the processing, and in the next step, the winning number is updated. The number counter update process (step S230) is executed. The detailed procedure of the winning number counter update process will be described later.

After the winning number counter update process (step S230), a status scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of switches and signals for which errors should be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is provided. Update (update "+1" in the range of 0 to 3) and prepare (step S231). Subsequently, the game machine condition monitoring table 1 is prepared (step S232).
The following types of errors to be monitored by the game machine status monitoring table 1 are set according to the values of the status scan counters, and these are, for example, a shoot ball out switch and an overflow switch from the payout control device 200. , Corresponds to the payout abnormality status signal of the payout control device 200 and the like.
(B) When 0: Switch error 1 error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
(B) When 1: Shoot ball out error (C) When 2: Overflow error (D) When 3: Payout error error

Next, an error check of the type defined in the game machine state monitoring table 1 is performed (step S233), and then the game machine state monitoring table 2 is prepared (step S235).
The types of errors monitored by the game machine status monitoring table 2 are as follows.
(E) When 0: Glass frame open (front frame open)
(F) When 1: Front frame open (main body frame open)
(G) When 2: Frame radio wave is invalid (H) When 3: Touch switch

Next, an error check of the type defined in the game machine state monitoring table 2 is performed (step S236), and it is determined whether or not the state scan counter has become "0" (step S237). When the state scan counter determines "0", the game machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S235).
The types of errors monitored by the game machine status monitoring table 3 are as follows.
(I) When 0: Switch error 2 error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
That is, as the type of error to be monitored by the game machine status monitoring table 3, only the error whose status scan counter value corresponds to "0" is set.

Next, an error check of the type defined in the game machine status monitoring table 3 is performed (step S239), a payout busy signal check process (step S240) is further executed, and then the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed to perform timer allocation. Return to the inclusion process.
On the other hand, if the status scan counter = "0" is not set in step S237, there is no error to be monitored in the game machine status monitoring table 3, so that the timer interrupt processing is performed without going through steps S238 and 239. Return.
The game machine status check process in Table 3 in step S239 and the payout busy signal check process in step S240 are executed only when the status scan counter is "0", that is, only once every four timer interrupts. Therefore, when the timer interrupt cycle is 4 ms, the monitoring by these check processes is a 16 ms cycle.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
Next, the fraudulent & winning monitoring processing (step S222, step S224, step S228) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning monitoring process is a process performed on each of the two large winning opening switches 124 of the large winning opening (variable winning device 27) and the second starting opening switch 121 in the Fuden. With regard to the large prize opening (variable prize device 27) and Fuden (normal variable prize device 26), it is easy to commit fraud by forcibly opening the opening / closing member to insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball. Others monitor fraud.
Here, in explaining the fraud & winning monitoring process in the winning slot switch / status monitoring process, the information defined in the fraud monitoring table among the winning slot monitoring tables prepared is as follows.
-Data for determining whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)
・ Lower address of fraud monitoring information ・ Lower address of fraudulent winning number area ・ Unauthorized winning error notification command ・ Upper limit of fraudulent winning number (number of fraud occurrence judgments)
・ Address of winning opening switch table ・ Notification timer update information (permission / update)

In the fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be error-monitored is checked (step S241), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S242). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the variable winning device 27 is opened when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the large winning opening switch 124. Further, when the winning port switch to be error-monitored is the second starting port switch 121, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 26 is executed based on the hit in the normal drawing.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step S242; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step S243). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S243; NO), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S252). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S243; YES), the number of illegal winnings of the target is updated by +1 (step S244), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (for example, , 5) or more is determined (step S245).

For example, the number of judgments is set to 5, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is sandwiched between the door members of the large winning opening, and the game ball is a count switch (large winning opening). This is to prevent it from being judged as invalid when a prize is won after the valid period of the switch 124) or when noise is added to the signal, and it is not easily determined as an error even though it is not illegal. The number of determinations may be different for each switch.
Then, if it is determined that the number is not equal to or more than the determined number (step S245; NO), the process jumps to step S250 and prepares the winning monitoring table (winning opening monitoring table) of the target winning opening switch. When the number of determined items is exceeded (step S245; YES), the number of illegal winnings is limited to the number of illegal winnings (step S246), and the initial value (for example, 60,000 ms) is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area (step). S247). Next, the target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S248), the fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as the fraud flag (step S249), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260). ).

On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S242; NO), the winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S250), and the winning number counter update process (step S251) for setting the winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S252), and whether or not the notification timer update permission is permitted is determined (step S253). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S253; NO), the fraudulent & winning monitoring process ends. When the update of the notification timer is permitted (step S253; YES), if the target notification timer is not 0, the notification timer is updated by -1 (step S254). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

The update of the notification timer is not permitted when the winning slot switch for error monitoring is one of the winning slot switches 124, and is permitted when the winning slot switch for error monitoring is the other winning slot switch 124. To. As a result, regarding the fraudulent notification of the variable winning device 27, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms).
That is, since error monitoring is performed for the large winning opening (variable winning device 27) by the two large winning opening switches 124, if the timer is updated by both switches, the timer is updated twice as a result. Since the illegal timer times out in half of the specified time, the timer is updated only at the timing when the monitoring process of the other large winning opening switch 124, which is monitored later, is performed. ..
When the winning port switch for error monitoring is the second starting port switch 121 in the normal train, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S255), and if the value is not 0 (step S255; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S255; YES), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, the target illegal release command is prepared (step S256), and the illegal prize release flag is set as the illegal flag. Prepare (step S257). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258).

When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258; YES), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of illegal prizes is cleared (). Step S259), the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258; NO), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. Compare with the value of the invalid flag area (step S260).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S260; YES), the fraud & winning monitoring process ends. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step S260; NO), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step S261), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S262), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated.
By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, an illegal winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter update process (step S230) in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S251) in the fraud & winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input number counter update process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table acquired in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S271).
Here, the information defined in the winning table among the winning opening monitoring tables prepared by the winning opening switch / status monitoring process and the like is as follows.
-Data for determining the number of repetitions and whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)
-Lower address of the winning number counter area 1-Lower address of the winning number counter area 2 (If there are multiple winning opening switches for one table, they are defined for each switch except for the number of repetitions)

Next, it is checked whether or not there is an input of a detection signal (more accurately, a change in the input) from the winning port switch to be monitored (step S272). Here, if it is determined that there is no input (S272; NO), the process jumps to step S281, and if it is determined that there is an input (S272; YES), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded in the next step S273. ..

In the next step S274, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and it is checked whether or not it overflows in the following step S275. Then, if it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S275; NO), the process proceeds to step S276, the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1, and then the process proceeds to step S277.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S275 that a counter overflow has occurred (S275; YES), step S276 is skipped and jump to step S277. The maximum number of stored items (for example, 255 for 1-byte size and 65535 for 2-byte size) is determined by the size of the provided prize counter area, so if it exceeds that, the value will return to "0" and payment will be made. You will lose information on the large number of prize balls that should be played. In order to avoid this, in step S274, the content of the area is not updated suddenly, and the update is performed after confirming that the content is (+1) outside the area and becomes “0”.

Proceeding to step S277, in steps S277 to S280, the same processing as in steps S273 to S276 is executed for the winning number counter area 2. That is, first, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded in step S277, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1) in the next step S278, and it is checked whether it overflows in the following step S279. Then, if it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S279; NO), the process proceeds to step S280, the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2, and then the process proceeds to step S281.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S279 that a counter overflow has occurred (S279; YES), step S280 is skipped and jump to step S281.
In step S281, the table address of the winning opening monitoring table is updated to the address of the next record, and then it is determined in step S282 whether the monitoring processing of all the switches is completed, and if it is completed (step S282; YES). Ends the input number counter update process, and if it has not ended (step S282; NO), returns to step S272 and repeats the above process.

By the above processing, a prize ball is set according to the winning.
Specifically, according to the processing of the first half (steps S273 to S276), the value of the winning number counter for the prize ball (payout command transmission) (that is, the value of the winning number counter area 1) is updated. This counter size is 2 bytes and takes a value in the range 0-65535.
Further, according to the processing of the latter half (steps S277 to S280), the value of the winning number counter for the main prize ball signal (that is, the value of the winning number counter area 2) is updated. This counter size is 1 byte and takes a value in the range 0-255. The value of the winning number counter area 2 is used, for example, in step S155 described above for the main prize ball signal.

[Game machine status check process]
Next, the game machine state check process (step S233, step S236, step S239) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the game machine status check process, first, a game corresponding to a plurality of switches for which an error should be monitored and a status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal is to be monitored this time. Acquire the machine status monitoring table (step S301).
The information defined on the game machine status monitoring table prepared by the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is as follows.
(B) Lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area (b) Port input of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored Lower address of the status area (c) Mask data to extract only the bits of the target signal (d) ) Signal on judgment data (e) Status off command (in the case of an error system, the meaning of the command to end error notification)
(F) Status on command (in the case of an error system, the meaning of the command to start error notification)
(G) Status-off monitoring timer comparison value (H) Status-on monitoring timer comparison value

Next, the state of the target switch acquired this time is checked, and it is determined whether or not the signal to be monitored (including the switch state) is on (step S302). Here, "the signal is on" means an error (abnormal, illegal) state for the error system, and a touching state for the touch switch signal (the player's hand on the firing operation handle 11). Is in contact with each other). Further, "the signal is off" means that the error system is not an error (normal), and the touch switch signal is not touched (the player's hand is on the firing operation handle 11). (Not in contact).
Then, when the switch is not on (step S302: NO), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S303), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S304). After that, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S305), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S309).

On the other hand, when the signal is on (step S302: YES), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S306). For example, as one of the errors defined in the game machine status monitoring table, in the case of a shot ball out, the shoot ball out switch detects that there is no game ball in the chute that supplies the game ball to the storage tank and turns it on. Then, step S302 becomes YES. If YES, the state on flag is prepared in step S306.
Next, the target state on command is prepared (step S307). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S308), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S309).

When the value of the target signal control area and the state of the current signal match (step S309; YES), that is, when the state of the signal has not changed, in order to determine a timer as to whether or not an error treatment is necessary. The target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S312), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (reference value for determining that it is necessary to deal with an error) ( Step S313). Further, when the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state do not match (step S309; NO), that is, when the signal state changes, it is determined that it is not necessary to deal with the error yet, and the target signal. The current signal state is saved in the control area (step S310), the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S311), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S312), and the target status monitoring timer is updated. It is determined whether or not the value of has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313).

If the value of the target status monitoring timer does not reach the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313; NO), the game machine status check process ends. When the value of the target status monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313: YES), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S314). The state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step S315).
Here, when it is determined in step S313 that the target status monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the signal status (in the case of an error system, the error occurrence or cancellation status) has been determined. Become. However, in the case of an error system, for example, there may be a situation where the error occurrence is confirmed when the error has already occurred, or the error cancellation is confirmed when the error is not occurring. Therefore, in step S314, After the processing, in step S315, by comparing the prepared state flag with the value of the target state flag area, it is checked whether the state of the signal confirmed this time is the same as the state of the current error flag.

When the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S315; YES), the signal state (in the case of an error system, the error situation) has not changed. , It is determined that there is no need for treatment (correspondence to the signal state change), and the game machine state check process is terminated. When the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (if the state flags are not the same) (step S315; NO), the signal state has changed (changed to a new error state). Or, the touch switch signal has changed from off to on or from on to off), so the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. That is, the value of the target state flag area is changed to that of the signal state determined this time, and the process proceeds to step S317. In step S317, the command setting process is performed, and the command corresponding to the signal state confirmed this time is set. That is, the process of transmitting either the state off command or the state on command prepared above is performed. As a result, a measure corresponding to the current signal state is performed. For example, if the shot ball is out, an error display for notifying it is notified or the notification is canceled. When step S317 is passed, the game machine state check process is completed.
In this way, when a signal such as an error is turned on, the corresponding state on flag is set and a state on command is prepared, and when a signal such as an error is turned off, the corresponding state off flag is set and the state off command is set. Is done. In particular, in this game machine state check process, not only the signal on (error occurrence or hand contact with the firing operation handle 11) is monitored, but the signal off (error cancellation or firing operation) is not monitored. The operation / state of releasing the hand from the handle 11) is also monitored, and the processing is common.
It should be noted that such a game machine state check process is the same for other errors such as opening the glass frame and opening the front frame.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S240) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, first, the state of the above-mentioned payout busy signal from the payout control device 200 is checked by the corresponding flag, and it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S285).
Then, when the payout busy signal is not on (step S285: NO), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S285), and a specified off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step). S286), the value in the busy signal state region is compared with the state of the current signal (step S287).

On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is on (step S302: YES), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S285a). Next, a specified on-determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S286a), and the value in the busy signal state region is compared with the current busy signal state (step S287). In step S287, it is checked whether the same state continues for a plurality of interrupts.

If the value in the busy signal state region and the current busy signal state match (step S287; YES), that is, if the busy signal state has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S290). , It is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the set monitoring timer comparison value (the off confirmed monitoring timer comparison value or the on confirmed monitoring timer comparison value) (step S291).
Further, when the value in the busy signal state region and the state of the busy signal this time do not match (step S287; NO), that is, when the state of the signal changes, the state of the busy signal this time is saved in the busy signal control area. (Step S288), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step S289), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S290), and the value of the busy signal monitoring timer reaches the set monitoring timer comparison value. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step S291).

If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S291; NO), the payout busy signal check process ends. When the value of the busy signal monitoring timer reaches the comparison value of the monitoring timer (step S291: YES), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 to keep the value of the comparison value -1 (step S292), and preparations are made. The state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S293), and it is determined whether the prepared state flag indicates a busy state (step S294).
Here, when it is determined in step S291 that the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, the busy signal state is determined.

Then, when the prepared state flag does not indicate a busy state (step S294; NO), the payout busy signal check process ends. Further, when the prepared state flag indicates a busy state (step S294; YES), the busy signal has changed from off to on, and the change is the player's ball lending operation (ball lending button). Step 295 proceeds to determine whether the operation is due to the operation of pressing 16.
Proceeding to step S295, the data of the payout request flag (saved in the above-mentioned payout command transmission process) is loaded and then cleared (step S295), and the loaded payout request flag data has a request flag (that is, the flag is set). It is determined whether the user is in a standing state (step S296).

If the data of the payout request flag has the request flag (step S296; YES), the payout control device 200 is busy because the payout control device 200 is executing the prize ball payout operation requested by itself (game control device 100). Therefore, the payout busy signal check process is terminated without executing steps S298 and S299, which will be described later.
On the other hand, when the payout request flag data does not have the request flag (step S296; NO), there is a possibility that the player has performed a ball lending operation, so that an error that the busy signal is turned on next occurs. Is checked (step S297).

Then, if an error that turns on the busy signal is occurring (step S297; YES), it is determined that the busy state is occurring because the error is occurring. Therefore, steps S298 and S299, which will be described later, are not executed. , End this payout busy signal check process.
On the other hand, when the error that the busy signal is turned on is not occurring (step S297; NO), it is determined that the player's ball lending operation has been performed (the busy signal has been turned on by the player's ball lending operation). Since it can be done, a ball lending button pressing command (a command indicating that the ball lending button 16 is pressed and the ball lending operation has been performed) is prepared (step S298), and the effect command is to be transmitted to the effect control device 200. The setting process is executed (step S299), and then the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

If the payout busy signal is on (busy), it is as described in the explanation of the payout command transmission process. Except for errors and abnormalities, the prize ball is being paid out or the ball is rented. It is either medium (during the payout operation of the ball rental). For this reason, it is necessary to check the status of the payout request flag and whether an error that turns on the busy signal is occurring (whether a shoot ball is out, an overflow error, a payout error status signal is on, etc.). You can judge whether you are busy by lending.
Therefore, according to this payout busy signal check process, the state of the payout busy signal received from the payout control device 200 is checked, data of a predetermined flag is set according to the state, and the payout busy signal is set. Based on the state, it is determined whether or not the player's ball lending operation (ball lending operation by pressing the ball lending button 16) has been performed, and each time the player's ball lending operation is performed, the ball lending operation is performed. The button pressing command will be transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the special figure game process (step S78) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure game process, the inputs of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.
In the special figure game process, first, in step S321, a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 is performed.
In the start port switch monitoring process, if a game ball is won in the special figure 1 start port 607, the special figure 2 start port 608, or the start winning opening 26a, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and the winning is won. Based on special figure variation display The game result pre-judgment is performed to predetermine the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the game. The details of the start port switch monitoring process (step S321) will be described later.
Next, in step S322, the large winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. This is a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 124 provided in the variable winning device 27.

Next, in step S323, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step S324). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step S324; YES), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the special figure game processing number is referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. A game sequence branch table (a specific example is shown in the upper right of FIG. 22) is set in a register (step S325), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step S326). .. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the game processing number (step S328).
In the special figure game processing timer, a timer value is set to a predetermined value in each processing (steps S329 to S339: corresponding to processing number = 0 to processing number = 10) after branching according to the processing number described later. There is, and when the time-up of this special figure game processing timer is set, it is set to be the timing to execute step S329 or later. As a result, if it is time to execute step S325 or later when step S323 is executed, the determination result of step S324 becomes affirmative, and steps S325 and subsequent steps (including steps S340 to S343) are executed. .. If it is not the timing to execute steps S325 to S339 at the time of executing step S323, the determination result of step S324 becomes negative, and only steps S340 to S343 are executed.

In the subroutine call by the process number in step S328, the process number 0 goes to step S329 (special figure normal processing), the process number 1 goes to step S330 (special figure changing process), and the process number 2 goes to step S331 (special figure display). Process), process number 3 to step S332 (fanfare / inter-interval processing), process number 4 to step S333 (processing while the big winning opening is open), process number 5 to step S334 (processing of remaining large winning openings). , Process number 6 to step S335 (big hit end process), process number 7 to step S336 (small hit fanfare middle process), process number 8 to step S337 (small hit middle process), process number 9 to step S338 (small hit middle process). The process number 10 proceeds to step S339 (small hit end process). In the customer waiting state (during demonstration), the processing number is 0.

The specific contents of each process executed by the subroutine call in the process number are as follows.
In step S329 (normal processing of special figures), when the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure start memories that are held because the special figure variation display game has not been executed) is zero and the special figure variation display game is not being executed, the customer A process for displaying the waiting state on the display device 41 is performed. In addition, in this special figure normal processing, processing for starting the next special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation start processing) is performed. In this special figure fluctuation start processing, the start memory of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is monitored, and if there is any special figure start memory, the corresponding fluctuation display (first or second fluctuation display) is started. (Setting of the variation pattern command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300, etc.) is executed, the processing number is set to 1, and then the process returns. If the number of special figure reservations is zero and the next special figure variation display game is not executed, the game returns as it is (the processing number remains 0).

Next, in step S330 (processing during special figure change), a process for displaying the special figure in a variable manner is performed until the variable time set in the special figure change start process elapses. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, a process of transmitting a command for stopping the symbol of the special symbol (symbol stop command) to the effect control device 300 is executed, and then the process number is set to 2 and returned.
Further, in step S331 (processing during special figure display), a process for displaying the variation display result of the special figure for a certain period of time (1 second to 2 seconds) is performed. In addition, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, the fanfare time is set according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and the fanfare / interval processing is performed. Set the information necessary to perform the above. Then, if it is a big hit, the processing number is set to 3, if it is a small hit, the processing number is set to 7, and if it is a miss, the processing number is set to 0.

Next, in step S332 (fanfare / inter-interval processing), immediately after the big hit, the fanfare processing for outputting the fanfare sound or the like from the speaker 12a or the like is executed, and the interval period is displayed during the big hit interval period. The processing number is set to 4 at the timing when the interval processing is executed and the opening of the large winning opening of the variable winning device 27 is started. In addition, here, the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set.
Next, step S333 (processing during opening of the large winning opening) is a process while opening the large winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 and the second variable winning device 33. In addition, here, if the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the information necessary for processing the remaining ball of the big winning opening is set. .. When the opening of the big prize opening is completed, the processing number is set to 5.

Next, in step S334 (processing of remaining balls in the large winning opening), in order to set a time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, and to perform a large hit end process if the big hit round is the final round. Set necessary information. Specifically, for example, a process of waiting for a certain period of time in order to reliably count the game balls that have entered the large winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 just before the end of opening the large winning opening is performed, and after this certain time has elapsed, , When the jackpot round remains, the processing number is set to 3, and when the jackpot round does not remain, the processing number is set to 6 and returned.
Next, in step S335 (big hit end processing), the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is set, and the processing number is returned to 0 and returned.

Next, in step S336 (small hit fanfare middle processing), the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit middle processing is performed.
Next, in step S337 (small hit middle processing), the ending command is set, the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like are set.

Next, in step S338 (small hit remaining ball processing), in order to set a time for the remaining balls that have won a prize in the large winning opening during the small hit middle processing and to perform the small hit end processing. Set necessary information.
Next, in step S339 (small hit end processing), the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is set, and the processing number is returned to 0 and returned.

Next, when any of the above processes corresponding to the process numbers is completed, the process proceeds to step S340, and a table for controlling the display (display of the present special figure 1) on the batch display device 35 of the special figure 1 (special figure 1). 1 Fluctuation control table) is prepared, and in the next step S341, the control process (symbol variation control process) for displaying the variation of the special figure 1 is performed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S342 to prepare a table (special figure 2 fluctuation control table) for controlling the display (display of the present special figure 2) on the batch display device 35 of the special figure 2, and in the next step S343, this table is prepared. The control process (design variation control process) for the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed, and then the return is performed.
On the other hand, in step S324, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step S324; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step S340, and subsequent processing is performed. Do.

The small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It may be used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the start port switch monitoring process (step S321) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the start port switch monitoring process, first, the winning monitoring table (starting port 1 winning monitoring table) of the first starting port (special figure 1 starting port 607) is prepared (step S351), and the hard random number acquisition process (step S352) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a prize in the first starting port (step S353). Here, the determination of whether or not there is a start winning prize in step S353 is performed based on, for example, the information set in step S376 described later.
If it is determined in step S353 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step S353; N), the process proceeds to step S359, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S353 that there is a prize for the first starting port (step S353; Y), the special time is shortened (during normal power support; low probability or high probability does not matter). ) (Step S354).

If it is determined in step S354 that the special time reduction is not in progress (step S354; N), the process proceeds to step S357, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S354 that the special figure time is being shortened (step S354; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step S355), and an effect command setting process (step S356) is performed. .. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step S355), and the effect command setting process (step S356) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start port (special figure 1 start port 607, special figure 2 start port 608) of the start port distribution device 600 must be left-handed to win a prize, and the normal variable winning device 26 The starting port (starting winning opening 26a) must be hit right to win a prize. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when the first starting port (special figure 1 starting port 607) is awarded during the time-saving state (that is, the time-saving state). (When left-handed), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) instructing right-handed is performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the holding information by the first start port (special figure 1 start port 607) (step S357), the special figure start port switch common process (step S358) is performed.

Next, the winning monitoring table (starting port 2 winning monitoring table) of the second starting port (starting winning opening 26a, special drawing 2 starting opening 608) is prepared (step S359), and the hard random number acquisition process (step S360) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the second starting port (step S361). Here, the determination of whether or not there is a start winning prize in step S361 is performed based on, for example, the information set in step S376 described later. If it is determined in step S361 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step S361; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S361 that there is a prize for the second starting port (step S361; Y), whether or not the normal electric accessory is operating, that is, the normal variable winning device 26 When it is determined whether or not the opening / closing member 26b is activated to open the game ball in an open state (step S362) and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step S362; Y), the step The process proceeds to the process of S364, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S362 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step S362; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step S363).

In the determination of whether or not a general electric fraud is occurring, if it is the winning to the starting winning opening 26a that is determined to have won in step S361, the number of illegal winnings to the starting winning opening 26a of the normal variable winning device 26. Is more than the number of fraud determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that fraud is occurring. In the case of this example, the normal variable winning device 26 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred. If it is determined in step S361 that there is a prize in the special figure 2 start port 608 of the start port distribution device 600, the determination result in step S363 is unconditionally an illegal occurrence of a normal electric power. Not in (step S363; N).

If it is determined in step S363 that no illegal electric power is being generated (step S363; N), after preparing a table for setting the holding information by the second starting opening (starting winning opening 26a, special drawing 2 starting opening 608). (Step S364), the special figure start port switch common process (step S365) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is completed. Further, if it is determined in step S363 that an illegal operation is occurring (step S363; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps S352 and S360) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, among the first starting port (special figure 1 starting port 607) and the second starting port (starting winning opening 26a, special drawing 2 starting port 608), the monitoring target (Step S371), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 120 and the start port 2 switch 121 (step S372). .. Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step S372; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step S372; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step S373), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step S374). ..

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step S374; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S374; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step S375). Then, among the first start port and the second start port, the winning information of the start port to be monitored is set (step S376), and the hard random number acquisition process is completed.
The extracted value of the jackpot random number prepared in step S375 is used in the special figure start port switch common process executed after returning.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the special figure start port switch common process (steps S358, S365) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 120 and the start port 2 switch 121 are input.

In the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 120 and the start port 2 switch 121, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is sent to the external management device of the game machine 1. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs, is loaded (step S381), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step S383). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step S383; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step S384), and the process proceeds to step S385. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step S383; Y), the process proceeds to step S385. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows. Therefore, here, if the update causes a loop to become "0", step S384 is skipped and the game is not saved.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 120 and the start port 2 switch 121, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step S385). When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step S385; N), a start port over winning command corresponding to the target start port switch is prepared (step S399), and an effect command setting process (step S398) is prepared. To end the special figure start port switch common processing. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step S385; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 (step S385; Y). Step S386), the target start opening winning flag is saved (step S387). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step S388), and the big hit random number prepared in step S375 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM (step S388). Step S389). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step S390), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step S391). The extracted value of the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step S390 is used in the special figure reservation information determination process.

Next, it is determined whether or not the prize is won in the first starting port (special drawing 1 starting port 607) (step S392).
If it is determined in step S392 that the prize is not won in the first starting port (step S392; N), the process proceeds to step S395.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S392 that the prize is won in the first starting port (step S392; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step S393), and the small hit symbol of the RWM is extracted. Save in the random number storage area (step S394). The extracted value of the small hit symbol random number prepared in step S393 is used in the special figure reservation information determination process.

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step S395), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step S396) is performed.
Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step S397), and the effect command setting process (step S398) is performed to perform the special figure start port switch common process. finish.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM101C) includes a start winning area (special figure 1 starting port 607, special drawing 2 starting port 608) of the starting port distribution device 600 and a starting winning area (starting) of the normal variable winning device 26. Based on the inflow of game balls into the winning opening 26a), it serves as a starting winning winning storage means that extracts a predetermined random number and stores a predetermined number as a starting memory that is an execution right of the variable display game. Further, the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) first starts various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port (special figure 1 start port 607) up to a predetermined number. It is stored as a memory, and various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening (starting winning opening 26a, special figure 2 starting opening 608) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number. ..

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure reservation information determination process (step S396) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 26, first, the start port winning flag saved in step S387 of the special figure start port switch common process is checked, and whether the first start port (special figure 1 start port 607) is won. Is determined (step S401).
If it is determined in step S401 that the prize is not won in the first starting port (step S401; N), the process proceeds to step S404.
On the other hand, in step S401, when it is determined that the first starting port has been won (step S401; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (step S402).

If it is determined in step S402 that the special figure holding time is being shortened (step S402; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step S402, when it is determined that the special figure time is not shortened (step S402; N), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is in progress (step S403).
If it is determined in step S403 that a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step S403; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S403 that the jackpot is not in progress or the small hit is not occurring (step S403; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot determination process (step S404) is performed. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step S405; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step S406), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step S390 is supported. The stop symbol information is acquired (step S407), and the process proceeds to step S414.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step S405; N), it is determined whether or not the prize is won in the first starting port (special figure 1 starting port 607) (step S408).
If it is determined in step S408 that the prize is not won in the first start port (step S408; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step S413), and the process proceeds to step S414.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S408 that the winning is to the first starting port (step S408; Y), whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step S409) is performed to determine whether or not. Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step S410; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step S413), and the process proceeds to the process of step S414.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step S410; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (step S411), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step S393 is provided. It is acquired (step S412), and the process proceeds to step S414.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step S414), and the effect command setting process is performed (step S415). Next, the special figure information setting process (step S416) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step). S417).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step S418), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S419), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step S416 and the variation pattern setting process in step S417 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. Is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment such as) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

[Great winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step S322) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 27.
In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening (variable winning device 27) is being processed during opening (step S421). When the process during the opening of the large winning opening is not in progress (step S421; NO), it is determined whether the processing for the remaining balls in the large winning opening is in progress (step S422).
When the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step S422; NO), it is determined whether the small hit medium processing is in progress (step S423).
When the small hit middle processing is not in progress (step S423; NO), it is determined whether the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step S424). If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step S424; NO), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends.

Then, when the large winning opening opening processing is in progress (step S421; YES), when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step S422; YES), and when the small hit opening processing is in progress (step S423; YES). , And when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step S424; YES), the process proceeds to step S425, respectively.
Here, each determination in steps S421 to S424 is checked by the value of the special figure game processing number. Since the processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer reaches 0, the progress status of the game can be checked.

Next, 0 is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening added in the current large winning opening switch monitoring process (step S425). The winning counter is a counter provided for counting the balls entered by opening one round of the big winning opening and adding it to the number of winning opening counts in the process of step S437 described later.
Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the large winning opening switch 1 (one large winning opening switch 124) (step S426).

When there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1 (step S426; YES), the big winning opening count command is prepared (step S427), the effect command setting process (step S428) is performed, and the winning counter is updated by +1 (step S428). Step S429) and step S430. If there is no input to the large winning opening switch 1 (step S425; NO), the process proceeds to step S430.
In step 430, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the large winning opening switch 2 (the other large winning opening switch 124) (step S430). When there is an input to the big winning opening switch 2 (step S430; YES), the big winning opening count command is prepared (step S431), the effect command setting process (step S432) is performed, and the winning counter is updated by +1 (step). S433), the process proceeds to step S434. If there is no input to the large winning opening switch 2 (step S430; NO), the process proceeds to step S434.

In step 434, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S434). When the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step S434; NO), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step S435). When the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step S435; NO), it is determined whether the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step S436). When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step S436; NO), the value of the winning counter is added to the number of large winning openings count (step S437). This is done by sending a command indicating that the ball has been won to the large winning opening to the payout control device 200 and counting it with the winning counter (step S429, step S433), and later when the remaining ball is not being processed. In step S437 of the above, it is added to the number of large winning opening counts. Here, for the large winning opening switch 1 or the large winning opening switch 2, the value of the winning counter is added to the large winning opening count number.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S434; YES), when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step S435; YES), and when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step S436; YES). ) Ends the large winning opening switch monitoring process.
Next, when step S437 is passed, it is determined whether or not the number of large winning opening counts has reached the upper limit value (corresponding to the number of game balls that can be won in one round: for example, 9) (step S438).

If the number of winning openings is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step S438; NO), the winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the number of large winning openings is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step S438; YES), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step S439), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step). S440), it is determined whether or not the small hit middle processing is in progress (step S441).
If the small hit middle process is not in progress (step S441; NO), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. When the small hit middle processing is in progress (step S441; YES), the value of the end of the small hit opening operation is saved in the large winning opening control pointer area (step S442), and the large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step S329) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 28.
In the special figure normal processing, first, it is checked whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is 0 (step S461).
When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step S461; YES), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is 0 (step S466). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step S466; YES), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step S471), and when the customer waiting demo has not been started (step S471; NO) saves the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step S472).

Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step S473), the effect command setting process (step S474) is performed, the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step S475) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is completed. .. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step S471 (step S471; YES), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step S475) is performed to end the special figure normal processing. The details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S475) will be described later in FIG. 29.

On the other hand, in step S461, when the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" (step S461; NO), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step S462) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is performed. The hold number command is prepared (step S463), and the effect command setting process (step S464) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step S465) of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.
Further, in step S466, when the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (step S466; NO), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S467) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is performed. The hold number command is prepared (step S468), and the effect command setting process (step S469) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step S470) of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, by checking the number of special figures 2 held before checking the number of special figures 1 held, if the number of special figures 2 held is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step S462). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation display based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special figure Normal processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step S475) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 29.
When this routine is started, first, "0" is set as the processing number in step S481 (for example, a table for shifting to the special figure normal processing is prepared, and the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing is prepared in the table. ”), And save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area in step S482.
Next, in step S483, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared, and in step S484, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. When step S484 is passed, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.
As a result, various data for shifting to the special figure normal processing, for example, the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set, and the flag (large prize opening fraud monitoring information) that defines the large winning opening fraud monitoring period is set. The process of setting is performed.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S467) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1 variation start processing). The special figure 1 fluctuation flag showing FIG. 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step S491), and the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit is deviated from the jackpot information or the jackpot. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step S492) for setting information is performed. The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process in step S492 will be described later.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S493) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step S494) is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step S495). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step S496) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step S497) is performed to end the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process in step S493, the special figure information setting process in step S494, the variation pattern setting process in step S496, and the variation start information setting process in step S497 will be described later.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S462) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2 variation start processing). The special figure 2 fluctuation flag showing FIG. 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step S491a), and the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the second special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit is missed and the big hit The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step S492a) for setting information is performed. The details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process in step S492a will be described later.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S493a) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step S494a) is performed to prepare the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step S495a). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step S496a) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step S497a) is performed to end the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step S492) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the left side of FIG. 31.
In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step S501), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step S502). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (step S503), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (Step S504). It should be noted that the hold number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process (step S505) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed according to whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step S505) is a jackpot (step S506; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step S502 (step S507). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step S505) is not a big hit (step S506; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step S508) for determining the above is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step S508) is a small hit (step S509; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the loss information was saved in step S501. (Step S510), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step S508) is not a small hit (step S509; N), the large hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the loss information in both the large hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step S492a) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG. 31.
In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step S502a). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of RWM, prepared (step S503a), and the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0. (Step S504a). After that, a jackpot determination process (step S505a) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed according to whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step S505a) is a jackpot (step S506a; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step S502a (step S507a). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step S505a) is not a jackpot (step S506a; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information about the jackpot flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination process executed in steps S505, step S505a, etc. in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 32.
When the routine starts, the process of setting the lower limit determination value for the jackpot determination is performed in step S511. After that, it is checked in step S512 whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value, that is, the value of the jackpot random number read in steps S503 and S503a is the lower limit value of the hit determination value of the jackpot random number. Check if it is less than.
The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.
If it is determined in step S512 that the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value, the process branches to step S517, a deviation (meaning other than jackpot) is set as the determination result, and a return is made.

On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value in step S512, the process proceeds to step S513 to determine whether or not the probability is high. This determines whether or not the jackpot probability is high due to the probability fluctuation, that is, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is in the high probability state (probability fluctuation state). It is a judgment. If the probability is high, the process of setting the upper limit determination value for the jackpot determination in the high probability is performed in step S514, and then the process proceeds to step S516.
Further, if it is determined in step S513 that the probability is not high, the process branches to step S515, a process of setting an upper limit determination value for jackpot determination in the low probability is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S516.
In this way, when the upper limit judgment value in high probability and low probability is set, if the value of the target big hit random number is between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value (zone), it is considered as a big hit. You will be able to judge.
Therefore, in step S516, it is checked whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (whether it exceeds the upper limit determination value), and in step S516, it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S516). ; YES), since it can be determined that it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S517, a deviation is set as the determination result, and a return is made.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S516 that the value of the target jackpot random number is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value (does not exceed the upper limit determination value) (step S516; NO), the value of the target jackpot random number is determined to be the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination value. From the time between the values (zone), it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit, and in step S518, the jackpot is set as the determination result and returned.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process executed in step S508 or the like in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 33. Here, "step A" is used as the step number.
In this small hit determination process, first, the small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A11). The small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. That is, a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A11; Y), that is, if it is out of order, the outlier is set as the determination result (step A13), and the small hit determination process is terminated.
If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A11; N), the small hit upper limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (Step A12).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A12; Y), that is, if it is out of order, the outlier is set as the determination result (step A13), and the small hit determination process is terminated.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A12; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A14), and the small hit determination process is completed. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S493) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 34.
In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step S521), and if it is a big hit (step S521; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step S522). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step S523), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step S524). Here, the information defined on the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is as follows.
・ Random number judgment value (indicates the distribution rate)
-Stop symbol number corresponding to the determination value The stop symbol number is used to set the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the 7-segment special symbol 1 display in the batch display device 35).

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step S525), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S526). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 1 display) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step S527), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step S528), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step S529). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts with the hit as an opportunity, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the end of the hit changes according to the type of the hit symbol (the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit). Further, in the case of a specific jackpot symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) among the jackpots in the special figure 1, the effect mode of the transition destination is determined to be the probability variation depending on whether or not the game state is in the probability variation. It is decided whether to switch to the production mode or to shift to the production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether or not the mode is probable. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S538).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step S521; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step S530), and when it is a small hit (step S531; Y), the special figure 1 small hit The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step S531). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step S532), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step S533).
After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S534), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step S535). Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S538).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step S530; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step S536), and the missed stop symbol pattern is set in the stop symbol pattern area. Save (step S537) and prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step S538). There are 11 types of decorative special drawing commands, for example, and the special drawing type in the effect control device 300 can be determined by the difference in these types. By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step S539), and the effect command setting process (step S540) is performed. This decorative special drawing command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step S541), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step S542), and the special figure 1 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step S543), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S493a) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 35.
In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step S551), and if it is a big hit (step S551; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step S552). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step S553), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step S554). Here, the information defined on the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is as follows.
・ Random number judgment value (indicates the distribution rate)
-Stop symbol number corresponding to the determination value The stop symbol number is used to set the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the 7-segment special symbol 2 display in the batch display device 35).

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step S555), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the game is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S556). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step S557), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step S558), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step S559). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, in the jackpot in the special figure 2, the effect mode of the transition destination is a dedicated effect mode in which the probability change is confirmed regardless of the jackpot symbol. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S562).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step S551; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step S560), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then (step S561), a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S562). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step S563).
The effect command setting process (step S564) is performed. This decorative special drawing command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step S565), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step S566), and the special figure 2 Stop The symbol setting process is terminated.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first starting port (special drawing 1 starting port 607), and executes the first variable display game as the variable display game, and the second starting port (starting winning opening). 26a, a variable display game executing means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball at the special drawing 2 starting port 608). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process executed in steps S494, step S494a and the like in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 change start process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step S571), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step S572).
Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (step S573), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step S574).
Next, the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step S575), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step S576). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of outliers. Therefore, in cases other than outliers, the number of holdes does not affect the distribution of fluctuations in the first half. In addition, the fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and when determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step S577), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step S578).
Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (step S579), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step S580).
Next, the latter half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step S581), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step S582), and the special figure information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than the loss, the number of holds will be distributed to the latter half fluctuation as a result. Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern setting process executed in steps S496, step S496a, and the like in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 37.
The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

In this fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection address table is set (step S591), the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step S592), and the target is targeted. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step S593). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the hit type and the missed type. Specifically, the hit size is 1 byte size, and the loss size is 2 byte size. Since the hit rate is lower than the loss rate and even one byte is sufficient, the hit size is 1 byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment (step S594), and if it is out of alignment (step S594; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step S595) is performed to perform step S597. Move to processing. If it is not out of alignment (step S594; N), the distribution process (step S596) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S597.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired, prepared (step S597), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1). Prepare (step S598). Then, the distribution process (step S599) is performed, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step S600). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step S601), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step S602). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step S603), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) and prepared. (Step S604). After that, the distribution process (step S605) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (step S606), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the variation start information setting process executed in step S497 and step S497a in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 38.
In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step S611). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step S612), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step S613). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step S614), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step S615).

Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step S616), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S617). After that, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step S618), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step S619), and the effect command setting process is performed (step S620). ). Next, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (step S621), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (step S622). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step S623), the free area after the shift is cleared (step S624), and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory. In steps S621 to S624, the oldest (starting winning order) of the special figure reservation (starting memory of the special figure) of the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is With the execution of the special figure variation display game related to the special figure hold 1 (the earliest), the special figure hold 2 that has been put on hold after the special figure hold 1 (the first special figure hold in the starting winning order). Processing for moving up the ranks of ~ 4 one by one (processing for so-called hold shift; shift processing) is performed. By this processing, for example, the values for the special figure holding number 2 to the special figure holding number 4 in the hit random number storage area of the special figure are changed from the special figure holding number 1 to the special figure holding number 3 in the hit random number storage area. It will move. Then, the value for the special figure holding number 4 in the hit random number storage area is cleared, and the special figure holding number is decremented by 1. In other words, as the variable display game corresponding to the oldest start memory (start memory by the earliest start prize) among the reserved start memories is executed, the ranking of the remaining start memories (start prize). The order (the order in which the variable display game is executed) is moved up one by one, and the number of special figure reservations is changed to a value one less. This shift process is executed for each type of special figure (that is, separately for the start memory of special figure 1 and the start memory of special figure 2).

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorative special figure variable display Set the detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step S470) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to the left side of FIG. 39.
When the routine starts, "1" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing during special figure change) is set as the processing number in step S631, and the processing number (here, "1") is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S632. To save. Next, in step S633, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and in step S634, the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in Special Figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area. By this step S634, the special symbol 1 changing signal is turned on.
Next, in step S635, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area, and in step S636, the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display which is an LED segment in the batch display device 35) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. The initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of the device is saved and the routine is terminated.
In this way, the process for shifting to the process during the change of the special figure 1 is performed with respect to the special figure 1.

[Processing transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step S465) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to the right side of FIG. 39.
When the routine starts, "1" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing during special figure change) is set as the processing number in step S641, and the processing number (here, "1") is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S642. To save. Next, in step S643, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and in step S644, the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area. By this step S644, the special symbol 2 changing signal is turned on.
Next, in step S645, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area, and in step S646, the blinking control timer (special figure 2 display which is an LED segment in the batch display device 35) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. The initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of the device is saved and the routine is terminated.
In this way, the process for shifting to the process during the change of the special figure 2 is performed with respect to the special figure 2.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step S330) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 40.
In the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step S651), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S652). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec, and when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time.
Next, the special figure display process transition setting process (step S653) is performed to end the special figure display process. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Process display transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure display process transition setting process (step S653) in the above-mentioned special figure changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 41.
When the routine starts, "2" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing during display of the special figure) is set as the processing number in step S661, and the processing number (here, "2") is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S662. To save. Next, in step S663, the signal related to the special figure 1 fluctuation end processing is saved in the test signal output data area (that is, the special symbol 1 changing signal is turned off), and in step S664, the signal related to the special figure 2 fluctuation end processing is used as the test signal. Save to the output data area (that is, turn off the special symbol 2 changing signal).
Next, in step S665, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol fixed number signal control timer area. After that, in step S666, the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area is provided as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display (the special figure 1 display which is the LED segment in the batch display device 35). FIG. 1 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display is saved, and in step S667, the stop flag is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 2 to end the routine.
In this way, the process for shifting to the process during display of the special figure is performed.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step S331) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.
In the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step S681), and the small hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step). S682) is performed.
Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process are loaded. (Step S683), the process of clearing the jackpot flag 1 region and the jackpot flag 2 region of the RWM (step S684) is performed. Then, when it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step S685) and it is determined to be a jackpot (step S685; Y), the jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) of the second special figure variation display game is started. (For example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step S688). The upper limit table of the number of rounds is set (step S689).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S685 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step S685; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step S686), and the jackpot is a jackpot (step S686). When it is determined that S686; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on and the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game is turned on. (Turn on the signal per special symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step S687), and the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step S689) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step S689), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. It is saved in the upper limit value area of the number of rounds of (step S690). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step S691).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step S692), and the effect command setting process (step S693) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step S694), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S695) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step S696), and the effect command setting process (step). S697) is performed.

Next, the big winning opening opening information representing the big hit pattern and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S698). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S698, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1), and the big hit without a big hit (so-called sudden big hit, etc. When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it turns ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and turns OFF otherwise.
Further, the big hit 3 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball, and is OFF when it is a big hit without a ball.
The information on opening the large winning opening will be described later in the description of the fanfare / interval processing.

After that, the big winning opening opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. It is set (step S699), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S700). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step S701). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 27) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step S702), and the large winning opening large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step S703). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step S704) is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S686, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step S686; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step S725).
When it is determined in step S725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step S725; Y), the high probability fluctuation number update process (step S726) and the effect mode information check process related to the effect mode setting (step S727). ) Is performed to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S728).

If it is determined in step S728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step S728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area, prepared (step S729), and the effect command is set. The process (step S730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step S731), an effect command setting process (step S732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S733.
If it is determined in step S728 that the special figure is in high probability (step S728; Y), the process proceeds to step S733. As described above, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the occurrence of a small hit is a game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the person aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step S733). After that, the small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process 1 (step S734) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step S725; N), the high probability variation number update process (step S735), the effect mode information check process related to the effect mode setting (step). S736) is performed to set the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number (step S737), and it is determined whether the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step S738). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. It may be (rotation speed), or it may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes.
If it is determined in step S738 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step S738; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step S741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S738 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation match (step S738; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step S739), and the effect command is set. After performing the process (step S740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S741) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions and the like from occurring.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the high-probability variation number update process executed in step S726 and step S735 in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG. 44.
In the high probability fluctuation count update process, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation display game has a high probability (the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high probability) (step S751). End the update process.
On the other hand, when the special figure is in high probability (step S751; Y), the number of high probability fluctuations is updated by -1 (step S752), and it is determined whether the number of high probability fluctuations is "0" (step S753). The high probability fluctuation number means the number of times the special figure variation display game is played during the special figure high probability (that is, in the probability change mode) (the special figure rotation speed during the special figure probability change). An initial value (for example, 100 times) is set for the number of high-probability fluctuations in the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2 described later.
If the number of high-probability fluctuations is not "0" (step S753; N), the high-probability fluctuation number update process ends.

When the number of high probability fluctuations is "0" (step S753; Y), the high probability notification flag area is cleared (step S754), and the signal relating to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step S755). To do. In this step S755, specifically, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off.
Next, the signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step S756). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off. The state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned off. In the high probability mode, there are two states: "high probability & time saving" (special figure high probability with normal power support) and "high probability & no time saving" (special figure high probability without public power support).

Subsequently, the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step S757), the low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step S758), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved (step S759), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S760).
After that, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step S761), and the high probability fluctuation number update process is completed.

By the above high-probability fluctuation number update process, the high-probability fluctuation number update (update that reduces the high-probability fluctuation number by 1 each time the special figure fluctuation display game is played) is performed, and when the high-probability fluctuation number becomes "0". Various settings for ending the probabilistic mode are made. For this reason, the special figure probability change ends when the special figure turns 100 times, for example, even if a big hit does not occur, and the Fuden support (shortening the normal figure time) performed at the same time as the special figure probability change also ends with the special figure probability change. However, the probability variation mode ends at that point when a big hit occurs. As can be seen from the above-mentioned high-probability fluctuation frequency update process, the game state of the special figure is switched (at least the state of the jackpot probability of the special figure is switched) and the game state of the normal figure is switched (the state of performing the normal electric support). And switching to a state in which the normal power support is not performed) are performed in conjunction with each other in the present embodiment.

[Production mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process executed in step S727 and step S736 in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG. 45.
In the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step S771). If the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step S771; YES), the effect mode information check process ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed. For example, in a high probability state, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected. is there.

If the next mode transition information is not a non-update code (step S771; NO), the remaining rotation speed of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step S772). , It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the effect is 0 (step S773). When the remaining number of rotations of the effect becomes "0" (step S773; YES), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step S774), and then Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information (step S775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area of the RWM (step S776), and the effect remaining rotation speed of the new effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area. Then (step S777), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step S778).
After that, a probability information command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step S779), and it is determined whether the prepared command is the same as the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step S780). When the prepared command is the same as the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step S780; Y), the effect mode information check process ends. This is to simplify the operation by not sending the command to the effect control device 300 if the probability state does not change.

On the other hand, if the prepared command is not the same as the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step S780; N), the command prepared in step S779 is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step S781), and the effect command is produced. Perform the setting process (step S782), prepare the effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number of the new effect mode to be shifted (the effect remaining rotation number newly set in step S777) (step S783), and produce the effect. The command setting process (step S784) is performed.
Next, following step S784, a high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation number (updated as necessary in the high probability fluctuation number update process executed in step S726 and step S735) is prepared (step). S785), the effect command setting process (step S786) is performed, and it is determined whether the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step S787). If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step S787; N), the effect mode information check process ends.

Then, when the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step S787; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step S788), the effect command setting process (step S789) is performed, and the effect mode information is performed. End the check process.
By managing the effect mode with the game control device 100 in this way, it is possible to control, for example, to generate a specific reach only in a specific effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 1 (step S704) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "3" (corresponding to the processing number related to fanfare / interval processing) is set as the processing number in step S801, and the processing number (here, "3") is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S802. To save. Next, in step S803, the signal relating to the start of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S804, the signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area.
Here, in step S803, specifically, one big hit signal (a signal that turns on by a big hit + a small hit) is turned on, and four big hit signals (a signal that turns on by a big hit) are turned on. Further, in step S804, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol is turned off. 1 High probability state signal is turned off, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, and normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned off. This is because during the big hit (during the special game state), the special figure is in the normal state (a state other than the high probability mode), and the normal electric support is not performed (the normal figure is also in the normal state).

Next, the process proceeds to step S805, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared, and the number at the time of low probability (number without time reduction) is saved in the game state display number area in the following step S806. Then, in step S807, the Fuzu low probability & no time saving (no Fuden support) flag is saved in the Fuzu game mode flag area.
Next, in step S808, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared, in step S809, the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the game state display LED related to the display of the high probability state, and in step S810, the special figure game mode flag is cleared. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the area, and the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery is saved in step S811. The probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area. Next, in step S812, the high-probability variation number region for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high-probability mode is cleared. As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal operation state are set. That is, since this fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 is a process executed by the occurrence of a big hit, if the high probability mode in which the big hit probability of the special figure is set to a high probability before the big hit occurs, the big hit occurs. This high-probability mode ends, and the special game state returns to the normal state (low-probability state). In addition, in conjunction with this, if there is a state in which normal power support such as shortening the time of the normal map is performed (normal power support state), this normal power support will also end due to the occurrence of a big hit, and the game state of the normal map will be It returns to the normal state (the state where the normal electric support is not performed).

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step S813), and the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step S814). This is to be cleared once because the effect mode is managed by the game control device 100 (main board).
Next, the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step S815), the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the game status is displayed. The number in the right-handed state is saved in the number 2 area (step S817), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information of the effect mode is temporarily cleared (that is, it becomes the initial value of the default state) with the occurrence of the special game state.
In addition, step S817 is a process for turning on the display LED during right-handed striking.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process 1 (step S734) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG. 47.
When the routine starts, "7" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing during small hit fanfare) is set as the processing number in step S831, and the processing number (here, "7") is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S832. To save. Next, in step S833, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, in step S834, the signal regarding the start of small hit is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S835. The signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area.
Here, in step S834, specifically, one big hit signal (output by big hit + small hit) is turned on. Further, in step S835, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on.

Subsequently, in step S836, the large winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared, in step S837, the illegal monitoring period out-of-period flag is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area, and in step S838, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation). (Signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area in step S839, and the small hit fanfare processing transition setting process 1 is completed.
By the above processing, various settings are made when a small hit occurs. In addition, step S839 is a process for turning on the display LED during right-handed striking.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step S332) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 48. After that, "step A" is used for the step number.
In the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state (big hit state) is updated by +1 (step A31), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A32), and a production command is created. The setting process (step A33) is performed.

After that, the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A34), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A35), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state to be started is acquired. It is determined whether or not it is larger than the open switching determination value (step A36).
Here, the large winning opening operation determination table has, for example, the configuration shown in the middle of FIG. 48, and is an opening switching determination value (the number of rounds, which is “0” in the example of FIG. 48, which corresponds to the large winning opening opening information. 16 ”,“ 4 ”, etc.) is set in the data table. The open switching judgment value is a value indicating the number of rounds for switching from long opening (long opening) to short opening (shorter opening than long opening) for opening the large winning opening, and is based on the switching judgment value (number of rounds). The opening operation is long opening before and short opening after that.

When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A36; Y), the large winning opening opening time for short opening (0.2 seconds in the case of this embodiment) is set to the special figure game processing timer area. Save (step A37) and move to the process of step A39.
If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A36; N), the large winning opening opening time (29 seconds in the case of this embodiment) for long opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then (step A38), the process proceeds to step A39.
In step A39, the process transition setting process (step A39) during the opening of the large winning opening is performed, and the fanfare / interval process is completed.

Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 48, as a big hit pattern, (1) 4R, big winning opening opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, big winning opening opening information 2 (All long open), (3) 16R, Large winning opening opening information 3 (1 to 4R is long opening, 5 to 16R is short opening), (4) 4R, Large winning opening opening information 4 (All long opening), (5) 16R, large winning opening opening information 5 (all long opening), (6) 16R, large winning opening opening information 6 (1-8R is long opening, 9-16R is short opening), (7) 16R, large Winning opening opening information 7 (1 to 4R is long opening, 5 to 16R is short opening) is set.

Therefore, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 48, in the large winning opening operation determination table, the large winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0” are the large winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value. "16" is the large winning opening opening information 3 data and the opening switching judgment value "4", and the large winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching judgment value "4" are the large winning opening opening information 5 data. The open switching judgment value "16" is stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching judgment value "8", and the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching judgment value "4" are stored in association with each other. ing. Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, a long opening operation is performed, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, a short opening operation is performed.
Then, the big winning opening opening information is information indicating which of the various big hit patterns is, and is set in step S698 of the above-mentioned special figure display processing.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the processing transition setting processing (step A39) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval processing will be described with reference to FIG. 49.
In the process transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the processing number is set to "4" related to the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step A41), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A41). Step A42). After that, a signal relating to the start of opening the large winning opening (for example, turning on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A43), and the number of winnings in the large winning opening is stored. Clear the information in the mouth count area (that is, the number of winning lots) (step A44). Then, the on-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 27) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A45), and the processing transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S333) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 50.
In the process of opening the large winning opening, first, it is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the running special game state with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area of RWM. (Step A61). Then, when it is not the final round (step A61; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A62), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A63), and the present It is determined whether the number of rounds of is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A64).

When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A64; Y), the remaining ball processing time (for short closing) (1.4 seconds in the case of this embodiment) is set to the special figure game processing timer area. Save (step A65), prepare an interval command related to the interval between rounds (step A66), and proceed to the process of step A67.
When the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A64; N), the remaining ball processing time (for long closing) (1.9 seconds in the case of this embodiment) is set as the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A71), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A66), and the process proceeds to step A67.

On the other hand, in the case of the final round (step A61; Y), the remaining ball processing time (for final use) (1.9 seconds in the case of this embodiment) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A69). The ending command related to the end of the jackpot state is prepared (step A70), and the process proceeds to step A67.
Then, when the process proceeds to step A67, the effect command setting process (step A67) is performed to send the prepared command, the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A68) is performed, and the large winning opening opening process is performed. To finish.

[Large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A68) in the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing will be described with reference to FIG. 51.
In the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number is set to "5" related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A81), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A81). Step A82). After that, in order to close the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27, the off data for turning off the large winning opening solenoid 133 is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A83), and the large winning opening remaining ball is saved. Ends the process migration setting process.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step S334) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 52.
In the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening, first, the number of rounds this time in the running special game state is compared with the upper limit of the number of rounds in the RWM round number upper limit area, and this round reaches the upper limit (final). Check whether it is a round) (step A101).
Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A101; NO), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A102), and the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired. (Step A22), an interval time (normal) (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A104), and it is determined whether the current number of rounds is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A105).

Then, when the number of rounds is not larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A105; N), it is determined whether the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank-down effect system (step A106), and the number of rounds is increased. If it is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A105; Y), the process proceeds to step A109.
Here, the value of the rank-down production system means the big winning opening opening information (large winning opening opening information 3, 6, 7 in the lower part of FIG. 48) corresponding to the big hit pattern that switches from the middle round to the short opening. ..

When the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank-down effect system (step A106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) (step A107). If the large winning opening opening information is not the value of the rank-down effect system (step A106; N), the process proceeds to step A109.
Then, when the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A107; Y), the interval time (rank down effect) (for example, 3.6 seconds) is set (step A108), and the process proceeds to step A109. On the other hand, when the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A107; N), the process proceeds to step A109.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A109, the set interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A108), the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 2 (step A110) is performed, and the large winning opening remains. End the ball processing.
Here, when the step A108 is executed, the setting of the previous step A104 is canceled, so that it is before the opening switching (switching from the long opening to the short opening) when it is not the final round. If the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank-down effect system (step A106; Y) and the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A107; Y), the interval time saved in step A109 is the interval time. (Rank down production). As a result, the time during which the rank-down effect immediately before the opening switching (switching from the long opening to the short opening) can be realized is set.
Even when it is not the final round, whether it is after the opening switch (switching from long opening to short opening), whether the big winning opening opening information is not the value of the rank down production system (step A106; N), or the number of rounds is If it is not the value of the special effect round (step A107; Y), the interval time saved in step A109 is the interval time (normal) set in step A104. Also, in the case of the final round, there is no longer an interval period (period between rounds), so there is no need to save the interval time.

On the other hand, when the current round is the final round (step A101; Y), the game mode flag (saved in step S701) is saved from the special figure game mode flag save area for storing the probability state when the special result is derived. Data) is loaded (step A111). Then, the loaded flag, the large winning opening opening information, and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern are set (step A112), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A112). Step A113), the jackpot end processing transition setting process (step A114) is performed, and the jackpot remaining ball processing is completed.
In this way, the ending time is set based on the stop symbol information, the big winning opening opening information, and the game mode flag at the time of big hit.

The ending time is not limited to the above, and may be set based on, for example, not the symbol information but the big winning opening information and the game mode flag at the time of big hit.
In addition, the period from the end of the final round to the end of the special game state (big hit state) (this may be called the ending period) is the remaining ball processing time of the big winning opening (for example, 1.9 seconds) from the end of the final round. ) Has elapsed, and the period from the elapse of the remaining ball processing time of the large winning opening to the elapse of the ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) (for example, a total of 3.8 seconds) is set. Then, in a period (sometimes referred to as an ending period) in which the ending time and the processing time for the remaining balls of the large winning opening are combined, the ending effect can be produced by the display device 41 or the like.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A110) in the above-mentioned large winning opening remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. 53.
In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A211), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A212).
Next, the signal regarding the end of opening of the large winning opening (variable winning device 27) (the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A213), and the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting is performed. Process 2 ends.

[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A114) in the above-mentioned jackpot remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. 54.
In this jackpot end processing transition setting process, first, "6" is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A221), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A222). After that, the signal regarding the end of opening the large winning opening (the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A223).

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A224), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A225). ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state (step A226). Then, the information in the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step A227), and the flag for storing the opening information determination for the large winning opening is stored in the large winning opening opening information area. The information is cleared (step A228), and the jackpot end processing transition setting processing is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (step S335) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 55.
In this jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether the time reduction determination data is the time reduction operation data (that is, whether or not there is a time reduction in which the normal power support is performed) (step A241). In this embodiment, 100% probability change is entered after the end of the big hit (the special figure is always in the probability change mode after the end of the big hit), so it is not necessary to determine whether or not the special figure is in the high probability state.
Then, if it is not the time saving operation data (step A241; N), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A242), and if it is the time saving operation data (step A241; Y), the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step). A243). After passing through step A243 or step A242, the effect mode information address table is set (step A244), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A244). Step A245).

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A246). Further, the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A247), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is set. The migration information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A248).

After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A249), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A250), and the effect command setting process (step A251) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands including any information of "high probability / time saving" or "high probability / no time saving", and further information on the production mode. In the case of this embodiment, since the probability change state is always reached when the jackpot ends (so-called ST state), the probability information commands are "high probability / time saving / effect mode A" and "high probability / time reduction / effect mode B". , "High probability / No time reduction / Production mode C", "High probability / No time reduction / Production mode A", which are not used in this process, but also "Low probability / No time reduction / Production mode A", " There are "low probability, no time reduction, production mode B" and "low probability, no time reduction, production mode C".

Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A252), and the effect command setting process (step A253) is performed.
Next, a high-probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation count is prepared (step A254), and the effect command setting process (step A255) is performed to determine whether a time saving state occurs after the jackpot ends (step A256). ..
When the time saving state occurs after the big hit ends (step A256; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A259), and the big hit end process ends.
If the time saving state does not occur after the jackpot ends (step A256; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A257), the effect command setting process (step A258) is performed, and then the special figure normal processing shifts. The setting process 2 is performed (step A259), and the jackpot end process is completed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A242) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to the left side of FIG. 56.
In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to no time saving state (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A271), and a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and no time saving state is performed. (For example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned on, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, normal symbol 1 high probability The status signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A272).

Next, save the number without the time saving state in the game state display number area (step A273), save the normal figure low probability & no time saving flag in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A274), and save the special figure game mode. Save the special figure high probability & no time saving flag in the flag area (step A275). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation frequency area (step A276), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step). A277), in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A278), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A243) in the jackpot end process described above will be described on the right side of FIG. 56.
In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of the time saving state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A281). Since the signal related to the start of the time saving state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form. Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is ON, special symbol 2 variation Save the time shortened state signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal ON, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal ON) in the test signal output data area ( Step A282).

Next, save the number with the time saving state in the game state display number area (step A283), save the normal figure high probability & time saving flag in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A284), and save the special figure game mode. Save the flag with high probability and short time in the flag area (step A285). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number region (step A286), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. In the case of the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.
By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and also becomes a time saving state.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A259) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG. 57.
In the special figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A291), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A292). ).

After that, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, turning off the jackpot 1 signal, turning off the jackpot 3 signal, and turning off the jackpot 4 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A293), and the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, , Condition device operating signal OFF, accessory continuous operating device operating signal OFF, special symbol 1 hit signal OFF, special symbol 2 hit signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A294). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A295), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of jackpot rounds is cleared (step A296), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A297). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag evacuation area is cleared (step A298), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A299), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 2 To finish.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (step S336) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described in the upper part of FIG. 58.
In the small hit fanfare processing, the small hit medium processing transition setting process (step A311) is executed, and the small hit fanfare processing is terminated.

[Small hit medium processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing transition setting process (step A311) in the small hit medium processing described above will be described in the lower part of FIG. 58.
In the small hit medium processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number is set to "8" related to the small hit medium processing (step A321), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A322). After that, the small hit opening time (example: 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A323), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A324), the on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A325), and the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening. (That is, the number of large winning opening counts) is cleared (step A326). Then, the small hit operation initial value "0" is saved in the small hit medium control pointer area (step A327), and the small hit medium processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Small hit medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing (step S337) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 59.
In the small hit medium processing, first, the small hit medium control pointer (pointer whose initial value is set in step A327) is loaded (step A341), and the loaded value is equal to or higher than the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”). (Step A342).
If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A342; N), the small hit middle control pointer is updated by +1 (step A343) because the opening of the large winning opening by the small hit is not finished yet, and the small hit operation. The transition setting process (step A344) is performed to end the small hit middle process.
When the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A342; Y), the opening of the large winning opening by the small hit ends, so the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A345). It is determined whether or not this flag is in the special figure high probability (step A346). Here, it is determined whether it is a small hit with a high probability, and the time saving state does not matter.

Then, if the flag is not in the special figure high probability (step A346; N), the process proceeds to step A349. When the flag is in the special figure high probability (step A346; Y), the command of the small hit end screen is prepared (step A347), the effect command setting process (step A348) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A349.
When the process proceeds to step A349, the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A) is performed, and the small hit middle process is completed.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit operation transition setting process (step A344) in the small hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the small hit operation transition setting process, first, the value of the small hit medium control pointer is checked, and branching is performed according to the value of this pointer (step A361). That is, if the value of this pointer is any of "0", "2", and "4", the process proceeds to step A362, and if the value is "1", "3", and "5", the process proceeds to step A364.
When the process proceeds to step A362, the wait time corresponding to the control pointer (for example, 1500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A362), and the off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A363). The small hit operation transition setting process is terminated.
When the process proceeds to step A364, the large winning opening opening time (for example, 200 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A364), and the on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step). A365), the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.

By the control processing of the present embodiment including the small hit operation transition setting process and the like, for example, the small hit operation (large winning opening opening operation at the time of small hit) as shown in the small hit timing chart in the lower part of FIG. 60 is realized. .. Here, the small hit fanfare time is in step S833, the large winning opening opening time 200 ms is in step A364, the wait time 1500 ms is in step A362, and the small hit remaining ball time is in step A373 described later, and the small hit ending time. Are set in step A403, which will be described later.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A349) in the small hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG. 61.
In the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to "9" related to the small hit remaining ball processing (step A371), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A372). ), The small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A373). After that, in order to close the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27, the off data for turning off the large winning opening solenoid 133 is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A374), and the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. End the migration setting process.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step S338) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described in the upper part of FIG. 62.
In the small hit remaining ball processing, the small hit end processing transition setting process (step A391) is executed, and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Small hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end processing transition setting process (step A391) in the small hit remaining ball processing described above will be described in the lower part of FIG. 62.
In the small hit end processing transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to "10" related to the small hit end processing (step A401), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A402). After that, the small hit ending time (example: 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A403), and a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A404), the large winning opening count area is cleared (step A405), the small hit medium control pointer area is cleared (0 clear) (step A406), and the small hit ends. End the process migration setting process.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end processing (step S339) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 63.
In this small hit end process, first, the game mode flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A421), and it is determined whether the value of this flag is in the special figure high probability (step A422).
Then, when the special figure is in high probability (step A422; Y), the process proceeds to step A439.
On the other hand, when the special figure is not in high probability (step A422; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A423), and the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is supported. The address of the table to be used is acquired (step A424).

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the small hit operation is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A425). Further, the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the small hit operation is acquired, saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A426), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the small hit operation. The transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A427).

After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A428), and
It is determined whether the prepared command is the same as the value in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A429). If the prepared command is the same as the value in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A429; Y), the process proceeds to step A439.
On the other hand, if the prepared command is not the same as the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A429; N), the prepared command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A430), and the effect command setting process (step A430) is performed. Step A431) is performed.

Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A432), and the effect command setting process (step A433) is performed.
Next, a high-probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation count is prepared (step A434), and the effect command setting process (step A435) is performed to determine whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A434). Step A436). If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A436; N), the process proceeds to step A439.

Then, when the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A436; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A437), the effect command setting process (step A438) is performed, and step A439 is performed. move on.
When the process proceeds to step A439, the game mode flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag evacuation area (step A439), and whether the value of this flag is during the special figure time reduction (state in which the special figure fluctuation time is shortened). Is determined (step A440).
Then, when the special time reduction is in progress (step A440; Y), the process proceeds to step A443.
On the other hand, when the special time is not shortened (step A440; N), the signal related to the left strike instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A441), and the right strike is in progress. In order to turn off the display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A442), and the process proceeds to step A443.
When the process proceeds to step A443, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (step A443), and the small hit end process is completed.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A443) in the above-mentioned small hit end process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure normal process transition setting process 3, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A461), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A462). ).

After that, the signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, one big hit signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A463), and the signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A464). Subsequently, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A465), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A466). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag evacuation area is cleared (step A467), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A468), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3 To finish.

[Direction command setting process]
Next, the effect command setting process executed in a number of steps such as step S262 in the above-mentioned fraud & winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 65. Note that this effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.
In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A481), and it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (step A482). When the transmission buffer is full (step A482; Y), the process returns to step A481 and the process is repeated.
On the other hand, when the transmission buffer is not full (step A482; N), the prepared command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the production serial transmission buffer (step A483), and the process proceeds to step A484.
When the process proceeds to step A484, the status of the production serial transmission buffer is read (step A484), and it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (step A485). When the transmission buffer is full (step A485; Y), the process returns to step A484 and the process is repeated.
On the other hand, when the transmission buffer is not full (step A485; N), the prepared command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A486), and the effect command setting process is terminated.

As described above, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the command can be made difficult. In addition, the command transmission timing can be accelerated and the number of data lines can be reduced. Further, the effect control device 300 does not need to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. In the present embodiment, since the command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 by serial communication, the same effect can be obtained.

[Design fluctuation control process]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control processing (steps S341 and S343) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol of the first special figure (special figure 1) and the second special figure (special figure 2) and setting the display data of the special symbol. In the symbol fluctuation control process, first, among the first special figure and the second special figure, it is checked whether the special figure fluctuation control flag related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is changing ( Step A501).
Then, when the special figure changing flag is changing (step A502; YES), the symbol display table (for change) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step). A503).

Here, the fluctuation control table prepared in step S340 of the special figure game processing has a configuration as shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, for example, and the information defined on this table is as follows.
-Lower address of the fluctuation control area-Address of display table 2 (for stop) -Address of display table 1 (for fluctuation) And in the case shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, in step A503, the prepared "Special figure 1 fluctuation control table" Based on the address "D_TZ1_LED1" of the display table 1 above, the "special figure 1 display table 1 (for variation) (D_TZ1_LED1)" shown under the "special figure 1 fluctuation control table" in FIG. 66 is acquired.
Next, among the first special figure and the second special figure, the blinking control timer related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by -1 (step A504), and the value of the timer is 0. That is, it is determined whether the time is up (step A505).

When the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step A505; NO), the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A508). When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step A505; YES), the initial value of the blinking control timer (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step A506). Of the second special figure, the variable symbol number related to the controlled target special figure (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (step A507), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired. (Step A508). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A509), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.
Here, in step A508, for example, in the case shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, when the value of the variable symbol number region (that is, the special figure 1 symbol number) is "0", the acquired "special figure 1" The display data "C_SEG1_OFF" corresponding to the special figure 1 symbol number "0" on the display table 1 (for fluctuation) (D_TZ1_LED1) "is acquired.

On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (step A502; NO), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step A510). .. Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A511), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A509), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. Here, the processes of steps A510 and A511 are also performed based on the fluctuation control table having the configuration shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, for example. In this case, the "special figure 1 display table 2 (for stopping) (D_TZ1_LED2)" is acquired in step A510 and used in step A511.
By the above processing, among the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display which are the LED segments in the batch display device 35, the special figure display (for example, the special figure 1 display) to be controlled has a symbol number. The special figure corresponding to is displayed.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (step S595) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process will be described on the right side of FIG. 67.
The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the first data of the latter half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step A521). ). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the case of a variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ing.

Then, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (step A522; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A527), and the 2-byte distribution process is completed. To do. On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step A522; NO), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variable group table is acquired (step A523).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A523 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in step S593 (step A524), and the calculation is performed. It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A525). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A525; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A526), the process shifts to step A523, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do. That is, in step A523, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the variable group selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step A525 as a new random number value, and further new disturbance. Calculate the numerical value (step A524). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A525).

The above process is executed in step A525 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A525; YES). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the latter half fluctuation group table. Then, in step A525, if it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A525; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A527), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To finish.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution processing (steps S596, S599, S605) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described with reference to the left side of FIG. 67.
In the distribution process, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation selection table) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation pattern group).

In this sorting process, first, it is checked whether or not the first data of the prepared second half variable selection table (selection table) and first half variable selection table (selection table) is a code without sorting (that is, "0"). (Step A541). Here, the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern or the first half fluctuation pattern, as in the second half fluctuation group table, but distribution is necessary. In the case of a selection table without a distribution value, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the data at the head of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step A542; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A547), and distribution is performed. End the process. On the other hand, when the data at the beginning of the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without distribution (step A542; NO), one distribution value first specified in the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table (Step A543).

Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A543 from the random number values (values of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in steps S598 and S604, a new random number value is calculated ( Step A544), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A545). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A545; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A546), the process shifts to step A543, and thereafter. Perform processing.

That is, in step A543, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step A545 as a new random number value. , Further, a new random number value is calculated (step A544). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A545). The above process is executed in step A545 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A545; YES). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation number and the first half fluctuation number is selected from at least one second half fluctuation pattern and the first half fluctuation pattern defined in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table. Then, in step A545, if it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A545; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A547), and the distribution process is completed. To do.
The above-mentioned sorting process and the above-mentioned 2-byte sorting process basically have the same configuration. Since the size of the random number used for sorting is different in that it is 1 byte or 2 bytes, the program instructions for calculation are different.

Next, the flow chart for the normal map game processing will be described, but here, "step B" will be used as the step number.
[Public map game processing]
First, the details of the normal figure game process (step S79) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 68.
In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 122 is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.
First, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 122 is performed. The details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) will be described later.
Next, a general electric winning switch monitoring process (step B2) for monitoring the input from the second start port switch 121 is performed. The details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process (step B2) will be described later.

Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer becomes 0 (step B4).
When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is 0 (step B4; YES), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been timed up, the normal figure referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. A process (step B5) of setting a game sequence branch table (a specific example is shown in the upper right of FIG. 68) in a register is performed, and a process of acquiring a branch destination address of a process corresponding to a game processing number of a normal figure is obtained using the table. (Step B6) is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the game processing number (step B8).

In step B8, when the game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the processing during the normal map fluctuation are performed. Performs normal processing (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing.
The details of the normal processing (step B9) will be described later.
Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.
The details of the processing during fluctuation of the normal map (step B10) will be described later.
Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, whether or not the normal fluctuation winning device 27 is in the normal electric support (in the time saving state). The normal map display processing (step B11) is performed, in which the normal power opening time is set according to the situation, and the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per-game processing is set.
The details of the processing during display of the normal map (step B11) will be described later.

Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "3", the processing during the normal drawing is continued, or the information necessary for performing the processing for the remaining spheres of the normal power is set. Step B12) is performed.
The details of the processing during normal drawing (step B12) will be described later.
Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing is performed.
The details of the treatment of the remaining spheres of the normal electric power (step B13) will be described later.
Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "5", the normal drawing end processing (step B14) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (step B9) is performed.
The details of the per-figure end processing (step B14) will be described later.
After that, after preparing various tables for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (collective display device 35) (step B15), the fluctuation of the normal symbol is controlled by the general symbol display (collective display device 35). Performs the symbol variation control process (step B16) according to the above, and ends the normal figure game process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; NO), that is, the time is not up, the process shifts to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-mentioned normal figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 69.
In the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B21). Then, when it is determined that there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B21; YES), it is determined whether the game is in a right-handed gaming state (step B22). In the case of a right-handed gaming state (step B22; Y), the process proceeds to step B25. When the game is not in the right-handed game state (step B22; N), the right-handed command is prepared (step B23), the effect command setting process is performed (step B24), and the process proceeds to step B25.
Here, there are the following game states for right-handed hitting.
・ Medium big hit, medium small hit, medium special time reduction (during general electric support)

In step B25, the number of reserved normal figures is acquired and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) (step B25). If it is determined that the number of reserved figures is less than the upper limit (step B25; YES), a process (step B26) of updating (+1) the number of reserved ordinary figures is performed.

After that, after performing a process (step B27) of calculating the address of the hit random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved normal figures, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of RWM (step B28). , The hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step B29), and the gate switch monitoring process is completed.
Further, in step B21, it is determined that there is no input to the gate switch 122 (step B21; NO), or in step B25, it is determined that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (step B21; NO). Step B25; NO), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned Fuzu game process will be described with reference to FIG. 70.
In the normal fluctuation winning switch monitoring process, first, whether the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is in the hit state and the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) (whether it is hitting the normal figure). ) Check whether or not (step B31). Then, if it is determined that the normal drawing is in progress (step B31; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the second start port switch 121 (step B32), and there is an input in the second start port switch 121 (step B31). If it is determined in step B32; YES), a process (step B33) for updating (+1) the count number of the general electric counter is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated normal electric counter has reached the upper limit value (for example, 6) (step B34), and it is determined that the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B34; YES). Then, it hits the control pointer area during hitting the normal figure, saves the operation end value (for example, "4") (step B35), clears the normal figure game processing timer to 0 (step B36), and monitors the normal power winning switch. To finish.
That is, if there is a winning prize of the upper limit or more during the hitting state of the normal figure, the value of the hitting end is saved in the processing control pointer area during the hitting of the normal figure, and the hitting state of the normal figure is in the middle. Try to finish.

Further, in step B31, it is determined that the normal drawing is not hit (step B31; NO), or in step B32, it is determined that there is no input to the second start port switch 121 (step B32; NO). ), Or even when it is determined in step B34 that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B34; NO), the general electric winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 71. The term "hit random number" means a random number per normal figure, and the term "hit symbol random number" means a random number per normal figure.
In the normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B41), and if it is determined that the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B41; YES), the step After shifting to B62 and performing the normal drawing normal processing transition setting process 1, the normal drawing normal processing is terminated. The normal process transition setting process 1 is to perform a process for repeating the normal process next time, and the details will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B41 that the number of reserved figures is not 0 (step B41; NO), the RWM random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) and the symbol random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) are determined. ) (Step B42), then clear the random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) and the symbol random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) to 0 (step B43), and step. Proceed to B44.
In step B44, it is determined whether the probability of winning the result in the normal map fluctuation display game is higher than usual, that is, the time saving state (normal power support state) is determined (step B44). ). In this embodiment, the normal figure is in the normal electric support state during the high probability, and the special figure is also in the high probability state (high probability mode). Then, in the present embodiment, the game state of the normal figure is a normal state (a state in which special control such as making the hit probability of the normal figure high is not performed, that is, a normal time when the normal power is not supported). The hit probability of is zero (for example, 0/251), and the hit probability of the normal figure in the normal state is 250/251, for example, which is a probability setting with a large difference between the normal state and the high probability state. .. As a result, it is possible to increase the attractiveness of being in a high probability state (that is, probabilistic change) for the player while suppressing the ball ejection in the normal state, and to enhance the interest.

When the probability is not high (step B44; NO), a low probability lower limit judgment value (for example, "251") is set (step B45), and it is determined whether the loaded hit random number is equal to or higher than the specified upper limit judgment value. (Step B47). On the other hand, in the case of high probability (step B44; Y), a high probability lower limit determination value (for example, "1") is set (step B46), and the loaded hit random number is equal to or higher than the specified upper limit determination value. (Step B47). The upper limit determination value is a value common to both the high probability of the normal map (normal state of the normal map) and the normal time (normal state of the normal map), and is, for example, "251".
When the loaded hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B47; N), it is determined whether the loaded hit random number is less than the set lower limit determination value (step B48).
Then, when the loaded hit random number is equal to or more than the upper limit determination value (step B47; Y) and when the loaded hit random number is less than the set lower limit determination value (step B48; Y), it is out of the ordinary. , The loss information is saved in the hit flag area (step B49), the loss stop symbol number is set (step B50), and the loss symbol information corresponding to this stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step). B51), the process proceeds to step B55.

If the loaded hit random number is not less than the set lower limit judgment value (step B48; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B52) because it is a normal figure hit, and the loaded hit symbol random number is used. The corresponding stop symbol number is set (step B53), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information storage area (step B54), and the process proceeds to step B55. In this embodiment, there are three types of hit symbols in the normal drawing.

Next, when the process proceeds to step B55, the set stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B55), the set stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B56), and the normal symbol is saved. Figure The normal map fluctuation time corresponding to the game mode state (for example, normal time; 700 ms, normal power support; 500 ms (short due to short time)) is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B57).
Next, the random number storage area per normal figure is shifted (step B58), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B59), and the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (step B60). That is, as the oldest normal figure hold number 1 game is executed, the order of the normal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 held after the normal figure hold number 1 is moved up one by one. I do. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 of the random number storage area per the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, after step B60, the process transition setting process (step B61) during the fluctuation of the normal map is performed, and the normal process of the normal map is completed.
When the game state of the normal figure is the normal state (in the present embodiment, the game state of the special figure is also the normal state (low probability state)), the above-mentioned upper limit judgment value and lower limit judgment value are set to, for example, "251". Since the values are the same, the determination process of steps B47 and B48 always proceeds to step B49, and the probability of hitting a normal figure in the normal state in this embodiment is zero.

[Usually process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing transition setting process 1 (step B62) in the above-mentioned normal drawing normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 72.
When the routine starts, "0" (corresponding to the processing number related to the normal drawing normal processing) is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal drawing normal processing in step B71, and the normal drawing game processing number area is processed in step B72. Save the number (here "0"). Next, in step B73, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved and returned to the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area. As a result, the next time, the normal processing will be started.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B61) during the change of the normal figure in the above-mentioned normal process of the normal figure will be described with reference to FIG. 73.
When the routine starts, "1" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing during fluctuation of the normal map) is set as the processing number in step B81, and the processing number (here, "1") is set in the normal map game processing number area in step B82. To save. Next, in step B83, the signal related to the start of the normal map fluctuation (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step B84, the changing flag is saved in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area. Next, in step B85, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the blinking cycle timer of the normal figure display (the normal figure display LED of the batch display device 35), is saved in the normal figure blinking control timer area. , Ends the process transition setting process during timer fluctuation. As a result, the next time, the process will shift to the normal map fluctuation processing.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described in the upper part of FIG. 74.
When the routine starts, the process transition setting process during display of the normal map is performed in step B91. This is for setting to shift to the process during display of the normal map, and the details will be described later. After passing through this process, it returns.

[Processing during display of general map Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the normal map display process transition setting process (step B91) in the above-mentioned normal map changing process will be described in the lower part of FIG. 74.
When the routine starts, "2" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing during display of the normal map) is set as the processing number in step B101, and the processing number (here, "2") is set in the normal map game processing number area in step B102. To save. Next, in step B103, the normal figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area, and in step B105, a signal related to the end of the normal figure fluctuation (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned off) is output as a test signal. Save to the data area. Next, in step B106, the stop flag is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area and returned. As a result, the process shifts to the process of displaying the normal map next time.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described with reference to FIG. 75.
In the normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B111), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared (step B112). Do.
Next, it is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is a hit (step B113), and if it is determined that the hit flag is not a hit (step B113; NO), the process branches to step B122 and the normal process transition setting process 1 (Explanation in FIG. 72) is performed, and the processing during display of the normal map is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B113 that the hit flag is a hit (step B113; YES), a process (step B114) for determining whether the normal power support is in progress (time saving state) is performed.
Then, when the timer is being supported (step B114; YES), the hit processing setting table is set (step B115), and the hit start pointer value (initial value of the control pointer, details) corresponding to the timer stop symbol information is set. (Described later) is acquired, this is saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B116), and the normal power opening time (for example, 500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired, and this is obtained. Is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B117), the normal map hitting process transition setting process (step B121) is performed, and the normal map display process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the normal power is not supported (step B114; NO), the hit start pointer value (initial value of the control pointer) for normal time is set, and this is saved in the normal control pointer area (step). B119), set the normal power release time (for example, 100 ms) for normal operation, save this in the normal map game processing timer area (step B120), and perform the normal process transition setting process 1 of FIG. 72. (Step B122), the process of displaying the normal map is terminated.

A specific example of the normal power operation timing chart (specific example of the normal power opening pattern) in the present embodiment is shown in the lower part of FIG. 78. In the case of this specific example, there are three types of hit symbols in the normal figure: "hit symbol 1", "hit symbol 2", and "hit symbol 3".
Then, when the hit symbol 1 is hit, as shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, after the display time of the normal figure of 600 ms (the time set in the step B 104), 500 ms (set in the step B 117). The Bundesstraße is released, and then the Bundesstraße is opened once, with a remaining Bundesstraße sphere processing time of 600 ms (the time set in step B158 described later). ..

Next, when the hit symbol 2 is hit, as shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, after the display time of the normal figure of 600 ms is passed, the normal of 1700 ms (the normal electric opening time set in the step B117) is normal. The electricity is released, and after a wait time of 200 ms (the time set in step B152 described later), the second 1700 ms of the normal power is released, and then 600 ms of the remaining normal ball processing time is provided. It becomes a double-opening normal electric opening pattern.
Next, when the hit symbol 3 is hit, as shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, after the display time of the normal figure of 600 ms is passed, the normal power of 1700 ms is released, and then the wait time of 200 ms is set. After that, the second 1700 ms of the normal power was released, then after a wait time of 200 ms, the third 1700 ms of the normal power was released, and then the remaining 600 ms of the normal power was provided three times. It becomes an open general electric opening pattern.

Further, in the present embodiment, although not shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, although a normal figure hit occurs during the normal electric support (during high probability), the normal figure hit (holding the normal figure) is normal. When the time when the power is released is other than during the normal power support (normal state) (that is, when the process proceeds to step B119 through the above step B114), the normal power release pattern is displayed regardless of the hit symbol. It is configured to be opened once (that is, the opening time of the opening operation of the hit symbol 1 is shortened) for 100 ms (the opening time of the normal power set in step B120). This is related to the configuration of this embodiment in which the probability of hitting a normal figure is set to zero when the game state of the normal figure is the normal state. That is, in this embodiment, when the game state of the normal figure is the normal state, the probability of hitting the normal figure is set to zero, so that the superiority of the normal power support state is relatively enhanced and the normal power is relatively increased. It raises expectations for the support state (which is also a special high-probability state in this example) and improves the interest. Then, as the opening pattern of the starting area opening / closing means (that is, the opening pattern of the normal electric power), the opening pattern when the game state of the normal figure is the support state (for example, the one shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78). ), A dedicated opening pattern (100 ms × 1) is provided when the game state of the normal drawing is the normal state. This has the effect of preventing an unexpected number of prizes from being generated (the game design is out of order) in a normal state in which the player does not want to win a prize. This is because the open pattern in the normal state is not prepared because the normal state does not hit (the probability of hitting the normal figure is zero). For example, if the open pattern in the high probability is used, the open pattern is opened. Since the time is extended and the number of times of opening is increased, a considerable number of unexpected starting prizes will occur in the normal state where you do not want to win, and the game design will be out of order. However, if a dedicated normal power opening pattern is provided in the normal state, the unexpected start winning prize can be suppressed or avoided by setting a specification that makes it difficult to win a prize as this dedicated general power opening pattern. Can be done.

Then, in the present embodiment, in order to realize a total of four types of normal power release operations as described above, the control pointer for normal power release control also shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78 (the normal processing control pointer per normal figure). Is used, and the value of this control pointer corresponds to the time when the open / closed state changes after the end of the first open operation, as shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78 in each open pattern. It's changing.
The hit start pointer value in steps B116 and B119 means the first value (initial value) of the value of such a control pointer. Therefore, in the case of the specific example shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, in step B116, "4" is used for the hit symbol 1, "2" is used for the hit symbol 2, and "0" is used for the hit symbol 3. However, this is saved as the start pointer value. Further, in step B119, "4" is saved as the hit start pointer value as in the case of the hit symbol 1.

[Middle processing transition setting processing per normal figure]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process transition setting process (step B121) in the above-mentioned normal map display process will be described with reference to FIG. 76.
When the routine starts, "3" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing during the normal drawing) is set as the processing number in step B131, and the processing number (here, "3") is set in the normal drawing game processing number area in step B132. To save. Next, in step B133, the signal related to the start of the normal symbol (for example, the signal for starting the normal symbol 1 is turned ON) and the signal related to the start of the normal electric operation (for example, the signal for starting the normal electric accessory 1 is turned ON) are set as test signal output data. Save to area. Next, in step B134, ON data is saved in the normal electric solenoid output data area, in step B135, the normal electric count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 26 is cleared, and then in step B136, the general electric fraud is illegal. Clear the solenoid fraudulent winning number area that stores the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 26 during the monitoring period, and in step B137, set the solenoid fraud monitoring period flag area to the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag (illegal monitoring of the normal variable winning device 26). (Flag that specifies outside the period) is saved and returned. As a result, next time, the process will shift to the normal processing.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B12) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described with reference to FIG. 77.
In the normal-figure hitting process, first, after loading and preparing the normal-figure-performing control pointer (step B141), the value of the loaded normal-figure hitting control pointer is in the normal-figure hitting control pointer upper limit area. It is determined whether or not the value (value at the end of winning: for example, “4” or the like) has been reached (step B142).
Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure does not reach the value in the upper limit value region of the control pointer per normal figure (step B142; NO), the control pointer per normal figure is updated by +1 (step B143). The normal electric operation transition setting process (step B144) is performed to end the normal process per drawing.
When the value of the control pointer per normal figure reaches the value in the upper limit value area of the control pointer per normal figure (value at the end of hit) (step B142; YES), the processing control pointer per normal figure in step B143 Without performing the process of updating the area (+1), the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B144) is performed to end the normal process per figure.

[Public operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B144) in the above-mentioned normal process per figure will be described with reference to FIG. 78.
For the time control of the normal power opening operation, a hit-medium processing time value table showing a specific example in the middle of FIG. 78 is used. This hit processing time value table is in the hit processing setting table set in step B115 in the normal map display processing. As shown in the middle part of FIG. 78, the hit processing time value table shows the value of the control pointer and the normal power operation (open or closed) after each time point during the normal power operation corresponding to the value. The duration value is recorded in association with each other. The hitting process time value table in the middle of FIG. 78 controls the hitting pattern 3 corresponding to the hit symbol 3 shown in the lower chart (normal power operation timing chart) of FIG. 78. In step B152 and step B154, which will be described later, the time corresponding to the value of the control pointer is saved by referring to such a hit processing time value table.

The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process of driving and controlling the normal electric solenoid 132 for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 26, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.
When the routine starts, branching is performed by the control pointer in step B151. Here, branching is performed according to the value of the control pointer loaded and prepared in step B141. Specifically, when the value of the control pointer is 0 or 2 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B152 to control the blockage of the winning device 26, so that the normal fluctuation corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The wait time (for example, 200 ms) after the winning device 26 is closed is saved in the normal-figure game processing timer area (step B152), and off-data is set in the normal-power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal-power solenoid 132 in step B153. Is set to end the solenoid operation transition setting process. As a result, the closing time after opening the normal variable winning device 26 becomes the above-mentioned weight time, and the normal variable winning device 26 is closed during that period.

On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is any of 1 and 3 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B154 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 26, so that the normal variable winning device 26 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The opening time of the normal power (for example, 1700 ms) is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B154), and on data in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 132 in step B155. Is set to end the solenoid operation transition setting process. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 26 becomes the above-mentioned general electric opening time, and the ordinary variable winning device 26 is opened during that period.

If the value of the control pointer is 4 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B156 to end the open control of the normal variation winning device 26 and perform the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B13). “4” is set as the number (step B156). Next, in step B157, the processing number (here, "4") is saved in the normal figure game processing number area. Next, in step B158, the normal power remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the normal power game processing timer area, and then in step B159, off data is stored in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 132. Save and end the solenoid operation transition setting process.

[Public electric residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B13) in the above-mentioned normal figure game processing will be described from the upper side of FIG. 79.
When the routine starts, step B161 performs the end processing transition setting processing per normal figure. This is for setting to shift to the end processing per drawing, and the details will be described later. After passing through this process, it returns.

[End processing per normal figure Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing transition setting process (step B161) in the above-mentioned normal electric remaining ball processing will be described from the lower side of FIG. 79.
When the routine starts, "5" (corresponding to the processing number related to the end processing per normal figure) is set as the processing number in step B171, and the processing number (here, "5") is set in the normal figure game processing number area in step B172. To save. Next, in step B173, the normal figure ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area, and in step B174, a signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 26 (for example, a signal during operation of the normal electric accessory 1 is transmitted. OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B175, the normal electric counting number area for counting the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 26 is cleared. Then, in step B176, the control pointer area for hitting the normal figure is cleared, and the end process for hitting the normal figure transition setting process ends. As a result, the next time, the process will shift to the end processing per drawing.

[End processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing (step B14) in the above-mentioned general-figure game processing will be described from the upper side of FIG. 80.
When the routine starts, in step B181, the normal process transition setting process 2 is performed. This is for making settings for shifting to normal processing, and details will be described later. After passing through this process, it returns.

[Usually processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B181) in the above-mentioned normal figure per end process will be described from the lower side of FIG. 80.
When the routine starts, "0" (corresponding to the processing number related to the normal processing of the normal figure) is set as the processing number in step B191, and the processing number ("0" in this case) is set in the normal drawing game processing number area in step B192. Save. Next, in step B193, a signal relating to the end per normal symbol (for example, the middle signal per normal symbol is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B194, the fraud monitoring period flag (the flag that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 26) is saved and returned in the fraud monitoring period flag area. As a result, next time, we will shift to normal processing.

Since the flowchart regarding the normal figure game processing has been described above, the next step will be the description of the subroutines after step S80 in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing.
Here, "step C" will be used as the step number for explanation.
[Segment LED editing process]
First, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S80) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 81.
The segment LED editing process performs processing related to the segment LED provided in the batch display device 35, and as described above, the batch display device 35 displays a normal figure, a special figure, and further, a special figure and a special figure. It is designed to display the start memory hold display (special figure hold display, normal figure hold display) and the game status.
These displays are configured to be performed by, for example, a plurality of indicators (for example, one lamp or a 7-segment display) using an LED as a light emitting source. More specifically, for example, the special figure 1 hold display, the special figure 2 hold display, the normal figure hold display, the first game state display unit, the second game state display unit, the error display unit, the round display unit, and the like. The segment LED editing process is composed of segment LEDs having functions, and makes settings related to driving them.

In the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is updated by +1 (step C1), and it is determined whether the output is on timing (step C2). This determination is made based on whether or not the specific bit of the timer is 1. In this example, a blinking cycle of 128 ms is created by looking at bit 5.
When the output is on timing (step C2; Y), the normal figure hold number display table 1 is set (step C3), and the process proceeds to step C5. If it is not the output on timing (step C2; N), the normal figure hold number display table 2 is set (step C4), and the process proceeds to step C5.
If the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the display data will be the same regardless of which table is used to display the number of holdings.

In step C5, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved normal figures is acquired based on the set number of reserved normal figures display table 1 or 2, saved in the segment area (step C5), and it is determined whether the output is on-timing. (Step C6). When the output is on timing (step C6; Y), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step C7), and the process proceeds to step C9. If the output is not on timing (step C6; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set (step C8), and the process proceeds to step C9.
By saving the display data in a predetermined segment area, the corresponding LEDs of the batch display device 35 are turned on or off.

In step C9, based on the set special figure 1 hold number display table 1 or 2, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired, saved in the segment area (step C9), and the output is turned on timing. (Step C10). When the output is on timing (step C10; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step C11), and the process proceeds to step C13. If it is not the output on timing (step C10; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step C12), and the process proceeds to step C13.

In step C13, based on the set special figure 2 hold number display table 1 or 2, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired, saved in the segment area (step C13), and the round display table is set. Then, the display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired from this table and saved in the segment area (step C15).
Next, the game status display table 1 is set (step C16), display data corresponding to the game status display number is acquired from this table, and the display data is saved in the segment area (step C17). In addition, in the game status display, it is notified whether or not the special figure time is shortened (Public train support is in progress). For example, it is performed with one LED, and when it is turned off, it indicates that it is in normal condition, and when it is turned on, it indicates that it is during special time reduction (during normal power support).
Next, the game status display table 2 is set (step C18), the display data corresponding to the game status display number 2 is acquired, saved in the segment area (step C19), and the segment LED editing process is completed. In the game state display 2, it is notified whether or not the game state is a right-handed game. For example, it is performed with one LED, and when it is turned off, it means normal hitting (left hitting), and when it is turned on, it means right hitting. In the case of this example, as described above, the right-handed period is during the big hit, during the small hit, and during the normal electric support.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S81) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 82.
The magnet fraud monitoring process checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 126, determines whether or not there is an abnormality, and sets the start and end of the fraud notification.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 126 is on, that is, an abnormal magnetism is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 126 and taken into the second input port 161 (input port 2). (Step C21).
When the magnetic sensor 126 is on (step C21; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 (step C22), and the timer is concerned. Determines if the time is up (step C23).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step C23; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C24), and the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer (step C24). For example, 60,000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step C25). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step C26), a magnet fraud generation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C27), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region. (Step C33). That is, when the magnetic sensor 126 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, a period for eight interrupts, that is, an interrupt period of 4 ms × 8 = 32 ms), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. There is.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 126 is not on (step C21; NO), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C28), and the magnet fraud monitoring time is specified. If the notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C29). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step C30). Even if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step C23; NO), the process proceeds to step C29.

Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step C30; NO), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.
Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step C30; YES), that is, when the time has been up or has already been up, the fraudulent notification period has expired, or the fraudulent notification has been issued from the beginning. If not, prepare a command to end the magnet fraud notification (step C31). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C32), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (step C33).

When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C33; YES), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated because the command for the state has already been transmitted to the effect control device 300. If the values do not match (step C33; NO), the prepared magnet invalid flag is saved in the magnet invalid flag area (step C34), and an effect command is set to send a command for the state to the effect control device 300. The process is performed (step C35), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is completed.
Here, in FIG. 82, the arrow indicates a processing route (normal route) in the case where there is no magnet fraud and it is normal. That is, in the normal case, the processing routes of step C21, step C28, step C29, step C30, step C31, step C32, step C33, and RET are taken. Normally, this normal route is repeated.

[Screen radio wave fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S82) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 83.
The panel radio wave fraud monitoring process determines the presence or absence of an abnormality based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 127, and sets the start and end of the fraudulent notification.
In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the panel radio wave sensor 127 is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 127 and taken into the second input port 161 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 163. That is, it is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave has been detected (step C41). When the radio wave sensor is on (step C41; YES), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step C42).

Then, a command for radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step C43), a radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio wave fraud flag (step C44), and it is determined whether the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value in the radio wave fraud flag area. (Step C49). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnet fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (step C41; NO), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is not 0, and the radio wave fraud notification timer is updated by -1 (step). C45). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step C46).
If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step C46; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step C46; YES), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the fraudulent notification period is over, or the fraudulent notification is sent from the beginning. If this is not done, prepare a command to end the radio wave fraud notification (step C47), prepare a radio wave fraud release flag as a radio wave fraud flag (step C48), and set the prepared radio wave fraud flag to the value of the radio wave fraud flag area. Is determined (step C49).

When the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (step C49; YES), the command for the state has already been transmitted to the effect control device 300, so that the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. .. If the values do not match (step C49; NO), the prepared radio wave illegal flag is saved in the board radio wave illegal flag area (step C50), and an effect command is sent to the effect control device 300 to send a command about the state. The setting process is performed (step C51), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process is completed.
Here, in FIG. 83, the arrow indicates a processing route (normal route) in the case where there is no radio wave fraud and is normal. That is, in the normal case, the processing routes of step C41, step C45, step C46, step C47, step C48, step C49, and RET are taken. Normally, this normal route is repeated.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S83) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85.
In the external information editing process, the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S74), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S77), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S81), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S82) are used. Based on this, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the external information editing process, first, in step C61, it is determined whether or not a glass frame opening error has occurred. In this process, the opening of the glass frame 5 (door) is not directly monitored based on the signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 211, but the determination based on the monitoring result in the “game machine state check process” of FIG. I do. That is, it is determined whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring based on whether or not an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set in the "game machine state check process" of FIG.
If the glass frame opening error is not occurring, the process proceeds to step C62 to determine whether or not the front frame (main body frame) opening error is occurring. Also in this process, a determination is made based on the monitoring result in the “game machine state check process” of FIG.

Then, if a front frame (main body frame) opening error is occurring, the process proceeds to step C65. Further, if a glass frame opening error is occurring in step C61, the process proceeds to step C65.
That is, if a glass frame opening error is occurring or a front frame opening error is occurring, the process proceeds to step C65, the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area in step C65, and then the game is played in step C66. The on-data of the machine error status signal is saved in the external information output data area, and the process proceeds to step C67.
On the other hand, when the front frame (main body frame) opening error is not occurring (step C62; N), the process proceeds to step C63, and in step C63, the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area, and step C64 The off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area, and the process proceeds to step C67.

In step C67, if the security signal control timer is not 0, the security signal control timer is updated to "-1" (step C67), and then it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step C68). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0. The security signal control timer is a timer in which the initial timer value (for example, 256 ms) is set in step S29 of the main process, and the security signal is turned on for at least a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) when the power is turned on by clearing the RAM. It is for output.

If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 in step C68, that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area in step C69, and then the process proceeds to step C70 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the security signal control timer has already timed up in step C68 or after updating "-1", the process proceeds to step C70 or later.

Proceeding to step C70, in steps C70, 71, 72, 73, 74, magnet fraud is occurring, board radio wave fraud is occurring, frame radio wave fraud is occurring, general electric wave fraud is occurring, big prize opening fraud is occurring Determine if it is inside. In these processes, a determination is made based on the monitoring result or the like in the “game machine state check process” of FIG. That is, it is determined whether or not each of the above-mentioned frauds is occurring based on whether or not the error flag (error occurrence flag) is set in the "game machine state check process" of FIG. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the above-mentioned fraud is occurring based on the flags of the fraud flag areas (magnet fraud flag area, panel radio wave fraud flag area) saved by the fraud monitoring process of FIGS. 82 and 83.

If any one or more of the frauds have occurred, the process proceeds to step C78 to save the on-data of the security signal in the external information output data area, and further, in step C79, the on-data of the game machine error status signal is used as a test signal. Save to the output data area and proceed to step C80. As a result, fraud and game machine error status will be output to the outside.
In the case of this example, since the security signal is turned on in step C78 in addition to step C69, it is not turned off unless the security signal control timer is timed up and no error has occurred. That is, when the security signal control timer is timed up and no error has occurred, the security signal is turned off by the processing of step C64.

On the other hand, when NO in step C70, NO in step C71, NO in step C72, NO in step C73, and NO in step C74, that is, when all are NO in steps C70 to C74, the process branches from step C74 to step C75. After saving the off-data of the game machine error status signal in the test signal output data area, the process proceeds to step C80.

Proceeding to step C80, the main prize ball signal editing process (step C80) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and then the starting port signal editing process (step C81) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed. .. Subsequently, if the symbol confirmation count control timer is not 0, it is updated by "-1" (step C82), and then it is determined whether the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is 0 (time is up) (step C83). ). The symbol confirmation number control timer is a timer for controlling the on time of the symbol confirmation number signal.
If the symbol confirmation count control timer is not timer-up (step C83; NO), the process proceeds to step C85, and the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area and returned. Then, when the routine is repeated and it is determined in step C83 that the symbol confirmation count control timer has timed up (step C83; YES), the process proceeds to step C84, and the off-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area. End the external information editing process.
In this way, each time the symbol of the special symbol ends the fluctuation, the symbol confirmation number signal is output as external information.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C80) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 86.
The main prize ball signal editing process outputs the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case) to an external device. It is a process.
In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step C102). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step C102; YES), it is determined whether or not the number of main prize ball signal outputs updated in step S160 described above is 0 (step C103).

When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is not 0 (step C103; NO), the number of main prize ball signal outputs is updated by -1 (step C104), and the main prize ball signal output to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step C105). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. The time (eg, 192 ms) is set. After that, the on-data that turns on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.
When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step C103; YES), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; NO), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C106). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more.
When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C106; YES), the process shifts to step C107. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step C106; NO), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.
In this way, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal of 1 pulse for every 10 scheduled payouts of prize balls to an external device (for example, a management device of a game store). It should be noted that the payout control device 200 outputs a 1-pulse prize ball signal generated for every 10 payouts to an external device (for example, a management device).
That is, the game control device 100 (main board) updates the number of main prize ball number signal outputs by +1 for each scheduled payout (every time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process), and then updates ( The main prize ball number signal is output for the number of output times (set). Then, with respect to the main prize ball signal output for each 10 payout schedule as described above, the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 (payout board) when 10 pieces are actually paid out. By matching the schedule with the result, it is possible to deal with fraudulent payouts.

In addition, from the main prize ball signal, it becomes possible to determine when a prize has occurred with a management device as an external device, which also helps the policy in hall sales.
Specifically, it can be determined whether the prize is a prize generated during a big hit or a prize generated during a normal game. For example, if you have a lot of prizes during a big hit, it is okay to have a lot of prizes, but if you have a lot of prizes during a normal game, you can judge that the nail adjustment is too sweet, which helps the policy in hall sales. become.
On the other hand, if the main prize ball signal is not output to the external device and only the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 that is output when the payout is completed, the ball runs out during the big hit and the payout is performed. If the supply is delayed and the prize is paid out after the big hit, it will not be possible to determine when the prize has occurred.
Therefore, if the replenishment is delayed and paid out after the big hit, it means that there was a large amount of prizes (payout) during the normal game, and there is a possibility that the sales data will be incomplete. There is sex.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, both the main prize ball signal and the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 are used in combination, and the main prize ball signal is output immediately after winning a prize, as described above. There are no problems.

Further, the ON / OFF pattern of the main prize ball signal generated by the main prize ball signal editing process is as shown in the timing chart shown at the lower side of FIG. 86, for example. That is, the pattern consists of an on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and an off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms). Here, since the value of the output control timer represents 4 ms, which is the timer interrupt cycle, as one unit, “48” corresponds to 192 ms and “16” corresponds to 64 ms.
The start port signal generated by the start port signal editing process described later also has the same pattern as the main prize ball signal.

[Starting port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the start port signal editing process (step C81) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 87.
The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121.
In the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not 0, the start port signal output control timer is updated by -1 (step C111). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step C112). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step C112; YES), it is determined whether the number of start port signal outputs updated in step S382 described above is 0 (step C113).

When the number of start port signal outputs is not 0 (step C113; NO), the number of start port signal outputs is updated by -1 (step C114), and the start port signal output control timer initial value is set in the start port signal output control timer area. Is saved (step C115). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal. For example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the start port signal editing process is completed.
When the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step C113; YES), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C118). , Ends the start port signal editing process.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (step C112; NO), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C116). The fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C116; YES), the process shifts to step C117. When the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step C116; NO), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C116; NO). Step C118), the start port signal editing process is completed.

Next, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 129.
Here, "step D" will be used as the step number for explanation.
The special figure controlled by the effect control device 300 is a special figure for effect displayed on the display device 41, and the special figure in the following description of the control process of the effect control device 300 is a special figure for this effect. It means (decorative pattern that is not this special figure).

Further, in general, the "character" means a character or a character, or a character or an animal having a character or a character, and may mean a character as a computer term. However, in the following description of the effect control device 300, especially in the description of image display control using VDP, a series of movies, background images, images of symbols (decorative symbols of special figures and fourth symbols), and characters A cohesive still image or moving image such as an image may be referred to as a character, and such image data (still image or moving image data) may be referred to as character data (or character data).
Further, in the following description of the effect control device 300, in the case of display control, the object means a cohesive display control target, and display elements (background image, decorative pattern image of special figure, image of notice character). , A cohesive image such as a hold display image). For example, in the case of this example, the decorative symbols of the special symbol are distinguished by the difference in the variable display area (reel) such as the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and each of these distinctions includes the current symbol, the next symbol, and so on. There is a distinction that the display position in the scroll direction called the previous symbol is different. That is, for example, with respect to the left symbol, there are the current symbol of the left symbol, the next symbol of the left symbol, and the previous symbol of the left symbol, and each of these is one object when viewed in detail. However, in the control process, for example, the entire left symbol including the current symbol, the next symbol, and the previous symbol may be classified as one display element.

Further, in this embodiment, a scenario table (also referred to as a scenario data table) is used when the display device 41 or the like is used for the production. In this scenario table, data for controlling the flow of a specific effect (data for specifying which motion table is executed at what timing, etc.) is set.
In the above motion table, there is motion data (that is, data for specifying the image data to be displayed and its display position, etc.) of each effect (mainly effect display) that has been made into blocks (parts), and the motion is blocked. It means a modified production action. That is, the motion table is a control table for executing each blocked effect, and is also called a motion control table. The data of this motion table can be easily produced by a graphical input operation using a mouse or the like by commercially available application software that can be executed on a PC (personal computer), and the effect control device 300 of the effect control device 300 for each blocked effect. It is stored in the PROM 321 in advance.

Further, in this embodiment, the concept of a scenario layer is used in drawing control of the screen displayed on the display device 41. The scenario layer means each layer in the method of controlling the effect display or the like by dividing it into a plurality of layers. In this example, a scenario table is set for each scenario layer as needed, and the entire effect is realized by synthesizing the effects of each scenario layer.
The "scenario management area" is a storage area having a structure including an area for storing the value of the scenario timer (scenario timer area) and an area for storing the address of the scenario table (scenario data table area). is there. Then, a scenario management area having the same structure exists for each scenario layer corresponding to each scenario layer, and since there are eight scenario layers in this example, there are also eight scenario management areas (scenario management areas 0 to 7). ..
Further, the “address area of the scenario management area” means a storage area for storing the start address of the scenario management area.

[Main processing]
First, the main process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 88.
This main process starts when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 starts, the interrupt is first disabled in step D1, then the initial setting of CPU311 is performed in step D2, then the initial setting of VDP312 is performed in step D3, and then the interrupt is performed in step D4. To give permission. Next, after executing steps D13, D15, and D19 in sequence, the process proceeds to step D20.

In step D13, display data generation is permitted. This is a process that allows the display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access the VRAM 329 and generate display data.
In step D15, a random number seed is set. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the srand function. Here, as an argument given to the srand function, a fixed value such as 0 (zero) may be used, or a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like is used so as to be different for each game machine. May be good.
In step D19, the power is turned on to the area to be initialized (for example, the effect flag area (the storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)) in the RWM (for example, RAM 326) of the effect control device 300. Save the initial value of the hour.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D20, steps D20 to D32 are sequentially executed.
In step D20, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared.
In step D21, the effect button input process is executed. This is a process of editing when the effect button 9 (for example, a configuration including a push button and a select button) or the touch panel 9a is operated when it is enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the process of detecting the button input may be performed within this process (that is, within the main loop process described later), or within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). You may go.

In step D22, the hall / player setting mode processing for setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 and accepting the operation such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player is performed. ..
In step D23, the random number update process is executed. This is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once every control cycle of the main process using, for example, the land function. Since the land function generates a random number based on the specified generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, it is only necessary to execute the function. A random number updated by +1 may be used as in the main board (game control device 100).
In step D24, a received command check process (described later) is executed.
In step D28, the scenario setting process is executed. This is a process of analyzing a scenario based on a command from the received game control device 100 (details will be described later).
In step D30, the motion control process is executed. This is a process for executing the scenario analyzed in step D28 (details will be described later).

In step D31, the effect display editing process is executed. This is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 of the drawing contents on the display device 41, and the details will be described later. In this effect display editing process, the commands are set in a table shape, and the commands set in this way are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instructing screen drawing) described later.
In step D32, the drawing command preparation end setting is executed, and the process proceeds to step D33. The process of step D32 is a process of setting that the preparation of all commands for VDP 312 set in step D31 is completed.

When the process proceeds to step D33, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing, steps D34 to D38 are sequentially executed if it is the frame switching timing, and this step D33 is repeated if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sink interrupt). It is the timing to arrive at the target interval. The V blank interrupt is generated every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As described above, the generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, frame switching is performed, and the frame switching timing cycle is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or 1/30 second or less. Frame switching may be performed at intervals.

By the process of step D33, the subsequent processes (steps D34 to D38, and subsequent steps D20 to D32) are executed at the frame switching timing for each of the above process cycles. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames have 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

Next, in step D34, the VDP 312 is instructed to draw a screen.
In step D35, a sound control process for processing the volume of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 12a, lower speaker 12b) is executed.
In step D36, a decoration control process for controlling various LEDs of the board decoration device 42 and the frame decoration device 43 is executed.
In step D37, a movable body control process for controlling a movable body including various motors and SOLs (solenoids) is executed.
In step D38, the launch information control process is executed. In the launch information control process, launch-related information (described later) is set based on the launch status flag, and the special map rotation state (the number of special map fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, the number of balls rented)) The mode of the production is corrected according to the above. Here, the firing state flag is information indicating whether or not the player is firing the game ball, and the firing touch information received from the game control device 100 in the firing touch information setting process (step D233) described later. Information saved in the firing status flag area based on the command to notify.
After executing this step D38, the process returns to step D20 and the same process as in the case of proceeding to step D20 is repeated. That is, steps D20 to D38 constitute a loop process (sometimes referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed in the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is activated.

Note that the control processing of steps D35 to D37 is performed within these steps in which operation switching is executed in units of processing cycles in order to match the effect of the screen, but signals generated or set by these control processing The process of actually outputting data (particularly signals for driving and controlling various LEDs and motors) to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the details of the received command check process (step D24) in the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to FIG. The command from the main board has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and these are sequentially transmitted. In the following, such data constituting a command will be referred to as command data or command data.

Further, the command reception process from the main board is performed by the "command reception interrupt process" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when the command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated to notify the user. All you have to do is take it out of the buffer, but in the above "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking whether the loaded command data is normal, the command is concerned. The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is incremented by 1 by the amount stored. In the description of the control process, the term “storing” simply means readable and storable in a predetermined storage area for use in the subsequent control process (same below). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is composed of, for example, a storage area in RAM 311a (or RAM 326, and so on) of CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be greater than or equal to the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

When this received command check processing routine is started, first, the value of the command reception counter is loaded as the number of command receptions in step D151, then it is determined in step D152 whether the number of command receptions is not zero, and if it is not zero, the step After executing D153 to D155 in sequence, the process proceeds to step D156, and if it is zero, the process returns. In the present application, as in step D151, “loading” data in the control process means taking out data from the RAM (RAM 326 or RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of this example).
Further, the command reception counter is subtracted in the next step D153 of this routine executed at each frame switching timing and basically cleared to 0. As a result, it is performed for one frame (1/30 second) (described above). It counts how many commands are received in (the time for one cycle of the processing cycle), and is composed of a command reception counter area of RWM (RAM 326 or RAM 311a).

In step D153, the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) are subtracted by the number of command receptions.
If A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of commands received, "A = B" immediately after the execution of step D151. Immediately after the execution of step D153, the normal movement is "A = AB = 0", but in the embodiment of this example, the effect control device interrupts the command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board). Since the highest priority is given without prohibition, there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the processing of step D151 and the processing of step D153. Therefore, if the process of step D153 is set to "A ← 0" (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count will be deviated. Therefore, in step D153, the subtraction process of "AB" is performed. Is going. However, when serial communication is used for sending and receiving commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D151 and the processing of step D153. By doing so, the processing content of step D153 may be set to "A ← 0".

In step D154, the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, which may be simply referred to as the command buffer) (that is, the command data stored in the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer) is set to the command area (case). To copy to the command storage area). The command area is a storage area in, for example, RAM 326 or RAM 311a that constitutes a so-called FIFO format (first-in, first-out format) buffer.
In step D155, since the data in the command buffer has been read, the value of the command read index, which is the read pointer of the command buffer, is updated by increasing by 1 in the range of 0 to 31, for example. The range from 0 to 31 here corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, 32).

Proceeding to step D156, it is determined whether or not the copy of the command for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D154 and D155 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions), and if not, step D154. The process is repeated from step D154, and if completed, the process proceeds to step D157.

Proceeding to step D157, the contents of the command area (the data stored first among the data not yet read in the command area, that is, the data to be read next) are loaded (that is, read). With respect to the data of this loaded command (hereinafter referred to as this command), the received command analysis process (described later) is executed in the next step D158, and then the process proceeds to step D159.
When the process proceeds to step D159, the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next) is updated, and the process proceeds to step D160.
In step D160, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D157 to D159 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions), and if not, the process returns to step D157. The process is repeated from step D157, and if it is completed, the process returns.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (step D158) in the above-mentioned received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. 90.
When this routine is started, first, in step D171, the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D157 is separately stored in MODE and the lower byte is stored in ACT, and then the process proceeds to step D172. .. In the case of a fluctuation system command that commands the fluctuation pattern of the special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half fluctuation pattern. It is a thing.

In steps D172 and D173, it is determined whether the MODE value and the ACT value separated in step D171 are in the normal range, and if only one of these values is not in the normal range, a return is made, and both of these values are in the normal range. If so, the process proceeds to step D174. Some values of MODE are not defined and are not used, and if they are such unused values, it is determined in step D172 that they are not in the normal range.
Further, in step D173, the determination as to whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D171 is within the normal range is performed, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of the ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and in step D173, they are separated within the range of the upper limit to the lower limit. It is checked whether the ACT value is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is judged to be in the normal range (at this point, the toothlessness check has not been performed).

Proceeding to step D174, it is determined whether the value of the separated ACT is the correct combination with respect to the value of the separated MODE. This determination is made using, for example, a match check table. The match check table is a table in which all ACT values (action values) valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the start address, and is provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it is determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. Judge that it is not a combination.
In the process of step D174, a check (including a toothlessness check) is performed to see if the MODE has a normal ACT combination. For one MODE, there are multiple valid ACTs, but their values are not always continuous (that is, there are values that do not exist discontinuously and values that are missing teeth), so the command We are comparing and confirming whether is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if any of them matches.
If the determination result in step D174 is NO, the ACT value is abnormal, and the command is considered to be abnormal, and the command returns without executing step D175 and subsequent steps. If the determination result in step D174 is YES, the process proceeds to step D175.

In step D175, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the variable command range, and if it is within this range, the variable command process (described later) is executed and returned in step D176, and if it is out of this range, step D177 is performed. move on. Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D171 (the same applies to step D177 and the like described later). Further, the variable command (sometimes referred to as a variable command or a variable pattern command) is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of this variable command can take is the variable command range.
Proceeding to step D177, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the jackpot command range, and if it is within this range, the jackpot command process (details omitted) is executed and returned in step D178, and if it is outside this range, it returns. Step D179 proceeds. The jackpot command is a command that commands an operation related to the jackpot production (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.), and the range in which the data of the jackpot command can be obtained is the jackpot command range.

Proceeding to step D179, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the symbol-based command range, and if it is within this range, the symbol-based command processing (described later) is executed and returned in step D180, and if it is outside this range, the step Proceed to D181. A symbol command (sometimes called a symbol command or a decorative special symbol command) is a command for commanding information about a special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be), and this symbol command. The range that can be taken by the data is the design command range.
In step D181, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the single-shot command range, and if it is within this range, the single-shot command processing (described later) is executed and returned in step D182, and if it is out of this range, step D183 is performed. move on. Note that, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes called single-shot commands) include customer waiting demo commands, hold count commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error / illegal commands, and model specification commands. The range that the data of this one-shot command can take is the one-shot command range.

Proceeding to step D183, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range for the look-ahead effect, and if it is within this range, the look-ahead symbol command processing (details omitted) is executed in step D184 to return. If it is out of this range, the process proceeds to step D185.
Proceeding to step D185, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the look-ahead variable command range for the look-ahead effect, and if it is within this range, the look-ahead variable command process (details omitted) is executed in step D186 to return. However, if it is out of this range, the received command analysis process is terminated and returned.

Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to a start winning memory (holding of the starting winning memory, or simply holding) in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed. In order to notify the player in advance whether or not the game will be a big hit (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) when it is executed after that, the start winning memory is held and displayed in a different manner from the usual mode. It is a production such as. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is a game at the time of the start winning. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, the details of the one-shot command processing executed in step D176 in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92.
When this routine is started, first, in step D201, it is determined whether the MODE data (data of the upper byte separated in step D171 described above, the same applies hereinafter) is model-specified (model-specified command data). If the model is specified, the model setting process (explanation is omitted) is executed in step D202, and then the return (this single-shot command processing is completed) is performed. If the model is not specified, the process proceeds to step D203.

Proceeding to step D203, it is determined whether the MODE data is a notification of RAM initialization (power on with the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) turned on) (RAM initialization command data), and RAM. If it informs the initialization, it returns after executing the RAM initialization setting process in step D204, and if it does not instruct the RAM initialization, it proceeds to step D205. The RAM initialization command is a command (sometimes referred to as a power-on command) that notifies the effect control device 300 that the game control device 100 has cleared the RWM, and is transmitted in step S30 described above. This RAM initialization command is sent to cause the effect control device 300 to clear the effect state and to perform an RWM clear notification (an operation of displaying, for example, the display device 41 that the RWM has been cleared), and for that purpose. The process is the RAM initialization setting process in step D204.

Proceeding to step D205, it is determined whether the MODE data is for notifying the power failure recovery (command data at the time of power failure recovery), and if it is for notifying the power failure recovery, after executing the power failure recovery setting process in step D206. If it returns and does not command the recovery from the power failure, the process proceeds to step D207. The power failure recovery setting process in step D206 is for displaying a message such as "the game has resumed" on the display device 41, blinking the lamps in a predetermined mode, and notifying the player of the power failure recovery. It is a process and includes a scenario data setting process for that purpose.
The scenario data setting process will be described in detail later, but it is intended to be executed in the scenario management storage area (“scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number. This is a process for setting scenario control data for the effect to be performed. Further, the scenario control data is data set in the above-mentioned scenario management area or the address area of the scenario management area in order to control the flow of a specific effect (for example, a scenario data table (scenario) to be written in the scenario management area. (Table) address, etc.).

Proceeding to step D207, it is determined whether the MODE data is the one that commands the customer waiting demo (data of the customer waiting demo command), and if it is the one that commands the customer waiting demo, after executing steps D208 and D210 in sequence. If it returns and does not command the customer waiting demonstration, the process proceeds to step D211. The customer waiting demo is a customer waiting demo effect (also referred to as a customer waiting effect), and is an effect including a customer waiting demo display performed by the display device 41. The customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the display on the display device 41, and may be displayed on another display device, the lamps may be lit (including blinking), or the sound may be output.
In step D208, a customer waiting demo setting process (details will be described later) for setting scenario control data for performing the customer waiting effect is executed.
Next, in step D210, the accessory position confirmation process (explanation omitted) is executed, and then returns.

Proceeding to step D211 it is determined whether the MODE data informs the value of the special figure 1 hold number (data of the special figure 1 hold number command), and if it informs the value of the special figure 1 hold number. If the value is not notified, the process proceeds to step D212.
Proceeding to step D212, it is determined based on the MODE data whether the number of reservations in special figure 1 (the number of start memories in special figure 1) has increased by one, and if it has increased, the start opening winning command is received in step D213. After updating the number by +1 it proceeds to step D214, and if it has not increased, it proceeds to step D214 without executing step D213. In step D214, the process returns after executing the special figure 1 hold information setting process (explanation omitted). Since the number of start opening winning commands received is also updated by +1 in step D217 and step D220, which will be described later, any of the starting winning openings (special figure 1 starting opening 607, special drawing 2 starting opening 608, starting winning opening 26a). It corresponds to the number of game balls entered (that is, the number of starting prizes), and is used to determine the special figure rotation state in the launch information control process in step D38.

Proceeding to step D215, it is determined whether the MODE data informs the value of the special figure 2 hold number (data of the special figure 2 hold number command), and if it informs the value of the special figure 2 hold number. For example, the process proceeds to step D216, and if the value of the special figure 2 hold number is not notified, the process proceeds to step D219.
Proceeding to step D216, it is determined based on the MODE data whether the number of reservations in special figure 2 (the number of start memories in special figure 2) has increased by one, and if it has increased, the start opening winning command is received in step D217. After updating the number by +1 it proceeds to step D218, and if it has not increased, it proceeds to step D218 without executing step D217. In step D218, the process returns after executing the special figure 2 hold information setting process (explanation omitted).
For the sake of simplicity, in steps D213 and D217, the prize balls at the first starting port (special figure 1 starting port 607) and the second starting port (special drawing 2 starting port 608, starting winning opening 26a). Although the number of common start opening winning command reception number areas is increased by +1 with the same number, the areas may be divided as different number of prize balls. In that case, the launch information control process in step D38 also changes accordingly.

Proceeding to step D219, if it is determined whether the MODE data is for notifying the start opening over winning command (data of the starting opening over winning command prepared in step S399 described above), and if it is for notifying the starting opening over winning command. For example, after updating the number of start opening winning commands received by +1 in step D220, the process proceeds to step D221, and if it does not notify the start opening over winning command, the process proceeds to step D222. In step D221, the player returns after executing the start port over prize setting process (explanation is omitted). In addition, the start winning over winning means the starting winning that exceeds the upper limit of the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number).

Proceeding to step D222, it is determined whether the MODE data informs the probability information (probability change information command data), and if it informs the probability information, returns after executing the probability information setting process in step D223. If the probability information is not commanded, the process proceeds to step D224.
Here, the probability information setting process is a setting process for screen switching at the end of the probability change (at the time of transition from the high probability state to the normal state where the probability is low) when the probability change occurs after the big hit, and a scenario for that. It may include data setting processing.
Proceeding to step D224, it is determined whether the MODE data is for notifying an error / invalidity (for example, data of an error notification command), and if it is for notifying an error / invalidity, an error / invalid setting process (explanation) is performed in step D225. After executing (omitted), it returns, and if it does not command an error / illegality, the process proceeds to step D226.

Proceeding to step D226, it is determined whether the MODE data is the one that commands the effect mode switching (data of the effect mode switching command), and if it is the one that commands the effect mode switching, the effect mode switching setting process is performed in step D227. After executing (details omitted), the process returns, and if it does not command the effect mode switching, the process proceeds to step D228. The effect mode switching setting process is a control process for performing an operation according to the effect mode switching command, and includes a scenario data setting process for that purpose.

When the process proceeds to step D228, it is determined whether the MODE data commands the stop of the special symbol symbol (that is, the symbol stop command), and if it commands the stop of the special symbol symbol, the process proceeds to step D229. If it is not a command to stop the symbol of the special figure, the process proceeds to step D232.
When the process proceeds to step D229, it is determined whether the command corresponding to the MODE data is a normal command, and if it is normal, it returns, and if it is normal, it returns after executing steps D230 and D231.
In step D230, the stop setting of the corresponding special figure (the one of special figure 1 and special figure 2 instructed by the data of the symbol stop command) is executed.
In step D231, the normal state is set as the content of the game state flag (information indicating the state of the game machine (P machine state)). Here, the normal state indicates that the special figure is not in the big hit, the special figure is in the small hit, the special figure is changing, or the customer is waiting (customer waiting state). Further, after the normal setting is made here, for example, the special figure may be changed or the customer may be waiting according to the next command from the main board.

Proceeding to step D232, the MODE data informs the firing touch information (state off command or state on command related to the touch switch signal prepared in step S304 or S307 described above and transmitted in step S317 (hereinafter, firing command). If it is to notify the firing touch information, it returns after executing the firing touch information setting process in step D233, and if it is not to notify the firing touch information, the process proceeds to step D234. ..
In the firing touch information setting process, a firing state flag is set to indicate the firing state (whether or not the player is in contact with the firing operation handle 11 and playing a game) according to the received data of the firing command. And so on. That is, in the firing touch information setting process, it is determined whether the received MODE data is a normal touch-on command (a state-on command prepared for the touch switch signal in step S307 and transmitted to the effect control device 300). If it is a normal touch-on command, a firing flag is prepared, and if it is normal but not a touch-on command, a touch-off command (a touch switch signal is prepared in step S304 and transmitted to the effect control device 300). Since it is a state off command), prepare a flag during firing stop, and if the data of the flag prepared in this way is different from the data already saved in the firing state flag area, the data of the prepared flag is put in the firing state flag area. Perform processing such as saving.

Proceeding to step D234, it is determined whether the MODE data is for notifying the ball lending button to be pressed (data of the ball lending button pressing command prepared in step S298 and transmitted in step S299), and the ball lending button is pressed. If it is for notifying the ball lending information, it returns after executing the ball lending information setting process (described later) in step D235, and if it is not for notifying the pressing of the ball lending button, it returns.
Regarding this one-shot command processing, there are steps for which illustration and explanation are omitted. For example, the corresponding processing when another non-variable command is received is omitted. Also, scenario control data is not set for all commands. For example, when an error command indicating frame opening is received, the screen of the display device 41 is not changed, so the scenario control data is not set.

[Customer waiting demo setting process]
Next, the customer waiting demo setting process executed in step D208 of the one-shot command process will be described with reference to FIG. 93.
In this customer waiting demo setting process, first, the process proceeds to step D241, it is determined whether the data of the current command loaded in step D157 is normal, if it is normal, it proceeds to step D242, and if it is abnormal, it returns.

Proceeding to step D242, it is determined whether the P machine state (pachinko machine state) is in the customer waiting demonstration, and if it is not in the customer waiting demonstration, it returns, and if it is not in the customer waiting demonstration, it returns after executing steps D243 and D244 in sequence. To do.
In step D243, a customer waiting scenario data setting process (described later) is executed in order to perform the customer waiting effect. In the description of the control process of the effect control device 300, the scenario control data means data set in the scenario management area or the address area of the scenario management area in order to control the flow of a specific effect. In step D243, scenario control data for performing the customer waiting effect is set.
In step D244, the customer waiting state A (customer waiting state A) is set as the P machine state. The customer waiting effect includes a customer waiting state A, a customer waiting state B, a customer waiting movie (without sound), and a customer waiting movie (with sound).

[Customer waiting scenario data setting process]
Next, the customer waiting scenario data setting process executed in step D243 of the customer waiting demo setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 94.
In this customer waiting scenario data setting process, steps D251 to D274 are sequentially executed and then returned.
In step D251, scenario layer number 0 is prepared. Here, "preparing" means that data is primarily stored and held in a predetermined storage area for later processing (the same applies to other steps described later). In addition, the scenario layer is a conceptual scenario layer (layer) for hierarchically controlling the flow of production. The scenario layer number is a number assigned to each scenario layer, and in this example, it is from 0 to 7. Further, in this example, the scenario layer with scenario layer number 0 (hereinafter referred to as scenario layer 0) is mainly used for display control of the background image, scenario layer 1 is used for display control of the left pattern, and so on, for each scenario layer. The control target is basically assigned. However, only the scenario layer 0 is used for the customer waiting effect, and the motion information such as the symbol for the customer waiting effect is also managed in the scenario layer 0.

In step D252, the address of the data table for the customer waiting scenario is prepared. The scenario data table (also simply called the scenario table) is a table in which data for controlling the flow of a specific effect (data for specifying which motion table is executed at what timing, etc.) is set. Each effect is stored in advance in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300. The customer waiting scenario data table is a scenario table for the customer waiting effect, and has the configuration shown in FIG. 136, for example. Further, in the scenario table of this example, as shown in FIG. 136, the operation code and the operand data (scenario data) are set in each line (each record).
In step D253, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data (address and scenario layer number data) prepared in the immediately preceding steps D251 and D252.

In step D254, scenario layer number 1 is prepared. In step D255, the address (Null) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D256, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D254 and D255.
In step D257, scenario layer number 2 is prepared. In step D258, the address (Null) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D259, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D257 and D258.

In step D260, scenario layer number 3 is prepared. In step D261, the address (Null) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D262, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D260 and D261.
In step D263, scenario layer number 4 is prepared. In step D264, the address (Null) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D265, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D263 and D264.

In step D266, scenario layer number 5 is prepared. In step D267, the address (Null) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D268, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D266 and D267.
In step D269, scenario layer number 6 is prepared. In step D270, the address (Null) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D271, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D269 and D270.

In step D272, scenario layer number 7 is prepared. In step D273, the address (Null) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D274, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D272 and D273.
The scenario layers 1 to 7 for which the address (Null) is prepared in steps D255, D258, D261, D264, D267, D270, and D273 are scenario layers in which the scenario data table is not set, that is, the scenario layer is not controlled.

[Scenario data setting process]
Next, the details of the scenario data setting process executed in steps D253, D256, D259, D262, D265, D268, D271, and D274 in the above-mentioned customer waiting scenario data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 95. Note that this scenario data setting process is common to various effects, and the step in which this scenario data setting process is executed is another routine (for example, step D453 of the reach start effect setting process described later). There are many in. All the steps described as "scenario data setting process" are shown in FIG. 95.
When this routine is started, first, in step D281, it is determined whether the address of the prepared scenario data table (for example, the one prepared in steps D252, D255, etc.) is NULL, and if it is NULL, after step D287 is executed. It returns, and if it is not NULL, it returns after executing steps D282 to D286 in sequence.

In the above-mentioned customer waiting scenario data setting process, when this routine is executed in step D253, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table that is not NULL is prepared in the immediately preceding step D252, so that step D281 The determination result of is NO, and steps D282 to D286 are executed. If this routine is executed in other steps D256 and the like, NULL is prepared in the immediately preceding step D255 and the like. The determination result of D281 becomes YES, and step D287 is executed.

In step D282, the start address of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (for example, the one prepared in step D251, the same applies hereinafter) is set. In the case of this example, the RAM 311a or the RAM 326 of the effect control device 300 is configured to be provided with storage areas for scenario management called "address area of scenario management area" and "scenario management area". Of these, the scenario management area includes an area for storing the value of the scenario timer (scenario timer area), an area for storing the value of the PB timer (push button timer) (PB timer area), and PB detection. The structure includes an area for storing the value of the flag (push button detection flag) (PB detection flag area) and an area for storing the address of the scenario data table (scenario data table area). Further, there are scenario management areas having the same structure corresponding to each scenario layer, and since there are eight scenario layers in this example, there are also eight scenario management areas (scenario management areas 0 to 7). .. In step D282, in order to specify one of the plurality of scenario management areas in this way, the start address of the scenario management area (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding scenario management area) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number is set. doing.

The address area of the scenario management area is an area for storing the start address of the scenario management area for each scenario layer. In this example, there are eight scenario layers, so eight start addresses corresponding to these (scenario). It consists of eight areas for storing (address for layer 0 to address for scenario layer 7).
Next, in step D283, the start address of the scenario management area set in the immediately preceding step D282 is stored (that is, written) in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number.

Next, in step D284, 0 is written (that is, the value is cleared) as the value of the scenario timer in the corresponding scenario management area.
Next, in step D285, 0 is written (that is, the value is cleared) as the value of the PB timer in the corresponding scenario management area. The value of the PB detection flag in the corresponding scenario management area may also be cleared, but it may be cleared when necessary (when PB detection is started), so the value of the PB detection flag is set here. Absent.
Next, in step D286, the address of the prepared scenario data table (for example, the one prepared in step D252) is written in the scenario data table area of the corresponding scenario management area.
On the other hand, in step D287, NULL is written in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number.

According to the above scenario data setting process, the storage area for scenario management (“address area of scenario management area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number is used for the effect to be executed from now on. Scenario control data is set.
For example, in the above-mentioned scenario data setting process for waiting for customers, the scenario data setting process is executed in steps D253, D256, D259, D262, D265, D268, D271 and D274 to create a scenario in the address area of the scenario management area. The start address of the scenario management area 0 is set as the address for layer 0, and NULL is set from the remaining address for scenario layer 1 to the address for scenario layer 7. Further, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table prepared in step D252 is set in the scenario data table area of the scenario management area 0. As a result, the control of the customer waiting effect is executed only in the scenario layer 0.

[Ball lending information setting process]
Next, the ball lending information setting process executed in step D235 of the one-shot command process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this ball lending information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball lending button pressing command determined in step D234 described above is a normal command (step D361). If the command is not normal (step D361; N), the ball lending information setting process ends. On the other hand, when the command is normal (step D361; Y), the unit amount information is set based on the ball lending unit number information set in the ball lending unit number setting process (step D362), and the set unit amount information is set. Is added to the value of the ball lending usage amount information area (step D363), and the ball lending information setting process is completed. Here, the ball lending unit number setting process is a process executed in the hall / player setting mode process (step D22) described above in the hall setting mode, and is a “ball lending unit number setting” by a hall clerk or the like. It is a process to realize the setting change of. The number of ball lending units corresponds to an increase in the amount of ball lending due to a single payout operation of the ball lending (a payout operation by pressing the ball lending button 16 once). Further, the hall setting mode is a mode that starts when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied. The hall setting mode start condition includes an operation input for entering the hall setting mode (for example, an operation of pressing the effect button 9 twice with the glass frame 5 open), and a customer waiting demonstration is in progress. Including the condition of. That is, for example, if the effect button 9 is pressed twice while the glass frame 5 is open during the customer waiting demonstration, the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied, and the above-mentioned ball lending unit number setting, volume setting by the hall clerk, etc. Is possible.

By the above processing, every time the player performs a ball lending operation (pressing the ball lending button) while the game is continuing, the ball lending usage amount information is increased by that amount (that is, the total amount of ball lending is accumulated). ).
Here, the ball lending unit number information is information corresponding to the amount of money information (unit amount information) used by pressing the ball lending button once (information that can obtain unit amount information from the information, unit amount information itself. There may be). This ball lending unit number information corresponds to the increase in the ball lending amount due to one payout operation of the ball lending. The registered value of the increase in the ball lending amount (that is, information on the number of ball lending units) can be rewritten by the game store (hall) in the hall setting mode described above.

[Design command processing]
Next, the details of the symbol-based command processing executed in step D180 in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. 97.
When this routine is started, first, in step D371, the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure) corresponding to the MODE data (data of the upper byte separated in step D171 described above, the same applies to step D372 described later). 2 information) is set. For example, if the MODE data is 85h, the special figure 1 is set as the special figure type, and if the MODE data is 86h, the special figure 2 is set as the special figure type. Since it can be determined from the MODE data whether it is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 in this way, in this step D371, the special figure type is determined and set from the MODE data.

Next, in step D372, a symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set, saved, and then returned (that is, the symbol command processing is terminated).
Specifically, in step D372, first, the symbol type setting table corresponding to the MODE data is set. The symbol type setting table is a table for determining the symbol type corresponding to the symbol command (for example, a category such as a missed symbol, a 16R probability variation jackpot symbol, a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol, an 11R normal jackpot symbol, ...). This is a table in which the correspondence between the ACTION data of the symbol command (for example, 11 types of 11h to 1Bh) and the symbol type is defined. Since the ratio of symbols changes between special figure 1 and special figure 2 (the probability variation ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE. In step D372, first, from a plurality of symbol type setting tables, MODE is provided. Select and set the one corresponding to the data of.

Next, in step D372, based on the set symbol type setting table, the symbol type corresponding to the ACT data (data of the lower byte separated in step D171 described above) is acquired and saved as symbol type information.
It should be noted that the special symbol type and symbol type information set in steps D371 and D372 in response to the symbol command in this way will be described later for the variable command that is the set received following the symbol command (or before the symbol command). It is used in the processing of steps D401 and D402. Even if the information of the special figure type is used for the determination of step D401, the data set in step D371 before the step D371 is newly executed is stored and retained. Further, even after the symbol type information is used in step D402, the data previously set in step D372 is stored and retained until step D372 is newly executed.
In this way, according to this routine, the special symbol type and the symbol type are set each time a symbol command is received.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command processing executed in step D176 in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. 98.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D401 whether the special figure type is undetermined, if it is undetermined, it returns, and if it is not undetermined (that is, when the special figure type is set), step D402 Check the combination of the variable command and the symbol command with, and proceed to step D403. The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is the information set in step D371 described above in the symbol system command processing.

Proceeding to step D403, it is determined whether or not the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent, and if they are inconsistent, a return is made, and if they are not inconsistent, steps D404 to D408 are executed and then returned.
The symbol type means a category of symbols, and as described above, the symbol types include, for example, a missed symbol, a 16R probability variation jackpot symbol, and the like. Further, the inconsistency in step D403 is inconsistent in performing the production, such as when the deviation command (variation pattern command) is received but the symbol command of the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol is received. It means that it is a combination (combination of variable command and symbol type). That is, in step D402, the consistency is checked as to whether or not the fluctuation pattern command matches the stop symbol, and the result is that the command branches in step D403.

Then, in step D404, the variation pattern type (which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure and is determined by the variation pattern type data) according to the received command is determined.
In step D405, a variation effect setting process (described later) is executed in order to perform an effect according to the variation command.
Further, in step D406, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state). Here, the term “during special map fluctuation” means that the special map is being displayed while being fluctuating (not during a customer waiting demonstration, during a big hit, or during fanfare).
In step D407, if the number of pre-reading effects (number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, a process of updating the number of pre-reading effects by -1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) is executed. Here, the reason for updating the number of look-ahead effects to -1 is that step D407 is executed when a valid variable command is received (the special figure will start to change, and the number of pending start prize memories is one. This is because (when it decreases). The number of pre-reading effects is set based on the latest hold information when a pre-reading notice is given in the pre-reading lottery process (a subroutine called and executed in the pre-reading variable command process in step D186) (not shown). For example, if the number of holds is 4, it is set to 4 times, if the number of holds is 3, it is set to 3 times, and so on. This look-ahead effect number is updated in step D407, and is used in step D729b, which will be described later.
Then, in step D408, the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation number (counter used in the launch information control process in step D38) is updated by +1. Since this step D408 is executed every time the special figure variation display is started, the special figure variation number of times for counting the number of executions of the special figure variation display is updated by +1 here. The special figure variation number updated here is used in the launch information control process to determine the special figure rotation state.

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, the details of the variation effect setting process executed in step D405 in the variation system command process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100.
When this routine is started, first, in step D421, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern type data determined in step D404 of the variable command processing is reachless variation, and if it is reachless variation, steps D422 and D423 are sequentially performed. After the execution, the process proceeds to step D426, and if there is no reach variation, steps D424 and D425 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D426.
In step D422, the launch-related information (described later), the model code, the special figure type, and the first half advance notice distribution group address table (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode at that time are set. In addition, when proceeding to step D422, since it is a variation without reach and the symbol type is always an outlier symbol, the symbol type does not need to be particularly referred to in step D422.
The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300 (in this embodiment, a game mode command is also sent from the game control device), and naturally differs depending on the model. This effect mode (game mode) is related to the effect theme of the game machine, such as the military congress mode and the decisive battle mode, and is corrected according to the special figure rotation state in the launch information control process (step D38). It is different from the mode of production.

Further, the first half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the first half notice distribution group table, which will be described later, and the data of the addresses of the first half notice distribution group table is arranged in a matrix. In this first half advance notice distribution group address table, the data in each row of the table corresponds to the same MODE value (data that specifies the first half fluctuation pattern). Then, when the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach variation, the same number of holds (the number of start winning memories in which the special figure variation display game has not been executed) is set in each column of the first half advance notice distribution group address table. Corresponding data is arranged. That is, in the first half notice distribution group address table in the case of non-reach fluctuation, the parameter that determines the row is the value of MODE, and the parameter that determines the column is the number of pending numbers. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern type is other than reachless fluctuation, data corresponding to the same fluctuation pattern type is arranged in each column of the first half advance notice distribution group address table. That is, in the first half notice distribution group address table in the case other than the non-reach variation, the parameter that determines the row is the value of MODE, and the parameter that determines the column is the variation pattern type.
As a result, in the case of this example, the lottery content (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) that appears during each change changes according to the number of reservations only in the case of the non-reach change. become. For example, in the case of non-reach fluctuations, the larger the number of holds, the shorter the fluctuation time.

In step D423, based on the first half notice distribution group address table set in step D422, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of MODE and the special figure type is acquired.
Specifically, as the address of the row of the set first half advance notice distribution group address table, the address of the row corresponding to the value of MODE (value separated in step D171, the same applies hereinafter) is calculated. Next, as the address of the column of the set first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the column corresponding to the number of reservations of the special figure type at that time is calculated. Then, based on these calculation results, the address of the first half notice distribution group table is acquired from the position of the corresponding row and column in the corresponding first half notice distribution group address table.

On the other hand, in step D424, the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the launch-related information (described later), the model code, the special figure type, the symbol type, and the effect mode at that time is set. ..
Next, in step D425, based on the first half advance notice distribution group address table set in step D424, the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired.
Specifically, the address of the row corresponding to the value of MODE is calculated as the address of the row of the set first half notice distribution group address table. Next, as the address of the column of the set first half advance notice distribution group address table, the address of the column corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type at that time (data determined in step D404, the same applies hereinafter) is calculated. Then, based on these calculation results, the address of the first half notice distribution group table is acquired from the position of the corresponding row and column in the corresponding first half notice distribution group address table.

Proceeding to step D426, the advance notice lottery process (lottery of the advance notice effect by random numbers) is executed for the first half change using the first half advance notice distribution group table of the address acquired in the immediately preceding step D423 or D425. According to this advance notice lottery process, the distribution results are selected in advance for all the advance notice distribution types set in the first half advance notice distribution group table, and various information for specifying the effect contents according to the distribution results is obtained in advance. Each will be stored in a predetermined storage area.
According to the processing up to step D426, the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table is selected, and the advance notice lottery process of step D426 (the first half change advance notice lottery process) is performed based on the selected first half advance notice distribution group table. Will be executed. Here, the first half advance notice distribution group table is a table in which the address of one advance notice distribution table and the address of the result area of one effect distribution result corresponding to the address correspond to the same row. Is. As for the advance notice distribution (lottery for determining the presence / absence and mode of the advance notice effect) performed for one variable display game, a large number of different ones are executed depending on the fluctuation pattern, and accordingly, the advance notice distribution group table The number of lines is also huge.

Here, the launch-related information referred to in steps D422 and D424 includes at least the above-mentioned information on the launch state flag (a launch flag indicating a touch state to the launch operation handle 11 or a launch stop indicating a touch-off state). Flag information), continuous touch state flag information (information saved in the process in the launch information control process in step D38), and ball lending usage amount information (information updated in step D363) are included. There is. The continuous touch state flag indicates whether or not the contact with the firing operation handle 11 is continuous for the continuous touch specified time (for example, 3 minutes) or more (may be continuous including the non-contact state less than the non-launching specified time). It is a flag, and this flag indicates the player's game continuation state.

Then, in steps D422 and D424, the first half advance notice distribution group address table to be selected is changed based on the launch-related information including such information. As a result, the effect is changed when a predetermined effect change condition is satisfied (for example, the frequency of occurrence of a special advance notice effect increases). For example, in this embodiment, the effect change condition including the condition (first condition) that the player releases (touches off) the launch operation handle 11 after playing the game (touches the launch operation handle 11) for a predetermined time or longer is satisfied. Then, the effect is changed, and the condition for changing the effect includes a condition (second condition) that the ball lending amount of money exceeds the specified amount. In addition, there is a condition (third condition) that there is only one special figure hold (memory for starting a special figure) corresponding to the special figure change (the special figure change that is about to start) that is about to change the effect. It may be included in this effect change condition. In the table selection in steps D422 and D424, the table to be selected changes depending on whether or not such a condition (for example, all of the second condition and the third condition in addition to the first condition) is satisfied, and as a result, the effect is produced. The content changes. As a result, the effect that the player has a sense of expectation and the player wants to continue the game enthusiastically and the effect that the range of the production can be given can be obtained without lowering the game efficiency. .. That is, when a player who has been playing for a specified time or longer releases his / her hand from the steering wheel, the effect is changed by the effect control device 300, and the effect change by the effect control device 300 is a change in the reach occurrence rate controlled by the game control device 100. Is not included, so the time efficiency does not decrease, and the player operates the handle again to try to continue the game.

The condition that the player releases (touches off) the launch operation handle 11 after playing the game (touches the launch operation handle 11) for a predetermined time or longer can be determined by the launch state flag and the continuous touch state flag. That is, when the firing state flag is the firing stopped flag and the continuous touch state flag is the continuous touch condition fulfillment flag, the firing operation handle 11 is in a touch-off state at present without contact with the player's finger or the like. , It means that there was contact with the firing operation handle 11 until a certain time before (within a time shorter than the above-mentioned non-launching specified time). Therefore, in steps D422 and D424, assuming that the above-mentioned first condition is satisfied when the firing state flag is the firing stopped flag and the continuous touch state flag is the continuous touch condition satisfying flag, the remaining second condition and the remaining second condition and If the third condition is satisfied, the table is selected so that the production content changes. The effect change condition may be a mode in which success or failure is determined only by the first condition (a mode in which there is no second condition or a third condition), or a mode in which success or failure is determined by the first condition and the second condition. It may be a mode in which success or failure is determined by the first condition and the third condition, or there may be a mode in which another condition is added.

Next, after going through step D426, steps D427 to D429 are executed.
Steps D427 to D429 are processes for drawing a lottery for the notice effect of the latter half change. It should be noted that the latter half variation of the special figure variation display game varies depending on the so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of multiple columns of the special figure is a big hit). It is a variable display (a state in which the display is stopped and the variable display is performed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the fluctuation display of the special figure The first half fluctuation of the game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.
In step D427, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the launch-related information, model code, special figure type, symbol type set at that time, and the effect mode at that time is set, and the process proceeds to step D428. ..
Here, the second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half notice distribution group table, and the data of the address of the second half notice distribution group table is arranged for each variation pattern type. That is, in this latter half notice distribution group address table, the data in each row of the table corresponds to each fluctuation pattern type.

In step D428, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired. Specifically, in the second half notice distribution group address table set in the immediately preceding step D427, the address of the second half notice distribution group table is acquired from the position of the row corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type at that time.
Next, in step D429, a lottery for advance notices that appear during the latter half fluctuation (during reach) is performed. That is, the advance notice lottery process (lottery of the advance notice effect by random numbers) is executed for the latter half variation using the latter half advance notice distribution group table of the address acquired in step D428.
According to this advance notice lottery process, distribution results are selected in advance for all the advance notice distribution types set in the second half advance notice distribution group table prepared in step D428, and the effect contents corresponding to the distribution results are displayed. Various designated information will be stored in a predetermined storage area in advance.

According to the processes from step D427 to step D429, the address of the second half notice distribution group table is selected, and the notice lottery process of step D429 (the second half change notice lottery) is performed based on the selected second half notice distribution group table. Processing) is executed. Then, when selecting the second half notice distribution group address table in step D427, the above-mentioned launch-related information is referred to in the same manner as in the case of the first half fluctuation, and the change of the production due to the establishment of the above-mentioned effect change condition also applies to the second half fluctuation. It will be realized.

Next, after passing through step D429, the process proceeds to step D431.
When the process proceeds to step D431, the basic BGM number (song number of the basic BGM) and the decoration number (number indicating the type of effect by the decorative lamp (LED) or the like) corresponding to the effect mode are set, and then the process proceeds to step D432. The BGM and decoration that are normally changing change for each production mode. In this step D431, the default in each mode is set first. If it changes to a special BGM or decoration due to a notice etc., it will be changed in the scenario table.

Proceeding to step D432, it is determined whether or not the first half fluctuation type determined in the processing up to this point (particularly step D426) is normal fluctuation, if it is normal fluctuation, it proceeds to step D433, and if it is not normal fluctuation, the wavy line in FIG. Proceed to other processing steps (processing of various variations when the first half variation type is not normal variation), which is not shown in the above.
The first half fluctuation type is a fluctuation notice type that is distributed on the effect control device side in the same MODE (for example, 12 seconds first half normal fluctuation). In order to avoid complication, here, only the state of the advance notice distribution when the first half variation type is normal variation is described in the flowchart (FIG. 100). Then, the processing of various fluctuations (including pseudo-reams) when the first half fluctuation type is not normal fluctuation is performed in the steps after the flow in which the determination result in step D432 becomes NO (omitted by wavy lines in FIG. 100). Although it is executed, it is configured to proceed to step D437 after executing the processing after this flow.

Proceeding to step D433, it is determined whether the advance notice type (data in the effect distribution result area; advance notice data) determined in the processes up to this point (particularly steps D426 and D429, the same applies hereinafter) specifies the reach start effect. If it is not the reach start effect, the process proceeds to the process when another notice effect is selected (omitted by the wavy line in FIG. 100), and then the process proceeds to step D437. If it is the reach start effect, the reach starts in step D434. After executing the effect setting process (described later), the process proceeds to step D437.
As a specific screen display example, the reach start effect includes an effect including the display as shown in FIGS. 145 and 146 (described later) (not only the display but also the sound output for the effect). This is the type in which) is performed. This effect may be executed as a special advance notice effect (for example, an effect having a low appearance rate or a zero appearance rate in a normal state) performed when the above-mentioned effect change condition is satisfied, or the above-mentioned effect change condition. It may be an embodiment that is selected and executed independently.

Proceeding to step D437 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure 2, and if it is special figure 2, the process proceeds to step D442 after executing steps D438 and D439, and if it is not special figure 2 (that is, special figure 1). In the case), the process proceeds to step D442 after executing steps D440 and D441.
In step D438, the special figure 2 hold scenario table information corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is set.
In step D439, the fourth symbol (special figure 2 variation) scenario table information is set.
In step D440, the special figure 1 hold scenario table information corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is set.
In step D441, the fourth symbol (special figure 1 variation) scenario table information is set.
In these steps D438, D439 or D440, D441, scenario control data related to animation in which the hold (special figure start memory) is reduced is set.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D442, it is determined whether or not the MODE data (data of the first half fluctuation pattern) separated in step D171 commands normal fluctuation, and if it commands normal fluctuation, the process proceeds to step D443. If it does not normally command fluctuation, the process proceeds to another step omitted by the wavy line in FIG. 100.
After the flow in which the determination result in step D442 becomes NO (the part not shown by the wavy line), the same processing as in steps D443 and D444 is executed for the variation display effect when the MODE data is other than the above. If the MODE data does not correspond to any of the above, it is abnormal and returns.

Proceeding to step D443, the advance notice type (data in the effect distribution result area; advance notice data) determined in the processes up to this point specifies SD1, which is one of the effects performed in the SD (super deformation) mode. If it is not SD1, the process proceeds to step D445, and if it is SD1, the SD1 variation setting process is executed in step D444 and then returned.
As a specific screen display example, the SD1 is output for an effect (not only the display but also the effect) including the display as shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 158 (b) (described later). This is the type in which the voice is performed. This effect may be executed as a special advance notice effect (for example, an effect having a low appearance rate or a zero appearance rate in a normal state) performed when the above-mentioned effect change condition is satisfied, or the above-mentioned effect change condition. It may be an embodiment that is selected and executed independently.
Proceeding to step D445, it is determined whether the ACT data (second half fluctuation pattern) separated in step D171 commands "missing", and if it is "missing", in step D446, the data returns after executing the deviation setting process. If it is not "off", the process proceeds to another step omitted by the wavy line in FIG. 100. It should be noted that the out-of-order setting process is a process including a scenario data setting process for performing the latter half variation effect of "out-of-order". In addition, although there are actually multiple types of "off"("normal-1off","normal + 1 off", etc.), detailed explanations are omitted here.
Further, after the flow in which the determination result of step D445 becomes NO (the part not shown by the wavy line), steps D445 and D446 are applied to other reach effects in the case of normal fluctuation (for example, including the fluctuation display effect in the case of a big hit). The same process as in the above is executed, and if the ACT data does not correspond to any of the above, it is abnormal and returns.

[Reach start effect setting process]
Next, the reach start effect setting process executed in step D434 of the variable effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 101.
In this process, steps S451 to S459 are sequentially executed and then returned.
First, in step D451, scenario layer number 1 is prepared, in step D452, a scenario table for the left symbol reach start effect (for example, the one shown in the upper part of FIG. 148) is prepared, and in step D453, scenario data setting processing is performed for the prepared scenario table. Execute, and then proceed to step D454.
Next, in step D454, scenario layer number 2 is prepared, in step D455, a scenario table for the right symbol reach start effect (for example, the one shown in the middle of FIG. 148) is prepared, and in step D456, scenario data setting processing is performed for the prepared scenario table. Is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D457.
Next, in step D457, the scenario layer number 4 is prepared, in step D458, a scenario table for the tiger taro reach start effect (for example, the one shown in the lower part of FIG. 148) is prepared, and in step D459, scenario data setting processing is performed for the prepared scenario table. And then return.

As described above, the scenario data setting process is to be executed in the scenario management storage area (“scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number. This is a process for setting scenario control data for production.
In steps D451 to D459, scenario control data for executing the reach start effect is set.
Further, just because the "scenario table of the tiger taro reach start effect" is prepared and set in step D458, the characters appearing in this reach start effect are not limited to "tiger taro". The "scenario table of the tiger taro reach start effect" is merely a name given to the scenario table in the specification of the present application for convenience of explanation.
Further, in this example, as described above, the scenario layers of scenario layer numbers 1, 2 and 4 are used for the reach start effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the scenario table of the tiger taro reach start effect may be set in the scenario layer of scenario layer number 5.

[SD1 fluctuation setting process]
Next, the SD1 variation setting process executed in step D444 of the variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 102.
In this process, steps D461 to D477 are sequentially executed and then returned.
In step D461, for example, a stop symbol setting process (details omitted) is executed in which the stop symbol of the decorative special symbol is set based on the symbol type saved in step D372 and stored in the stop symbol area.
The stop symbol area exists for each of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and is used in the symbol stop process described later. Further, the variation of SD1 in this embodiment may be a big hit, and in step D461, an out-of-order symbol or a jackpot symbol is set based on the symbol type saved in step D372.

In step D462, the address (name of the scenario table) of the scenario table of SD1 corresponding to the ACT and the first half variation type is saved in the symbol variation scenario table area. The symbol variation scenario table area is a storage area of the RAM 311a (or RAM 326) of the effect control device 300 that temporarily stores the address of the symbol variation scenario table to be used, and is for the left symbol area and the right symbol area. It is divided into an area and a middle symbol area, and each symbol area is further divided into 1st (early stage), 2nd (first half), and 3rd (second half), and a total of 9 areas for storing the address of one scenario table. There are pieces (= 3 x 3 pieces). On the other hand, the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300 is a table for selecting a scenario table for symbol variation according to a command received from the game control device and the first half variation type (or further, the effect mode or the advance notice type) (hereinafter,). , Design fluctuation list table) is registered for each command (for each ACT data). In step D462, for example, the symbol variation list table corresponding to the ACT is first selected, and then the setting pattern corresponding to the first half variation type and the like is selected from the plurality of setting patterns in the selected symbol variation list table. Then, the address of the scenario table of the selected setting pattern is saved in the symbol variation scenario table area. In step D462 above, a combination of scenario tables for performing a variation effect called SD1 in SD mode is selected and saved, but for example, a combination that is different depending on whether it is a big hit or a miss (at least 3rd (second half)). A combination of different scenario tables for)) is selected and saved.
Here, the symbol variation list table is a scenario table for the 1st (early stage), 2nd (first half), and 3rd (second half) for each of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol for each setting pattern. It is a table in which addresses are registered.

In the present application, the period in which the symbol starts to move within the first half fluctuation time is defined as the "early stage" (1st), and the remaining period within the first half fluctuation time is defined as the "first half" (2nd). Even with the same first half fluctuation time, the pattern starts to move, but there are cases where it scrolls down as it is or hopping up once (a kind of notice), so "early stage + first half = first half fluctuation" so that the movement does not become one. It is configured as. Then, the latter half fluctuation time is set to "second half" (3rd). Further, in this embodiment, in this way, the effect contents are set for each period in which the effect at the time of special figure change is divided into a plurality of time, and the entire effect at the time of special figure change is set as a combination of the effect contents of each period. It is a combination type that composes. This has the advantage of reducing the total amount of data that must be stored in the non-volatile memory for storing control data (PROM321 in this example). That is, for example, if all the tables are prepared for each effect content whose movement is slightly different, the amount of data becomes enormous, but this combination formula solves such a problem.

In step D463, scenario layer number 0 is prepared.
In step D464, the address of the background scenario table for SD1 corresponding to the ACT or the like is prepared.
In step D465, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D463 and D464.
In step D466, scenario layer number 1 is prepared.
In step D467, the left symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early stage) area in the left symbol area described above) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area described above.
In step D468, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D466 and D467.

In step D469, scenario layer number 2 is prepared.
In step D470, the right symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early stage) area in the right symbol area described above) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area described above.
In step D471, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D469 and D470.
In step D472, scenario layer number 3 is prepared.
In step D473, the middle symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early stage) area in the above-mentioned middle symbol area) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area described above.
In step D474, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D472 and D473.

In step D475, scenario layer number 7 is prepared.
In step D476, the address of the fourth symbol scenario table (scenario table for the fourth symbol) is prepared.
In step D477, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D475 and D476.
According to the routine (SD1 variation setting process) described above, the scenario layer (in this case, scenario layers 0, 1, 2, 3, 7) that needs to set the scenario control data when performing the variation effect of SD1 is performed. However, as the scenario table, for example, a combination as shown in FIGS. 159 to 161 described later (the scenario table for controlling the fourth symbol is omitted) is selected.

[Scenario setting process]
Next, the details of the scenario setting process executed in step D28 in the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to FIG. 103.
When this routine is started, steps D551 to D566 are sequentially executed and then returned.
In step D551, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) is prepared, and in the next step D552, the scenario analysis process (described later) is executed based on the preparation of step D551. .. Here, "preparing the address area" means preparing the address of the address area itself in order to read the data set in the address area in a later process.

Similarly, in step D553, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 1 (scenario layer number 1) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D554.
In step D555, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 2 (scenario layer number 2) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D556.
In step D557, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 3 (scenario layer number 3) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D558.
In step D559, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 4 (scenario layer number 4) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D560.
In step D561, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 5 (scenario layer number 5) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D562.
In step D563, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 6 (scenario layer number 6) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D564.
In step D565, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 7 (scenario layer number 7) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D566.

In the case of this example, there are eight scenario layers as described above, and the scenario layer numbers are 0 to 7. Of these eight scenario layers, basically, scenario layer 0 is for the background, scenario layer 1 is for the left symbol, scenario layer 2 is for the right symbol, and scenario layer 3 is for the middle symbol. The scenario layer 4 is for the notice 1, the scenario layer 5 is for the notice 2, the scenario layer 6 is for the hold, and the scenario layer 7 is for the fourth symbol.

However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, in this embodiment, the scenario layer is a flowchart of eight, but the number of scenario layers is not limited to this. In particular, the number of layers used for background and notice increases or decreases depending on the model specifications, and this embodiment is explained by limiting it to as few as possible. Further, the control target of each scenario layer is not limited to the above embodiment, and various allocations may be possible. For example, scenario layer 0 is for the background, scenario layer 1 is for the cut-in notice, scenario layer 2 is for the left symbol, scenario layer 3 is for the right symbol, and scenario layer 4 is for the middle symbol. There may be a mode in which the scenario layer 5 is for holding, the scenario layer 6 is for other notices, and the scenario layer 7 is for the fourth symbol.

Further, the address area of the scenario management area is provided for each scenario layer as described above, and if there is something to be controlled, the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X (any of X = 0 to 7) If the address of the scenario management area is stored in the address area and there is nothing to control, the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X is set to NULL (see steps D283 and D287 described above). .. For example, since the hold is not displayed during the movie waiting for customers, the address (address of the scenario management area 0) is set in the background area (address area of the scenario management area 0), but the hold area. NULL is set in (the address area of the scenario management area 6).
Further, the allocation of the control target of the scenario layer is only basic. For example, as shown in FIG. 136, the scenario layer 0 for the background may also control the design (decorative special figure).

[Scenario analysis processing]
Next, the details of the scenario analysis process executed in step D552 and the like in the above-mentioned scenario setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105.
When this routine is started, the brk value (data used for repeating the process described later) is first set to 0 in step D571, and then in step D572, the address area of the prepared scenario management area X is set. After loading the set data (data of the address of the scenario management area X or NULL), the process proceeds to step D573. Here, the “prepared address area of the scenario management area X” is, for example, the address area (scenario) prepared in step D551 immediately before the routine when the routine is executed in step D552 described above. The address area of the management area 0), and when this routine is executed in the above-mentioned step D554, it is the address area (address area of the scenario management area 1) prepared in the step D553 immediately before that, and the like. The case of is also prepared in the previous step.

When the process proceeds to step D573, it is determined whether the data of the address loaded in step D572 is NULL, and if it is NULL, it returns because control is unnecessary, and if it is not NULL, it proceeds to step D574.
Proceeding to step D574, the value of the scenario timer in the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572 is read, it is determined whether the value of this scenario timer is smaller than 0, and if it is smaller than 0, it returns because it is abnormal. If it is 0 or more, step D575 is executed and the process proceeds to step D576. The value of the scenario timer is first set to 0 in step D284 described above each time the scenario control data is set, but since 0 is the lower limit, if it is smaller than 0, it is determined to be abnormal. Further, in step D575, if the value of the scenario timer is not 0, the update that reduces the value of the scenario timer by 1 is executed.
When the process proceeds to step D576, it is determined whether the value of the scenario timer is greater than 0, and if it is greater than 0, it returns because the time has not yet expired, and if it is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step D577.

According to steps D574 to D576, timer management for waits is performed. That is, for the time corresponding to the value of the scenario timer set in the scenario timer area in the target scenario management area (scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572), the target scenario table (in the target scenario management area). The operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table of the address set in the scenario data table area is realized. Here, "the operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table" means to weight the progress of the scenario table (wait there without proceeding to the next row of the scenario table. Continue to produce the effect at that time). .. For example, in the 20th line (// 19) of FIG. 136, since the constant weight code is set and the wait time value is (300), the time corresponding to 300 frames stays in this line, and after the time elapses, the next It progresses to the line, but this operation corresponds to "the operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table". In the scenario table, between the line where the code between the wait time value and the wait time value (constant weight code etc. (including PB waiting code) is set) and the line where the constant weight code etc. are set next. The opcodes on the line in) are all executed at the same time. Then, when the value of the scenario timer becomes 0 or less due to the update of step D575, it is determined that the scenario timer has timed up. Therefore, in order to proceed with the control process of the target scenario table, step D576 is followed by step D577. It is configured to proceed to. However, the control process of the target scenario table (step D584 and subsequent steps) is executed after the timer management process for the PB effective time described later.

That is, when proceeding to step D577, the value of the target PB timer (the value of the PB timer area in the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572) is read, and it is determined whether the value of this PB timer is larger than 0. If it is larger than 0, the time is up and the process proceeds to step D578. If it is 0 or less, the time is up and the process proceeds to step D583.
When the process proceeds to step D578, it is determined whether the PB operation flag is set. If the PB operation flag is set, the process proceeds to step D579. If the PB operation flag is not set, the target PB timer is set in step D582. After executing the update that reduces the value of by 1, the process proceeds to step D583. Here, the PB operation flag is a flag that is set when the pressing operation of the PB (push button 9) is detected in the effect button input process executed in step D21 in the above-mentioned main process.

Proceeding to step D579, the value of the target PB timer at this time (that is, the remaining time of the PB effective time at the time when PB is pressed) is saved as the PB effect addition time, and then in step D580, the target PB The value of the timer is set to 0, and then a flag is set in the PB detection flag area of the target scenario management area in step D581 (that is, data indicating that the PB detection flag is set is set). In these steps D579 to D581, since the PB was pressed, the remaining time of the PB timer is stored as the PB effect addition time (for step D696 described later), the PB timer is reset to 0, and the PB operates. A PB detection flag indicating that this has been done is set in the scenario management area for scenario control.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D583, it is determined whether the value of the target PB timer is greater than 0, and if it is greater than 0, the PB operation is not detected and the time is not up, so a return is made, and if it is 0 or less. Since the PB operation was performed or the time was up, the process proceeds to step D584.

According to steps D577 to D583, timer management for the PB effective time is performed. That is, when the value of the PB timer larger than 0 is set in the PB timer area in the target scenario management area (scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572), it corresponds to the value of this PB timer. The operation of delaying the control progress of the target scenario table (the scenario table of the address set in the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area) and setting the PB effective time is realized by the time to be performed. Here, "the operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table and setting the PB effective time" means that the value of the target PB timer becomes 0 (that is, the PB timer times up) or the PB is pressed. It means to weight the progress of the scenario table until it is done (wait there without proceeding to the next row of the scenario table. Continue to produce at that time). For example, in the 28th line (// 27) of FIG. 136, since the constant weight code is set and the wait time value is (30), the time corresponding to 30 frames stays in this line, and after this time elapses, the next The process proceeds to the 29th line, and the operation according to the 28th line is the "operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table" by the scenario timer described above. On the other hand, in the next 29th line (// 28), since the PB wait code is set and the effective time value is (2970), this effective time value (2970) is set in the PB timer in step D702 described later. If there is no PB pressing operation, the valid time corresponding to a maximum of 2970 frames stays in this line, and if there is a PB pressing operation within this valid time, it immediately advances to the next line, but it is set in the PB timer in this way. The operation of waiting for the PB pressing operation for the effective time (PB effective time) to be performed corresponds to the "operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table and setting the PB effective time". Then, the value of the PB timer becomes 0 or less due to the update of step D582 without the operation of the PB, and the PB timer is timed up, or the PB effective time until the PB timer is timed up. If the PB is operated in the meantime, the process proceeds to step D583 via step D582 or steps D579 to D581. In this case, the determination result of step D583 becomes NO (the timer for PB is 0) and the process proceeds to step D584.
However, when the value of the PB timer set in the PB timer area is 0 from the beginning, the process proceeds from step D577 to step D583, and further proceeds from step D583 to step D584, and the control proceeds immediately (this). In this case, the PB effective time is 0 (none)). Since the PB effective time is provided in the case of a notice effect or the like, the value of the PB timer area is set to 0 in other cases, and the PB effective time is not provided.

Next, in step D584 and subsequent steps, the control process of the target scenario table is executed. This will be described below.
Proceeding to step D584, the process from step D584 to step D623, which is the end of the loop, is repeatedly executed until a non-zero value is set as the brk value. That is, in step D623, which is the end of the loop at the rear, the value of brk at that time is read, and if the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step D584 and the process is repeated from the next step D585.

That is, when the process proceeds to step D584, first steps D585 to D588 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D589.
In step D585, the address of the scenario table is loaded from the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area. For example, in the case of the scenario layer number 0 at the time of the customer waiting demonstration, the address of the scenario table shown in FIG. 136 is loaded in this step D585.
In step D586, the opcode of a specific row (designated row) of the scenario table specified by the address loaded in step D585 is acquired. As described above, in the scenario table, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, the operation code and the operand data (scenario data) are set in each line. For example, in the case of FIG. 137, if the target is the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) and the designated line is the first line, the “motion continuation code” which is the data of the operation code of the first line of the uppermost scenario layer 0. Is acquired in step D586. Further, in the case of FIG. 136, for example, when the designated line is the first line, the "motion 1 deletion code" (specific data, for example, "51h"), which is the data of the operation code of the first line, is in step D586. To be acquired. Alternatively, in the case of FIG. 136, for example, if the designated line is the 16th line, the "motion 10 registration code" (specific data, for example, "4Ah"), which is the data of the operation code on the 16th line, is acquired in step D586. Will be done.

In step D587, the operation code acquired in the immediately preceding step D586 is separated into high-order bits and low-order bits and prepared. For example, when the data of the operation code is the above-mentioned "51h", the high-order bit "5" and the low-order bit "1" are separated and prepared respectively. The upper and lower bits of the opcode have meanings (however, the lower bits may have no meaning). For example, among the "51h" which is the "motion 1 deletion code", the upper bit "5" means the motion deletion, and the lower bit "1" is the motion of the target (in this case, the target of the motion deletion). Means that the layer of is motion 1.
In step D588, the operand of a specific row (designated row) of the scenario table specified by the address loaded in step D585 is acquired and prepared. For example, in the case of FIG. 137, if the target is the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) and the designated line is the first line, the “motion index No.” which is the operand data of the first line of the uppermost scenario layer 0. (51) ”is acquired in step D588 and prepared. Further, in the case of FIG. 136, if the designated line is the 16th line (the operation code is the “motion 10 registration code”), the “motion index No. (-1)” which is the data of the operand of the 16th line is set in step D588. Get and prepare.

Proceeding to step D589, the prepared operation code upper data (data separated and prepared in step D587, the same applies hereinafter) is determined, and if it is data for instructing motion registration (motion registration code), the motion registration process (motion registration code) is performed in step D601. After executing (described later), the process proceeds to step D621, and if the data does not command motion registration, the process proceeds to step D590.
Proceeding to step D590, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is data for instructing motion deletion (motion deletion code), the motion deletion process (described later) is executed in step D602, and then the process proceeds to step D621 to delete the motion. If it is not the data instructing, the process proceeds to step D591.

Proceeding to step D591, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is data for instructing motion continuation (motion continuation code), motion continuation processing (described later) is executed in step D603, and then step D621 is performed to continue the motion. If it is not the data instructing, the process proceeds to step D592.
Proceeding to step D592, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is the data for instructing the constant weight (constant weight code), the constant weight processing (described later) is executed in step D604, and then the process proceeds to step D621 to proceed to the constant weight. If it is not the data instructing, the process proceeds to step D593.

Proceeding to step D593, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is the data for instructing the variable weight (variable weight code), the variable weight processing (described later) is executed in step D605, and then the process proceeds to step D621 to proceed to the variable weight. If it is not the data instructing, the process proceeds to step D594.
When the process proceeds to step D594, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is a PB wait command data (PB wait code), the PB wait process (described later) is executed in step D606, and then the process proceeds to step D621 to wait for PB. If it is not the data instructing, the process proceeds to step D595.

Proceeding to step D595, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is the data for instructing the PB determination branch (PB determination branch code), the PB determination branch process (described later) is executed in step D607, and then the process proceeds to step D621. If the data does not command the PB determination branch, the process proceeds to step D596.
When the process proceeds to step D596, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is the data for instructing the symbol stop (stop symbol set code), the symbol stop process is executed in step D608, and then the process proceeds to step D621 to command the symbol stop. If it is not data, the process proceeds to step D597.

Proceeding to step D597, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is the data for instructing the symbol back calculation replacement (symbol back calculation replacement code), the symbol back calculation replacement process (described later) is executed in step D609, and then the step Proceed to D621, and if it is not the data instructing the back calculation replacement of the symbol, the process proceeds to step D598.
When the process proceeds to step D598, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is a data for instructing the variable scenario switching (variable scenario switching code), the variable scenario switching process is executed in step D610 and then the process proceeds to step D621 to switch the variable scenario. If it is not the data instructing, the process proceeds to step D599.

When the process proceeds to step D599, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is a repeat command (repetition code), the repeat process is executed in step D611 and then the process proceeds to step D621. Proceed to step D600.
When the process proceeds to step D600, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is the data for instructing the end (end code), the end process is executed in step D612 and then the process proceeds to step D621. Proceed to other steps (not shown). In the other steps (the steps shown by the wavy lines in FIG. 105), the contents of the prepared opcode upper data are determined in the same manner as in steps D589 to D612 described above, and the determination results are the other steps. The process corresponding to the type of data (code) is executed and the process proceeds to step D621. If the prepared opcode upper data does not correspond to any type of data (code), a return is made. It has become.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D621, the data set at this time is read in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number, it is determined whether this data is NULL, and if it is NULL, brk in step D622. Set the value of to 1 and proceed to step D623. If it is not NULL, the process proceeds to step D623 without executing step D622.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D623, the brk value at that time is read as described above, and if the brk value is 0, the process returns to step D584 and the process is repeated from the next step D585, and the brk value is not 0. Exits this routine and returns.

Therefore, in any of the processes such as steps D601 to D612, the value of brk is set to a non-zero value, or NULL is set in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number. Then, the loop processing with steps D584 and D623 as the loop ends is completed and the process returns. Then, until the loop processing is completed in this way, the address of the scenario data table area (the address that specifies the scenario table and its row) in the scenario management area is appropriately changed, and the above loop processing is repeated in a series. The control of the production of is executed.
The above subroutine group (steps D601 to D612) is an example, and changes depending on the specifications of the model.

Here, the motion index will be described.
The motion index specifies a motion control table (motion table). For example, the "motion index No. (51)" which is the data of the operand of the first row of the scenario table of the scenario layer 0 in the uppermost stage of FIG. 137 is , Indicates that the motion index data is "51". The data of this motion index specifies a specific row of the motion list table as shown in FIG. 135, for example, and thereby identifies the motion control table (motion table).

Note that FIG. 135 is an example of a motion list table stored in the PROM 321 of the effect control device. The motion list table is a data list of the motion table in which data related to a large number of motion tables are arranged in each row (each record). The data of each row of the list table for motion is the data related to one motion table. Each row of the motion list table has a number of frames, a number of motion commands, a motion table name, a number of behaviors, and a behavior table name as data items (data categories). However, this category setting is an example, and parameters other than this may be set. The contents of each data item are as follows.
-The number of frames (number of display frames) indicates how many frames of motion data (data constituting the motion table) are defined in the motion table.
-The number of motion commands indicates the number of commands defined in the motion table.
-The motion table name indicates the name (= address) of the motion table.
-The number of behaviors indicates the number (type) of behaviors used in the motion table.
-The behavior table name indicates the name (= address) of the behavior table that defines the behavior (processing address) at the time of the motion control.
If the number of behaviors is 0, the behavior table is naturally unnecessary.

Here, the behavior is a function for setting the operation of an object (display element). In this example, it is mainly used to change the basic image data (character data) defined on the motion table according to the situation.
Further, on the right side of the motion list table in FIG. 135, the display contents corresponding to the values of the motion index are shown. For example, the value of the motion index that specifies the motion control table for the fourth symbol (variation in special figure 2) is 62. Further, the value of the motion index for specifying the motion control table for the fourth symbol (variation in special figure 1) is 61.

[Motion registration process]
Next, the details of the motion registration process executed in step D601 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 106.
When this routine is started, steps D631 and D632 are executed in sequence, and then step D633 is performed.
In step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (the address that specifies the next row of the table). This is an update process for advancing the designated row to the next row when the above-mentioned step D585 is executed next time, and the designated row of the target scenario table becomes the next row by performing this update process. The loop processing (steps D584 to D623) described above is repeated.

In step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded and prepared from the address area of the motion management area corresponding to the data of the lower bits of the operation code separated in step D587. In the case of this example, the RAM 311a of the effect control device 300 is configured to be provided with storage areas for motion management called "address area of motion management area" and "motion management area". Of these, the motion management area is the number of displays (for example, in the case of the left symbol, the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol), which is the number (maximum number) of objects to be displayed and controlled (not necessarily displayed on the screen). Area for storing (three) (area for the number of displays), area for storing the frame number indicating how many frames the processing has progressed (area for the frame number), and the number of rows in the motion table. An area for storing the command position (command position area) and an area for storing address data (corresponding to the motion index) indicating which table is used among a plurality of motion list tables (motion list). It is a structure including a table area) and a display information area for the number of displays.

In addition, there are motion management areas with the same structure corresponding to the motion layers (in this example, motions 0 to 13), and there are 14 motion layers in this example, so this motion. There are also 14 management areas (motion management areas 0 to 13). Further, corresponding to this motion management area, there are also 14 address areas of the motion management area in this example (addresses for motion 0 to addresses for motion 13). Here, since the address area of the motion management area is an area for storing the address of the motion management area, it is provided for each motion management area (that is, for each motion layer), and there are 14 in this example.
Then, in step D632, in order to specify one of the plurality of motion management areas in this way, the motion management area corresponding to the layer number of the motion specified by the data of the lower bit of the operation code (hereinafter, corresponding motion management). The start address of (referred to as area) is read from the address area of the corresponding motion management area and prepared. In the present application, the motion layer number (0 to 13 in this example) may be abbreviated as the motion number, or may be used as the motion management area X (X is a number corresponding to the motion number). In some cases.

There are multiple display information areas in the motion management area for the number of displays (the number of objects), and each display information area has a display type, an effect type, an effect parameter, an X coordinate of the upper left point of the display, and an upper left point of the display. Y coordinate, X coordinate of the upper right point of the display, Y coordinate of the upper right point of the display, X coordinate of the lower left point of the display, Y coordinate of the lower left point of the display, image index, background color, foreground color, IPicture (I picture) only video It contains an area for storing each data of the hour frame count and the behavior index.

Here, the display type is the type of the object (including information indicating whether the object is a still image or a moving image (movie), as well as information indicating the type of the movie (whether it is an I picture, etc.)). The effect type is information indicating the type of effect (processing process such as giving transparency) to be added to the image. The effect parameter is a parameter of the effect (transparency when giving transparency, etc.). The X coordinate and the Y coordinate are data for specifying the display position of the image. In this example, for the polygon display function (the function of displaying a solid as a polyhedron), the display upper left point, the display upper right point, and the display lower left point are three. There are point coordinates. The image index is a number that identifies a still image or movie. The frame count at the time of moving image of only IPicture is data indicating which frame data is IPicture (that is, I frame). The behavior index is an index for behavior (design replacement). The behavior (design replacement) is different from the cut-in character replacement in which only the character (still image or moving image) is replaced at the same size and the same display position, and the character or the like appearing in the effect display is replaced. In the cut-in character replacement, the size and display position of displaying the character can also be changed by the replacement. The cut-in character replacement process is performed by, for example, a subroutine (preliminary effect setting process 1) that is called and executed in the above-mentioned variable effect setting process, but this subroutine is not shown and the description is omitted. ..

Next, when the process proceeds to step D633, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D632 is NULL, if it is NULL, the process proceeds to step D635, and if it is not NULL, the motion data initialization process 1 (described later) is performed in step D634. After executing the above, the process proceeds to step D635.
When the process proceeds to step D635, the start address of the motion management area corresponding to the data of the lower bits of the operation code separated in step D587 is set and prepared, and the process proceeds to step D636.
When the process proceeds to step D636, the start address prepared in step D635 is set in the address area of the motion management area corresponding to the data of the lower bits of the operation code, and the process proceeds to step D637.

In any of these steps D632 to D636, finally, in step D636, the start address of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bits of the opcode separated in step D587 is set to the address area of the corresponding motion management area. However, if data of an address other than NULL has already been set in the address area of the corresponding motion management area, the motion data initialization process 1 (which sets the release of the expansion area used for video development, etc.) 1 ( Since (described later) is required, this is executed in step D634.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D637, it is determined whether the operand data prepared in step D588 is 0 or more, and if it is 0 or more, it returns after sequentially executing steps D638 to D640, and if it is less than 0 (that is, a negative value). If steps D641 to D643 are sequentially executed, the process returns.
In step D638, the operand data (operand data prepared in step D588, the same applies hereinafter) is prepared as a motion index.
In step D639, the data prepared in step D638 is set in the area for storing the in-use motion index corresponding to the lower operation code (hereinafter referred to as the in-use motion index area). The in-use motion index area is an area for storing the data of the motion index (in-use motion index) that specifies the row to be controlled in the motion list table for each motion number, and is provided for each motion number. There is. In this step D639, the data prepared in step D638 is set (that is, saved) in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the motion number specified by the lower bits of the opcode separated in step D587.
In step D640, motion data initialization process 2 (described later) for initializing data such as the number of displays is executed.

On the other hand, in step D641, the motion index data corresponding to the lower opcode is loaded from the corresponding motion index area and prepared. The motion index area includes, for example, a storage area (SU1 cut-in area, SU2 cut-in area, SU3 cut-in area) in which the motion index data is saved in the above-mentioned advance notice effect setting process 1 (not shown). .. In this step D641, among the motion index areas in the plurality of RAMs, the motion index specified by the lower bits of the opcode separated in step D587 and the current state of the gaming machine (whether or not it is in the probable change, etc.) Extract the motion index data from the area and prepare it.
Next, in step D642, the data prepared in step D641 is set in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the lower opcode.
Then, in step D643, the motion data initialization process 2 (described later) that initializes the data such as the number of displays is executed.

Of the steps D637 to D643 described above, the route in which the determination result in step D637 is YES (operand is 0 or more) and steps D638 to D640 are executed, and the determination result in step D637 is NO (operand is less than 0). The route for executing steps D6412 to D643 is different from that of the route as follows. That is, the former route is a route that uses the motion index value (fixed value) set in the scenario table stored in the ROM for control, and the latter route is stored in the motion index area in the RAM. A route that uses the motion index value (not a fixed value) for control. When you want to change the motion index to be used according to the state of the game machine (whether or not it is in the probable change, etc.), a negative value (for example, "-1") is set as the value of the operand, and the latter route is executed. It is configured to be.

[Motion data initialization process 1]
Next, the details of the motion data initialization process 1 executed in step D634 (or step D674 described later) in the above-mentioned motion registration process will be described on the left side of FIG. 107. In the description of the control process of the effect control device 300, the motion control data is data such as the number of displays and the frame number stored in the motion management area.
When this routine is started, first, step D651 to step D655 are repeatedly executed until the closing price (closing price = display number -1) is reached while increasing the variable i by an increment of 1 from the initial value 0, and then in step D656. move on. That is, in step D651, immediately after the start of the routine, the variable i is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step D652. In step D655, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step D651, and if the variable i is the closing price, the process proceeds to step D656. Then, when returning to step D651, the value of the variable i is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step D652. The closing price value is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the display number data set in the motion management area (hereinafter referred to as the target motion management area) corresponding to the lower bits of the operation code separated in step D587. .. That is, in this routine, the loop processing of steps D651 to D655 is repeatedly executed for the number of display times, and then the process proceeds to step D656.

When the process proceeds to step D652, the address of the display information area corresponding to the variable i in the target motion management area is set, and then the process proceeds to step D653. In step D652, for example, if the variable i = 0, the address of the first display information area among the plurality of display information areas existing for the number of displays is set in the target motion management area.
Proceeding to step D653, the data of the display type in the display information area for which the address is set in the immediately preceding step D652 is read, and it is determined whether or not this display type is a moving image. Then, if the display type is a moving image, the expansion area (the area used for expanding the compressed video data) is set to be released in step D654, and then the process proceeds to step D655. If the display type is not a moving image, step D654 is executed. Do not proceed to step D655. When the process proceeds to step D655, as described above, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step D651, and if the variable i is the closing price, the process proceeds to step D656.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D656, the process of initializing the parameters of the target motion management area is performed in steps D656 to D658, and then the process returns. That is, in step D656, the number of displays is set to 0, in step D657, the frame number is set to -1, and in step D658, the command position is set to 0.

[Motion data initialization process 2]
Next, the details of the motion data initialization process 2 executed in steps D640 and D643 (or step D689 described later) in the above-mentioned motion registration process will be described on the right side of FIG. 107.
When this routine is started, first, the processing of initializing the parameters of the target motion management area is performed in steps D661 to D663, and then the process proceeds to step D664. That is, in step D661, the number of displays is set to 0, in step D662, the frame number is set to -1, and in step D663, the command position is set to 0.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D664, the address (motion list table and its row) corresponding to the in-use motion index (for example, the data set in step D639 or D642) is specified in the motion list table area in the target motion management area. Set the address to be used), and then return.

[Motion deletion process]
Next, the details of the motion deletion process executed in step D602 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to the left side of FIG. 108.
When this routine is started, steps D671 and D672 are executed in sequence, and then step D673 is performed.
In step D671, similarly to step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (the address that specifies the next row of the table).
In step D672, similarly to step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded and prepared from the address area of the target motion management area, and the process proceeds to step D673.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D673, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D672 is NULL, if it is NULL, the process proceeds to step D675, and if it is not NULL, the motion data initialization process 1 is executed in step D674. Later, the process proceeds to step D675.
When the process proceeds to step D675, NULL is set in the address area of the target motion management area, and the process proceeds to step D676.
Proceeding to step D676, the data of the in-use motion index corresponding to the data of the lower bits of the operation code (the operation code separated in step D587, the same applies hereinafter) is cleared, and then the data is returned.
The motion deletion process described above is executed when the control of the character or the like is terminated, whereby the motion information (data in the address area of the motion management area and data in the motion index area in use) is deleted.

[Motion continuation processing]
Next, the details of the motion continuation process executed in step D603 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described on the right side of FIG. 108.
When this routine is started, steps D681 and D682 are executed in sequence, and then step D683 is performed.
In step D681, similarly to step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (the address that specifies the next row of the table).
In step D682, the data of the in-use motion index corresponding to the lower bits of the opcode is loaded.

Proceeding to step D683, it is determined whether the data of the in-use motion index loaded in step D682 matches the operand acquired in step D588, and if they match, it returns, and if they do not match, step D684 and subsequent steps are executed. To do. Here, it is determined whether the motion currently being controlled and the motion specified in the scenario table are the same, and if they are the same, the motion currently being controlled should be continued as it is, so it returns without any processing. If they are not the same, step D684 and subsequent steps are executed in order to perform new motion registration.
Then, in step D684 and subsequent steps, the same processing as the motion registration processing (route using the value of the scenario table) described above is performed.
That is, in step D684, similarly to step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded and prepared from the address area of the target motion management area, and the process proceeds to step D685.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D685, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D684 is NULL, if it is NULL, the process proceeds to step D687, and if it is not NULL, the motion data initialization process 1 is executed in step D686. Later, the process proceeds to step D687.
When the process proceeds to step D687, the start address of the target motion management area is set and prepared, and the process proceeds to step D688.
When the process proceeds to step D688, the start address prepared in step D687 is set in the address area of the target motion management area, and the process proceeds to step D689.
Proceeding to step D689, the motion data initialization process (the above-mentioned motion data initialization process 2) is executed.
In step D690, the data of the operand is set in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the lower bit of the operation code, and then the data of the operand is returned.
In the motion continuation process described above, if the motion information specified in the scenario table is the same as the content currently controlled, the process is continued as it is, and if it is different, a new registration process is executed. As a result, for example, if the background during normal fluctuation does not change due to reach or the like, the movie is continued over a plurality of fluctuations, but when reach occurs, new playback is performed from the head.

[Constant weight processing]
Next, the details of the constant weight processing executed in step D604 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis processing will be described from the upper side of FIG. 109.
When this routine is started, first, in step D691, the same update process as in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D692, the data of the operand is set in the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area.
Then, in step D693, the value of brk is set to 1 and the process returns.
According to this routine, a time value or the like when waiting for a specified fixed time is set. For example, in the case of the 20th line (// 19) in the scenario table shown in FIG. 136, this routine is executed because the opcode is a constant weight code, and the wait time of the operand is (300). Therefore, in step D692. 300 (10 seconds = 300 × 1/30) is set as the value of the scenario timer area. Then, since the value of brk becomes 1 in step D693, the repetition of the loop processing (steps D584 to D623) in the scenario analysis processing described above ends.

[Variable weight processing]
Next, the details of the variable weight processing executed in step D605 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis processing will be described from the lower side of FIG. 109.
When this routine is started, first, in step D695, the same update process as in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D696, a value obtained by adding the PB effect addition time (value set in step D579) to the data of the operand is set in the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area.
Then, in step D697, the value of brk is set to 1 and the process returns.

In this routine, when the effect time changes due to the player's button operation (PB operation), a time value or the like for variable time weighting is set. As a result, the earlier the button is pressed, the longer the effect to be performed after that, and the operation that the effect is performed only for a short time when the button is pressed at the last minute of the effective time is realized. For example, in the case of the 11th line (// 10) in the scenario table shown on the upper side of FIG. 142, this routine is executed because the operation code is a variable weight code, and the valid time value of the operand is (55). In D696, 55 + PB effect addition time is set as the value of the scenario timer area. Here, the PB effect addition time becomes a larger value as the player performs the PB operation earlier after the effect of prompting the player to perform the PB operation is performed (see step D579). Therefore, the sooner the player operates the PB, the longer the subsequent production will be.

[PB waiting process]
Next, the details of the PB waiting process executed in step D606 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described from the upper side of FIG. 110.
When this routine is started, first, in step D701, the same update process as in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D702, the data of the operand is set in the PB timer area of the target scenario management area.
Next, in step D703, the flag of the PB detection flag area in the target scenario management area is cleared.
Then, in step D704, the value of brk is set to 1 and the process returns.

In this routine, the setting for starting the push button effect is made. For example, in the case of the scenario table shown on the upper side of FIG. 142, the motion deletion process of motion 9 is first executed in the first row (// 0), and then the motion registration process of motion 8 is executed in the second row (// 1) (FIG. After the motion index "70" corresponding to the push button ON / OFF effect motion table "MDat0070" shown in 135 is executed), the operation code on the next third line (// 2) is the PB waiting code. Therefore, since this routine is executed and the valid time value of the operand is (90), 90 is set as the value of the timer area in step D702, and the push button effect of 3 seconds (= 90 × 1/30) starts. Will be done. In step D703, in order to start the push button effect, the value of the PB detection flag indicating that the PB (push button) has been operated is initially set to off (a state in which the flag is not set).

[PB judgment branch processing]
Next, the details of the PB determination branching process executed in step D607 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis process will be described from the lower side of FIG. 110.
When this routine is started, first, in step D711, it is determined whether the flag of the PB detection flag area in the target scenario management area is set (that is, whether the PB detection flag is set), and if it is set. To step D713, and if it is not set (when the PB detection flag is off), the process proceeds to step D712.
When the process proceeds to step D712, the same update process as in step D631 is executed and the process returns.
When the process proceeds to step D713, the same update process as in step D631 is executed and the process proceeds to step D714.
Proceeding to step D714, it is determined whether the address update process of step D713 has been completed by the amount of the operand data prepared in step D588, and if it is completed, it returns, and if it is not completed, it returns to step D713 and performs the process. repeat.

This routine is executed when the PB timer that measures the effective time without pressing the push button in the above-mentioned push button effect has timed up, or when the PB is pressed within the effective time and the timer is forcibly set to 0. It is a process to be performed. Then, when the time is up without pressing PB, the process proceeds to step D712 through step D711, and the designated row of the scenario table advances by one row and returns. If PB is pressed within the valid time, the process proceeds to step D713 through step D711, and the designated row of the scenario table jumps by the amount specified by the operand.

For example, in the case of the scenario table shown on the upper side of FIG. 142, when the control up to the third line is completed as described above, this routine is executed because the operation code of the next fourth line (// 3) is the PB judgment branch code. Since the number of table jumps of the operand is (3), if PB is pressed within the valid time and the process proceeds to step D713, the determination result of step D714 is NO until step D713 is executed three times. As a result, the next designated row in the scenario table jumps to the 7th row (// 6). Then, when jumping to the 7th line, the effect of the 7th line and thereafter (in the case of the upper side of FIG. 142, the effect that the character of the military commander appears on the display screen as motion 8 and outputs the voice of the dialogue) is started. On the other hand, even when this routine is executed as described above, if PB is not pressed within the valid time, step D712 is executed only once and returns (this routine ends). The designated line on the upper side becomes the next 5th line (// 4), the motion deletion process of motion 8 is executed by this 5th line, and then the end process described later is executed by the 6th line, and the push described above is performed. The button production simply ends (the warlord character does not appear).

[Symbol stop processing]
Next, the details of the symbol stop processing executed in step D608 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. 111.
When this routine is started, first, in step D721, the same update process as in step D631 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D722.
When the process proceeds to step D722, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the left symbol, and if it is the left symbol, it returns after executing step D727, and if it is not the left symbol, it proceeds to step D723. In step D727, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (left) (for example, the value set in step D461 described above) is set as the current symbol (left).
When the process proceeds to step D723, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the right symbol, and if it is the right symbol, it returns after executing step D728, and if it is not the right symbol, it proceeds to step D724. In step D728, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (right) (for example, the value set in step D461 described above) is set as the current symbol (right).

When the process proceeds to step D724, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the middle symbol, and if it is the middle symbol, step D729 is executed and then the process proceeds to step D729a. If it is not the middle symbol, the process proceeds to step D725. In step D729, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (middle) (for example, the value set in step D461 described above) is set as the current symbol (middle).
When the process proceeds to step D729a, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect is being executed. If it is being executed, the process proceeds to step D729b, and if it is not being executed, the process returns. Whether or not the pre-reading effect is being executed is determined by determining that the pre-reading effect is being executed if the pre-reading effect executing flag is set.
Proceeding to step D729b, it is determined whether the number of pre-reading effects is zero, and if it is zero, the pre-reading effect is finished, so a return is made after clearing the pre-reading effect executing flag in step D729c. Return without executing D729c.

The number of pre-reading effects is the number of pre-reading executions, and is a case where the pre-reading effect (pre-reading notice) is performed in the pre-reading lottery process (not shown), which is a subroutine executed in the pre-reading variable command process in step D186 described above. Is set to, and is updated by -1 at the start of the special figure fluctuation in step D407 described above.
Further, the pre-reading effect executing flag is a flag set when the pre-reading effect (pre-reading notice) is performed in the pre-reading lottery process (not shown). In the case of this example, the fluctuation of the special figure stops in the order of left → right → middle, so clear the pre-reading effect execution flag at such a place (that is, the place where the middle symbol is stopped on the flowchart). (Steps D729a to D729c described above) are included. That is, in the state where the pre-reading effect executing flag is set and the pre-reading effect is being executed, when the number of pre-reading effects becomes zero, the pre-reading effect executing flag is cleared at the timing when the middle symbol stops. If the model has a different stop order for special figure fluctuations, the process may be performed to clear the symbol at the timing when the last stopped symbol is stopped.
Although omitted, processing such as checking the time reduction and the end of the number of fluctuations with a high probability is also performed at the same location on the flowchart (the location executed when the determination result in step D724 is YES).

Proceeding to step D725, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the special figure 1 fourth symbol (the fourth symbol of the special figure 1), and if it is the special figure 1 fourth symbol, step D730 is executed. After that, it returns and proceeds to step D726 if it is not the special figure 1 fourth symbol. In step D730, the value of the special symbol stop symbol region (special diagram 1 fourth symbol) is set as the current symbol (special diagram 1 fourth symbol).

Proceeding to step D726, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the special figure 2 fourth symbol (the fourth symbol of the special figure 2), and if it is the special figure 2 fourth symbol, step D731 is performed. It returns after execution, and returns if it is not the special figure 2 fourth symbol. In step D731, the value of the special symbol stop symbol region (special diagram 2 fourth symbol) is set as the current symbol (special diagram 2 fourth symbol).
This routine is a process for stopping the variable display of a symbol such as a decorative special symbol, and steps D727, D728, D729, D730, and D731 are processes for setting the stop symbol. For example, when the sixth row in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 137 is the designated row, since the operation code is the stop symbol set code (left symbol), this routine is executed and the determination result in step D722 is YES. , The above step D727 is executed, and the stop symbol of the left symbol of the special symbol is set.

[Design back calculation replacement processing]
Next, the details of the symbol back calculation replacement process executed in step D609 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 112.
When this routine is started, first, in step D741, the same update process as in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D742, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the left symbol, and if it is the left symbol, steps D743 and D744 are executed and then the process proceeds to step D745. If it is not the left symbol, step D748 is performed. move on.
In step D743, the remainder (operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the data of the operand by 9 is set as the frame difference.

In step D744, the result of subtracting the frame difference (value set in step D743) from the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (left) is set as the symbol number.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D745, it is determined whether the symbol number set in step D744 is less than 0 (minus value), and if it is less than 0, step D746 is executed and then step D747 is executed to return, and if it is not less than 0. Returns after executing step D747 without executing step D746.
In step D746, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D747, the value of the symbol number (the value set in step D744 and adjusted in step D746 in the case of a minus) is set as the current symbol (left).

Next, when the process proceeds to step D748, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the right symbol, and if it is the right symbol, steps D749 and D750 are executed and then the process proceeds to step D751. Proceed to D754.
In step D749, the remainder (operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the data of the operand by 9 is set as the frame difference.

In step D750, the result of subtracting the frame difference (value set in step D749) from the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (right) is set as the symbol number.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D751, it is determined whether the symbol number set in step D750 is less than 0. If it is less than 0, step D752 is executed and then step D753 is executed to return. If it is not less than 0, step D752 is performed. It returns after executing step D753 without executing it.
In step D752, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D753, the value of the symbol number (the value set in step D750 and adjusted in step D752 in the case of a minus) is set as the current symbol (right).

Next, when the process proceeds to step D754, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the middle symbol, and if it is the middle symbol, steps D755 and D756 are executed and then the process proceeds to step D757. To do.
In step D755, the remainder (operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the data of the operand by 9 is set as the frame difference.

In step D756, the result of subtracting the frame difference (value set in step D755) from the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (middle) is set as the symbol number.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D757, it is determined whether the symbol number set in step D756 is less than 0. If it is less than 0, step D758 is executed and then step D759 is executed to return. If it is not less than 0, step D758 is performed. It returns after executing step D759 without executing it.
In step D758, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D759, the value of the symbol number (the value set in step D756 and corrected in step D758 in the case of a minus) is set as the current symbol (middle).

The symbol back calculation replacement process described above is a process of replacing a symbol with a symbol several frames before the scheduled stop (a symbol a few frames before the symbol feed), such as at the moment of slowdown after the end of high-speed fluctuation.
For example, when the third line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 137 is the designated line, since the opcode is the left symbol back calculation replacement code, this routine is executed and the determination result in step D742 is YES, and the above Steps D743 to D747 are executed to set the current symbol (left). In this case, the operand is data meaning the number of symbol feeds, and in the third line of MS_LZ100, the operand is the number of feed frames (2). Therefore, in step D743, the remainder of the division of 2/9 is 2 Is set as the frame difference, and the symbol number is set in step D744 using the value of this frame difference. For example, if the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (left) is 1, -1 (= 1-2) is set as the symbol number, and if the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (left) is 7, 5 (=). 7-2) is set as the symbol number. Then, if the symbol number set in step D744 is a negative value (for example, -1), step D746 is executed and the symbol number is changed to a value that has been cycled (for example, if it is -1, 8 = -1 + 9). After that, the symbol number is registered as the current symbol (left) in step D747.

The above operation is the same in the case of the right symbol (steps D748 to D753) and the case of the middle symbol (steps D754 to D759). Further, "9" in step D743 and the like represents the number of symbols in each reel (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol). This may not be 9 depending on the model, and may be a different value for each reel.

[Variable scenario switching process]
Next, the details of the variable scenario switching process executed in step D610 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 113.
When this routine is started, first, in step D761, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the left symbol scenario 2nd (instructing the switching of the variation display of the left symbol to the 2nd (first half)), and the left symbol scenario If it is 2nd, steps D762 to 765 are sequentially executed and then returned, and if it is not the left symbol scenario 2nd, the process proceeds to step D767.
In step D762, the scenario layer number 1 is prepared because it is the left symbol.

In step D763, the address of the left symbol scenario 2nd table (scenario table for the left symbol and for the 2nd (first half)) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area. In the symbol variation scenario table area, as described in step D462 described above, various symbol variation scenario tables (for 1st (early stage), 2nd (first half), 3rd (second half)) are provided. The addresses of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol (existing respectively) are stored, and in this step D763, the address of the scenario table for the 2nd (first half) for the left symbol is prepared.
In step D764, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D762 and D763.
In step D765, the address of the scenario management area 1 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area (for example, the address area of the scenario management area prepared in step D553 or the like) and returned. As a result, the scenario management area 1 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D767, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the right symbol scenario 2nd (instructing the switching of the variation display of the right symbol to 2nd), and if it is the right symbol scenario 2nd, steps D768 to After executing 771 sequentially, it returns, and if it is not the right symbol scenario 2nd, the process proceeds to step D772.
In step D768, the scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is the right pattern.

In step D769, the address of the right symbol scenario 2nd table (scenario table for the right symbol and for the 2nd) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D770, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D768 and D769.
In step D771, the address of the scenario management area 2 is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area, and the screen returns. As a result, the scenario management area 2 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D772, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the middle symbol scenario 2nd (instructing the switching of the variation display of the middle symbol to the 2nd), and if it is the middle symbol scenario 2nd, steps D773 to After executing 776 sequentially, it returns, and if it is not the middle symbol scenario 2nd, the process proceeds to step D777.
In step D773, the scenario layer number 3 is prepared because it is a medium symbol.

In step D774, the address of the middle symbol scenario 2nd table (scenario table for the middle symbol and for the 2nd) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D775, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D773 and D774.
In step D776, the address of the scenario management area 3 is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area, and the screen returns. As a result, the scenario management area 3 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D777, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the left symbol scenario 3rd (instructing the switching of the variation display of the left symbol to 3rd (second half)), and if it is the left symbol scenario 3rd. It returns after sequentially executing steps D778 to 781, and proceeds to step D782 if it is not the left symbol scenario 3rd.
In step D778, the scenario layer number 1 is prepared because it is the left symbol.

In step D779, the address of the left symbol scenario 3rd table (scenario table for the left symbol and for the 3rd (second half)) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D780, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D778 and D779.
In step D781, the address of the scenario management area 1 is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area, and the screen returns. As a result, the scenario management area 1 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D782, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the right symbol scenario 3rd (instructing the switching of the variation display of the right symbol to 3rd), and if it is the right symbol scenario 3rd, steps D783 to After executing 786 in sequence, it returns, and if it is not the right symbol scenario 3rd, the process proceeds to step D787.
In step D783, the scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is the right pattern.

In step D784, the address of the right symbol scenario 3rd table (scenario table for the right symbol and for 3rd) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D785, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D783 and D784.
In step D786, the address of the scenario management area 2 is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area, and the screen returns. As a result, the scenario management area 2 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D787, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the middle symbol scenario 3rd (instructing the switching of the variation display of the middle symbol to 3rd), and if it is the middle symbol scenario 3rd, steps D788 to It returns after executing 791 in sequence, and returns if it is not the middle symbol scenario 3rd.
In step D788, the scenario layer number 3 is prepared because it is a medium symbol.

In step D789, the address of the middle symbol scenario 3rd table (scenario table for the middle symbol and for the 3rd) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D790, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D788 and D789.
In step D791, the address of the scenario management area 3 is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area, and the screen returns. As a result, the scenario management area 3 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

According to the fluctuation scenario switching process described above, the scenario switching of the section of the symbol fluctuation described above, that is, the switching of the scenario from the 1st (early stage) to the 2nd (first half) or from the 2nd (first half) to the 3rd (second half). Is done. In other words, in the variation display effect of the decorative special map, one variation is usually divided into three sections, "early stage, first half, second half", and the scenario of each section is switched and connected by this routine. For example, when the 9th line (// 8) of the last line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 137 is the specified line, the opcode is the variable scenario switching code and the operand is the left symbol scenario 2nd, so this routine Is executed, the determination result of the above step D761 becomes YES, the above steps D762 to D765 are executed, and a new scenario table (for example, MS_LZ300 shown in FIG. 137) for the left symbol and for the 2nd (first half) is controlled. It is set as a scenario table, and the setting to execute this scenario table will be made.
It should be noted that the time value of the "early stage, first half, second half" division differs depending on the type of fluctuation. There are also fluctuations without 3rd (second half) (variations without reach, etc.).

[Repeat processing]
Next, the details of the iterative process executed in step D611 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described from the upper side of FIG. 114.
When this routine is started, first, in step D795, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is returned to the previous record (the address that specifies the row immediately before the scenario table).
Next, in step D796, step D795 is executed for the operand acquired in step D588 to determine whether or not the table address has been returned to the previous record. Return to step D795 and repeat the process.

The iterative process described above is used when returning to a predetermined stage of the scenario table and repeating the operation in the same scenario. For example, when the 52nd line (// 51) of the last line in the scenario table shown in FIG. 136 is the specified line, this routine is executed because the opcode is the repetition code and the operand is the number of returns (22). When the step D795 is executed 22 times, the determination result of the step D796 becomes YES and the routine ends. As a result, the designated row of the scenario table is the 30th row (// 29) 22 rows before. Return to. The 30th line of the scenario table shown in FIG. 136 is the line for starting the movie of the customer waiting demo production (the operation code is the motion 0 registration code and the operand is the motion index No. (13)). Following the movie, the table structure is such that the design of the customer waiting demo production is displayed. Therefore, after that, the movie display and the symbol display as the customer waiting demo effect are repeated, and the data for one loop (data from the 30th row to the last row of the scenario table shown in FIG. 136) should be prepared. It will be done.

〔End processing〕
Next, the details of the termination process executed in step D612 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis process will be described from the lower side of FIG. 114.
When this routine is started, in step D798, NULL is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area and returned. As a result, the setting of the target scenario management area is eliminated, and the scenario ends.
For example, when the 15th line (// 14) of the last line of the scenario table shown on the upper side of FIG. 142 is the specified line, since the operation code is the end code, this routine is executed and the target scenario management area is executed in step D798. The address area of is set to NULL, and the scenario ends. In this way, this routine is executed when all the scenarios in the series are completed.

[Motion control processing]
Next, the details of the motion control process executed in step D30 in the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to FIG. 115.
When this routine is started, the loop processing of steps D801 to D818 is repeatedly executed while increasing the number X of the target motion management area from 0, and the end condition of this loop processing (control for all motion management areas 0 to 13). Returns when is satisfied. That is, at the start of this routine, first, in step D801, the number of the target motion management area is set to 0 (X = 0), the process proceeds to step D802 to execute the processes after step D802, but when the process proceeds to step D817, the target motion The number of the management area is increased by 1 (that is, X = X + 1) to determine whether the above end condition (X = 14) is satisfied in step D818, and if it is satisfied, a return is made, and if not, step D801 It is configured to return to step D802 and proceed to step D802.

Hereinafter, steps D802 and subsequent steps will be described assuming that the number of the target motion management area is X (actually, in the case of this example, any of 0 to 13).
Proceeding to step D802, the initialization flag used in this routine is cleared, the address of the motion management area X is loaded from the address area of the motion management area X in the next step D803, and then the process proceeds to step D804.
When the process proceeds to step D804, it is determined whether the data of the address loaded in step D803 is NULL, and if it is NULL, control is not required for the motion X (the layer of the motion corresponding to the motion management area X), so the process proceeds to step D817 and the NULL If not, the process proceeds to step D805.

In step D805, the data of the motion list table area in the motion management area X (that is, the data that specifies the motion list table to be controlled this time and its rows) is loaded and prepared based on the address loaded in step D803. The process proceeds to step D806.
Proceeding to step D806, the data of the number of display frames in the row (hereinafter referred to as the designated row) of the motion list table specified by the data loaded in step D805 is read, and this number of display frames (the number of frames for executing a certain motion). If it is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step D817, which is abnormal, and if it is not 0 or less, the process proceeds to step D807, which is normal. For example, assuming that the first row in the motion list table shown in FIG. 135 is a designated row, the number of frames (number of display frames) is "1", so the determination result in step D806 is NO and step D807. Proceed to. Further, for example, if the fourth row in the list table is the designated row, the number of frames (number of display frames) is "216", so the determination result in step D806 is also NO, and the process proceeds to step D807. In this way, since the execution period is different for each motion, the number of display frames corresponding to each is defined on the motion list table, and the number of display frames should be defined for at least one frame. If the definition value of the number of frames on the motion list table is 0 or less, it is abnormal.

Proceeding to step D807, the value of the frame number in the motion management area X is read, it is determined whether the value of this frame number is less than 0, and if it is less than 0, it is when a motion is newly registered (at the time of motion registration). After executing step D808 (setting of initialization flag), the process proceeds to step D809. If it is not less than 0, it is considered that the motion is not registered and step D808 is not executed and the process proceeds to step D809. Since the frame number is set to "-1" in steps D657 and D662 in the above-mentioned motion data initialization processes 1 and 2 at the time of motion registration, the initialization flag is set in step D808 at the time of motion registration. Ru. It should be noted that this initialization flag is a flag that is cleared in step D802 described above and determined in step D812 described later.

Proceeding to step D809, it is determined whether the value of the frame number in the motion management area X has reached the final number of frames (that is, the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of display frames described above) or more, and if it is less than the final number of frames, step D812. If the number of frames is equal to or greater than the final number of frames, steps D810 and D811 are sequentially executed, and then step D812 is performed.
In step D810, the motion data initialization process 1 described above is executed, and in step D811, the initialization flag is set as in step D808.
Here, the fact that the frame number (starting from 0) reaches the final number of frames means that the control of the target motion table is completed up to the final frame. Therefore, if the determination result in step D809 is YES (the frame number has reached the final number of frames), the motion data initialization process 1 and the initialization flag set are executed in the same manner as at the time of motion registration, and the same. The motion table is configured to be executed from the beginning again.

When the process proceeds to step D812, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag is set, and if it is set, steps D813, D814, and D815 are executed in order to execute the target motion table from the beginning, and then step D816 is performed. If the initialization flag is not set (that is, if it is cleared), step D819 is executed and then step D816 is performed.
In steps D813, D814, and D815, the values of the frame number, the number of displays, and the command position in the motion management area X are set to 0, respectively.
In step D819, an update is performed in which the value of the frame number in the motion management area X is incremented by 1. The reason for proceeding to step D819 is that the initialization flag is not set (that is, the target motion table is being executed), so that the frame number needs to be sequentially increased.

The display number value (value indicating the number of objects under control) set to 0 in step D814 is added or deleted by an object in the motion command execution process described later (for example, in step D881 described later). If it is, it will be updated (+1 or -1). Further, the value of the command position (value indicating the number of rows in the motion table) set to 0 in step D815 is also updated in the motion command execution process described later (for example, in step D880 described later). Note that the value of the command position is 0 indicates that the designated line in the motion table is the first line. The display number value is the number of objects under control, not the number of objects (designs, notice characters, etc.) that are actually displayed at the same time on the screen.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D816, a motion command execution process (described later) for executing control of the target motion table is executed, and the process proceeds to step D817.
Proceeding to step D817, the address of the address area itself of the motion management area is updated. That is, the update that increases the value of the number X in the motion management area by 1 is executed. As a result, the target motion management area and the target motion layer are switched to the next. For example, if the motion management area 1 (the motion layer is motion 1) is the control target before the execution of this step D817, the motion management area 2 (the motion layer is motion 2) is the control target after the execution. ..
Then, when step D817 is executed, the process proceeds to step D818, and if the above-mentioned end condition (in this example, the number X = 14 is satisfied) is satisfied, a return is made, and if not, the process returns to step D801. The process is repeated from step D802.

[Motion command execution process]
Next, the details of the motion command execution process executed in step D816 in the above-mentioned motion control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117.
When this routine is started, first, in step D821, from the motion list table area in the motion management area X (target motion management area), the data of the address of the motion list table (also referred to as the motion list table) (that is, that is). The motion list table to be controlled this time and the data for specifying the row) are loaded, and the process proceeds to step D822.

Proceeding to step D822, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is read, and the value of this command position is the number of motion commands (the number of motion commands in the specified line of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D821). If it is more than the number of motion commands, it returns because all commands (all rows of the target motion table) have been executed, and if it is not more than the number of motion commands, it is the target. Step D823 proceeds to execute the motion table of the above for the next frame. For example, assuming that the fourth row in the motion list table shown in FIG. 135 is a designated row, the number of motion commands is "1830". Therefore, in step D822, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is "1830". If it is not more than "1830", the process proceeds to step D823. Further, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is initially initialized to 0 in steps D658, D663 and the like in the above-mentioned motion data initialization processes 1 and 2, and each row (command) of the motion table is initialized in step D845 described later. Is updated by +1 each time is executed, so if this value is "1830" or more, all the rows of the target motion table have been executed, so the configuration is such that a return is made.

Proceeding to step D823, the address (motion table name) of the motion table is acquired from the specified row of the target motion list table (the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D821). Step D824 proceeds. For example, assuming that the fourth row in the motion list table shown in FIG. 135 is the designated row, since the motion table name is "Mdat003", this "Mdat003" is acquired as the address of the motion table (from ROM (PROM321)). Take out). In the motion list table area of the RAM (RAM311a), the address of the leftmost column (position of the number of frames) of the motion list table (pointing to the address of the table in the ROM) is stored, and is described above. In step D821, this address is loaded from the motion list table area of the RAM. Then, in step D823, the value of the "motion table name (address)" indicated by the address two records ahead of the address loaded in step D821 is read from the ROM.
In this example, since the address of the motion table and the name of the motion table correspond to each other, if the name of the motion table is acquired, the address of the motion table is acquired.

Further, as described above, the motion table is a control table for executing each blocked display effect, but details will be described here. In the present application, an example of the motion table at the time of the push button notice is shown on the lower side of FIG. 142 described above, an example of the motion table at the start of the normal fluctuation of the left symbol is shown in FIG. 138, and other figures are also shown. Many such motion tables are registered in the ROM (PROM321 in this example). As shown in these figures, each row of the motion table is set with the command code at the beginning, followed by the parameters corresponding to the command. However, there may be no parameters.

For example, the command "additional 1 code" and the parameter "character No. (design" 2 ")" are set in the first line of FIG. 138, and the command "behavior code" is set in the second line of the same. Parameters "Object index (0)" and "Behavior index (0)" are set, and on the 7th line, the command "Move 1 code" and "Object index (0)", "X coordinate (0)" , "Y coordinate (-493)", "image width data (296)", "image height data (490)" are set, and on the 10th line, only the command "end code" is displayed. It is set. Here, the object index is a number assigned to the object to distinguish each object, and is automatically set in the order of being registered by the additional code. For example, the symbol "2" additionally registered in the first row of FIG. 138 becomes the object index (0), and the symbol "1" additionally registered in the third row becomes the object index (1), and in the fifth row. The additionally registered symbol "9" becomes the object index (2), and the value of the object index increases based on the number of characters (number of objects) to be displayed.

The smaller the value of this object index, the deeper the screen will be displayed as the context of the display layer. That is, when the display positions overlap, the object having a large object index value is preferentially displayed on the screen.
Further, in the example of FIG. 138, three characters appear, but the total number of all characters in other categories (such as notices) used at the same time is managed to be 128. That is, in the VDP 312 of this example, 128 characters can be displayed and controlled at the same time. Since characters can be placed outside the screen, the number is not limited to 128 inside the screen.
Further, the example of FIG. 138 is data for the first four frames of the motion table of the normal fluctuation (first half) of the left symbol. The delimiter to the end code is the data for one frame. For example, the first to tenth lines are the data for the first frame. Further, the numerical values such as the coordinate data and the size data only describe the values that are the meaning of this embodiment, and may be data including information after the decimal point. Actually, it is 16-bit signed fixed decimal data (sign bit, integer part 13 bits, decimal part 2 bits 2's complement).
If the same state as the previous frame is to be continued, only the end code needs to be defined.

The types and meanings of the motion table commands in this example are as follows.
-"Additional code": A command to add (register) an object. Depending on the type of object to be added (bitmap, moving image, single color rectangle), there are 1 additional code, 2 additional codes, and 3 additional codes, respectively.
-"Insert code": A command that inserts an object as a specific object index. Depending on the type of object to be inserted (same as above), there are insertion 1 code, insertion 2 code, and insertion 3 code. By executing this insertion code, the value of the object index of the already registered object deviates.
-"Move code": A command that specifies the display position and display size of an object. Depending on the designation method (1 point designation, 3 point designation), there are 1 movement code and 2 movement codes.
-"Effect code": A command that commands an effect that applies processing such as transparency to an image. There is an effect 1 code that specifies the effect type, an effect 2 code that specifies the effect parameter (for example, the transparency value (%)), and an effect 3 code that specifies the effect color.
-"Delete code": A command that commands the deletion of an object.
-"Change code": A command that commands a change to change an object's character (design, characters, etc.) by continuing the movement in the middle of the movement and replacing it.
-"Decode code": A command that commands decoding (decoding) of video data.
-"Replacement code": A command for commanding replacement of objects (for example, control of switching characters of object index 0 and object index 1).
-"Behavior code": A command that commands the replacement of the character of an object.
-"Copy code": A command for cutting out, copying, and displaying a part or all of an image (bitmap, moving image, monochrome rectangle) of an existing object registered by the additional code or insertion code. In this embodiment, there is a copy 2 code that cuts out a moving image into a rectangular shape. In addition, for example, there may be a copy 1 code that cuts out a bitmap that is a still image, or there may be a copy code that cuts out into a triangular shape or a circular shape instead of a rectangular shape.
-"Inverted code": A command for displaying an inverted image of an existing object image (bitmap, moving image, monochrome rectangle) registered by the additional code or insertion code. In this embodiment, there is an inversion 2 code that inverts a moving image in the left-right direction (horizontal direction, X coordinate direction). In addition, for example, there may be an inversion 1 code that inverts a bitmap that is a still image in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction, X coordinate direction), or an inversion that inverts in the vertical direction (vertical direction, Y coordinate direction). There may be code.
-"Exit code": A command that indicates the end of data for one frame.
The motion table command is not limited to the one described above, and may include a command other than the above, or a mode in which any of the above commands is deleted. For example, there may be a "rotation code" as a command to specify the display angle of the object. Specifically, a rotation 1 code that specifies the angle of rotation along the display surface (rotation about an axis orthogonal to the display surface) and a mode of tilting with respect to the display surface (the image is three-dimensional in the front-back direction). A rotation 2 code or the like for designating the angle of rotation (rotation about an axis parallel to the display surface) may be set.

Next, the processes after the step D823 will be described.
After passing through step D823, the process proceeds to step D824, and the loop processing with step D824 and step D846 as the loop end is repeatedly executed until the end condition (command = end) is satisfied. That is, immediately after the motion registration or the like, the command position k of the target motion management area X is set to 0 (a value that specifies the first row of the motion table) by the above-mentioned steps D658, D663, and D815 (k). = 0), each time the loop processing of steps D824 to D846 is repeated, the value of the command position k of the motion management area X is increased by 1 in steps D845 and D880 described later (k = k + 1), and the end condition described above is performed in step D844. It is determined whether (the command at the command position k is the end command) is satisfied, and if it is satisfied, it returns through step D846, and if it is not satisfied, it returns to step D824 via step D846 and proceeds to step D825. It has become.

Hereinafter, steps D825 and subsequent steps will be described assuming that the value of the command position of the target motion management area X is k.
Proceeding to step D825, the line corresponding to the command position k in the target motion table (motion table of the address acquired in step D823) (for example, the first line if k = 0, the second line if k = 1), ... If k = N, the command of N + 1 line) is acquired, and then the command determination of whether or not each code is applicable is sequentially executed in steps D826 to D843 for this command, and any of the command determination results is YES. Then, the corresponding process (any of steps D851 to D868) is executed, and the process proceeds to step D846.

That is, in step D826, it is determined whether the code is an additional 1 code, and if YES, the bitmap addition process (process of adding a still image as an object, details will be described later) is performed in step D851, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, step D827 is performed. Proceed to.
In step D827, it is determined whether or not the additional 2 codes are used. If YES, the movement addition process (process of adding a moving image as an object, details will be described later) is performed in step D852, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D828.
In step D828, it was determined whether the code was an additional 3 codes, and if YES, a single color rectangle addition process (a process of adding a single color rectangle image that does not use the data of the character ROM (image ROM 322) as an object, details are omitted) was performed in step D853. Later, the process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D829.
In step D829, it is determined whether the code is insertion 1, and if YES, the bitmap insertion process (processing of inserting a still image as an object, details are omitted) is performed in step D854, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D830. move on.

In step D830, it is determined whether the code is the insertion 2 code, and if YES, the moving image insertion process (processing of inserting the moving image as an object, details are omitted) is performed in step D855, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D831.
In step D831, it is determined whether the code is insertion 3, and if YES, the single color rectangle insertion process (the process of inserting the single color rectangular image as an object, details are omitted) is performed in step D856, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the step Proceed to D832.
In step D832, it is determined whether the movement is one code, and if YES, one point designation object movement processing (processing for setting the display position and display size of the object by the one point designation method, details will be described later) is performed in step D857. The process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D833.
In step D833, it was determined whether the movement was 2 codes, and if YES, a 3-point designation object movement process (a process of setting the display position and display size of the object by the 3-point designation method, details are omitted) was performed in step D858. Later, the process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D834.

In step D834, it is determined whether the chord is the effect 1, and if YES, the effect type designation process (described later) is performed in step D859, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D835.
In step D835, it is determined whether the chord is the effect 2, and if YES, the effect parameter specification process (described later) is performed in step D860, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D836.
In step D836, it is determined whether the chord is the effect 3, and if YES, the effect color designation process (process for setting the effect color, details are omitted) is performed in step D861, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D837.
In step D837, it is determined whether the code is a deletion code. If YES, the object deletion process (process for deleting the object, details will be described later) is performed in step D862, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D838.

In step D838, it is determined whether the code is a change code. If YES, the object change process (process for changing the object, details will be described later) is performed in step D863, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D839.
In step D839, it is determined whether the code is a decoding code. If YES, the object moving image decoding process (details will be described later) is performed in step D864, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D840.
In step D840, it is determined whether the code is a replacement code, and if YES, the object replacement process (process of replacing objects, details are omitted) is performed in step D865, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D841.
In step D841, it is determined whether the code is a behavior code, and if YES, the behavior index setting process (details will be described later) is performed in step D866, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D842.

In step D842, it is determined whether the code is a copy 2 code, and if YES, a rectangular copy process (process for cutting out and displaying a part of an object (moving image), details are omitted) is performed in step D867, and then the process proceeds to step D846, and NO. Then, the process proceeds to step D843. When this rectangular copying process is executed, a part of the one-frame image of the target object (video) specified by the parameter attached to the copying 2 code in the line at the command position k will be described later, for example. It becomes the designated image in the character drawing process of step E58, and this is configured to be drawn in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer of VDP 312) in step E76 described later. Note that such copying processing is also possible when the object is a still image.

In step D843, it is determined whether the code is inverted 2 and if YES, horizontal inversion processing (processing for inverting the object (moving object) in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) and displaying it, details are omitted) is performed in step D868. The process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D844. When this horizontal reversal process is executed, a setting process (for example, step E71 in FIG. 128, which will be described later) is executed so that the image of one frame of the target object (moving image) has a horizontal flip. (For example, the value of the X coordinate of the upper left point of the display and the upper right point of the display is exchanged so that the width data calculated in step E65 of FIG. 128 described later becomes a negative value), and the target is set to this. An image in which one frame of the object (moving image) is horizontally inverted is drawn in the virtual drawing space in step E76 described later. Note that such inversion processing can be performed in the same manner even when the object is a still image.
Further, the direction of the inversion process can be the vertical direction (vertical direction). Set a code (motion command) to instruct vertical inversion, and in the case of this code, vertical inversion processing (processing to invert the object in the vertical direction (vertical direction) and display it, details omitted) Should be configured to be executed. When this vertical inversion process is executed, the image of the target object is set to be set to have a vertical flip (for example, step E75 in FIG. 128 described later) (for example, described later). The Y coordinate values of the upper left point of the display and the lower left point of the display are exchanged so that the height data calculated in step E66 of FIG. 128 becomes a negative value), whereby the image of the target object is in the vertical direction. The image inverted to is drawn in the virtual drawing space in step E76 described later.

Next, in step D844, it is determined whether the code is the end code, and if YES, the process proceeds to step D845, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D845.
In step D845, the update that increases the value of the command position k by 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step D846.
In step D846, if the determination result of step D844 is YES, a return is made, and if NO, the process returns to step D824 to execute step D825 and subsequent steps for the updated command position k.

A specific example of the operation for one frame by the loop processing in steps D824 to D846 will be described in the case of FIG. 138 as follows.
That is, since the command position k = 0 at first and the first line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line, YES is set in step D826, and the bitmap addition process in step D851 is executed. The symbol "2" in the line is registered as the object index 0.
Next, k = 1, the second line where the behavior code is set is the specified line, and the object index 0 and the behavior index 0 are set as parameters, so it becomes YES in step D841 and the behavior in step D866. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 0 (that is, the symbol "2").

Next, k = 2, and the third line in which the additional 1 code is set is the specified line. Therefore, it becomes YES in step D826, the bitmap addition process in step D851 is executed, and it is in this third line. The symbol "1" is registered as the object index 1.
Next, k = 3, the 4th line where the behavior code is set is the specified line, and since the object index 1 and the behavior index 0 are set as parameters, it becomes YES in step D841 and the behavior in step D866. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 1 (that is, the symbol "1").

Next, k = 4, and the fifth line in which the additional 1 code is set is the specified line. Therefore, it becomes YES in step D826, the bitmap addition process in step D851 is executed, and it is in this fifth line. The symbol "9" is registered as the object index 2.
Next, k = 5, the sixth line where the behavior code is set is the specified line, and since the object index 2 and the behavior index 0 are set as parameters, it becomes YES in step D841 and the behavior in step D866. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 2 (that is, the symbol "9").

Next, k = 6, the 7th line where the move 1 code is set is the specified line, and the object index 0 etc. is set as a parameter, so YES is set in step D832 and one point is specified in step D857. The object movement process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 0 (that is, the symbol "2") according to the coordinate data and the display size data in the 7th line is performed.
Next, k = 7, the 8th line where the move 1 code is set is the specified line, and the object index 1 etc. is set as a parameter, so YES is set in step D832 and one point is specified in step D857. The object movement process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 1 (that is, the symbol "1") according to the coordinate data and the display size data in the eighth line is performed.

Next, k = 8, the 9th line where the move 1 code is set is the specified line, and the object index 2 etc. are set as parameters, so YES is set in step D832 and one point is specified in step D857. The object movement process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 2 (that is, the symbol "9") according to the coordinate data and the display size data in the 9th line is performed.
Next, k = 9, and the 10th line in which the end code is set is the designated line. Therefore, the result is YES in step D844, and the loop processing is completed and returned in step D846.
In this way, the first frame shown in FIG. 138 is completed. It should be noted that the third and subsequent frames shown in (b), (c), and (d) in the figure are similarly executed every frame cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

[Bitmap addition process]
Next, the details of the bitmap addition process executed in step D851 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. 118. As described above, this routine is a process of adding a still image character as a display object.
When this routine is started, first, in step D871, the address of the motion list table (that is, the data that specifies the motion list table to be controlled this time and its row) is loaded from the motion list table area in the motion management area X. Then, the process proceeds to step D872.
Proceeding to step D872, it is determined whether the value of the number of displays in the motion management area X is equal to or greater than the maximum number of display elements. If there is, the process returns after sequentially executing steps D873 to D881. Here, the maximum number of display elements is a limit value of the number of displays (the number of objects to be controlled) that can be handled by one motion in consideration of the hardware limit of VDP312 and the capacity of VRAM329 (area for developing moving images, etc.). For example, it is set to 18 (still image 16 + moving image 2). However, 18 is only an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

In step D873, the address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays is set. For example, when the object is added for the first time, the number of displays is 1, so the address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays 1 in the motion management area X is set. To give a specific example, for example, the display information area of the motion management area 5 (motion management area for the left symbol) is 3 for the first next symbol, the second current symbol, and the third previous symbol. There are pieces. And now, for example, if the motion management area X = 5 (left symbol), the target motion table is shown in FIG. 138, and the command position k = 0, the command on the first line, which is the designated line, is This routine is executed because it is an additional 1 code. In this case, among the three display information areas of the motion management area 5, the display information area for the first next symbol corresponding to the number of displays 1 is described. Since the data of the object (character No. (symbol "2")) specified by the parameter on the first line is set, in step D873, the address of the display information area for the first next symbol is set. Set. Similarly, when k = 2 (the designated line is the third line), the character No. of the third line is set in the display information area for the second current symbol corresponding to the number of displays 2. The address of the display information area for the second current symbol is set by setting the data of (symbol "1"), and when k = 4 (the designated line is the 5th line), the number of displays corresponds to 3. In the display information area for the third previous symbol, the character No. on the fifth line. The data of (symbol "9") is set, and the address of the display information area for the third previous symbol is set.

The "display number" set (saved) in the motion management area basically represents the MAX number of displayed objects (that is, the number of all objects set as control targets), but as in this routine. Since the number of objects increases in the additional processing, the "display number" fluctuates by +1 (for example, it is updated in step D881 described later), but when such additional processing is no longer performed. The displayed number indicates the MAX number of the displayed objects.

Next, in step D874, each data of one display information area (hereinafter, referred to as a target display information area) specified by the address set in step D873 is cleared to 0. This is because once all the values of the target display information area are set to 0, the initial values are set in the necessary areas. Note that 0 is cleared only in one display information area corresponding to the number of displays.
Next, in step D875, an undefined value (for example, “-1”) is saved as the value of the behavior index in the target display information area. This is to set the initial value to the state without behavior. In this example, even when the behavior index value is 0 (when the behavior index 0 is specified as in the parameters on the 2nd, 4th, and 6th lines in FIG. 138), there is a behavior (replacement of symbols, etc.). is there.

Next, in step D876, still image information is saved as display type data in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is a still image is set.
Next, in step D877, the address (motion table name) of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D871). This is the same process as in step D823 described above.

Next, in step D878, the still image index corresponding to the command position k is acquired. Here, the still image index is a registration number of the still image character registered in the character ROM (image ROM 322), and is a parameter for designating a row of the still image ROM member list table as shown in FIG. 133, for example. .. And now, for example, if the motion management area X = 5 (left symbol), the target motion table is as shown in FIG. 138, and the command position k = 0, it is specified by the first line which is the designated line. The object is the character No. (Design "2") Therefore, in step D878, "1" is acquired as the value of the still image index that specifies the row corresponding to the symbol "2" in the table of FIG. 133.
Next, in step D879, the value of the still image index acquired in step D878 is saved as an image index. The image index is information indicating a specific character (an image such as a still image or a moving image) as a display target, and is information used in step E51 or the like in the effect display editing process described later.

Next, in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record. That is, the update is performed so that the value k of the command position is increased by 1. This is because when the motion command execution process is executed in the next cycle, the next row of the motion table is set as the designated row for control.
Next, in step D881, since the object is added by this routine, the value of the display number in the motion management area X is updated by 1 and then returned.

The contents of each parameter of the still image ROM member list table shown in FIG. 133 are as follows.
-Image address offset: Indicates an offset value to the address where the character is stored in the character ROM.
-Palette address offset: Indicates an offset value to the address where the palette data used by the character is stored in the character ROM. In this example, since the described characters use the same palette, all the values are 0. However, the palette may be changed according to the needs of the characters. Places using different palettes will have different offset values.
-Image width and height; represents the size of the original image of the character. For example, the unit is pixel. In this example, since only the character at the time of fluctuation and the character of the push button are usually the same size, they are actually various values for each character. Also, even in a normal pattern, for example, the size of the person drawn on the pattern may be slightly different and the size of the appearance may be different, but in order to make it easier to handle with internal control, the size of the character in the transparent part Adjust the size so that characters in the same category have the same size.

-Width on VRAM: Refers to the width when the character is expanded into VRAM. In this example, since the compression type uses only "lossless compression 32-bit image", the width is the same as the original image. If you use lossy compression or reduce the number of bits in the color palette, the size will decrease.
-Image compression type: Indicates the compression type of each character stored in the character ROM. Examples of this compression type include the following types 0 to 6. There may be types other than these.
0: 32 bit full color image without compression 1: 8 bit full color image without compression 2: 4 bit full color image without compression 3: reversible compression 32 bit full color image 4: reversible compression 8 bit full color image 5: reversible compression 4 bit full color image 6: irreversible compressed image / image Compressed size; Indicates the compressed capacity of image data (character data). It is used as a parameter or the like when transferring data from the character ROM 322 to the VRAM 329.
The category setting of the still image ROM member list table described above is an example.
Other parameters may be set.

[Video addition process]
Next, the details of the moving image addition process executed in step D852 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. 119. As described above, this routine is a process of adding a moving image character as a display object.
When this routine is started, first, in step D891, the address of the motion list table is loaded and the process proceeds to step D892 in the same manner as in step D871.
Proceeding to step D892, similarly to step D872, it is determined whether the value of the number of displays in the motion management area X is equal to or greater than the maximum number of display elements, and if it is equal to or greater than the maximum number of display elements, it returns and is less than the maximum number of display elements. If this is the case, steps D893 to D897 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D898.

In step D893, the address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays is set in the same manner as in step D873.
In step D894, similarly to step D874, each data of one display information area (target display information area) specified by the address set in step D893 is cleared to 0.
In step D895, as in step D875, an undefined value (for example, “-1”) is saved as the value of the behavior index in the target display information area.
In step D896, similarly to step D877, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D891).

In step D897, the moving image index corresponding to the command position k is acquired. Here, the moving image index is a registration number of a moving image character registered in the character ROM (image ROM 322), and is a parameter for designating a row of the moving image ROM member list table as shown in FIG. 134, for example. Then, assuming that the parameter of the object (data set in the next column of the additional 2 code) in the designated row of the target motion table is, for example, the animation symbol "1", in step D897 above, the table of FIG. 134 In, "0" is acquired as the value of the moving image index that specifies the line corresponding to the animation symbol "1".

Next, in step D898, the data of the encoding type (described later) in the specified row of the video ROM member list table corresponding to the value of the video index acquired in step D897 is read, and the encoding of the video to be added based on this data is read. It is determined whether the type is an I-picture moving image, and if it is an I-picture moving image, the process proceeds to step D899, and if it is not an I-picture moving image, the process proceeds to step D904. In the case of FIG. 134, if the encoding type data is "0", it is an I-picture moving image. Therefore, if this data is "0", the process proceeds to step D899, and if the data is other than "0", the process proceeds to step D904. Become. The I-picture means frame data of an image that can be decoded independently without performing inter-frame prediction, and the I-picture moving image means a moving image composed of only I-pictures.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D899, steps D899 to D901 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D902.
In step D899, the initial value "-1" is set as the data of the frame count number for I-pictures (frame count at the time of moving image of only I-pictures) in the target display information area. If "-1" is set as the initial value, the number of frame counts for the I picture starts from "0".
In step D900, the I-picture moving image information is saved as the display type data in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is an I-picture moving object is set.
In step D901, the value of the moving image index acquired in step D897 is saved as an image index.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step D904, steps D904 and D905 are sequentially executed, and then step D906 is performed.
In step D904, the loop playback flag is set in order to instruct the VDP 312 to loop the moving image. It is also possible to set it so that it does not loop.
In step D905, the moving image decoding area securing process for securing the storage area of the RAM 311a for decoding the moving image data is executed.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D906, as a result of the moving image decoding area securing process, it is determined whether the area is correctly allocated. If YES, steps D907 and D908 are executed to proceed to step D902, and if NO, the process returns. It is NO when the area cannot be secured correctly due to capacity over or the like.
In step D907, normal moving image information is saved as display type data in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is a normal moving object (that is, not an I-picture moving object) is set.
In step D908, the index value of the area allocated by the moving image decoding area securing process is saved as an image index.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D902, steps D902 and D903 are sequentially executed and then returned.
In step D902, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.
In step D903, as in step D881, the update is performed so that the value of the number of displays in the motion management area X is increased by 1.

The contents of each parameter of the moving image ROM member list table shown in FIG. 134 are as follows.
-Movie address offset: Indicates the offset value to the address where the movie is stored in the character ROM.
-Width and height of the movie; Indicates the size of the original image of the movie. For example, the unit is pixel. As with the still image, adjust the transparent part so that the size of movies in the same category is the same.
-Number of frames in the movie: Indicates how many continuous pictures the movie is composed of. In this embodiment, 1 second = 30 frames are controlled, so a movie is created with that in mind. If the control is executed so as to be 60 frames per second, the playback will be performed at double speed. The reverse is also true.

-Α value setting: Information indicating whether or not the movie contains alpha channel information. 0 = no alpha, 1 = alpha. If you have alpha, you can change the transparency of the movie. If not, it will be opaque only.
-Encoding type: Indicates how the movie is organized. There are the following types 0 to 2.
0 = Consists of only I-pictures 1 = Consists of I-pictures and P-pictures with reference to one sheet (P-pictures are created by referring to one past I-picture or P-picture)
2 = A configuration including two reference P pictures in addition to the above 1 (the P picture is created by referring to two past I or P and two past I or P).
However, the encoding type is not limited to the above, and a configuration including, for example, a B picture may be used.
The category setting of the video ROM member list table explained above is an example.
Other parameters may be set.

[1 point designation object movement processing]
Next, the details of the one-point designation object movement process executed in step D857 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. 120.
When this routine is started, steps D911 to D924 are sequentially executed, and then returns.
In step D911, the address of the motion list table is loaded in the same manner as in step D871.
In step D912, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D911).

In step D913, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D912. For example, if FIG. 138 is the target motion table and k = 6 (the specified line is the 7th line), this routine is executed because the command is the movement 1 code. In this case, the 7th line is executed. Since the object index is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D913.
In step D914, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D913 is set. For example, in FIG. 138, when k = 6 (the designated line is the 7th line), the object index 0 is the symbol "2" (next symbol) added in the 1st row, so that the first symbol corresponding to the next symbol is used. The address of the display information area is set.

In step D915, the X coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D916, the X coordinate of the upper left point of the display and the X coordinate of the lower left point of the display in the target display information area (the display information area whose address was set in step D914, hereinafter the same in this routine) are the X acquired in step D915. Save the coordinate data.
In step D917, the Y coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D918, the Y coordinate data acquired in step D917 is saved as the Y coordinate of the upper left point of the display and the Y coordinate of the upper right point of the display in the target display information area.

In step D919, the image width data and the image height data corresponding to the command position k are acquired.
In step D920, the image width data acquired in step D919 is added to the X coordinate data acquired in step D915, and in the next step D921, this addition result is saved as the X coordinate of the upper right point of the display in the target display information area. ..
In step D922, the image height data acquired in step D919 is added to the Y coordinate data acquired in step D917, and in the next step D923, this addition result is saved as the Y coordinate of the lower left point of the display in the target display information area. To do.
Then, in step D924, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.

According to the steps D915 to D923, the following operations are realized. For example, when k = 6 (the designated line is the 7th line) in FIG. 138, the X coordinate data is "0", the Y coordinate data is "-493" (minus indicates the position outside the screen on the upper side of the screen), and the image. The width data is "296" and the image height data is "490". Therefore, "0" is acquired in step D915, "-493" is acquired in step D917, and "296" and "490" are acquired in step D919. Then, the addition result in step D920 is "296" (= 0 + 296), and the addition result in step D922 is "-3" (= -493 + 490). Therefore, in step D916, "0" is saved as the X coordinate of the upper left point of the display and the lower left point of the display, and in step D918, "-493" is saved as the Y coordinate of the upper left point of the display and the upper right point of the display. Then, "296" is saved as the X coordinate of the upper right point of the display, and "-3" is saved as the Y coordinate of the lower left point of the display in step D923. As a result, the display position of the target object (in this case, the next symbol "2") is set as the coordinates of three points (display upper left point, display lower left point, display upper right point). In this case, the position of the upper left corner on the screen is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0), and all the Y coordinates set as described above are negative values, so the object of this next symbol is , The display position is set outside the screen on the upper side of the screen, and the image of this next pattern is not yet visible on the screen.

As described above, according to this routine, one point is specified, but as a result, three points are specified. This is because the object (character) has a quadrangular shape, so if you have the coordinates of the upper left reference point and the height and width data of the object, you can use the upper right point and lower left point as in steps D920 and D922 above. This is because the coordinates are obtained. As described above, the display information area in the motion management area has an area for inputting each coordinate value of the three points determined in this way, and in steps D916, D918, D921, and D923, registration is performed in each area. ..
Regarding the 3-point designation object movement process executed in step D858 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process, detailed description by showing a flowchart is omitted, but this process is also substantially the same as the above-mentioned 1-point designation object move process. It is done in. However, in the case of specifying three points, since the structure is such that each coordinate data is on the motion table, the addition process as described in steps D920 and D922 is unnecessary, and all the coordinate data acquired from the motion table are used as they are. The processing content is only saved in each area of the display information area.

[Effect type specification processing]
Next, the details of the effect type designation process executed in step D859 in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG. 121.
When this routine is started, steps D931 to D940 are sequentially executed, and then returns.
In step D931, the address of the motion list table is loaded in the same manner as in step D871.
In step D932, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D931).

In step D933, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D932. For example, if Mdata0041 (motion index No. 41) on the lower side of FIG. 149 is the target motion table and k = 4 (the specified line is the 5th line), this routine is executed because the command is the effect 1 code. However, in this case, since the object index of k = 4 is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D933.
In step D934, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D933 is set. For example, in the case of the lower side of FIG. 149, the object index 0 is the moving image “Tiger Taro Movie 1” added at k = 0 (first line), and the address of the display information area corresponding to this moving image is set.

In step D935, the effect type data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D936, the data acquired in step D935 is saved as an effect type in the target display information area (display information area whose address is set in step D934, the same applies in this routine).
For example, when k = 4 on the lower side of FIG. 149, since the effect type is (1), this is acquired in step D935 and set in the target display information area in step D936.
Next, in steps D937, D938, and D939, the effect parameter, foreground color, and background color data in the target display information area are cleared, respectively.
Then, in step D940, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.

In this routine described above, for example, the type of blending method when displaying a plurality of objects in an overlapping manner is set. That is, for example, the effect type (1) is a kind of an effect that gives transparency (transparency), and the effect that gives transparency is the image of the rear (back side) layer having the same display position and overlapping and the front. It can be said that it is a process of mixing (blending) with the image of the layer of, and in this routine, the type of the blend is set.

[Effect parameter specification processing]
Next, the details of the effect parameter specification process executed in step D860 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the right side of FIG. 121.
When this routine is started, steps D941 to D947 are sequentially executed, and then returns.
In step D941, the address of the motion list table is loaded in the same manner as in step D871.
In step D942, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D941).

In step D943, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D942. For example, if the lower side of FIG. 149 is the target motion table and k = 5 (the specified line is the 6th line), this routine is executed because the command is the effect 2 code. In this case, k = 5 Since the object index of (0) is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D943.
In step D944, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D943 is set. For example, in the case of the lower side of FIG. 149, since the object index 0 is the moving image "Torataro Movie 1" added at k = 0 (first line), the address of the display information area corresponding to this moving image is set. ..

In step D945, the effect parameter data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D946, the data acquired in step D945 is saved as an effect parameter in the target display information area (display information area whose address is set in step D944, the same applies in this routine).
For example, when k = 5 on the lower side of FIG. 151, since the effect parameter is (64), this is acquired in step D945 and set in the target display information area in step D946.

Here, the effect parameter indicates the ratio of the transparency (darkness) of the object when blending. Assuming that the value of the effect parameter is P, in the case of this example, the data obtained by converting the percentage of transparency into the numerator of "P / 255" is defined on the table. Specifically, for example, when 100% is a normal display (no transparency), the parameter P when displaying at a density of about 10% is 25 (≈255 × 10/100). On the contrary, as in the above-mentioned specific example, when the value of the parameter P is 64, the transparency is about 25% (= 100 × 64/255), which means that it is considerably thin. However, when 100% display is performed, the above-mentioned effect type specification process and this routine effect parameter specification process are not executed.
Next, in step D947, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.

[Object deletion process]
Next, the details of the object deletion process executed in step D862 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG. 122.
When this routine is started, first, in step D951, the address of the motion list table is loaded in the same manner as in step D871.
Next, in step D952, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is 0 or less, and if it is 0 or less, there is no display number (that is, there is no object to be deleted), so a return is made and 0. If not the following, the process proceeds to step D953.
When the process proceeds to step D953, steps D953 to D955 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D956.
In step D953, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D951).

In step D954, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D953. For example, if the lower side of FIG. 142 is the target motion table and k = 12 (the specified line is the 13th line), this routine is executed because the command is the deletion code. In this case, k = 12 Since the object index is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D954.
In step D955, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D954 is set. For example, when k = 12 on the lower side of FIG. 142, since the object index is 0, the address of the display information area corresponding to the object index 0 is set at this point.

Proceeding to step D956, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is normal moving image information, and if it is normal moving image information, the moving image decoding area opening process (details are omitted) is executed in step D957, and then the step The process proceeds to D958, and if it is not normal moving image information (that is, it is an I-picture moving image), the process proceeds to step D958 without executing step D957.
When the process proceeds to step D958, steps D958 to D960 are sequentially executed and then returned.
In step D958, the information in the display information area after the acquired object index is shifted (moved) forward. That is, in the motion management area X, the data in the display information area after the address set in step D955 is shifted to the previous display information area by one amount. As a result, the data in the display information area of the address set in step D955 is deleted, and the object corresponding to the deleted data is deleted.
In step D959, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.
Then, in step D960, since the object is deleted by this routine, the update that reduces the value of the number of displays in the motion management area X by 1 is executed.

[Object change processing]
Next, the details of the object change process executed in step D863 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the right side of FIG. 122.
When this routine is started, steps D961 to D967 are sequentially executed, and then returns.
In step D961, the address of the motion list table is loaded in the same manner as in step D871.
In step D962, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D961).
In step D963, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D962.

In step D964, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D963 is set.
In step D965, an index (the above-mentioned still image index or moving image index) of the changed character (changed character) corresponding to the command position k in the target motion table is acquired.
In step D966, the index value acquired in step D965 is saved as an image index. As a result, it is possible to change the object in which only the image (characters such as symbols and characters) changes.
Then, in step D967, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.

[Object video decoding process]
Next, the details of the object moving image decoding process executed in step D864 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. 123.
When this routine is started, steps D971 to D974 are executed in sequence, and then step D975 proceeds.
In step D971, the address of the motion list table is loaded in the same manner as in step D871.
In step D972, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D971).

In step D973, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D972. For example, if the table shown on the upper side of FIG. 149 is the target motion table and k = 3 (the specified line is the 4th line), this routine is executed because the command is the decode code. In this case, Since the object index of k = 3 is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D973.
In step D974, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D973 is set. For example, when k = 3 in the table on the upper side of FIG. 149, the object index 0 is the moving image (tiger taro movie 1) added at k = 0 (first row), so the display information area corresponding to this moving image. Address is set.

Proceeding to step D975, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is I-picture moving image information, and if it is I-picture moving image information, steps D977 and D978 are executed, and then step D979 proceeds to proceed to I-picture moving image information. If not, the process proceeds to step D976.
In step D977, the address of the area of the frame count number for I-picture (frame count at the time of moving image of only I-picture) in the target display information area (display information area whose address is set in step D974, hereinafter the same in this routine). To set.
In step D978, based on the address set in step D977, the data of the number of frame counts for I-pictures in the target display information area is updated by one.

Proceeding to step D979, it is determined whether the number of I-picture frame counts updated in step D978 is equal to or greater than the number of moving image frames (the number of moving image frames corresponding to the image index data at this time), and equal to or greater than the number of moving image frames. If this is the case, the process proceeds to step D983 after executing step D980, and if the number is not equal to or greater than the number of moving image frames, step D980 is not executed and the process proceeds to step D983.
In step D980, since the moving image specified by the image index (in this case, the moving image index) is displayed up to the final frame, the number of I-picture frame counts in the target display information area is used to restart the moving image from the beginning. Set the data to 0 (start value).

When the process proceeds to step D976, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is normal moving image information. If it is normal moving image information, steps D981 and D982 are executed and then step D983 is performed. Returns as abnormal.
In step D981, the data registered as the image index at this point (in this case, the video index data) is loaded.
In step D982, a moving image decoding process (details are omitted) for decoding (decoding) one frame of the moving image corresponding to the index loaded in step D981 is executed.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D983, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.
In the case of an I-picture moving image, the pictures of each frame exist independently, so the number of frames may be managed. Later, when instructing the internal register of VDP312, the count (the number of frame counts for I-picture) becomes important.

[Behavior index setting process]
Next, the details of the behavior index setting process executed in step D866 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. 124.
When this routine is started, steps D991 to D997 are executed in sequence, and then returns.
In step D991, the address of the motion list table is loaded in the same manner as in step D871.
In step D992, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D991). As shown in FIG. 135 described above, a behavior table name corresponding to the address of the behavior table is also set in the designated row of the motion list table (however, it may be NULL).

In step D993, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D992. For example, if the upper side of FIG. 149 is the target motion table and k = 1 (the specified line is the second line), this routine is executed because the command is a behavior code. In this case, k = 1 Since the object index is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D993.
In step D994, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D993 is set. For example, in the case of the upper side of FIG. 149, since the object index 0 is a moving image (tiger taro movie 1) added at k = 0 (first line), the address of the display information area corresponding to this moving image is set.

In step D995, the behavior index data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D996, the data acquired in step D995 is saved as a behavior index in the target display information area (the display information area whose address is set in step D994, hereinafter the same in this routine).
For example, when k = 1 on the upper side of FIG. 149, since the behavior index is (0), this is acquired in step D995 and set in the target display information area in step D996.
Then, in step D997, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.

The behavior table is a table (data table registered in PROM321) consisting of rows in which the processing address of the behavior (character replacement) is set, and a specific row (designated row) in this row is specified. Is the behavior index. Therefore, once the values of the behavior table and the behavior index are determined, the processing address of the behavior is determined and the content of the behavior is specified. This routine performs control processing to specify the contents of such behaviors. For example, the second line of k = 1 on the upper side of FIG. 149 instructs the object (tiger taro movie 1) having the object index 0 to execute the behavior (character replacement) specified by the behavior index 0. Therefore, the target information display area is set accordingly. The behavior specified by the behavior index 0 is, for example, changing the color of the notice character "Torataro" appearing in the movie for jackpot reliability notification, or changing the type of the notice character from "Torataro" to "Torataro". It is a control such as replacing with "Torasuke" (see FIGS. 146 (b) and 146 (c) described later).

[Production display editing process]
Next, the details of the effect display editing process executed in step D31 in the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to FIGS. 125, 126, and 127. In the following, step E will be used as the step number. As described in the main process, this effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 of the drawing contents on the display device 41. In this effect display editing process, the commands are set in a table shape, and the commands set in this way are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instructing screen drawing) of the main process.
When this routine is started, the loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 is repeatedly executed for the number of motion management areas, and then returns. The loop process A includes the loop process B of steps E6 to E48, and the loop process B further includes the loop process C of steps E39 to E43.

In the loop processing A, the processing is executed from step E2 for the motion management area X (that is, the motion management area 0 at first) with X = 0 at first, and the address area of the motion management area is updated (that is, when the process proceeds to step E49). , X = X + 1), and in the next step E50, it is determined whether the loop processing A has been completed for all the motion management areas (in this example, X = 14), and the determination result in step E50 is YES. If the result is (that is, if the end condition of the loop process A is satisfied), the process returns, and if NO, the loop process A is repeated from step E2.
Hereinafter, the processes after step E2 will be described.
In step E2, it is determined whether the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, and if it is NULL, control is not required for the motion management area X, so the process proceeds to step E49. If it is not NULL, steps E3 to E5 are sequentially performed. After the execution, the process proceeds to step E6. When the result is determined to be NULL (YES) in step E2 and the process proceeds to step E49, the following processes including the loop process B and the loop process C are not naturally executed for the motion management area X.

In step E3, the motion list table to be controlled this time is loaded and prepared.
In step E4, all the blend information areas are cleared. The blend information area is an area in the RAM 311a that stores the parameter information of the internal register of the VDP 312 for comparison between old and new. That is, the VDP 312 has four types of internal register parameters that indicate inter-pixel calculation fixed values at the time of blending for the effect. The RAM 311a is provided with an area for storing the current setting information and the previous setting information for each of the four types of parameters, and this is the blend information area.
In step E5, the inter-pixel calculation parameters (that is, four types of parameters set in the internal registers of the VDP 312) are set.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E6, the loop process B is started. In the loop process B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed until the closing price (closing price = display number -1) is reached while increasing the variable i from the initial value 0 by an increment of 1, and then the process proceeds to step E49. That is, in step E6, immediately after the start of the loop, the variable i is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step E7. In step E48, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step E6, and if the variable i is greater than or equal to the closing price, the process proceeds to step E49. Then, when returning to step E6, the value of the variable i is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step E7. The closing price value is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the display number data set in the motion management area X. That is, in this loop process B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed for the number of display times, and then the process proceeds to step E49.

Hereinafter, the processes after step E7 will be described.
When the process proceeds to step E7, steps E7 to E9 are sequentially executed, and then steps E10 are performed.
In step E7, the color parameter of the internal register of VDP312 is set to correspond to the α value.
In step E8, the α flag used for the process described later is set to have α.
In step E9, the address of the display information area (hereinafter referred to as the target display information area) corresponding to the variable i in the motion management area X is loaded.
Next, when the process proceeds to step E10, the value of the behavior index in the display information area of the address loaded in step E9 is read, it is determined whether the data of some index other than NULL is set, and the data of some behavior index is set. If yes (YES), the process corresponding to the behavior index is executed in step E11, and then the process proceeds to step E12. If NO, the process proceeds to step E12 without executing step E11.

The process corresponding to the behavior index executed in step E11 is to execute the behavior (replacement of image data) specified by the behavior index for the object (target object) corresponding to the target display information area. This is the process specified by the process address set in the row specified by the behavior index in the behavior table described above.
For example, when the target object is the current symbol of the left symbol, the flow chart processing (display left symbol conversion process) shown on the left side of FIG. 129, which will be described later, is executed in step E11. In the present application, specific examples of the processing executed in step E11 are also shown on the right side of FIG. 129, but the details thereof will be described later.
When step E11 is executed, the image index data is changed immediately before display, for example, the basic symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol to be displayed, or the color of the push button (PB) image is changed from the basic color. It may be replaced with a predetermined color according to the game state (for example, a specific color indicating the jackpot reliability). Since the display pattern of the character defined on the motion table is fixed, basically, unless the motion table is changed, it is not possible to correspond to different stop symbols and different notice characters due to distribution for each change. .. Therefore, in this example, the behavior is embedded in the necessary part and the character is replaced so that a flexible response can be performed.

Proceeding to step E12, the effect type data set in the target display information area is read, and whether this is a basic blend, an addition blend, or a subtraction blend is determined in steps E12, E13, and E14, and any of them is determined. If it corresponds to the blend type of, the process proceeds to step E15, and if it does not correspond to any of the blend types, steps E15 to E18 are skipped and the process proceeds to step E21.

When the process proceeds to step E15, the value of the effect parameter set in the target display information area is loaded, applied to the color parameter, and then the process proceeds to step E16.
When the process proceeds to step E16, it is determined from the data such as the display type set in the target display information area that the drawing specification is normal video non-transparent playback, and if YES, the process proceeds to step E17, and if NO, the step Proceed to E21.
Proceeding to step E17, it is determined whether or not the target moving image (the one determined to be non-transparent playback of the normal moving image in step E16) is registered without α, and if YES, the α flag is set to no α in step E18. After setting, the process proceeds to step E21. If NO, the process proceeds to step E21 without executing step E18.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E21, the data of the effect type set in the target display information area is read, and whether this is an addition blend, a subtraction blend, a multiplication blend, a screen blend, or a difference blend is compared (dark). ) Blending or reversing blending is determined in steps E21 to 27, respectively, and if any of the blend types is applicable, the corresponding process (corresponding process in steps E31 to E37) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step E39. If none of the blend types are applicable, the process proceeds to step E28.
Here, step E31 is a process executed in the case of addition blending (a process of setting an addition type drawing effect), and step E32 is a process executed in the case of subtraction blending (a process of setting a subtraction type drawing effect). Process), step E33 is a process executed in the case of multiplication blend (processing to set a multiplication type drawing effect), and step E34 is a process executed in the case of screen blending (screen type drawing effect). Step E35 is a process to be executed in the case of a difference blend (a process to set a difference type drawing effect), and step E36 is a process to be executed in the case of a comparison (dark) blend (comparison). It is a process of setting a (dark) type drawing effect), and step E37 is a process executed in the case of inversion blending (a process of setting an inversion type drawing effect).

Next, when the process proceeds to step E28, it is determined whether the α flag is set to α, and if there is no α, a drawing effect without α is set in step E29 and the process proceeds to step E39. , With α), set the drawing effect of the type with α in step E38, and proceed to step E39.
In steps E29 and E31 to E38, various parameters for blending (4 types in this example) are set in the corresponding blend information area according to the setting of the effect type of the target information display area. There is.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E39, the loop process C is started. In the loop process C, steps E39 to E43 are repeatedly executed until the closing price (closing price = 3) is reached while increasing the variable j corresponding to the above-mentioned four types of blend information regions by an increment of 1 from the initial value 0, and then the step. Proceed to E44.
That is, in step E39, immediately after the start of the loop, the variable j is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step E40.
When the process proceeds to step E40, it is determined whether the blend information area corresponding to the variable j has been changed, and if it has been changed, steps E41 and E42 are sequentially executed to proceed to step E43. If not, step E41, Proceed to step E43 without executing E42. Here, the determination in step E40 is performed by determining that the previous data and the current data in the corresponding blend information area do not match, and if they match, it is determined that the data has not been changed.
Further, in step E41, the inter-pixel calculation fixed value of the resist parameter corresponding to the variable j is set in the internal register of VDP 312, and in step E42, the current blend information is set as the previous blend information.

Then, when the process proceeds to step E43, if the variable j is less than the closing price, the process returns to step E39, and if the variable j is the closing price, the loop process C is exited and the process proceeds to step E44. Then, when returning to step E39, the value of the variable j is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step E40.
The reason why the variable j has four ranges is that, as described above, the VDP 312 has four types of internal register parameters that indicate the inter-pixel operation fixed value at the time of blending. Further, it is specified that the area (blend information area) corresponding to each register is provided for the previous time and the current time, and the setting process of step E41 is performed only when the old and new data of this blend information area are compared and matched. This is because it is set in the register of VDP312 only when the value to be set changes (to improve the efficiency of the setting process in VDP).

Next, when the process proceeds to step E44, the data of the display type (display type) set in the target display information area is read, and whether this is a still image, a normal moving image, an I-picture moving image, or a single color quadrangle is stepped. Judgment is performed in E44 to 47, and if any display type other than the single color quadrangle is applicable, the corresponding processing (corresponding processing in steps E51 and E52, steps E53 and E54, or steps E55 to E57) is executed. Later, the process proceeds to step E58, if it is a single-color quadrangle, the process proceeds to step E59, and if none of the display types is applicable, the process proceeds to step E48.
Here, steps E51 and E52 are executed in the case of a still image, the image index data is loaded in step E51, and the attributes of the still image data are set based on the loaded image index data in step E52. Execute the process. After passing through step E52, the process proceeds to step E58, and character drawing processing (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in step E51 and the settings in step E52.

Further, steps E53 and E54 are executed in the case of a normal moving image, in step E53, the image index data is loaded, and in step E54, the attributes of the normal moving image data are set based on the loaded image index data. Execute the process. After passing through step E54, the process proceeds to step E58, and character drawing processing (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in step E53 and the settings in step E54.
Further, steps E55 to E57 are executed in the case of an I-picture moving image, in step E55, the image index data is loaded, and in step E56, the frame count for I-picture from the target display information area (when the moving image is only I-picture). The data of (frame count) is loaded, and in step E57, processing such as setting the attributes of the I-picture moving image data is executed based on the loaded data. After step E57, the process proceeds to step E58, and character drawing processing (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in steps E55 and E56 and the settings of step E57.
Further, step E59 is executed in the case of a monochromatic quadrangle, and a process of drawing a rectangular image (monochromatic quadrangle image) in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) of VDP 312 (that is, pasting a sprite of the rectangular image into the virtual drawing space). Processing).
After passing through step E58 or step E59, the process proceeds to step E48.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E48, it is determined whether the variable i of the loop process B has reached the closing price (display number -1), and if so, the loop process B is exited and the process proceeds to step E49 to reach the closing price. If not, the process returns to step E6 and the loop process B is repeated.
Then, when the process proceeds to step E49, an update is executed in which the number X of the target motion management area is increased by 1, and then it is determined in step E50 whether X has reached the closing price of the loop process A (14 in this example), and the number X is reached. If so, the loop process A is exited and returned, and if not reached, the process returns to step E1 and the loop process A is repeated from step E2.

In the step of setting the attributes of steps E52, E54, and E57, the process of transferring the character data (still image data or moving image data) from the character ROM (image ROM 322) to the VRAM 329 is also performed at the same time. However, if the same VRAM already exists, this data transfer is not performed. Further, in the case of a single color quadrangle, since the data in the character ROM is not used, this data transfer is not necessary. Here, the attribute is basic information of the character, and includes, for example, α mode, color mode (how many colors are displayed, etc.), character size, color palette specification, and the like.

[Character drawing process]
Next, the details of the character drawing process executed in step E58 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 128.
When this routine is started, first, in step E61, the data of the X coordinate of the upper left point of the display and the X coordinate of the lower left point of the display are obtained from the target display information area (display information area corresponding to the variable i) in the motion management area X. It is read out and it is determined whether or not they match, and if they match, the process proceeds to step E62, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step E77.
Proceeding to step E62, the data of the Y coordinate of the upper left point of the display and the Y coordinate of the upper right point of the display are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, it is determined whether they match, and if they match, the process proceeds to step E63. If there is a discrepancy, the process proceeds to step E77.
If the image is a quadrangle (rectangle), the determination results of steps E61 and E62 are YES, and the process proceeds to step E63. However, if the image is a triangle character (triangle image), any determination is NO. And proceed to step E77.
Proceeding to step E77, the triangle character drawing process (explanation is omitted) is executed and returned.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E63, steps E63 to E67 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E68.
In step E63, the data of the X coordinate of the upper left point of the display is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and this is set as the X coordinate of the upper left base point of the character.
In step E64, the data of the Y coordinate of the upper left point of the display is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and this is set as the Y coordinate of the upper left base point of the character.
In step E65, the data of the X coordinate of the display upper right point and the X coordinate of the display upper left point are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the difference between them (= X coordinate of the display upper right point-X of the display upper left point). (Coordinates) is set as the width data of the character.

In step E66, the data of the Y coordinate of the lower left point of the display and the Y coordinate of the upper left point of the display are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the difference between them (= Y coordinate of the lower left point of the display-Y of the upper left point of the display). (Coordinates) is set as the height data of the character.
In step E67, no horizontal flip (horizontal flip) and no vertical flip are set. Here, the horizontal flip means the image inversion in the horizontal direction (X coordinate direction), and the vertical flip means the image inversion in the vertical direction (Y coordinate direction).

When the process proceeds to step E68, it is determined whether the width data set in step E65 is less than 0 (that is, a negative value), and if it is less than 0, there is a horizontal flip, so steps E69 to E71 are sequentially executed, and then step E72 is performed. If it is not less than 0, there is no horizontal flip, and the process proceeds to step E72 without executing steps E69 to E71.
In step E69, the X coordinate data of the upper left point of the display is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the width data (minus value) set in step E65 is added to the addition result to add the upper left base point X of the character. Update as coordinates.
In step E70, the width data (minus value) set in step E65 is converted into a positive number, and this is updated and set as new width data.
In step E71, it is set to have horizontal flip (change the setting in step E67).

When the process proceeds to step E72, it is determined whether the height data set in step E66 is less than 0 (that is, a negative value), and if it is less than 0, there is a vertical flip, so steps E73 to E75 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E76. If it is not less than 0, there is no vertical flip, and the process proceeds to step E76 without executing steps E73 to E75.
In step E73, the Y coordinate data of the upper left point of the display is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the height data (minus value) set in step E66 is added to this, and the addition result is added to the upper left base point of the character. Update and set as Y coordinate.
In step E74, the height data (minus value) set in step E66 is converted into a positive number, and this is updated and set as new height data.
In step E75, it is set to have vertical flip (change the setting in step E67).
Then, when the process proceeds to step E76, the image of the predetermined character corresponding to the image index data loaded in any of the steps E51, E53, and E55 is based on the settings obtained by the processes (steps E63 to E75) up to this point. Is executed as a designated image in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) of the VDP 312 (that is, a process of pasting a sprite of a predetermined character into the virtual drawing space), and then returns.

[Display left symbol conversion process]
Next, the details of the display left symbol conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG. 129.
When this routine is started, steps E81 to E83 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E84.
In step E81, the image index data (data before replacement by behavior) is loaded.
In step E82, the index (symbol number) data of the current symbol (left) to be displayed (for example, the data set in step D727 or D747 described above) is loaded. In the case of this example, since there are nine types of symbols, the index (symbol number) data of the symbols (decorative symbols of special symbols) is any numerical value from 0 to 8.

In step E83, the index data of the current symbol (left) loaded in step E82 is added to the index data of the current symbol (left) set in the image index loaded in step E81, and the addition result is updated. Set as an index. For example, if the value of the image index before replacement (conversion) loaded in step E81 is, for example, 0, and the index data of the current symbol (left) loaded in step E82 to be replaced is 6, In step E83, 6 (= 0 + 6) is set as the update index value.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E84, it is determined whether the update index data set in step E83 exceeds the symbol upper limit (8 in this example), and if it exceeds, step E85 is executed and then step E86 is performed. If the value is not exceeded, the process proceeds to step E86 without executing step E85.

In step E85, the value obtained by adding 1 to the symbol upper limit (9 in this example) is subtracted from the value of the update index, and the subtraction result is set as the value of the new update index. According to these steps E84 and E85, when the value of the update index exceeds the upper limit of the symbol, the value of the update index is updated to a value that has been cycled.

Proceeding to step E86, the left symbol index conversion table is set, and the process proceeds to step E87. The left symbol index conversion table is a table in which a row is specified by the update index and the value of the image index of the left symbol to be displayed in the specified row is set.
In step E87, a new image index value is acquired from the row specified by the update index in the left symbol index conversion table set in step E86, and the process proceeds to step E88.
Then, in step E88, the value acquired in step E87 is saved as a new image index value in the image index area (area in which the image index is saved), and then returned.
Although the display left symbol conversion process has been described above, the same process is applied to the right symbol and the middle symbol (details are omitted).

[PB color conversion process]
Next, the details of the PB color conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the upper right side of FIG. 129.
When this routine is started, steps E91 to E94 are sequentially executed and then returned.
In step E91, the distribution result is loaded from the PB color area of the effect distribution result area (the area in which the distribution result (notice type) determined in the above-mentioned steps D426 and D429 is stored).
In step E92, the PB index conversion table is set, and the process proceeds to step E93. The PB index conversion table is a table in which rows are specified by the distribution result saved in the PB color area and the image index value of the PB (push button) image to be displayed in the specified row is set. ..

In step E93, a new image index value (PB index value) is acquired from the row specified in the distribution result in the PB index conversion table set in step E92, and the process proceeds to step E94.
Then, in step E94, the value acquired in step E93 is saved in the image index area as a new image index value, and then returned.
Since only the button character that is the default color is registered as the motion control data (especially the image index data) of the push button notice, when changing the color from the default color for notification of jackpot reliability, etc., This routine (PB color conversion process) is executed.
Not limited to this push button notice, the basic character that appears (for example, "Torataro") can be assigned to other characters (for example, "Torasuke" or "Toralock") that correspond to the distribution result in the production distribution result area. Similarly, there is a process such as conversion (replacement) according to the behavior.

[Reach character conversion process]
Next, the details of the reach character conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the lower right side of FIG. 129.
When this routine is started, steps E101 to E103 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E104.
In step E101, the distribution result is loaded from the reach character area of the effect distribution result area.
In step E102, the reach character index conversion table is set, and the process proceeds to step E103. The reach character index conversion table is a table in which a line is specified by the distribution result saved in the reach character area and the image index value of the image of the reach character to be displayed on the specified line is set.
In step E103, a new image index value (reach character index value) is acquired from the row specified by the distribution result in the reach character index conversion table set in step E102. Although not shown, the value acquired in step E103 is also saved in a predetermined image index area as a new image index value.

Then, when the process proceeds to step E104, it is determined whether the reach character index acquired in step E103 is a value indicating "no character", and if YES, the size of the character (image) of the reach character is set to 0 in step E105. It returns later, and if NO, returns without executing step E105.
In this example, motion control data (especially) for reach characters such as "reach!" Displayed at the moment when reach occurs and reach characters such as "battle", "win", "reach", and "daze!" The image index data) is configured to display the default characters, and if necessary, by behavior (that is, by setting the reach character conversion process to be performed in step E11 as necessary) immediately before display. Change characters and replace each character with different colors.
Further, in the reach character conversion process described above, for example, when the reliability of the jackpot notice fluctuates at a low reliability, the character size is set to 0 in step E105, so that the reach character exists in control, but actually. Is invisible. However, the method of not displaying is not limited to this configuration, for example, a configuration that does not display reach characters may be used.

[Specific examples of production control data table and production display]
Next, a specific example of the data table used in the control of the effect control device 300 described above, a specific example of the effect display performed on the display unit 41a (screen, display area) of the display device 41 by the same control, and the like are shown in the figure. It will be described with reference to 133 to 180.
First, FIG. 133 is a specific example of the still image ROM member list table, which has already been described in step D878 and the like of the bitmap addition process.
Next, FIG. 134 is a specific example of the moving image ROM member list table, which has already been described in step D897 or the like of the moving image addition process.
Next, FIG. 135 is a specific example of a motion list table. This list table for motion has already been described in the explanation part of the scenario analysis process (specifically, the part where the motion index is explained).

Next, FIG. 136 is a specific example of the scenario table (during the customer waiting demonstration), which has already been described in step D585 and the like of the scenario analysis process, constant weight processing, iterative processing, and the like.
Next, FIG. 137 is a specific example of the scenario table (special figure 1 at the time of normal fluctuation), which has already been described in step D586 and the like of the scenario analysis process.

Next, FIG. 138 is a specific example of the motion table (at the start of the normal fluctuation of the left symbol), which has already been described in step D823 and the like of the motion command execution process.
In the control of the motion table, unless the motion deletion process or the new motion registration process is executed for the target motion layer, the table returns to the head when the row reaches the bottom. That is, in the motion control process (step D30), when the control of the target motion table is completed up to the final frame (the frame number reaches the final number of frames), the same motion table is used as in the case of motion registration. Is configured to be executed from the beginning again.
Next, FIG. 139 is an example of the display result by the motion table shown in FIG. 138.
As shown in this figure, the upper left corner of the display screen 41a is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0), and the vertical direction is the Y axis direction. Therefore, the lower left corner of the display screen 41a is the X coordinate. = 0 and Y coordinate = 767. Further, since the left-right direction of the display screen 41a is the X-axis direction, the upper right corner of the display screen 41a has the X coordinate = 1023 and the Y coordinate = 0, and the lower right corner of the display screen 41a has the X coordinate = 1023 and Y. The coordinates = 767. It should be noted that the specific numerical values of such coordinates are only an example.

FIG. 139 (a) corresponds to the first frame (a) of the motion table. The symbol "2" containing the image of the tiger character is the next symbol (object index 0), the symbol "1" is the current symbol (object index 1), and the symbol "9" is the previous symbol (object index 2). ), These objects are additionally registered by the 1st to 6th rows of the motion table, and the behavior is set. Further, the display positions and sizes of these objects are set in the 7th to 9th rows of the motion table, and the display shown in FIG. 139 (a) is performed accordingly. However, the next symbol is actually not visible because it is entirely outside the screen, and the previous symbol is only partially visible.

Further, FIG. 139 (b) corresponds to the second frame (b) of the motion table. The design and behavior settings of each object are the same as in the first frame (a), and the display positions and sizes of these objects are set in the 11th to 13th rows of the motion table, which is shown in FIG. 139. The display shown in (b) is performed. In this case, the Y-coordinate values are all changed by -8 from the first frame (a) (for example, the current symbol of the object index 1 has the Y-coordinate value changed from 7 to -1). The design is slightly moved upward on the display screen 41a. This is a part of the movement of hopping once in the operation of scrolling (fluctuation) downward after each symbol hops (slightly rises) at the start of fluctuation. In the third and fourth frames (c) and (d) of the motion table (FIG. 138), the Y coordinates are sequentially changed by -8.

Next, the upper side of FIG. 140 shows the state of the initial position of each symbol (the state at the top except for the hop operation described above), and has the same display as (a) of FIG. 139 described above.
Further, the lower side of FIG. 140 shows a state in which each symbol is scrolled to the bottom of the moving range.
The movement (scrolling) of the display position as the variable display of each symbol is performed within the range of the above-mentioned two states.
For example, when the current symbol reaches the bottom of the movement range, the value at the beginning of the movement range will be restored with the symbol number updated (+1). In this example, only three symbols (when considered by the current symbol, the previous symbol, and the next symbol instead of the symbol number) are repeatedly moving within their respective narrow effective ranges. Since the symbol number is incremented by 1 when returning to the top (that is, for example, the symbol "1" can be switched to the symbol "2"), the same symbol appears to be scrolling from the upper part of the screen to the lower part of the screen.

Then, when the y-coordinate fluctuates at a speed at which 100 are added, the current symbol is fluctuated and controlled by the values of 7 → 107 → 207 → 307 → 407 → 7 → 107 → .... The symbol number displayed when it reaches 7 is incremented by 1. The same applies to the previous symbol and the next symbol of the left symbol, and the same applies to the current symbol, the previous symbol, and the next symbol of the middle symbol and the right symbol.
The merit of this method is that it is easy to determine how many symbol numbers are currently the center of control. In the example of FIG. 140, it can be relatively calculated that the symbol number "1" is the center, the previous symbol is "9" immediately before it, and the next symbol is "2" one after it. When the coordinates return to the top, the central symbol can be narrowed down to one control target, such as "2", so a simple structure can be created.
If this is a method of moving the same symbol from top to bottom instead of dividing it into "current symbol, previous symbol, and next symbol", each will exist as three independent symbols, so the reference symbol will be Since it does not exist, there are problems such as being difficult to control when replacing symbols and having to manage everything, but in this example, such problems are solved.
The above range division is for normal fluctuations. This is not the case because the position of the design changes in various ways during reach (during reach action). However, even during reach, the idea of classifying the current symbol, previous symbol, next symbol, etc. remains.

Next, FIG. 141 is an example of connecting the motion table when the left symbol is normally changed. The concatenation of the motion tables is performed by the scenario table described above. First, in the motion table (Mdat0000) shown in the upper part of FIG. 141, the motion index 0 is set by the 20th row (// 19) of the scenario table shown in FIG. 143, which will be described later, and thereby the motion list table of FIG. 135. It is set by specifying the first line (stop the left symbol) of. Then, by this motion table (Mdat0000), the symbol "1" is registered as the object index 0 (first row), and then this symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0 (second row). ), It is displayed as a stop symbol at the display position specified in the third line. In a motion table such as this motion table (Mdat0000), even if the drawn character has a different effect depending on the situation, only one way is registered for the same movement, and it is internally registered as a basic character on the table. The character with the youngest number in control (for example, the character with the youngest registered address in the character ROM (image ROM 322), and in this case, the stop symbol "1") is used. According to this configuration, since the one with the lowest number in internal control is used as a reference, it is easy to calculate the difference value such as character replacement by behavior (change processing), and it is easy to control and efficiently control. This has the effect of improving development efficiency. Further, since the motion table is registered only once for the same movement, there is an effect that the data capacity can be prevented from becoming large.

Next, in the motion table (Mdat0003) shown in the middle of FIG. 141, the motion index 3 is set by the first row of the scenario table (MS_LZ100) shown in FIG. 137, and thereby the four rows of the motion list table of FIG. 135. It is set by specifying the eye (left normal fluctuation (first half)). Then, by this motion table (Mdat0003), the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol are registered, respectively, and the normal variation (first half) of the left symbol is displayed, as in the case described in FIG. 138 described above. The middle row of FIG. 141 and FIG. 138 show the same motion table (Mdat0003).

Next, in the motion table (Mdat0004) shown in the lower part of FIG. 141, the motion index 4 is set by the fourth row of the scenario table (MS_LZ100) shown in FIG. 137, and thereby the five rows of the motion list table of FIG. 135. It is set by specifying the eye (// 4 left normal fluctuation (second half)). Then, the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol are registered by this motion table (Mdat0004), and the normal fluctuation (second half) of the left symbol is displayed.
Although only the left symbol has been described above, the same applies to the right symbol, the middle symbol, and other objects.
In this way, the scenario table can be easily configured as a series of long effects by freely combining a plurality of motion tables that specify a blocked display effect.

Next, the upper part of FIG. 142 is a specific example of the scenario table (at the time of advance notice of the push button), and has already been described in the variable weight processing, the PB waiting processing, the PB determination branch processing, and the like.
Next, the lower part of FIG. 142 is a specific example of the motion table (at the time of giving notice of the push button), which has already been described in step D823 of the motion command execution process and step D954 of the object deletion process.

Next, FIG. 143 is an example of a scenario table used at the ending of the variable display effect of the special figure.
Here, in order to prevent the next symbol change from suddenly starting at the same time as the ending movie ends, a symbol display period of a predetermined time is provided during the ending period. In this example, a constant weight code is set on the 27th line (// 26), and the weight time value is set to 30 (that is, 1 second). As a result, the left, right, and middle stop symbols displayed in motion registered on the 20th line (// 19), 22nd line (// 21), and 24th line (// 23) are displayed for a predetermined time (this example). Then, it continues for 1 second), and the next symbol change does not start suddenly at the same time as the ending movie ends.

Further, in the background setting of the 18th line (// 17) of FIG. 143, since the value of the motion index is set to (-1), it becomes NO in step D637 of the motion registration process described above, and the motion index of the RAM. The value of the area is used as the motion index. This must match the background displayed after the ending, but since the probability information command has not been received at this point, it can be predicted from the information such as the symbol command, fanfare command, and ending command that have already been received. This is because it is necessary to select the background. In addition, even if a symbol command of a probabilistic symbol is sent from the game control device, there is a possibility that the effect control device side may perform an effect of pretending to be a hit with a normal symbol (non-probable variable symbol), so not only the command but also the command. This is because it is necessary to use the internal information of the effect control device. A probability information command is sent at the end of the ending scenario, but if there is no problem with the displayed content, it can be continued as it is, and if there is a problem, it is configured to switch to the background corresponding to the command ( Because the command from the game control device has the highest priority).

Next, FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating a display layer. Here, the display layer means a virtual layer (layer) that determines the context (display priority) of whether to display as the front side or the other side on the screen. In this embodiment, the motion layer described above corresponds to the basic display layer. As described above, there are a total of 14 motion layers in this embodiment, from motion 0 for the background to motion 13 for the fourth symbol, and the images overlap at the same position (positions of the X coordinate and the Y coordinate). In this case, the larger the motion number, the priority is displayed. That is, when images overlap at the same position, unless the one with a large motion number is transparent or translucent, the one with a small motion number (the one with a young motion number) has a large motion number in the overlapped part. It appears to be hidden and disappears. FIG. 144 shows the relationship between the display layers corresponding to the motion layers as a perspective view.

In the case of this embodiment, the display priority of the motion layer is actually determined by the effect display editing process (FIGS. 125 to 127) described above. In the effect display editing process described above, as described above, the processes are performed in order from the one with the smallest motion layer number (that is, the motion number) (younger one), and each image is drawn in the virtual drawing space of VDP312 in this order. This is because it is drawn in (frame buffer).
Further, although FIG. 144 shows only the classification of the basic display layers corresponding to the motion layers, it is considered that the display layers are more finely different even in the same motion layer due to the difference in the object index described above. be able to. As mentioned above, the smaller the object index value, the more it will be displayed in the back of the screen as the context of the display layer (that is, when the display positions overlap, the object with the larger object index value has priority. It is displayed on the screen).

Next, in FIGS. 145 and 146, an image of effect information (information for effect different from the identification information) different from the image of the decorative symbol (that is, the symbol of the decorative special figure; identification information) is on the back side or As a specific example of a series of effect displays overlapping on the front side, an example of a reach start effect is shown. In addition, the fourth symbol is usually always displayed somewhere on the screen 41a, and in some cases, a hold display of the start memory of the special figure (including a special effect display by a look-ahead notice) is performed. The illustration is omitted to avoid complication.
In this production example, first, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), "7" as the left symbol KTL and "7" as the right symbol KTR of the decorative special figure are largely displayed on both sides of the center of the screen 41a. After that, the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR are gradually reduced to a small size on the screen, and are shown in FIG. 146 (a) through the state shown in FIG. 145 (b) and then the state shown in FIG. 145 (c). A display that moves to the state is made. The dotted line with an arrow shown in FIG. 145 (a) illustrates the subsequent movement locus of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (the locus of moving to the upper corner after turning), and is actually the screen 41a. (However, this may also be displayed as an effect).

Then, when the images of the left symbol KTL (identification information) and the right symbol KTR (identification information) start to move, an image of the face of "tiger taro" as the character C7 (image of the production information) appears on the screen 41a, and this is the screen. A display is displayed that moves from the upper right side to the lower left side. At this time, the character C7 is displayed so as to partially overlap the right symbol KTR in the state of FIG. 145 (b) and to be in front of the right symbol KTR, and in the state of FIG. 145 (c), the left symbol KTL and the right. It partially overlaps with the symbol KTR and is displayed so as to be on the side (back side) opposite to the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR, and a dynamic effect display is realized. The dotted lines shown in FIGS. 145 (b), 145 (c), and 146 (a) indicate the movement locus immediately before the character C7, and are not actually displayed on the screen 41a (however, this also). It may be displayed as a production).

Further, in the state of FIG. 145 (c) in which the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR and the character C7 are gathered and overlapped in the center (a state in which the player gazes at the center), the advance notice lottery process (for example, steps D426 and D429 described above). ), For example, the color of the character C7 changes temporarily (or continuously) as shown in FIG. 146 (b), or the character C7 is different as shown in FIG. 146 (c). By temporarily (or continuously) changing to the character C6, for example, a notice effect suggesting the reliability of a big hit is performed. If the reliability is suggested by the display content or display mode of the character or the like in the state where the image of the special figure (identification information) and the image of the character (effect information) are overlapped in this way, the player suggests the reliability. It is extremely unlikely that the (notice) effect will be overlooked, and an effective advance notice display can be realized.

The advance notice effect suggesting the reliability is, for example, the contents of the data table of the advance notice distribution (lottery of the advance notice effect contents) used in the above-mentioned steps D426 and D429, for example, when a big hit occurs, the character C7 is used by a behavior or the like. It may be set so that the probability that the color of the table changes (or changes to a specific color) is high. In this way, the player empirically realizes that when the color of the character C7 changes (or changes to a specific color), it is easy to make a big hit. Therefore, the change in the color of the character C7 makes the jackpot reliability reliable. Can be suggested. The same applies to other notice productions.
Further, even if there is no change in the color of the character C7, the series of reach start effects themselves shown in FIGS. 145 (a), 145 (b), 145 (c), and 146 (a) are big hit reliability. It may be done as a notice of the degree. In this case as well, for example, if the contents of the data table for drawing the effect contents are set so that the reach start effect can be easily executed in the case of a big hit, the player will get a big hit when the reach start effect is executed. It can be estimated that it is easy to become (that is, it can suggest the jackpot reliability to the player).

Next, FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining one aspect of the state of each image and the display layer in the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 and 146.
In the effect display, when the effect control device 300 shows the character C7 to the front side of the right symbol KTR or the like (in the case of FIG. 145 (b) in the specific example), as shown in FIG. 147 (a), the character The image of the movie M1 (image for directing), which is a moving image of C7 moving as described above, is arranged on the display layer (motion 4; notice 4) behind the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (identification information). At the same time, the image GM1 obtained by copying a part of the image of the movie M1 including the image of the character C7 (effect information) is placed on the display layer (motion 8; notice 5) on the front side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR. It is arranged and controlled so that the display positions (positions of the X coordinate and the Y coordinate) of the character C7 in the images on the back side and the front side match. That is, the character C7 is drawn at the same position on the display layer before and after the decorative special drawing pattern (the display layer is motion 5 to 7), and the character C7 is drawn twice as a whole, but the front side is the back side. I am using a copy of a part of the image in. Since a part of the image is copied, the original data (image data registered in the image ROM 322) can be used, and the image on the back side (for example, the image of the left symbol KTL and the image of the right symbol KTR) can be displayed without making it translucent. It has the effect of ensuring the visibility of decorative special drawings without unnecessarily covering them up.

Further, in the effect display, when the effect control device 300 shows the character C7 to the back side of the right symbol KTR or the like (in the case of FIG. 145 (c) in the specific example), as shown in FIG. 147 (b). , The image of the movie M1 (effect image) is left arranged on the display layer (motion 4; notice 4) behind the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (identification information), and the left symbol KTL and the right symbol are left. The character C7 is not displayed on the display layer (motion 8; notice 5) on the front side of the KTR. That is, the character C7 is drawn only on the display layer on the back side of the decorative special drawing pattern (the display layer is motion 5 to 7).

Next, FIGS. 148 and 149 are examples of a scenario table and a motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 145 to 146 with the configuration of FIG. 147.
Of these, the upper part of FIG. 148 is the scenario table used for the left symbol KTL in the scenario layer 1 (left symbol reach start effect), and the middle part of FIG. 148 is the scenario table used for the right symbol KTR in the scenario layer 2. (Right symbol reach start effect), and the lower part of FIG. 148 is a scenario table (Torataro reach start effect) used for the character C7 in the scenario layer 4.
Further, the upper part of FIG. 149 is a motion table "Mdat0040" for controlling an image of the movie M1 (an image arranged on the back side), and the lower part of FIG. 149 is an image GM1 (front) obtained by copying the movie M1. It is a motion table "Mdat0041" for controlling the image) arranged on the side.

Hereinafter, each row of the scenario table (left symbol reach start effect) in the upper part of FIG. 148 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), the data of the "motion 5 registration code" is set as the operation code, and the data of the "motion index No. (30)" is set as the operand. As a result, in the above-mentioned motion registration process in the scenario analysis process of the scenario layer 1, display by the motion table (not shown) specified by the data of the above operand (display in which the left symbol KTL moves as described above) is performed. Is processed.
Next, in the second line (// 1), the data of the "constant weight code" is set as the operation code, and the data of the "wait time value (60)" is set as the operand. As a result, the above-mentioned constant weight processing is executed, and an operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table by a time (2 seconds) corresponding to 60 frames is realized. This is to wait for the display in which the left symbol KTL moves to the upper corner of the screen to finish.

Next, in the third line (// 2), the data of the "variable scenario switching code" is set as the operation code, and the data of the "left symbol scenario 3rd" is set as the operand. As a result, the fluctuation scenario switching process is executed, and the scenario is switched from the first half fluctuation to the second half fluctuation (reach action) (not shown).
The numerical values such as the wait time value and the motion index of the table shown in FIG. 148 are specific examples for explanation only, and are not necessarily the same as the actual numerical values. The same applies to the tables and the like in other figures.
Next, since the scenario table in the middle of FIG. 148 (right symbol reach start effect) is the same as the scenario table in the upper part of FIG. 148 (left symbol reach start effect), the description for each row will be omitted. However, here, since the design is on the right, the scenario layer number is 2, and the motion number of the registration code on the first line is 6.

Next, each row of the scenario table (tiger taro reach start effect) in the lower part of FIG. 148 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), the data of "Motion 4 registration code" is set as the operation code, and the data of "Motion index No. (40)" is set as the operand. As a result, in the above-mentioned motion registration process in the scenario analysis process of the scenario layer 4, the display (character C7 moves as described above) by the motion table (“Mdat0040” shown in the upper part of FIG. 149) specified by the data of the above operands. The process for performing the display on the back side) is performed.
Next, in the second line (// 1), the data of the "motion 8 registration code" is set as the operation code, and the data of the "motion index No. (41)" is set as the operand. As a result, in the above-mentioned motion registration process in the scenario analysis process of the scenario layer 4, the display (character C7 moves as described above) by the motion table (“Mdat0041” shown in the lower part of FIG. 149) specified by the data of the above operands. Processing for performing (display on the front side) is performed.

Next, in the third line (// 2), the data of the "constant weight code" is set as the operation code, and the data of the "wait time value (30)" is set as the operand. As a result, the above-mentioned constant weight processing is executed, and an operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table by a time (1 second) corresponding to 30 frames is realized. This is to wait for the character C7 to overlap with the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR at the center of the screen (the state of FIG. 145 (c)).
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), the data of "Motion 8 deletion code" is set as the operation code, and "Null" is set as the operand. As a result, the display in motion 8 is not performed, the display of the character C7 on the front side disappears, and only the display control of the character C7 on the back side is continued. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 145 (c), the character C7 A display is realized in which the character appears to be behind the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR.

Next, in the fifth line (// 4), the data of the "constant weight code" is set as the operation code, and the data of the "wait time value (30)" is set as the operand. As a result, the above-mentioned constant weight processing is executed, and an operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table by a time (1 second) corresponding to 30 frames is realized. This is to wait for the character C7 to move to the lower left side (the state shown in FIG. 146 (a)).
Next, in the 6th line (// 5), the data of "Motion 4 deletion code" is set as the operation code, and "Null" is set as the operand. As a result, the display in motion 4 is not performed, and the display of the character C7 on the back side also disappears.
Next, on the 7th line (// 6), an "end code" is set as an operation code, and "Null" is set as an operand. As a result, the effect control by this scenario table ends.

Next, the motion table “Mdat0040” in the upper part of FIG. 149 will be described.
According to this motion table "Mdat0040", first, in the first row (// 0), the "tiger taro movie 1" as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0, and then in the second row (// 1). , The image of this "Tiger Taro Movie 1" is appropriately replaced by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0 (that is, it is replaced according to the result of the above-mentioned advance notice lottery), and in the third line (// 2), It is displayed at the display position designated as the movie M1.
In this way, for example, if you want to register the character with the lowest jackpot reliability as the basic character in the motion table and change the character (however, change within the range of the same type of character) as the production progresses. By using the behavior (function to change the image data (character data) of the object (display element)) that changes the basic character to another one in the control program, one motion table can support various display modes. For example, it becomes data (motion table) that can be used in common both when it comes off and when it hits a jackpot, and the data capacity can be reduced and the development efficiency can be improved.

In the 4th line (// 3), a command called "decode code" and a parameter called "object index (0)" are set, but this is the above movie M1 (basic "", which has an object index of 0. This is for executing the above-mentioned object moving image decoding process for decoding "Torataro Movie 1" or another movie replaced by the behavior) as needed. It is also possible to display the effect information such as the character C7 by still image data instead of moving images, and in this case (that is, when the object 0 registered in the first line is a still image), the fourth line. Is unnecessary.

Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 149 will be described.
According to this motion table "Mdat0041", first in the first row (// 0), the "tiger taro movie 1" as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0, and then in the second row (// 1). , The image of this "Torataro Movie 1" is replaced as appropriate by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0, and on the third line (// 2), by this movie M1 (basic "Torataro Movie 1" or behavior A part of the image of the replaced other movie) is copied and displayed at the display position designated as the image GM1. However, in the case of this example, the command "effect 1 code" and the parameters "object index (0)" and "effect type (1)" are set on the 5th line (// 4), and the 6th line. Since the command "effect 2 code" and the parameters "object index (0)" and "effect parameter (128)" are set in (// 5), the above-mentioned effect type specification process and effect parameter specification process can be performed. The image that is executed and displayed as the image GM1 is controlled to be in a translucent state with a transparency (darkness) of about 50% (= 100 × 128/255). However, it is not always necessary to make it semi-transparent, and a mode in which commands and the like on the 5th to 6th lines are not set may be used.
Further, in the fourth row (// 3), the "decode code" and the "object index (0)" are set as in the motion table "Mdat0040".

The motion table "Mdat0041" has the above-mentioned fifth and sixth lines for making the image translucent, and the command on the third line is "copy 2 code" instead of the movement code. Unlike the table "Mdat0040", the numerical values of the parameters of the display position (X coordinate, Y coordinate) and the size (width, height) of the display image in the third row are also different from the motion table "Mdat0040". .. This is because the display by the motion table "Mdat0040" (display of the image of the movie M1 in the motion 4 on the back side) is, in this case, the "Torataro movie 1" (or another movie replaced by the behavior). While the entire image is displayed on the entire display screen 41a, the display by the motion table "Mdat0041" (display of the image GM1 in the motion 8 on the front side) is "Torataro Movie 1" ( Or, only a part of the image (a part including the effect information such as the character C7 or the replaced character C6) of the image of the other movie replaced by the behavior) is displayed at a predetermined position on the screen 41a (character C7 in motion 4 on the back side, etc.). This is because it is displayed at the same display position as the image of. Therefore, the parameters in the third row of the motion table "Mdat0041" are, for example, "X coordinate (823)", "Y coordinate (200)", "width (200)", and "height (200)". There is. Since it is "width (200)" and "height (200)", the image GM1 is a small rectangular image of 200 x 200. On the other hand, in the case of this example, the image of the movie M1 has a size of the entire screen of 1023 × 767. It should be noted that these numerical values such as display positions are merely numerical examples for explanation, and are not necessarily actual numerical values.

The configuration of the scenario table or the like that realizes the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 to 147 is not limited to the mode described above. For example, in the examples of FIGS. 148 and 149, the scenario layer 4 is used to control the character C7 (or another replaced character), but the scenario of the scenario layer 1 or 2 in the upper part of FIG. 148 or the middle part of FIG. Add a line in the table in which the code for registering the motion tables "Mdat0040" and "Mdat0041" is set, and design (identification information) and characters (effect information) only in the scenario layer 1 and the scenario layer 2. ) Both can be controlled. On the contrary, in the scenario table of the scenario layer 4 in the lower part of FIG. 148, the motion index No. (30) and No. It is also possible to add a line for executing the motion registration and the like in (31) to control both the symbol and the character only by the scenario layer 4.
When different motion layers are used, the motion layers on which the character C7 and the like are placed are not limited to motion 4 and motion 8, and any motion can be used as long as it is before or after motions 5 to 7, which are display layers of symbols. It may be a layer of. That is, in principle, the image of the character C7 or the like arranged on the back side of the symbol (identification information) may be arranged in any of motions 0 to 4, and the character C7 arranged on the front side of the symbol (identification information). Such images may be arranged in any of motions 8 to 13.

Further, in this production example, in order to arrange the character C7 or the like (effect information) on the back side or the front side of the special figure design (identification information), the motion layer of the character C7 or the like is made different from the left design KTL or the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display priority may be set by making the object indexes different according to the arrangement order before and after. That is, the movie M1 on the back side is the same as FIG. 147 (a) by arranging the movie M1 in the same motion 5 as the left symbol KTL and setting the object index to a value smaller than the left symbol KTL. The context (display priority) can be realized. Further, the image GM1 obtained by copying the movie M1 on the front side is arranged in the same motion 6 as the right symbol KTR, and the object index is set to a value larger than that of the right symbol KTR. The same context as in (a) can be realized. However, in this case, as the structure of the table, for example, the motion index No. registered in the first row in the upper row of FIG. 148. In the motion table specified in (30), in addition to the left symbol, objects such as character C7 (those placed on the back side) are registered and controlled, and the motion index registered in the first row in the middle of FIG. 148. No. In the motion table specified in (31), in addition to the right symbol, an object such as character C7 (which is arranged on the front side) is registered and controlled, and the scenario table in the lower part of FIG. 148 becomes unnecessary.

Further, in this effect example, as the effect information to be arranged and displayed on the front side or the back side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR, which are the identification information, they are added to the identification information as shown in FIG. 155 (a) described later. Character C7 "Torataro", which is additional information, is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Directive information other than the above additional information may be used, or inanimate objects (for example, "rose flower", "flame", a specific figure, etc.) may be displayed as directing information instead of a person or creature such as "tiger taro". Good.

Next, FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating a state (another mode) of each image and a display layer that realizes the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 and 146. As shown in FIG. 150, the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 and 146 can also be realized by the following configuration.
That is, when the effect control device 300 shows the character C7 to the front side of the right symbol KTR or the like in the effect display (in the case of FIG. 145 (b) in the specific example), as shown in FIG. 150 (a). , The image (directing image) of the movie M1 which is a moving image of the character C7 moving as described above is placed on the display layer (motion 4; notice 4) behind the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (identification information). In addition to arranging, the same image of the movie M1 is made semi-transparent and arranged on the display layer (motion 8; notice 5) on the front side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR, and the images on the back and front sides are arranged. The display position (position of the X coordinate and the Y coordinate) of the character C7 may be controlled to match. That is, in this other aspect, the character C7 is drawn at the same position on the display layer before and after the decorative special drawing pattern (the display layer is motion 5 to 7), and the character C7 is drawn twice as a whole, but in front. The side uses the same image as the back side in a semi-transparent form. Since it is the same image, the original data (image data registered in the image ROM 322) can be used, and since it is semi-transparent, there is an effect that the visibility of the decorative special drawing on the back side can be ensured.

When the character C7 is shown on the back side of the right symbol KTR or the like (in the case of FIG. 145 (c) in the specific example), as shown in FIG. 150 (b), the image of the movie M1 (effect image). ) Is left on the display layer (motion 4; notice 4) behind the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (identification information), and the display layer (motion) on the front side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR. 8; The character C7 is not displayed in the notice 5). That is, the character C7 is drawn only on the display layer on the back side of the decorative special drawing pattern (the display layer is motion 5 to 7). This is the same as FIG. 147 (b).

Next, FIG. 151 is an example of a motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 145 to 146 with the configuration of FIG. 150. The same scenario table as in FIG. 148 can be used.
First, since the motion table “Mdat0040” in the upper part of FIG. 151 is exactly the same as that in the upper part of FIG. 149, the description thereof will be omitted.
Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 151 will be described.
According to this motion table "Mdat0041", first, in the first row (// 0), the "tiger taro movie 1" as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0, and then in the second row (// 1). , The image of this "Tiger Taro Movie 1" is replaced as appropriate by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0, and on the third line (// 2), by this Movie M1 (basic "Tora Taro Movie 1" or behavior The entire image of the replaced movie) is displayed on the entire specified screen. However, the command "effect 1 code" and the parameters "object index (0)" and "effect type (1)" are set on the 5th line (// 4), and "effect type (1)" is set on the 6th line (// 5). Since the command "effect 2 code" and the parameters "object index (0)" and "effect parameter (64)" are set, the above-mentioned effect type specification process and effect parameter specification process are executed, and the movie M1 The image displayed as an image is controlled to be semi-transparent with a transparency (darkness) of about 25% (= 100 × 64/255).

The motion table "Mdat0041" in the lower row of FIG. 151 is different from the motion table "Mdat0041" in the lower row of FIG. 149 in that the command in the third row is a movement code, and the display position (X coordinate, Y coordinate) in the third row. And the numerical values of the parameters of the size (width, height) of the displayed image are the same as those of the motion table "Mdat0040". This is because the display by the motion table "Mdat0041" in this case displays the entire image of "Torataro Movie 1" (or another movie replaced by the behavior) in the same manner as the display by the motion table "Mdat0040". This is because it is displayed on the entire 41a. Even when the entire image of the movie M1 is displayed, it is not limited to the mode of displaying the entire image of the movie M1 but may be displayed in a limited area of the display screen 41a depending on the content of the effect.

Next, FIG. 152 is a modified example of the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 145 to 146.
First, in FIG. 152 (a), the display positions (X coordinate, Y coordinate) of the image of the character C7 or the like displayed on the back side and the image of the character C7 or the like displayed on the front side are different, and the character C7 or the like is displayed. It is a mode in which two characters appear with a shift, for example, the display position is shifted and the movement is performed. It should be noted that the display position may be an effect display that only temporarily shifts at a specific timing and does not shift except at a specific timing so that it looks like one.
Next, in FIG. 152 (b), the inverted state of the image of the character C7 or the like displayed on the back side and the image of the character C7 or the like displayed on the front side are different (only one of them is inverted). Two characters C7 and the like appear symmetrically, and for example, the characters C7 and the like move in different inverted states. It should be noted that the inverted state may be an effect display that looks like one without being different except at a specific timing, only temporarily different at a specific timing.

According to the effect displays shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b), the player who is looking at the display screen 41a feels uncomfortable due to the deviation of the display position and the difference in the inverted state, which is novel. A highly interesting production display is realized. The same applies to the other effect displays, but the effect displays shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b) suggest reliability such as whether or not the hit is a big hit or whether or not the probability fluctuates. It can be performed as a notice production. For example, in the case of a big hit, the player can set the contents of the table used for the lottery so that the mode of the effect display shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b) can be easily drawn. When appears, it can be empirically understood that it is easy to make a big hit, and the reliability can be suggested.

Next, FIG. 153 is an example of a motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIG. 152 (a). The same scenario table as in FIG. 148 can be used.
First, in the motion table "Mdat0040" in the upper row of FIG. 153, only the "end code" is set as a command in the first, second, and third rows, and the fourth and subsequent rows thereafter are the first row in the upper row of FIG. 149. It is exactly the same as after the eyes.
Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 153 is exactly the same as the motion table in the lower part of FIG. 151.
As mentioned above, the display control for one frame ends with the "end code", so if the "end code" is set to the first three lines only in the motion layer on the back side like this, the first Nothing is displayed by the motion table of the display layer on the back side for 3 frames, and the display of the movie M1 on the back side starts with a time difference of 3 frames (0.1 seconds) from the front side. Will be done. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), the display positions of the images of the effect information on the front side and the back side are shifted.

Next, FIG. 154 is an example of a motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIG. 152 (b). The same scenario table as in FIG. 148 can be used.
First, the motion table “Mdat0040” in the upper part of FIG. 154 is exactly the same as that in the upper part of FIG. 149.
Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 154 will be described.
According to this motion table "Mdat0041", first in the first row (// 0), the "tiger taro movie 1" as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0, and then in the second row (// 1). , The image of this "Torataro Movie 1" is replaced as appropriate by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0, and on the third line (// 2), by this movie M1 (basic "Torataro Movie 1" or behavior The image of the replaced other movie) is inverted in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction), and in this case, it is displayed on the entire display screen 41a. In the case of this example as well, the command "effect 1 code" and the parameters "object index (0)" and "effect type (1)" are set on the 5th line (// 4), and the 6th line ( Since the command "effect 2 code" and the parameters "object index (0)" and "effect parameter (64)" are set in // 5), the image of the movie M1 displayed on the front side is transparent ( The density) is controlled to a translucent state of about 25% (= 100 × 64/255).

The motion table "Mdat0041" has the above-mentioned fifth and sixth lines for making the image translucent, and the command on the third line is "inverted 2 code" instead of the movement code. It is different from the table "Mdat0040". As a result, as shown in FIG. 152 (b), the display positions of the images of the effect information on the front side and the back side are symmetrical.
The direction of inversion may be not the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) but the vertical direction, or the position may be changed so as to be point-symmetrical.

Next, FIGS. 155 to 158 show images of a plurality of effect information different from the design (identification information) of the decorative special figure in an area different from the variable display area of the decorative special figure on the screen 41a of the display means (display device 41). Displayed in SD mode, which includes a notification effect that notifies the mode or result of the variable display game of the special figure (presence or absence of reach action in this embodiment) by combining the displayed effect information among the plurality of effect information. An example is shown. However, FIG. 155 (a) shows a display example of normal fluctuation for comparison. In addition, the fourth symbol is usually always displayed somewhere on the screen 41a, and in some cases, a hold display of the start memory of the special figure (including a special effect display by pre-reading notice) is performed, but this display is complicated. The illustration is omitted to avoid.

First, FIG. 155 (a) will be described. FIG. 155 (a) is a display example of normal fluctuation. In this case, the entire display screen 41a is a variable display area for variable display of decorative special symbols (left symbol KTL, right symbol KTR, middle symbol KTC). In this case, there are nine types of symbols (identification information) constituting the decorative special figure, from "1" to "9", and as shown in FIG. 155 (a), production information is added (corresponding) to each as additional information. (Attached). For example, "6" is a picture of the face of Tiger Suke C6 and a character representing its name, "7" is a picture of the face of Tiger Taro C7 and a character representing its name, and "8" is a picture of Tiger Lock C8. A picture of the face and characters representing its name are added, and some effect information (not shown) is also added to the other "1" to "5" and "9". Needless to say, the added production information is not limited to the character with the tiger motif, and may be a person, an animal, a plant, a fictitious creature, or an inanimate object.
In the drawings of the following display examples, the description of the character code (including the leader line) of characters such as C6 to C8 may be omitted as appropriate.

Next, FIG. 155 (b) and subsequent sections, which are the first example of the SD mode effect, will be described. Here, "SD" means super deformation. Deformation is generally the expression of an object by deforming or distorting it. In addition, the SD mode is a mode in which the character used for the additional information of the decorative special drawing actually appears in a highly deformed manner, but in the drawing of the present application, the diagram is simplified and easy to see. In order to secure the characters, the characters are shown in the same manner regardless of the presence or absence of deformation. The SD mode effect of this example is performed in a normal state (the jackpot probability of the special figure is a low probability state) that is not the probability variation mode, but is performed in a probability variation mode (the jackpot probability of the special figure is a high probability state), for example. May be good.

When this SD mode effect (first example) is started, first, as shown in FIG. 155 (b), the variable display area H1 of the decorative special figure is displayed as a small rectangular area in the upper right corner of the screen 41a, and thereafter. , The decorative special figure (left symbol KTL, right symbol KTR, middle symbol KTC) is variablely displayed in this variable display area H1, and the area excluding the variable display area H1 on the screen 41a (hereinafter referred to as the main screen area). In this case, the effect display is performed by a plurality of effect information different from the identification information (in this case, the numbers "1" to "9"). In FIG. 155 (b), the display of each image of the sky C10, the ground C11 including the road, the surrounding scenery C12, and the celestial body C13 (sun or moon) is started in the main screen area. Here, the sky C10, the ground C11, the surrounding scenery C12, and the celestial body C13 all correspond to a kind of effect information different from the identification information, and in terms of the effect content, form the background of a character such as "Torataro" that appears after that. It is also background information to be done.

Of these, the sky C10 is displayed on the innermost part of the displayed objects, for example, the entire screen, and at the time of FIG. 155 (b), it is a light blue image representing, for example, the blue sky. The ground C11 is an image of the ground including a road displayed at the bottom of the screen and appearing to extend from the front side of the screen to the back side, and is displayed so as to move (scroll) to the back side. Further, in the case of this example, the peripheral scenery C12 is an image of, for example, a coniferous forest displayed on both the left and right sides of the center of the screen, and is also displayed so as to move (scroll) to the back side. The celestial body C13 is the sun that can be seen in the sky at the time of FIG. 155 (b), and at this time, it is displayed so as to gradually move so as to rise from the left side of the screen corresponding to the east side of the sky.
Here, the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 are images in which the viewer feels a sense of perspective as if the road on the ground C11 extends from the front to the back. Specifically, it is an image in which the vanishing point (point at infinity) in perspective is located near the upper end of the center of the road displayed in the center of the lower part of the screen.

Then, as shown by the dotted line with an arrow in FIG. 155 (b), the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 are displayed as if they are moving toward the vanishing point, so that the place is moved to the front side. The display that looks like is started. The ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 displayed so as to move in this way are background information for realizing the first parameter indicating the passage of time (the first parameter that makes the player who sees the display feel the passage of time). ..
Further, the brightness and color of the sky C10 are displayed so as to change in accordance with the movement of the celestial body C13 described above, whereby the time change of morning, noon, evening, and night is expressed. That is, the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 are background information for realizing the second parameter indicating the passage of time (the second parameter that makes the player who sees the display feel the passage of time). As of FIG. 155 (b), the sky C10 and the celestial body C13 represent the morning.

In the drawings of the following display examples, the description of the reference numerals (including leader lines) of the sky C10, the ground C11, the surrounding scenery C12, the celestial body C13, etc. may be omitted as appropriate.
Needless to say, the specific modes of the production information and the background information of the sky C10, the ground C11, the surrounding scenery C12, the celestial body C13, and the like are not limited. For example, the ground C11 and the surrounding landscape C12 are not limited to the coniferous forest, and may be, for example, an image of a rose garden, a building district, and are not limited.
In addition, the dotted line with an arrow shown in the figure of the display example indicates the movement of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12, and if it is moving, it is also described in the following figures, but in reality It is not displayed on the screen 41a (however, this may also be displayed as an effect).

In the SD mode effect (first example), first, the display shown in FIG. 155 (b) described above is performed for a short time, and then, as shown in FIG. 155 (c), a character as effect information is provided near the vanishing point. Appears in positions adjacent to each other on the left and right. In the example of FIG. 155 (c), Tiger Lock C8 and Tiger Taro C7 (a state in which there is a body in addition to the face) appear. Here, at the time of FIG. 155 (c), these characters are displayed so as to be on the back side (far side) of the ground C11 on the road by being displayed small near the vanishing point, and the back side. It is displayed in a mode (for example, the state of limbs) that seems to move toward the front side (walking, running, etc.). That is, the display (that is, the variable display) in which the image of the character such as the tiger taro C7 displayed near the vanishing point moves (scrolls) toward the front side is started. The movement of the character to the front side is relatively more realistic due to the display such as moving to the back side of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 described above.
The left and right characters may not appear at the same time, but may appear with a time lag, or may be displayed so that there is a difference in the front and rear positions. Further, at the time of FIG. 155 (c), the states (display position, display color, brightness, etc.) of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 are in a state representing daytime. In particular, the image of the sun as celestial body C13 is displayed in a state of rising to a high position in the sky.

Next, after passing through the state of FIG. 155 (c), the tiger lock C8 and the tiger taro C7 are gradually displayed larger at the bottom of the screen, so that the display is further advanced to the front side, and FIG. 156 (a) shows. As shown, the tiger lock C8 and the tiger taro C7 advance to the foremost side and stop for a moment, and then disappear as shown in FIG. 156 (b). In the case of this example, the tiger lock C8 and the tiger taro C7 are not in a state in which a plurality of characters (in this case, two characters (directing information)) are in a predetermined combination (a state in which they are aligned), and therefore reach at this point. It does not become an occurrence notification.
At the time of FIG. 156 (a), the states of the celestial bodies C13 and the sky C10 are still in the state of representing daytime. However, the sun as the celestial body C13 moves and is displayed in a state slightly lower than that in FIG. 155 (c), and changes in the same manner thereafter.
Next, after the state shown in FIG. 156 (b), the following two characters (in this case, Torasuke C6 and Torataro C7) are also on the back side (far) as shown in FIG. 156 (c). It is displayed so that it looks like.

After that, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the tiger skate C6 and the tiger stalk C7 appear to move from the back side to the front side (walking or running, etc.). For example, while being displayed in the state of limbs), it is gradually displayed larger at the bottom of the screen, so that the display moves toward the front side.
Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), the presence or absence of reach is notified when the tiger lock C8 and the tiger wax C7 advance to the foremost side and stop for a moment. In the case of this example, the Torasuke C6 and the Torataro C7 are in a state in which a plurality of characters (in this case, two characters (directing information)) are in a predetermined combination (a state in which they are aligned). Become. In this case, "Reach!", Which is the dialogue C15 of Torasuke C6, and "Daze!", Which is the dialogue C16 of Torasuke C7, are displayed to surely notify the player of the occurrence of reach. Although not shown, when there is no reach, an image of lines such as "reach" and "failure" may be displayed. In any case, the image of the dialogue may or may not be present, and the presence or absence of reach may be notified only by the combination of character types.

According to the effects shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 157 (b) described above, a plurality of effect information other than the identification information is displayed in an area different from the variable display of the identification information, and the displayed effect information Since the notification effect of notifying by the combination is performed, the effect information having a low appearance rate as a stop symbol (for example, the character used for the additional information of the symbol having a low appearance rate such as "Torataro C7") is also made to appear in the notification effect. It is possible to make it possible to make the production information that is not the additional information of the decoration special figure appear, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game and to make the notification effect easy to understand and dynamic. In particular, as in the present embodiment (FIG. 156, etc.), the variation display area H1 for displaying the variation of the identification information (design of the decorative special drawing) is arranged in the corner of the screen 41a, and the remaining area in the screen is described above. In a mode in which the effect information for the notification effect is displayed in an area (main screen area) having a larger area than the variable display area H1, a more understandable and dynamic notification effect becomes possible.

The number of types of characters (effect information) displayed in the main screen area as the above notification effect is the number of symbols of the decorative special figure (number of types of identification information; 9 of "1" to "9" in this embodiment. It may be the same number as (type), more or less. That is, even in a mode in which all the additional information of the decorative special figure (in the case of the specific example, the above-mentioned characters such as "Torasuke C6", "Torataro C7", "Toralock C8", etc.) appears in the above notification effect. Alternatively, a mode in which a part of the additional information appears (for example, the additional information is grouped, only a specific group among a plurality of groups is appropriately selected, and only the characters of the selected group appear. ), In addition to the additional information, the effect information that is not the additional information may appear, or only the effect information that is not the additional information may appear.
Further, in the effect shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 157 (b) described above, the effect information to be displayed in the main screen area is displayed in the variable display direction (vertical direction) of the decorative special figure in the variable display area H1 of the decorative special figure. ) Is displayed in a different direction (front-back direction), which has the effect of realizing a dynamic and interesting production with various movements on the entire screen.

Here, as described above, the variation display in the front-back direction from the back side to the front side of the character in which a plurality of characters (effect information) appear from the back side, move to the front side, and disappear is not limited to two times. It may be performed three or more times. Further, the type of character (effect information) may be switched while the character is moving from the back side to the front side. For example, at the time of FIG. 157 (a) or before or after that, the left tiger skate C6 is instantly changed to the tiger sword C7, and at the time of FIG. 157 (b), both the left and right sides become the tiger sword C7 and the characters are the same. It may be configured to be a predetermined combination.
Further, in this display example, as will be described later, the variation display of the character in the front-rear direction is repeated until the states of the celestial bodies C13 and the sky C10 are switched to the states representing the night, but the pattern is not limited to this. For example, the variation display of the character in the front-back direction ends before night (or before noon), and then shifts to reach, or the variation display game of the special figure ends without reach (off). There may be a pattern.

Further, at the time of FIGS. 156 (b) and 156 (c), the states (display position, display color, brightness, etc.) of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 are the states representing the evening. In particular, in FIG. 156 (b), the sun as the celestial body C13 is displayed in a state where it has moved to a position lower than the time point in FIG. 156 (a), and at the time of FIG. 156 (c), the sun as the celestial body C13 is further displayed. It is displayed in the state just before it moves and sinks to the horizon. Then, at the time point of FIG. 157 (a), the states of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 (display form, display position, display color, brightness, etc.) are in a state representing night. In particular, an image of the moon is displayed as the celestial body C13 instead of the sun, and then in FIGS. 157 (b) and 157 (c), the movement of the moon is displayed in a progressive state. In this way, the second parameter indicating the passage of time is realized by the image change of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10. Especially in this example, the second parameter (expressed by the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 (background information)) is realized. When the time elapsed) is switched from evening to night, for example, after that, a new appearance from the back side of the character (switching of the type of character (effect information) that is displayed in a variable manner) does not occur, and at that point, the front side If the characters moving to are not aligned in a predetermined combination, reach is not generated. That is, although it is background information, when the images of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 represent the night, it is possible to notify the player that it is the last chance of reach generation, that is, the reach generation production period is over. It has become.

In this way, by changing the image of the background information, it is possible to suggest or notify the start, progress, end, etc. of some effect period or game state.
It should be noted that such a change in the image of the background information can realize a notice effect that suggests the reliability (reliability of reach occurrence, jackpot reliability, reliability that becomes high probability after the jackpot, etc.). For example, in the case of a big hit, the probability that the second parameter progresses to night is high, and in the case of deviation, the probability that the variation display of the character in the front-back direction ends before the second parameter becomes night is high. In addition, if the contents of the table used for the production lottery (notice lottery) are set, the player will recognize that the background information image is a hot production at night and is likely to be a big hit.
Further, the advance notice effect suggesting the reliability can be realized by the presence / absence of other effect information appearing in the reach generation notification effect described above, the image change, and the like (other than the image change of the background information). For example, it is also possible to suggest the reliability by the type of combination of characters that have notified the occurrence of reach (for example, a combination of tiger taro C7s tends to be a big hit).

Next, the display example shown in FIG. 157 (c) is an example of the reach action started through the state of FIG. 157 (b), with respect to the movable accessory 700 (display screen 41a of the display means) on the lower side of the screen. This is an example of an interlocking effect of an accessory that is interlocked with a movable accessory that can be moved. In this case, the movable accessory 700 is in a state of swinging to a position at an angle of 40 degrees, and a rope C17 (an interlocking image that changes in conjunction with the movement of the movable accessory) that pulls the movable accessory 700 is newly displayed on the screen 41a. An image is displayed, for example, the Torasuke C6 disappears, and the Torataro C7 holds the end of the rope C17 and pulls the movable accessory 700 in an upright position (interlocking that changes in conjunction with the movement of the movable accessory). Image) is also displayed. At the same time, in the variable display area H1 of the decorative special symbol, the reach action of the symbol (identification information) is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned and stopped at the same symbol, and only the middle symbol is changed (scrolling in the vertical direction in this case). It is said. As a result, it is possible to produce a reach action related to the character and the display, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
It should be noted that the above-mentioned character-linked effect is a notice effect that suggests (notices) some degree of reliability (reliability that becomes reach, reliability that becomes a big hit, or reliability that becomes a high probability state (probability change)). Can be done as.
Further, in the present application, the "character interlocking" means interlocking with the movement of the character, and the "character interlocking notice" or the "character interlocking effect" means the operation of the character and the display contents (display). It means not only the advance notice production or the overall production in which the sound output for the production may be included). Further, in the present application, "interlocking" means changing with some kind of relationship, and does not necessarily mean synchronization. "Interlocking" also includes a mode in which the movements are not synchronized and, for example, a predetermined amount of time shifts in time and related movements, and a mode in which the movements are opposite to each other. Further, the mode of movement of the movable accessory is not limited to rotation and rocking, and may be, for example, a linear or curved movement (parallel movement; so-called sliding movement), or a movement that combines rotation and parallel movement. It may be.

Then, in the case of disengagement as a result of reach, for example, an image (not shown) in which the tiger Taro C7 failed to raise the movable accessory 700 to the upright state is displayed, and the variable display game of the special figure ends. .. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit as a result of reach, for example, an image (not shown) in which the tiger Taro C7 succeeds in raising the movable accessory 700 to the upright state is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and even in the case of a big hit, for example, the image in which the tiger Taro C7 succeeds in raising the movable accessory 700 to the upright state is not displayed, and the state of FIG. 157 (c) is suddenly described later. The state may shift to the state shown in FIG. 158 (a).

Next, the display example shown in FIG. 158 (a) is an example of a blackout effect started through the state of FIG. 157 (c). As shown in FIG. 158 (a), a blackout image C20 that fills at least the entire main screen area with black is displayed, for example, all audio outputs are temporarily stopped, and after a predetermined time elapses, a predetermined music or a predetermined music or The sound effect begins to flow at a low volume and gradually increases in volume. At this time, the entire screen 41a including the variable display area H1 of the decorative special drawing may be filled with the blackout image C20 except for the fourth symbol. Further, the color of the blackout image C20 is not limited to black, and may be, for example, dark blue or gray. With such a blackout effect, it is possible to make it unclear whether or not it was a big hit, and for that matter, it may even be a malfunction of the game machine, and it is unclear what happened. , The player's expectations and anxieties about the big hit can be raised with a novel production, and an unprecedented interest can be realized.

It should be noted that this blackout effect is performed only when a big hit is made (or is performed with a high probability when a big hit is made), and the player is informed that the big hit (or its reliability) is achieved by this effect. It may be suggested to increase the excitement and joy of the player who becomes a big hit, but as a configuration that is performed with a predetermined probability even if it is out, the player is given a little anxiety that it may be out. As a result, the joy of a big hit may be enhanced.
Further, in FIG. 158 (a), the movable accessory 700 is in an upright state, but in this blackout effect, the movable accessory 700 may be in a state of, for example, an angle of 40 degrees, or is tilted substantially horizontally. It may return to the initial state.

Next, the display example shown in FIG. 158 (b) is an example of a jackpot notification effect (an effect when the decorative special figure is stopped and displayed) started after the state of FIG. 157 (a). In this case, the movable accessory 700 is in an upright state, for example, and the image of the rose flower C21 (interlocked image with respect to the accessory, related image), which is the effect information related to the decorative portion 701 of the movable accessory 700, is large and small on the screen 41a. Various multiple displays are made to celebrate and increase the joy of being a big hit. At this time, the rose flower (the real thing that is not the image) of the decorative part 701 of the movable accessory 700 and the screen 41a on which the rose flower C21 which is the image is displayed are displayed so as to look like one painting as a whole. And the production effect is enhanced. Further, as the sound, for example, the music started to be played back in the state of FIG. 157 (a) is continuously output, but the music which was, for example, a dark tone at the time of FIG. 157 (a) is shown in FIG. 157 (b). When it becomes a state, for example, it changes to a bright and cheerful tone and a production is made to celebrate the big hit. At this time, in the variable display area H1 of the decorative special figure, for example, the stop display is performed with the jackpot symbol in which the decorative special figure is "7, 7, 7" (all additional information is tiger taro C7). At this time, the variable display area H1 may be enlarged and displayed so that the stop symbol of the decorative special figure can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, FIGS. 159 to 161 are examples of a scenario table for realizing the effect display (including reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 158 (b). The detailed description of the motion table used in this display example will be omitted.
Of these, the upper part of FIG. 159 is a scenario table used for the background in scenario layer 0 (in this case, for the display control of the sky C10 described above).
Next, the middle part of FIG. 159 is a scenario table used for controlling the early stage (1st) of the left symbol KTL etc. (including the above-mentioned ground C11, surrounding scenery C12, celestial body C13 etc.) in the scenario layer 1, and the lower part of FIG. 159 is a scenario table. , Scenario layer 1 is a scenario table used for controlling the first half (2nd) of the left symbol KTL and the like, and FIG. 160 is a scenario table used for controlling the second half (3rd) of the left symbol KTL and the like in scenario layer 1. Is.

Next, the first from the top (top) of FIG. 161 is the scenario table used for controlling the early stage (1st) of the right symbol KTR in the scenario layer 2, and the second from the top of FIG. 161 is the scenario layer. 2 is a scenario table used for controlling the first half (2nd) of the right symbol KTR, and the third from the top of FIG. 161 is a scenario table used for controlling the second half (3rd) of the right symbol KTR in scenario layer 2. Is.
The fourth from the top of FIG. 161 is a scenario table used for controlling the early stage (1st) of the middle symbol KTC in the scenario layer 3, and the fifth from the top of FIG. 161 is the middle symbol KTC in the scenario layer 3. The scenario table used for controlling the first half (2nd) of the above, and the sixth from the top of FIG. 161 is the scenario table used for controlling the second half (3rd) of the middle symbol KTC in the scenario layer 3.
The numerical values such as the wait time value and the motion index of the tables shown in FIGS. 159 to 161 are specific examples for the sake of explanation, and are not necessarily the same as the actual numerical values. The same applies to the tables and the like in other figures.

Hereinafter, each row of the scenario table (scenario layer 0; background) in the upper part of FIG. 159 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), the data of "motion 0 registration code" and "motion index No. (81)" are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (81) (display by the moving image or the still image in the early stage and the first half of the sky C10) is started.
Next, in the second line (// 1), the data of the "constant weight code" and the "wait time value (270)" are set. As a result, the control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (9 seconds) corresponding to 270 frames. This is to display the early stage and the first half of the sky C10 (display of the sky C10 from the morning of FIG. 155 (b) to the night of FIG. 157 (a)).

Next, in the third line (// 2), the data of "motion 0 registration code" and "motion index No. (82)" are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (82) (display by the moving image or the still image in the latter half of the sky C10) is started.
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), a "constant weight code" and a "wait time value (375)" are set. As a result, the control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (12.5 seconds) corresponding to 375 frames. This is to display the latter half of the sky C10 (display of the sky C10 from the night of FIG. 157 (b) to the state of FIG. 158 (b)). The display of the sky C10 is hidden behind the blackout image C20 at the time of FIG. 158 (a), but may be displayed as a background of the rose flower C21 at the time of FIG. 158 (b), for example. Good.
Next, in the 5th line (// 4), the data of "end code" and "NULL" are set. As a result, the control in the scenario layer 0 is not performed, and the display of the empty C10 disappears.

Next, each row of the scenario table (scenario layer 1; the beginning of the left symbol) in the middle of FIG. 159 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), the data of "motion 4 registration code" and "motion index No. (83)" are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display (display of the image (moving image or still image) representing the variable display area H1) by the motion table (not shown) of (83) is started.
Next, in the second line (// 1), the data of "Motion 3 registration code" and "Motion index No. (84)" are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (84) (display by the moving image or the still image of the early stage and the first half of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12) is started. In this motion table, the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 are controlled as different objects, for example.

Next, in the third line (// 2), the data of "Motion 2 registration code" and "Motion index No. (85)" are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (85) (display by the moving image or the still image of the early stage and the first half of the celestial body C13) is started.
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), the data of "motion 5 registration code" and "motion index No. (30)" are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (30) (variable display by a moving image or a still image at the beginning of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) is started.

Next, in the fifth line (// 4), a "constant weight code" and a "wait time value (30)" are set. As a result, the control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (1 second) corresponding to 30 frames. This is because the early stage production by each display and the like started by the control of the scenario table up to this point is performed only for the relevant time.
Next, in the 6th line (// 5), the data of the "variable scenario switching code" and the "left symbol scenario 2nd" are set. As a result, the scenario is switched from the early fluctuation to the first half fluctuation according to the scenario table in the lower part of FIG. 159, for example.
Each image that has been started to be displayed by controlling the scenario table up to this point is placed in the motion layer (display layer) corresponding to the motion number, and the context (display priority) is determined (the one with a large motion number). (Priority is displayed as the front side) as already described in FIG. 144 (the same applies to the scenario table described below). For example, since the variable display area H1 is displayed in motion 4 by the first row of the scenario table in the middle of FIG. 159, the sky C10 displayed in motion 0 by the first and third rows of the scenario table in the upper row of FIG. 159. In addition, the second and third rows of the scenario table in the middle of FIG. 159 give priority to the ground C11 displayed in motion 3 and motion 2, the surrounding scenery C12, and the celestial body C13 so that they can be seen in front of them. Not hidden by.

Next, each row of the scenario table (scenario layer 1; the first half of the left symbol) in the lower part of FIG. 159 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), the data of "motion 5 registration code" and "motion index No. (31)" are set. As a result, the above-mentioned motion index No. Instead of the display by the motion table (not shown) in (30), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (31) (variable display by the moving image or the still image of the first half of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) is started.
Next, in the second line (// 1), the data of "Motion 8 registration code" and "Motion index No. (86)" are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (86) (variable display by the moving image or the still image of the character on the left side in the main screen area) is started.
Next, in the third line (// 2), the data of "Motion 9 registration code" and "Motion index No. (87)" are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (87) (variable display by the moving image or the still image of the character on the right side in the main screen area) is started.
That is, according to the second and third rows, the variation display in the front-back direction in the left and right two columns in the main screen area of the character such as the tiger taro C7 described with reference to FIGS. 155 (c) and 156 is started. To.

Next, in the fourth line (// 3), a "constant weight code" and a "wait time value (240)" are set. As a result, the control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (8 seconds) corresponding to 240 frames. This is because the first half of the effect including the variation display of the left symbol in the variation display area H1 and the variation display of the character in the front-back direction in the main screen area is performed only for the relevant time.
Next, in the fifth line (// 4), the data of the "variable scenario switching code" and the "left symbol scenario 3rd" are set. As a result, when there is reach, the scenario is switched from the first half fluctuation to the second half fluctuation (reach action) according to the scenario table of FIG. 160, for example.

Next, each row of the scenario table (scenario layer 1; the latter half of the left symbol) of FIG. 160 will be described.
Data of "Motion 8 registration code" and "Motion index No. (88)" are set in the first line (// 0). As a result, the above-mentioned motion index No. Instead of the display by the motion table of (86), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (88) (stop display by a moving image or a still image of the character on the left side in the main screen area) is started.
Next, in the second line (// 1), the data of "Motion 9 registration code" and "Motion index No. (89)" are set. As a result, the above-mentioned motion index No. Instead of the display by the motion table in (87), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (89) (stop display by a moving image or a still image of the character on the right side in the main screen area) is started.

Next, in the third line (// 2), the data of "Motion 3 registration code" and "Motion index No. (90)" are set. As a result, the above-mentioned motion index No. Instead of the display by the motion table in (84), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (90) (display by the moving image or the still image of the latter half of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12) is started.
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), the data of "Motion 2 registration code" and "Motion index No. (91)" are set. As a result, the above-mentioned motion index No. Instead of the display by the motion table of (85), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (91) (display by the moving image or the still image of the latter half of the celestial body C13) is started.
Next, in the fifth line (// 4), a "constant weight code" and a "wait time value (30)" are set. As a result, the control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (1 second) corresponding to 30 frames.
Here, according to the first to fifth lines, the display for notifying the reach occurrence described with reference to FIG. 157 (b) is performed for a specified time (1 second). At this time, the images of the lines C15 and the lines C16 described above are, for example, the motion index No. (88) and motion index No. In the motion table of (89), it is controlled and displayed as an object separate from the character such as the tiger Taro C7.

Next, in the 6th line (// 5), "stop symbol set code (left symbol)" and "Null" are set. As a result, the above-mentioned symbol stop processing is executed for the left symbol, and the stop symbol of the left symbol of the decorative special symbol is set.
Next, in the 7th line (// 6), the data of "motion 5 registration code" and "motion index No. (32)" are set. As a result, the above-mentioned motion index No. Instead of the display by the motion table (not shown) in (31), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (32) (stop display by the moving image or still image of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) is started.
Next, in the 8th line (// 7), "Motion 8 deletion code" and "Null" are set. As a result, the above-mentioned motion deletion process is performed, the display in the motion 8 is not performed, and the display of the character on the left side (for example, "Torasuke C6") in the main screen area disappears.
Next, on the 9th line (// 8), "Motion 9 deletion code" and "Null" are set. As a result, the above-mentioned motion deletion process is performed, the display in the motion 9 is not performed, and the display of the character on the right side (for example, "Torataro C7") in the main screen area disappears.

Next, in the 10th line (// 9), the "character position code" and the "character position No. (4)" are set. The "accessory position code" is an operation code for commanding a setting change (that is, movement (state change) of the decorative portion 701 of the movable accessory 700) of the state (initial state or standing state, etc.) of the movable accessory 700. For example, "accessory position No. (9)" commands the standing state of the movable accessory 700, and "accessory position No. (4)" is an operand that commands the state in which the movable accessory 700 is at an angle of 40 degrees. It is the data of. As a result, in the process corresponding to the "accessory position code" in the scenario analysis process described above (process omitted by the wavy line in FIG. 105), the decorative portion 701 and the like of the movable accessory 700 are obliquely as shown in FIG. 157 (c). A control process with an angle of 40 degrees is executed.
As other data of the operand corresponding to the "accessory position code", there is "accessory position No. (0)" for instructing the initial state of the movable accessory 700, and further, the decoration unit 701 is in the initial state. "Accessory position No. (1)" that commands the state of being displaced toward the standing state by an angle of 10 degrees, and commands the state that the decorative portion 701 is displaced toward the standing state by an angle of 20 degrees from the initial state. "Character position No. (2)", "Character position No. (3)" that commands the state in which the decorative portion 701 is displaced toward the standing state by an angle of 30 degrees from the initial state, and so on. Various things may be set to command the state of each angle between the initial state and the standing state.

Next, on the 11th line (// 10), a "constant weight code" and a "wait time value (15)" are set. As a result, the control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (0.5 seconds) corresponding to 15 frames. This is to wait for the movable accessory 700 to be in a state of an angle of 45 degrees from the initial state.
Next, in the 12th line (// 11), the data of "Motion 8 registration code" and "Motion index No. (92)" are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (92) (display of the interlocking image in the main screen area as a moving image or a still image) is started. The interlocking image is, for example, an image of the rope C17 described above and a tiger taro C7 pulling the rope C17.
Next, on the 13th line (// 12), a "constant weight code" and a "wait time value (45)" are set. As a result, the control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (1.5 seconds) corresponding to 45 frames.
In the scenario table, the code between the wait time value and the wait time value (the opcode of the line between the line where the constant weight code etc. is set and the line where the constant weight code etc. is set next) Are all executed at the same time. For example, in the case of FIG. 160, constant weight codes and the like are shown in the first line (// 0) to the fourth line (// 3) and the sixth line (// 5) to the tenth line (// 9). Since there is no line in which is set, these 1st line (// 0) to 4th line (// 3) and 6th line (// 5) to 10th line (// 9) are all at the same time. Is executed.

According to the 6th to 13th lines described above, the effect of the reach action shown in FIG. 157 (c) described above (the effect in which the movable accessory 700 and the effect display in the main screen area are linked, and the left in the variable display area H1). A reach action effect in which the symbol and the right symbol are stopped and the middle symbol is changed) is performed for a total of 2 seconds.
Then, when there is reach and the movement is disengaged, for example, after that, a stop display of the disengaged symbol (not shown) is performed to control the movable accessory 700 to return to the initial state. The scenario table of FIG. 160 shows. Is an example of a table that is selected when a big hit occurs, so after that, control for the big hit is performed.

That is, in the next 14th line (// 13), the "character position code" and the "character position No. (9)" are set. As a result, in the process corresponding to the “accessory position code” in the scenario analysis process described above (process omitted by the wavy line in FIG. 105), the decorative portion 701 and the like of the movable accessory 700 stand up as shown in FIG. 158 (a). The control process to be in the state is executed.
Next, on the 15th line (// 14), a "constant weight code" and a "wait time value (45)" are set. As a result, the control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (1.5 seconds) corresponding to 45 frames.
According to the 14th to 15th lines described above, after the effect of the reach action shown in FIG. 157 (c) described above, the movement of the movable accessory 700 in the standing state and the tiger rope C7 (in conjunction with this) Alternatively, an image (not shown) of this and another character replaced by the behavior) pulling up the movable accessory 700 with the rope C17 is displayed. The image in which this character pulls up the movable accessory 700 with the rope C17 has the motion index No. registered in the 12th line. It is controlled by the motion table of (92).

Next, on the 16th line (// 15), "Motion 8 deletion code" and "Null" are set. As a result, the above-mentioned motion deletion process is performed, the display in the motion 8 is not performed, and the display of the rope C17 in the main screen area and the character such as the tiger tiger C7 pulling the rope disappears.
Next, on the 17th line (// 16), "Motion 3 deletion code" and "Null" are set. As a result, the above-mentioned motion deletion process is performed, the display in the motion 3 is not performed, and the display of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 disappears.
Next, in the 18th line (// 17), the data of "Motion 2 registration code" and "Motion index No. (93)" are set. As a result, the motion index No. Instead of the display by the motion table in (91), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (93) (display of the blackout image C20 by a moving image or a still image) is started. By the new registration of the motion 2 on the 18th line, the display of the celestial body C13 (moon) in the same motion 2 (that is, the display by the motion table of the motion index No. (91)) disappears.

Next, in the 19th line (// 18), the data of the "voice setting code" and the "sound No. (15)" are set. As a result, in the process corresponding to the “voice setting code” in the scenario analysis process described above (process omitted by the wavy line in FIG. 105), a process for outputting the voice specified by the data of the above operand is performed. Sound No. The data of the operand (15) is the data for designating the music or sound effect in the above-mentioned blackout effect.
Next, on the 20th line (// 19), a "constant weight code" and a "wait time value (150)" are set. As a result, the control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (5 seconds) corresponding to 150 frames.
According to the 16th to 20th lines described above, the blackout effect shown in FIG. 158 (a) described above is performed.

Next, in the 21st line (// 20), the data of "Motion 3 registration code" and "Motion index No. (94)" are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (94) (display by the moving image or the still image of the rose flower C21 in the main screen area) is started.
Next, on the 22nd line (// 21), a "constant weight code" and a "wait time value (90)" are set. As a result, the control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (3 seconds) corresponding to 90 frames.

According to the 21st to 22nd lines described above, the jackpot notification effect shown in FIG. 158 (b) described above is performed for 3 seconds.
In addition, the line in which the "motion 2 deletion code" is set is inserted immediately before the 21st line, and the motion index No. 1 performed in the motion 2 is inserted. The display by the motion table (display of the blackout image C20) of (93) may be erased. However, the display of the rose flower C21 in the motion 3 starting on the 21st line (display by the motion table of the motion index No. (94)) is the entire image of the main screen area shown in FIG. 158 (b). In the case of displaying a plurality of rose flowers and their backgrounds), the blackout image C20 is hidden and invisible by the display in this motion 3, so that it is not necessary to delete it in particular. Further, in the case of this table example, the audio output set in the 19th row is continued even during the jackpot notification effect, and this audio output enhances the effect of blessing the jackpot.

Next, since the "end code" is set in the last 24th line (// 23), the control in the scenario layer 1 is not performed by this.
The "end code" on the 24th line (// 23) ends the production control by the scenario table for the target scenario layer, but after that, a new scenario table is set, so that the scenario layer is about. Needless to say, the production control is performed again.

Next, the first scenario table from the top of FIG. 161 (scenario layer 2; the beginning of the right symbol) will be briefly described.
In the first line, the registration for the fluctuation display at the beginning of the right symbol KTR in the fluctuation display area H1 is performed, in the second line, the wait time value for that is set, and in the third line, the scenario is switched. ..
This is the same control as the control of the left symbol by the scenario table shown in the middle of FIG. 159 (control for the variation display of the left symbol KTL in the early stage of the variation display area H1) for the right symbol.

Next, the second scenario table from the top of FIG. 161 (scenario layer 2; the first half of the right symbol) will be briefly described.
The first line registers for the fluctuation display of the first half of the right symbol KTR in the fluctuation display area H1, the second line sets the wait time value for that, and the third line switches the scenario. ..
This is the same control as the control of the left symbol by the scenario table shown in the lower part of FIG. 159 (control for the variation display of the first half of the left symbol KTL in the variation display area H1) for the right symbol.

Next, the third scenario table from the top of FIG. 161 (scenario layer 2; the latter half of the right symbol) will be briefly described.
In the first line, the wait time value for the character stop display (shown in FIG. 157 (b)) in the main screen area is set, in the second line, the stop symbol of the right symbol KTR is set, and in the third line. Then, the stop display of the right symbol KTR in the variable display area H1 is started, the wait time value for the stop display is set in the fourth line, and the control of the scenario layer 2 is finished in the fifth line.
This is the same control as the control of the left symbol by the scenario table shown in FIG. 160 (control for displaying the latter half of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) for the right symbol.
According to the first to third scenario tables from the top of FIG. 161 described above, the right side of the decorative special figure in the variable display area H1 in the series of effects of FIGS. 155 (b) to 158 (b) described above. The display of the design is realized.

Next, the fourth scenario table from the top of FIG. 161 (scenario layer 3; early stage of the middle symbol) will be briefly described.
In the first line, the registration for the fluctuation display in the early stage of the middle symbol KTC in the fluctuation display area H1 is performed, in the second line, the wait time value for that is set, and in the third line, the scenario is switched. ..
This is the same control as the control of the left symbol by the scenario table shown in the middle of FIG. 159 (control for the variation display in the early stage of the left symbol KTL in the variation display area H1) for the middle symbol.

Next, the fifth scenario table from the top of FIG. 161 (scenario layer 3; the first half of the middle symbol) will be briefly described.
In the first line, the registration for the fluctuation display of the first half of the medium symbol KTC in the fluctuation display area H1 is performed, in the second line, the wait time value for that is set, and in the third line, the scenario is switched. ..
This is the same control as the control of the left symbol by the scenario table shown in the lower part of FIG. 159 (control for the variation display of the first half of the left symbol KTL in the variation display area H1) for the middle symbol.

Next, the sixth scenario table from the top of FIG. 161 (scenario layer 3; the latter half of the middle symbol) will be briefly described.
In the first line, the wait time value for the character stop display (shown in FIG. 157 (b)) in the main screen area is set, and in the second line, the fluctuation in the latter half of the medium symbol KTC in the fluctuation display area H1. Registration for display (variation display of medium symbol KTC in the variation display area H1 at the time of reach action shown in FIGS. 157 (c) to 158 (a)) is performed, and in the third line, from FIG. 157 (c). The wait time value for the reach action shown in FIG. 158 (a) is set, the stop symbol of the middle symbol KTC is set in the fourth line, and the stop display of the middle symbol KTC in the variable display area H1 is set in the fifth line. Is started, the wait time value for the stop display is set in the 6th line, and the control of the scenario layer 3 is finished in the 7th line.
This is to perform the control corresponding to the control of the left symbol by the scenario table shown in FIG. 160 (control for displaying the latter half of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) for the middle symbol. However, since the middle symbol is displayed in a variable manner (scrolls at a low speed) even during the reach action, the second and third lines are provided, which is different from the left symbol and the right symbol.
According to the fourth to sixth scenario tables from the top of FIG. 161 described above, in the decorative special figure in the variable display area H1 in the series of effects of FIGS. 155 (b) to 158 (b) described above. The display of the design is realized.

Next, FIGS. 162 and 163 are modified examples of a series of effects (SD mode effect examples) from FIGS. 155 (b) to 158 (b) described above. In this modification, characters such as the tiger taro C7 appearing in the main screen area appear in the main screen area, and at the same time, are not displayed as additional information of the decorative special figure in the variable display area H1. Further, when the character such as Torataro C7 disappears from the main screen area, the display as the additional information in the variable display area H1 is resumed at the same time. For example, when the tiger taro C7 and the tiger lock C8 are displayed in the main screen area as shown in FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (b), the tiger taro C7 and the tiger lock C8 are displayed in the variable display area H1. Is controlled to disappear, and then when the tiger lock C8 disappears from the main screen area as shown in FIG. 162 (c), the display of the tiger lock C8 in the variable display area H1 is controlled to resume. Further, as shown in FIGS. 162 (c), 163 (a), and 163 (b), when the tiger taro C7 and the tiger skeleton C6 are displayed in the main screen area, the tiger in the variable display area H1. It is controlled so that the Taro C7 and the Torasuke C6 are not displayed, and then when the Torasuke C6 disappears from the main screen area as shown in FIG. 163 (c), the display of the Torasuke C6 in the variable display area H1 resumes. Is controlled to do.

In the progress of the series of effects, FIGS. 162 (a), 162 (b), and 162 (c) are the above-mentioned FIGS. 155 (c), 156 (a), and 156 (c), respectively. This is a display example at the same timing. Similarly, FIGS. 163 (a), 163 (b), and 163 (c) are display examples at the same timings as those in FIGS. 157 (a), 157 (b), and 157 (c), respectively. is there.
According to this modification, for example, as shown by the dotted line with an arrow in FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (c), when a character such as Torataro C7 appears (starts to be displayed) in the main screen area, the player When viewed, the character appears to jump out of the variable display area H1. Further, when a character such as Torataro C7 disappears from the main screen area (display ends or is hidden by another image), the character appears to return to the variable display area H1 from the player's point of view. As a result, a dynamic and innovative production is realized.

The dotted line with an arrow indicating that the tiger taro C7 or the like in FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (c) protrudes from the variable display area H1 is for explanation and may not be actually displayed. However, an image may be displayed that clearly expresses the entry and exit of the character from the variable display area H1 to the main screen area.
Further, the above-mentioned modification can be controlled by the scenario table and the motion table in the same manner as the above-mentioned specific example, but the description of the specific example of these tables will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 164 is another modification of a series of effects (SD mode effect examples) from FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 158 (b) described above. This modification is characterized by a mode of variable display of the character in the front-back direction in the main screen area and a mode of a combination of characters for notifying the occurrence of reach. That is, in the above display example, as shown in FIGS. 155 (c) and 156 (a), characters arranged in a plurality of rows (in this case, two rows on the left and right) move toward the front side at the same time. Not limited to. In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), only the character on the left side is stopped and displayed on the front side, and only the character on the right side is switched one after another, appears on the back side, and advances to the front side. In this mode, the character is displayed in a variable manner by (for example, running). In addition, the variation display of the character in the main screen area may be changed to such a mode in the middle so that the variation display of the decorative special figure shifts to the reach action (second half variation) from the middle.

Then, in this modification, for example, as shown in FIGS. 164 (b) and 164 (c), when there is reach, the target character (in this case, for example, the tiger lock C8) that will be a predetermined combination someday The same character, such as Tiger Lock C8, appears on the right side, advances to the front side, and stops, thereby providing a reach occurrence notification. In this way, the combination of characters with reach (that is, the notification of reach occurrence) is in the same manner as the combination of the symbols of the decorative special figure, which is a big hit, in a manner (doublet) in which characters of the same type are aligned. There may be.
In any case, according to the above-mentioned production example and the present modification example, the variable display direction of the decorative special figure is performed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative special figure performed in the vertical direction (vertical direction) in the variable display area H1. Since the variable display of the character in a direction (front-back direction) different from the conventional one (a variable display game that determines the presence or absence of reach from the player's point of view) is performed in the main screen area, a dynamic and novel effect is realized.

Next, FIG. 165 is another modification of a series of effects (SD mode effect examples) from FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 158 (b) described above.
First, FIGS. 165 (a) and 165 (b) are other examples of the reach generation notification effect shown in FIG. 157 (b), and the poses of the two left and right characters that are stopped and displayed on the front side ( The feature is that the postures of the limbs, etc.) are not the same but different. In this way, the configuration suggests (notices), for example, the reliability of a big hit after the reach action (or the reliability of a high probability state (probability change)) depending on the presence or absence of the difference in the poses of the aligned characters and the content of the difference. May be. Note that FIG. 165 (a) shows a case where the predetermined combination for the reach generation notification is a different character, and FIG. 165 (b) shows a case where the predetermined combination for the reach generation notification is the same character.

Next, FIG. 165 (c) is an example of a special effect (character interlocking effect with the upper movable accessory) performed in the front-back variation display of the character performed in the main screen area described above. As shown in FIG. 165 (c), this special effect is a display mode in which, for example, the character on the left side (for example, Tiger Lock C8) that has advanced to the front side has a predetermined item (for example, a rose flower; light emission effect information). (Light emission interlocking image) is displayed, and at the same time as the light emission interlocking image is displayed, the left half of the upper movable accessory 801 emits light (for example, blinking at high speed). Although not shown, for example, when an image (light emission interlocking image) as a display mode in which the character on the right side that has advanced to the front side has a predetermined item (light emission effect information) is displayed, the upper side is displayed at the same time as this display. The right half of the movable accessory 801 may emit light. Alternatively, although not shown, for example, when an image (light emission interlocking image) as a display mode in which both the left and right characters that have advanced to the front side have a predetermined item (light emission effect information) is displayed, this display is displayed. At the same time, the entire upper movable accessory 801 may emit light. Such a special effect may be performed as appropriate. In addition, this special effect can also be performed as a notice effect that suggests (notices) some degree of reliability (reliability that becomes reach, reliability that becomes a big hit, or reliability that becomes a high probability state (probability change)). it can.
In addition, the specific example of FIG. 165 (c) is a display mode in which the effect information (for example, a character such as a tiger lock C8) different from the identification information (design of the decorative special figure) has a predetermined item. This is an example in which the mode (light emitting state) of the accessory changes in conjunction with the display of this display mode, but the present invention is not limited to such a specific example. For example, when the display mode of the character itself such as the tiger lock C8, the display size, the display position, the pose (posture of the limbs, etc.) becomes a specific display mode, it is linked to the display of this specific display mode. The configuration may be such that the mode (light emitting state, etc.) of the accessory changes. Further, the change in the mode of the accessory that changes in conjunction with the display mode of the effect information is not limited to the change in the light emitting state of the accessory, as in the specific example shown in FIG. 163 (c) described above. It may be configured such that the operating state and operating position of the accessory change.

Next, FIG. 166 shows an effect (including a distorted mode) of reducing an image in a predetermined area displaying an image including a decorative special figure (identification information) on the display unit 41a (display area) of the display device 41. Is an example of. Although various display examples in the display unit 41a of the display device 41 are shown in FIGS. 167 and later, the same description and reference numerals in the drawings once shown may be omitted in the subsequent drawings.
First, FIG. 166 (a) is a display example of a state before the reduction effect (referred to as reduction effect or reduction display effect) is performed. In this case, the "left, middle, right" (KTL, KTC, KTR) of the large decorative design (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the large decorative design) is displayed in a greatly variable manner. The decorative large pattern means a normal decorative special pattern, and is a name for distinguishing it from the decorative small pattern described later.

In FIG. 166 (a) and the like, the half line shows an example of the outer edge of the display unit 41a, which is not hidden by the accessory (center case 24, movable accessory 801, 802, 803, etc.). However, such a half line is not displayed. In this way, the visible area that the player can actually see in the display unit 41a is often limited, and the shape and size of the visible area vary depending on the model, and depending on the movement of the accessory. Changes during the game.
In the example shown in FIG. 166 (a) and the like, a large decorative symbol (KTL, KTC, KTR) is displayed large near the center position in the vertical direction of the visible area, and a small decorative symbol is displayed at the central position in the vertical direction at the left end of the visible area. Is displayed, the number of holds is displayed at the upper left position of the visible area, and the number of fluctuations is displayed at the center position in the left-right direction of the upper edge of the visible area (for example, countdown during time reduction (normal power support state)). Is performed, a hold display is performed near the center of the lower edge of the visible area in the left-right direction, a right-handed instruction is displayed at the upper right position of the visible area, and a "tiger" is displayed at a position that overlaps a part of the decorative large pattern. There is a dialogue display for the production, "Find Taro!". The display position of each such object is an example, and various arrangements are possible. Further, in the display example of FIG. 166 (a) and the like, the downward arrow “↓” illustrates a state in which the decorative large symbol or the decorative small symbol is scrolled downward in a variable manner. Aspects such as scroll orientation are not limited to this. For example, the decorative large symbol may be scrolled downward, while the decorative small symbol may be displayed in a variable manner by switching on the spot, or the decorative large symbol may be scrolled in the left-right direction.

Here, the hold display means the above-mentioned special figure hold display (starting memory display of the special figure), and in this case, the unfilled (white-painted) circular image is the hold display of the special figure 1, and there is a fill. The (black-painted) circular image is the hold display of special figure 2, and the filled circular image surrounded by the square line is the hold display (variation) that displays the start memory of special figure 2 that is currently changing. (Display of pending hold). In the example of FIG. 166 (a), since the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is two and the number of holdings of the special drawing 2 is one, the holding display not surrounded by the square line (that is, the variable display). As the display of the start memory in which the game has not been executed), two unfilled circular images are displayed, and one filled circular image is displayed. In this case, the variable display hold display (circular image surrounded by a square line) is displayed on the leftmost side, and the images of each hold display are arranged in the order of execution of the variable display game from this left side. Then, the process of the hold shift of the special figure described above is performed by the game control device 100, and the effect control device 300 receives a command (for example, a hold number command) from the game control device 100 indicating this. The control of 300 also shifts the above-mentioned hold display on the display unit 41a (that is, in this case, the display is switched so that the image of each hold display seems to move to the left by one). Due to this shift, for example, as shown in FIG. 168 (a) described later, the image on hold during fluctuation (in this case, the image surrounded by a square line) is displayed on the right side immediately before (variation display). The game is not executed, the execution order of the variable display game is switched to the next hold display image), and the player is notified that the variable display game of the special figure corresponding to the next start memory has started. Become.

It is needless to say that the display mode of the hold display and the configuration of the arrangement are not limited to this example, and various configurations may be possible. Further, in the display examples after FIG. 166 (a), for convenience of explanation, the start prizes of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are generated alternately, and the special figure variation display game for each start memory is executed in the order of the start prize, for example. The display example is based on the assumption that the display is performed, but the display example is not limited to such a configuration or state.
For example, in the case of the board configuration of the present embodiment described above, since the player normally strikes the game ball to the right and aims at the normal fluctuation winning device 26 during the time saving (normal electric support state), the normal fluctuation It is normal that only the start memory of the special figure 2 is generated by the start winning of the winning device 26. However, even in the case of the board configuration of the present embodiment described above, if, for example, a beginner player makes a left-handed strike during the time reduction, the above-mentioned function of the start port distribution device 600 allows the special figures 1 and 2 to be used even during the time reduction. Starting prizes occur alternately. Further, in the case of the specific example of the special figure normal processing described with reference to FIG. 28, the start memory of the special figure 2 is executed with priority over the start memory of the special figure 1 (the start winning order is the first special figure 1). Even if there is a start memory of, if there is a start memory of special figure 2, the variation display game of the start memory of special figure 2 (the one with the first start winning order in the start memory of special figure 2) goes first. It is a configuration, and such an embodiment may be used.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 172 (c) described later, the hold display area (area for performing hold display) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be separated. Further, when the look-ahead effect described in step D185 or the like is performed, the hold display of the start memory of the target of the look-ahead effect may be performed in a special mode (special color, shape, etc., animation, etc.).

Next, in the hold number display, the number of the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed on the left side (for example, “2” in the case of FIG. 166 (a)), and the number of the hold number of the special figure 2 is displayed on the right part (for example, In the case of FIG. 166 (a), "1") is displayed.
Next, the decorative small design is a design that is always visibly displayed even if the decorative large design becomes difficult to see or disappears in the production image, and the player is informed that the special design is changing. It is for sure notification. In this case, the decorative small symbol displays the symbols corresponding to the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the decorative large symbol in three vertical rows in a small size. For example, the symbol corresponding to the left symbol of the large decorative symbol is displayed small at the top, then the symbol corresponding to the medium symbol of the large decorative symbol is displayed small, and the symbol corresponding to the right symbol of the large decorative symbol is displayed at the bottom. The design to be displayed is displayed in a small size. In addition, the small decorative symbol is controlled to start the variable display at the same time as the large decorative symbol, and the variable display ends when the stop of the large decorative symbol is confirmed (when the combination of symbols is confirmed and the variable display game ends). (That is, the decorative small symbol is displayed in the stopped state). Then, only when the decorative large symbol is fixed and stopped instead of being temporarily stopped, the variable display of the decorative small symbol is stopped, and the same symbol as the decorative large symbol is also displayed as the decorative small symbol (for example, FIG. 167 described later). As shown in (a), if the large decorative symbol is "9,3,4", the small decorative symbol also stops at "9,3,4"). It should be noted that this decorative small design is different from the fourth design. The fourth symbol is not shown in FIG. 166 and the like.

Next, the fluctuation number display displays a number (“87” as an example in FIG. 166 (a)) indicating the number of fluctuations of the special figure until the time saving state (normal power support state) ends. Each time the variable display game is executed (for example, when the variable display game of the special figure ends), the number is switched to a value smaller by one.
Next, the right-handed instruction display displays, for example, characters that urge the player to right-handed, such as "right-handed! →", as shown in the figure. As described in step S355 and the like, in the case of this embodiment, for example, in the time saving state, the right-handed hitting is more advantageous than the left-handing, but the first starting port (special figure 1 start) during the time-saving state. When there is a prize in the mouth 607) (that is, when the player is left-handed during the time saving state), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 to notify the player to right-handed (warning). Is performed by the effect control device 300, and the display for that is the right-handed instruction display. In addition, the right-handed instruction display may be configured to always be displayed in a state where right-handedness should be made (for example, during a short time).

Next, FIG. 166 (b) is a display example of a state (during reduction) after the effect of reducing is started. In this case, all the images (including the background image) displayed in the predetermined reduction target area shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 166 (a), except for the images not to be reduced, are integrated over a predetermined time. A display effect that shrinks (so that one display panel becomes smaller) is performed, and an example of the state in the middle is shown in FIG. 166 (b).
The alternate long and short dash line is shown for the sake of explanation and does not need to be actually displayed. Further, the reduction target area is not limited to the area shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 166 (a), but is an area including the display area of the decorative large symbol, and is in the above-mentioned visible area (for example, FIG. It is preferable that the region is wider than the region shown by the half line). This is because if a wide area including the visible area is a reduction target area, the reduction effect becomes a more dynamic effect.
Further, here, "reduction" means reducing the size of the image displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 on the display unit 41a, but the target image in the reduction target area is similar without being distorted. It may be a mode in which the size is reduced, or a mode in which the size of the target image in the reduction target area is reduced while being distorted. That is, the "reduction" may be accompanied by image distortion (change in shape or aspect ratio).

And what is characteristic here is that the reduction ratio differs depending on the object. In the example shown in FIG. 166 (b) and FIG. 166 (c) described later, the character information such as the variation number display and the dialogue display among the objects to be reduced is other objects (for example, a decorative large pattern or a background image). The reduction rate (reduction rate) is smaller than that of (etc.), and the display is made so that it does not become excessively small. That is, the character information such as the fluctuation number display and the dialogue notice is reduced at a smaller rate than the object such as the decorative large pattern. For this reason, there is an effect that the player can maintain the information such as the fluctuation number display and the dialogue display in a state where the player can read the information such as the fluctuation number display and the dialogue display while realizing a highly interesting display effect of reducing the fluctuation number display and the dialogue display as well as the decorative large pattern. .. That is, there is an effect that a plurality of objects can be reduced to realize a highly interesting display effect while maintaining the required size for each object.

In such a display effect, for example, another new background image is arranged and displayed on the back side of the background image at the start of the effect immediately before the start of the effect, and then includes a variable display area of the decorative large pattern. For all images (excluding images not subject to reduction) displayed in a predetermined area (for example, the area indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 166 (a)), the display size is set for each frame period at the same time. This can be achieved by performing control such that the image is gradually switched to a smaller size (however, the reduction ratio differs depending on the object). A specific example of the flow chart of the control process will be described later.
Further, as shown in FIG. 166 (b) and FIG. 166 (c) described later, a frame-shaped image (a square frame-shaped image in the example of the figure) showing the outer edge of the entire image to be reduced is displayed. You may. There is a sufficient difference in brightness, pattern, and color between the image to be reduced and the new background image that appears around it, and even if such a frame-shaped image is not displayed, the outer edge of the entire image to be reduced There is little significance in displaying such a frame-shaped image when the player can sufficiently see the frame-shaped image (the frame-shaped image does not necessarily have to be displayed).
Further, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 166 (a), the region to be reduced (the region surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line; the region to be reduced) is large including the portion outside the visible region shown by the half-line. Although it is an area, it is not necessarily limited to this embodiment, and an area smaller than the visible area may be reduced. However, a more dynamic display effect can be realized by reducing a large area including a portion outside the visible area (in an extreme example, the entire display unit 41a may be used).

Next, FIG. 166 (c) is a display example of a state in which the effect of reducing is further advanced (a state of being further reduced). In this case, the variable display of the special figure is continuously executed in the reduced area. In addition, the display angle of the reduced image is changed from that before the reduction, and the displayed image is displayed as being tilted as a whole. In FIG. 166 (c), the reduced image is displayed so as to appear tilted in the front-rear direction (for example, toward the back side), although it is tilted only in the direction of rotation along the display surface of the display unit 41a. You can also do it. That is, the image may be reduced and displayed so that the image appears to be tilted three-dimensionally (three-dimensionally).
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 166 (c), the decorative portion 701 of the movable accessory 700 operates in the direction of rising toward the upright state, and is linked to the surrounding of the reduced image (front side of the new background image). Images of the rose flower C21 (interlocked images for the accessory, related images) are displayed on the screen (display unit 41a) in various sizes, and a new development effect has been started. In this case, as shown in the figure, for example, an effect in which an image of the face of "tiger taro" as the character C7 is displayed so as to be hidden in the image of one of the rose flowers C21 is, for example, a notice effect (for example, a big hit is possible). It is appropriately performed as a production suggesting that the character is high. With such an effect, the player already has expectations for the special effect that the area including the large decorative pattern is reduced, and further, the development effect performed around the reduced image further raises the expectation. For example, if the image of "Tiger Taro" as the character C7 is partially displayed somewhere during the above-mentioned reduced display effect, there is a high possibility that it will become a big hit after that, for example. By controlling in this way, it is possible to produce a hot notice that suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit, and it is possible to raise the expectation of the player.

Here, the images that are not subject to reduction include information that may affect the game, specifically, the above-mentioned hold display, hold number display, decorative small symbol, right-handed instruction display, etc. (even if the fourth symbol is included). Good) is included. By excluding these images (objects) from the reduction target, the notification function of these images (the function of notifying the player of the number of holds and the like) can be sufficiently maintained even during the reduction effect.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to perform a dynamic and highly interesting production that raises the player's expectation as described above, and as described above, an object that is not subject to reduction is set, and an object that is subject to reduction is set. The following effects can be obtained by making the reduction ratio different.

That is, when the effect of reducing the image is performed, if all the information is deformed at the same magnification, the important information will not be visible to the player, which will adversely affect the game or make the player tired and uncomfortable. There is a risk of getting tired. However, in this example, the information that is likely to affect the game is excluded from the reduction target and is not reduced, and the reduction ratio is reduced for the character information that is difficult to see if the reduction target object is excessively reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding or overlooking the information and adversely affecting the game, and to prevent the player from feeling tired or uncomfortable.

It should be noted that there may be various aspects as to how the reduced effect executed as in the examples shown in FIGS. 166 (b) and 166 (c) subsequently progresses and ends. For example, a display effect may be executed in which the reduced image is further reduced and finally becomes so small that it cannot be seen and disappears, or the reduced image moves out of the visible area and disappears and ends. After the reduced image is reduced to some extent, the variable display of the special figure is stopped by a big hit or a deviation in a state where the enlargement is started and the size is returned to a certain size. Aspects are also possible.

Next, FIG. 167 is a modification of the effect of reducing the effect described with reference to FIG. 166 (particularly, a modification corresponding to FIG. 166 (c)).
First, FIG. 167 (a) is an example in which the display angles are different between the reduced images. In this case, the reduced background image, dialogue display, and frame-shaped image are tilted (the display angle is changing) compared to before reduction, while the decorative large pattern and the number of fluctuations display are not tilted. , The display angle is different. In this way, the display angle during or after reduction may be different for each object, which can enhance the interest. The image to be reduced may be displayed in a state in which it is three-dimensionally moved so as to be tilted in the front-rear direction, and the display angle may be different for each object including the change in the display angle in the front-back direction.
Note that FIG. 167 (a) shows a state in which the variable display game of the special figure ends with the deviation and the final combination of the symbols of the special figure "9, 3, 4" is displayed for convenience of explanation. Immediately after this state, the number of fluctuation display is switched to a value that is one less, a hold shift is performed, the number of hold is reduced, and the next fluctuation display game of Special Figure 1 is started.

Next, FIG. 167 (b) shows the contrast between the image of the area to be reduced and the image of a new background or the like located around the image of the area to be reduced during the reduced display effect described with reference to FIG. 166. An example in which (for example, difference in brightness, difference in color, etc.) is provided is shown. By providing the contrast in this way, the reduced image becomes easier to see, the display effect becomes more impressive, and the interest is enhanced.

Next, FIG. 167 (c) displays the image to be reduced in a semi-transparent manner at the time of the reduced display effect described with reference to FIG. 166, and a new background image or another effect image is displayed behind the image to be reduced. An example of displaying through is shown. In this case, the image of the rose flower C21 for the advance notice production and the image of the face of the character C7 "Torataro" displayed so as to be hidden behind the image such as the large decorative pattern to be reduced can be seen through. The display is such that it can be seen. With such a production, it is possible to enhance the interest.

Next, FIG. 168 is a display example of an effect in which the image is enlarged (referred to as an enlarged effect or an enlarged display effect), contrary to the effect of reducing the image described in FIG. 166. First, FIG. 168 (a) shows a state before enlargement (for example, in a variable display game of one special figure, a state in which the decorative large symbol is temporarily stopped due to a detachment) is shown. The display is the same as in FIG. 166 (a) described above, except that the symbol is temporarily stopped and the number of holds and the number of fluctuations are reduced by one. Here, the temporary stop is, for example, an operation in which the symbol is shaking without scrolling.
Next, in FIG. 168 (b), from the state of FIG. 168 (a), all the images (including the background image) displayed in the visible area of the display unit 41a except for the images not to be enlarged are predetermined. It shows an example of an enlarged display effect that expands integrally (as if one display panel grows larger) over time.

What is characteristic here is that the enlargement ratio differs depending on the object. In the example shown in FIG. 168 (b), among the objects to be enlarged, the character information such as the fluctuation number display and the dialogue display has a smaller enlargement ratio than other objects (decorative large symbols, etc.) and is larger than other objects. Is also displayed without being greatly enlarged. That is, the character information such as the fluctuation number display and the dialogue notice is enlarged at a smaller rate than the object such as the decorative large pattern. For this reason, while realizing a highly interesting display effect that the number of fluctuations and dialogues are displayed along with the large decorative design, the information such as the number of fluctuations and dialogues is expanded and maintained in a state that the player can read. There is an effect that can be done.

In addition, the image not to be enlarged includes information that may affect the game, specifically, the above-mentioned hold display, hold number display, decorative small symbol, right-handed instruction display, etc. (4th symbol may be included. ) Is included. By excluding these images (objects) from the enlargement target, the notification function of these images (the function of notifying the player of the number of holds and the like) can be sufficiently maintained even during the enlargement effect, and these images can also be sufficiently maintained. It is possible to prevent the display from becoming complicated and difficult to see by enlarging it to.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to perform a dynamic and highly interesting production that raises the player's expectation as described above, and as described above, an object that is not to be expanded is set, and an object to be expanded is set. The following effects can be obtained by making the enlargement ratio different.

That is, when performing an effect of enlarging an image, if all the information is deformed at the same magnification, the important information will not be visible to the player, which will adversely affect the game or make the player tired and uncomfortable. There is a risk of getting tired. However, in this example, the information that is likely to affect the game is excluded from the enlargement target and is not expanded, and the enlargement ratio is different for the character information that becomes difficult to see even if the object to be expanded is excessively enlarged. Since the information is made smaller, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding or overlooking the information and adversely affecting the game, and to prevent the player from feeling tired or uncomfortable.

Moreover, in the enlarged effect of this example, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the variation is seen in the enlarged image of the number "1" which is the enlarged decorative large symbol KTC (medium symbol of the special figure). Subsequent variation display (variation display after temporary stop) of the decorative large symbols KTL, KTC, and KTR (left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the special figure) in the display game is performed. For this reason, even if the decorative large symbol is extremely enlarged (to the extent that it extends beyond the visible area of the display unit 41a), the subsequent variable display of the decorative large symbol is clearly visible to the player, and in the enlarged symbol. Since it is performed, there is an effect that the player is less likely to miss the subsequent fluctuation display.
In addition, the above-mentioned effect of performing the variable display of the symbol (internally) in the image of the enlarged symbol is performed in the same variable display game as described above (that is, in the enlarged symbol as described above). It is not limited to the mode of displaying the variation of the subsequent symbol). For example, when special figure 1 and special figure 2 can be changed at the same time, the decorative large symbol of special figure 1 is enlarged, and the decorative large symbol of special figure 2 is inside the image of the enlarged decorative large symbol of special figure 1. In the mode of performing the variable display of the special figure 2, or conversely, in the mode of enlarging the decorative large symbol of the special figure 2 and displaying the variable display of the decorative large symbol of the special figure 1 inside the image of the enlarged decorative large symbol of the special figure 2. Good. Further, when displaying a normal figure on the display unit 41a (display area) of the display device 41, a mode in which the pattern of the normal figure is variablely displayed in the image of the symbol of the special figure to be enlarged, or an enlarged normal figure It is also possible to display the variation of the special symbol in the image of the symbol.

Next, in FIG. 168 (c), for example, the image of the rose flower C21 for directing and the image of the face of the character C7 "tiger taro" displayed so as to be hidden therein are enlarged at the same time. A display example is shown in which a display effect is performed, and a variable display of a large decorative pattern is performed in these images for the effect that are further enlarged. With such a production, it is possible to enhance the interest.
Although not shown, in the above-mentioned enlarged display effect, the display angle during or after the enlargement of the enlarged image may be different for each object, as in the case of the above-mentioned reduced display effect. Can be enhanced. Further, also in the above-mentioned enlarged display effect, it is possible to display the enlarged image semi-transparently and display a new background image or another effect image through the back side of the enlarged image. .. As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, FIG. 169 is an example of a flowchart for the above-mentioned reduction effect, for example.
The above-mentioned reduction effect and enlargement effect can also be performed by setting a dedicated scenario table or motion table for that purpose (for example, the above-mentioned rotation code may be used to change the display angle for each object). However, for example, the data in the display information area set by the scenario table or motion table that does not perform the reduction effect as it is (in particular, the X coordinate of the upper left point of the display that determines the display position of the image and the display size of the image, etc.) The direction (or display angle) for reducing the Y coordinate of the upper left point of the display, the X coordinate of the upper right point of the display, the Y coordinate of the upper right point of the display, the X coordinate of the lower left point of the display, and the Y coordinate of the lower left point of the display for each frame period, for example. It can be realized by changing in the changing direction), and FIG. 169 shows a reduction effect control process which is an example of the control process of the effect control device 300 in that case.
This reduced effect control process is added between steps D30 and D31 in the main process of the effect control device 300 shown in FIG. 88, for example, and the effect of step D31 is performed every frame period (for example, 1/30 second) described above. This is the process executed immediately before the display edit process.

When this reduction effect control process is started, as shown in FIG. 169, it is first determined whether the reduction effect is being executed (step E201), and if it is not being executed, the process proceeds to step E202, and if it is being executed, the process proceeds to step E208. Here, if the reduction effect execution flag described later is set, it is determined that the execution is in progress, and if the reduction effect execution flag is cleared, it is determined that the operation is not in progress.
Proceeding to step E202, it is determined whether or not the start execution of the reduction effect is set in, for example, the variable effect setting process (FIGS. 99 and 100), and if the reduction effect is not set to be started and executed, a return is made. If it is set to end this process and start and execute the reduction effect, it returns after executing steps E203 to E206 (that is, this process ends).

Then, in step E203, the reduction effect execution flag is set, in step E204, for example, the value of the scheduled time of the reduction effect set in the variable effect setting process is set, and in step E205, a setting process for displaying a new background image is set. (For example, a process of preparing a scenario table for displaying a new background image and executing the above-mentioned scenario data setting process) is performed, and in step E206, the current background image (background image to be reduced) is set to a predetermined area. Perform the setting process to change the size of (the area to be reduced as described above).
In addition, for example, after step E206 (before returning), a step may be provided to perform a setting process for displaying the frame-shaped image that displays the outer edge of the entire image that is being reduced.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step E201 that the reduction effect is being executed and the process proceeds to step E208, the value of the reduction effect time is increased by one frame cycle (step E208), and then the value of the reduction effect time is set in step E204. It is determined whether the scheduled time has been reached (step E209), and if not, the process proceeds to step E210 in order to proceed with the reduction effect.
When the process proceeds to step E210, the loop processing of steps E210 to E213 is repeatedly executed for all display information areas of all motion management areas (that is, for all objects), and then returns.
In the above loop processing, it is determined whether the object is the reduction target (step E211), and if the object is not the reduction target, the loop processing is performed on the next object (next display information area) without doing anything, and the object is the reduction target. If there is, step E212 is executed.

In step E212, a setting process is executed in which the data in the display information area for determining the display size, display position, and display angle for each object is changed by the reduction effect time at that time for the reduction effect. "Changing by the reduction effect time" means changing the data (data in the display information area) of the image so as to reduce the image by, for example, the amount corresponding to the elapse of the reduction effect time. For example, when the image is simply reduced at a constant speed as the reduction effect time elapses and the scheduled time (for example, 4 seconds) is reached, the image is reduced to 1/2 the size before the reduction, for example, the reduction effect. When the time is half of the scheduled time (for example, 2 seconds), it is necessary to change the size to 1/4 of the size before the reduction as the progress of the reduction, and thus corresponds to the passage of the reduction production time. It means to change as much as you do.
Then, when the loop processing is completed for all the display information areas (at least for all the displayed objects), the process returns through step E213.

In step E212, the data in each display information area is changed so that the reduction ratio differs for each object as described above.
Further, in step E211 it is determined that the object such as the hold display is not subject to reduction as described above, but the new background image set to be displayed in step E205 is also determined to be not subject to reduction.
Then, in the determination of step E209, if the reduction effect time reaches the scheduled time and the time is up, the reduction effect execution flag is cleared to end the reduction effect (step E214), and then the process returns (step E214). This process ends).

According to the reduction effect control process described above, the data of the display information area of each object set in the processes up to step D30 in the main process (FIG. 88) is changed by a necessary ratio for each frame cycle as needed. By doing so, a reduction effect as in the display example described above is realized. It should be noted that a display effect for enlarging the image is also possible by the same process as the reduction effect control process. For example, in step E212, the data in the display information area may be changed so as to enlarge the image.

Next, FIG. 170 is a display example of the hold display (starting memory display) by animation.
First, FIG. 170 (a) has, for example, two pending numbers (one for special figure 1 and one for special figure 2), and a predetermined number of people (or animals, etc.) including the pending display of the pending change is included. The hold display is performed by an animation display (a moving display, so-called movie may be used) in which the character) walks at the same position, and the animations of all the hold displays (including the variable hold in this case) are synchronized. This is a display example. The walking motion animation in this case is, for example, an image of a person walking on a treadmill, and repeatedly executes the walking motion without the person moving (without changing the display position of the center of the person). It is a thing. This animation display may be realized by expanding and playing back what has been registered as moving image data, or by registering the movement of a person (or character) walking as a plurality of still image data. From the registered still image data, the still image to be displayed may be switched and displayed for each frame (frame by frame) as necessary, and may be controlled so that the player can see it as a moving image.

In the case of the display example after FIG. 170, the unfilled head portion of the person (or character) (white-painted) represents the hold (starting memory) of the special figure 1, and the person (or character) represents the hold (starting memory). ) With a fill in the head part (black paint) represents the hold (starting memory) of Special Figure 2, and the image of the person (or character) surrounded by the square line is currently changing. It is a hold display (display of changing hold) that displays the start memory in. However, the configuration for displaying the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 separately and the configuration for displaying the pending change are not limited to such an embodiment. For example, as shown in FIG. 172 (c) described later, the hold display area (area for performing hold display) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be separated. Further, in the display examples shown in FIGS. 170 and after, a walking motion, a running motion, and the like of a person (or a character) are illustrated as an example of the animation, but various other modes may be possible. For example, there can be various movements such as a character dancing and a clock hand spinning. Further, the variable hold may be displayed differently from the normal hold display (display of the start memory in which the variable display game has not been executed).

Then, what is characteristic of this display example is that the image data of the preceding hold display (still frame by frame (frame by frame)) is characterized in order to synchronize the animation of all hold displays (including hold during fluctuation in this case). The point is that the latest hold display is performed by copying the image data or the image data for each frame (frame by frame) obtained by expanding the moving image data. In detail, among the pending displays of the animation to be synchronized, for example, the image data of the earliest pending display is copied frame by frame (frame by frame), and each pending display includes the latest hold. The point is that the setting process for displaying at the position corresponding to is executed, for example, at the time of hold shift. Here, "copy" means that the same image data is used for each frame (frame by frame) as well as the preceding hold display, and the image data itself used for the preceding hold display is not necessarily copied and used. The mode is not limited to the above. Further, the preceding hold display that is the copy source disappears when the corresponding variable display game is executed, but for example, when the above setting process is performed (for example, at the time of hold shift), the original image data is required every time. By making new settings accordingly, it is possible to always secure the image data of the copy source (the image data that is the source of the hold display of the synchronized animation).

Due to this feature, for example, there is a new start prize (special figure 2) in the state shown in FIG. 170 (a) (the state in which all the animations of the hold display are synchronized), and a new hold display corresponding to the new start prize is displayed. Even if (Latest Hold Display) is started and this latest Hold Display animation is newly started from the beginning as shown in Fig. 170 (b) and is out of sync with other Hold Display, after that. By performing the above setting process at the time of the hold shift, the hold display of all the animations is in a synchronized state as shown in FIG. 170 (c).
As a result, except for the time when a new start prize is generated and the next hold shift is made, all the hold displays of the animation are synchronized, and the effect of holding display with a highly interesting animation that is not uncomfortable for the player is realized. it can. That is, when the animation is executed as the hold display, there is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable if the animation of one hold display and the other hold display is not synchronized, which can be solved. Further, since the above setting process is performed at the time of the hold shift, at the time of starting the hold display of the latest hold corresponding to the new start winning, the hold display of the latest hold is executed from the beginning as illustrated in FIG. 170 (b). There may be a temporary situation in which the display is not synchronized with the hold display of the advance hold, but this also has the effect of improving the interest as a kind of production.

The display example shown in FIG. 170 is a specific example in the case where the above setting process is performed at the time of hold shift, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 173 (a). In FIG. 173 (a), the first hold (advance hold) is described as one or more holds for which animation display has already been performed (holds that may be on hold during fluctuation or hold that is not on hold during change). It may be), and the description of the second hold (latest hold) means the hold due to the newly generated start winning prize. In this case, it may be temporarily asynchronous immediately after a new start prize is generated, but at the time of hold shift, the setting process of copying the image data of the animation display of the preceding hold and displaying the animation of the latest hold is executed. Therefore, after the hold shift, the latest hold will also be synchronized.

However, the timing of performing the above setting process is not limited to the hold shift. For example, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 173 (b), the above setting process may be performed when the start winning prize occurs (that is, at the timing when a new hold display is started). In this embodiment, as in the display examples shown in FIGS. 171 (a) and 171 (b), the latest hold display corresponding to the new start winning prize is also synchronized from the beginning, which is more interesting. It is possible to realize the effect of holding the animation.
Here, FIG. 171 (a) illustrates the same state as that of FIG. 170 (a) described above, and FIG. 171 (b) shows a hold display for the start winning prize (special figure 2) newly generated from that state. Shows the state started and running with an animation that synchronizes with the preceding hold display.

Further, the data to be copied in the above setting process may be only a moving image related to the animation to be synchronized. For example, in the case of the hold display shown in FIG. 170, the image data of the head part of the person (or character) and the other parts (body and limbs) are controlled separately, and the moving body and limbs are controlled. It is possible to control so that only the image data of the part is copied and synchronized, and the image of the head part without movement is selected and displayed at a predetermined position regardless of the advance hold without copying. ..
In addition, in order to make the display mode such as display color and size or the type of character different between the synchronized pending displays, the data may be processed without displaying the image data copied in the above setting process as it is. , A part of the data may be replaced (for example, replacement by the behavior described above), or the data may be partially overlapped with other image data for display.

For example, FIG. 171 (c) is a modification of the display example of FIG. 171 (b). In the display example of FIG. 171 (c), with respect to the latest hold display, image data is replaced or superposed so that the head of the walking character can be visually recognized as an image of "tiger tiger", and the latest As a hold display (for example, a special hold display as a look-ahead notice effect), an animation display in which "Torataro" walks is performed. Even in this case, for the image of at least the body and limbs of "Torataro", the same image data is used for each frame of the preceding hold display and animation (for each animation frame) (that is, the above-mentioned "copy"). By doing so, it is possible to synchronize the motion of the animation (in this case, the walking motion) with the other preceding hold display that is not "Tiger Taro". Although the case where the characters are different is shown, even if the display mode such as the display color and size (or the presence / absence of filling, the difference in pattern, the presence / absence of pattern, etc.) is different, it is similarly synchronized with the preceding hold display. Can be made to.

Note that, unlike FIG. 171 (b), FIG. 171 (c) illustrates a state in which the special figure symbol is stopped (when one special figure variation display game is completed), but this is a stop of the symbol. This is only for convenience to illustrate and explain the condition somewhere. Similar to FIG. 171 (b), even when the special figure is displayed in a variable manner, the same hold display as in FIG. 171 (c) (a mode in which a part of the hold display is a special character different from the others) or the like is possible. Needless to say. By the way, FIG. 171 (c) shows the moment when the variable display game of Special Figure 1 that was being executed ends, and immediately after this, a hold shift is performed and the number of holds of Special Figure 2 is reduced by one. The next variable display game of Special Figure 2 will be started.

Next, FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b) are display examples in the case where the hold display by the synchronized animation and the hold display not synchronized are mixed.
First, FIG. 172 (a) illustrates the same state as in FIG. 170 (a) (a state in which there are two holds and the hold display of the animation in which the walking motion is synchronized is performed).
FIG. 172 (b) shows a case where a new start prize is generated in the state of FIG. 172 (a) and the hold display corresponding to the new start prize is a non-animated hold display (non-animated hold display). This is an example in which the above-mentioned copying is not performed, and only the latest hold display corresponding to the new start winning is displayed in another mode with image data different from the preceding hold display. In this way, it is possible to mix the hold display by the synchronized animation and the hold display that is not synchronized.
The figure shows a non-animated hold display, but even if the latest hold display is an animation display, if the hold display is a type of animation that is not synchronized with the previous hold display, the above copy is It is not performed, and the display is performed with image data different from the preceding hold display.

Next, FIG. 172 (c) is a display example in which the display area of the hold display is distinguished by the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.
In the case of FIG. 172 (c), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is two, the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is two, and the variable display game of the special figure 1 is being executed. At the center of the lower edge of the visible area of the display unit 41a, the display of the variable hold (in this case, the display of the variable hold of FIG. 1) is executed, and in the area on the left side of the variable hold of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 is displayed. The hold display is performed, and the hold display of the special figure 2 is performed in the area on the right side of the pending hold during the change. As the hold display of the special figure 1 in the left area, the display of the animation in which the white-painted head person walks in a posture toward the right is displayed, and in this case, two lines are arranged side by side and synchronized according to the number of holds. It has been. In addition, as the hold display of the special figure 2 in the right area, the display of the animation in which the person with the black head walks in a posture toward the left is synchronized side by side according to the number of holds in this case. Is being done. In the case of this example, the animation is not synchronized between the hold display of the special figure 1 in the left area and the hold display of the special figure 2 in the right area.

In this way, the display areas of the reserved display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are distinguished, and it is also possible to display the same animation operation in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in synchronization with each other. However, even when the hold display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is divided into different display areas, the present invention is not limited to the example of FIG. 172 (c), and for example, the hold display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 having different display areas. It is also possible to display the animation operations so that they are synchronized with each other with the hold display.
When the display area of the hold display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is divided as shown in FIG. 172 (c), when the variable display game ends and the hold shift occurs for the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the hold shift occurs. The hold display of special figure 1 displayed on the left side is controlled so that the display position is sequentially changed to the right side toward the center, and the hold display of special figure 2 displayed on the right side is directed toward the center. The control that seems to change the display position sequentially on the left side is performed. Specifically, in the case of the example of FIG. 172 (c), assuming that the variable display game of special figure 1 that is being executed ends and then the variable display game of special figure 2 is played, the hold shift of special figure 2 is performed. Is generated, so that the hold display of the special figure 2 displayed at the second position from the center side in the right area is displayed as if it moves to the first position (position near the center). The hold display of Special Figure 2 that was displayed in the first position seems to move to Hold during change in the center. The position of the hold display has been changed, and it changes during the execution of the next change display game of Special Figure 2. It will be displayed as a pending hold.

Next, FIG. 174 is a hold effect setting process which is an example of a flowchart for realizing the effect of the hold display shown in FIG. 170 and the like and FIG. 173 (a) described above.
This hold effect setting process is performed, for example, in both step D214 (special figure 1 hold information setting process) and step D218 (special figure 2 hold information setting process) in the one-shot command process of the effect control device 300 shown in FIG. This is a process executed every time a hold number command is received from the game control device 100.

When this hold effect setting process is started, as shown in FIG. 174, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is changing (that is, whether or not the variable display game of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is being executed). If (step E221) is not being executed (step E221; NO), it is determined whether the number of holds indicated by the latest received hold number command has increased from the previous time (step E222).
If the number of holds has not increased (step E222; NO), the number of holds is 0 and there is no hold during fluctuation, so a return is made (this process ends). On the other hand, when the number of holds increases (step E222; YES), a new hold display due to a new start winning should be executed. Therefore, performing a hold animation effect as this new hold display is, for example, a variable effect. It is determined whether or not the setting is made in the setting process (step D405) or the look-ahead symbol command process (step D184) (step E223). Here, the hold animation effect means the effect of the hold display by the animation shown in FIG. 170 and the like.

Then, when it is not set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E223; NO), a setting process is performed to display the non-animated changing hold image at the changing hold position. (Step E224), then return. "Non-animated" means not animated.
On the other hand, when it is set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E223; YES), the changing hold image of the set animation (animation) is displayed at the changing hold position. The setting process is performed (step E225), and then the process returns.

On the other hand, when the determination result in step E221 is changing in the special figure (step E221; YES), it is determined whether the number of holds indicated by the latest received hold number command has increased from the previous time (step E227).
Then, when the number of holds increases (step E227; YES), a new hold display due to a new start winning should be executed. Therefore, performing a hold animation effect as this new hold display is, for example, a variable effect. It is determined whether or not the setting is made in the setting process (step D405) or the look-ahead symbol command process (step D184) (step E228).

Then, when it is not set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E228; NO), a setting process is performed to display the non-animation hold image at the position corresponding to the number of holds (step E228; NO). Step E229), then return. By the process of step E229, the non-animation hold display as shown in FIG. 172 (b) described above is performed.
On the other hand, when it is set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E228; YES), the setting to display the hold image of the set animation (animation) at the position corresponding to the number of holds. The process is performed (step E230), and then the process returns. Note that the process of step E230 is not limited to displaying the same animation image as the preceding hold display, and for example, as shown in FIG. 171 (c) described above, an animation image having a different mode from the preceding hold display is displayed. You may set to display.

If the number of holds has not increased as a result of the determination in step E227 (step E227; NO), it is determined whether the number of holds indicated by the latest received number of holds commands has decreased from the previous time (step E232).
Then, when the number of holds has not decreased (step E232; NO), the number of holds has not changed, so the process returns without doing anything.
On the other hand, when the number of holds decreases (step E232; YES), it means that a hold shift has occurred. Therefore, the currently changing hold images are deleted, and the display positions of the remaining hold display images are changed. The setting process of shifting to the next hold position toward the middle hold position is performed (step E233), and then it is determined whether the number of holds indicated by the latest received hold number command is 0 (step E234).

Then, when the number of holds is 0 (step E234; YES), it means that only the hold is being held during the change, so the player returns without doing anything.
On the other hand, when the number of holds is not 0 (step E234; NO), it is necessary to display the hold in addition to the changing hold, so that the player returns after executing step E235.
In step E235, among the pending displays during execution of the display of the animation to be synchronized (including the variable pending display in this example), for example, the image of the earliest pending display is copied to include the latest pending display. Executes the setting process to display the hold display at the position corresponding to each hold number. That is, for example, when the special figure fluctuation ends from the state shown in FIG. 170 (b) and the total number of holds is reduced from 3 to 2 (at the time of hold shift), the animation is displayed, for example, the earliest hold. The process of step E235 is a process in which the remaining two hold displays are set to be performed using the same frame-by-frame (frame-by-frame) image data as the display (in this case, the variable hold display). .. By the process of this step E235, for example, as shown in FIG. 170 (c), all hold displays are synchronized.

As described in FIG. 174 as Note 1), in steps E224, E225, E229, E230, and E235, whether the hold display to be set for display corresponds to special figure 1 or corresponds to special figure 2. Distinguish between what to do and what to do. That is, if the hold display to be set for display corresponds to, for example, special figure 1, the image having the feature as special figure 1 (for example, the white-painted image described above) is set separately so as to be displayed.
Further, as described in FIG. 174 as Note 2), in step E233, the frame-shaped image surrounding the pending hold is not deleted.
Further, as described as Note 3) in FIG. 174, although not shown, when the number of reservations is 0 and the special figure fluctuation is completed (for example, when the determination result in step E222 is negative). ) Is configured to delete the image on hold during fluctuation (the image in the frame-shaped image).

Next, FIG. 175 is a hold effect setting process which is an example of a flowchart for realizing the effect of the hold display shown in FIGS. 171 and 173 (b) described above.
The flowchart of the hold effect setting process shown in FIG. 175 is provided with step E230A instead of step E230 in FIG. 174, and other configurations are the same as the flowchart shown in FIG. 174. That is, in the flowchart of FIG. 175, when the number of holds increases during the change of the special figure and it is determined in step E228 that the hold animation effect is set, step E230A is executed and returns.

In step E230A, as the latest hold display determined that the hold animation effect is set, among the preceding hold displays (including the variable hold display in this example) during which the display of the animation to be synchronized is being executed. For example, the setting process of copying the image of the earliest hold display and displaying it at the position corresponding to the number of holds of the latest hold display is executed. That is, for example, when there is a new start prize from the state shown in FIG. 171 (a) and the total number of holds increases from 2 to 3 (that is, when there is a start prize and a new hold display is started). In addition, the latest hold display that should be newly executed is also performed using the same frame-by-frame (frame-by-frame) image data as the earliest hold display (in this case, the variable hold display) that is displaying the animation. The process set to be such is the process of step E230A. By the process of this step E230A, for example, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), the latest hold display is also synchronized from the beginning.
In addition, in the example after FIG. 170 described above, the mode in which the animation of the variable hold is also synchronized has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned copy (frame by frame (frame)) is described only between the hold displays other than the variable hold. The same image data may be used for each) to synchronize the animation, and the display of the pending hold may be controlled separately.

Next, FIG. 176 is a display example of a hold display (starting memory display) by animation synchronized using a timer.
First, in FIG. 176 (a), the number of holds is, for example, two (one for special figure 1 and one for special figure 2), and a person (or a predetermined character) includes a hold display of hold during fluctuation. In the display example, the hold display is performed by the animation display (moving display) that walks along the inner circumference in the circle, and the animations of all the hold displays (including the changing hold in this case) are synchronized. is there. This animation display may be realized by expanding and playing back what has been registered as moving image data, or registering the movement of a person (or character) walking in a circle as a plurality of still image data. Alternatively, the still image to be displayed may be switched and displayed for each frame (frame by frame) from the registered still image data, and controlled so that the player can see it as a moving image.

In the case of the display examples after FIG. 176, the unfilled head part of the person (or character) (white-painted) represents the hold (starting memory) of the special figure 1, and the person (or the character) The one with the head part of the character) filled (black one) represents the hold (starting memory) of Special Figure 2, and the image of the person (or character) surrounded by the square line is currently It is a hold display (display of hold during change) that displays the start memory during change. However, the configuration for displaying the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 separately and the configuration for displaying the pending change are not limited to such an embodiment.

And, what is characteristic of this display example is that in order to synchronize the animations of all the hold displays (including the pending hold in this case), all the hold display animations are performed by the hold animation timer, which is the same timer. It is a point that controls the progress of.
More specifically, for example, when the hold display animation makes one round in 12 frames (that is, the animation is decomposed into frames 1 to 12, for example, frame 12 is the first frame), for example, FIG. 179 (b). ), The value of one hold animation timer that increases sequentially is determined by periodically associating the frames of the hold display animation that should be displayed sequentially, and all according to this relationship. Controls the progress of the hold display animation.

For example, in the case of hold display A (low speed) shown in FIG. 179 (b), frame 12 is displayed when the value of the hold animation timer is 0, frame 1 is displayed when the timer value is 4, and the timer is displayed. When the value is 8, frame 2 is displayed, ... (Omitted) ... When the timer value is 48, the frame number is displayed every time the timer value increases by 4, and so on. It is assumed that the frames are determined so as to advance by one, and the frames to be displayed are switched based on the increase of the timer value according to this relationship, and the animation of the hold display progresses. By the way, in the case of the hold display A (low speed) shown in FIG. 179 (b), assuming that the timer value increases uniformly as long as the timekeeping operation of the hold animation timer continues, the timer value is divided by 48. When the remainder is obtained and the remainder is further divided by 4, the integer value (value rounded down to the nearest whole number) obtained as a result of this operation represents the frame number (however, the result of the calculation is obtained). If the obtained integer value is 0, the frame number is frame 12).

Further, in the case of the hold display B (high speed) shown in FIG. 179 (b), when the hold animation timer value is 0, frame 12 is displayed, and when the timer value is 2, frame 1 is displayed, and the timer is displayed. When the value is 4, frame 2 is displayed, ... (Omitted) ... When the timer value is 24, the frame number is displayed every time the timer value increases by 2, and so on. It is assumed that the frames are determined so as to advance by one, and the frames to be displayed are switched based on the increase of the timer value according to this relationship, and the animation of the hold display progresses. By the way, in the case of the hold display B (high speed) shown in FIG. 179 (b), assuming that the timer value increases uniformly as long as the timekeeping operation of the hold animation timer continues, the timer value is divided by 24. When the remainder is obtained and the remainder is further divided by 2, the integer value (value rounded down to the nearest whole number) obtained as a result of this operation represents the frame number (however, the result of the calculation is obtained). If the obtained integer value is 0, the frame number is frame 12). For example, a program or a data table is described using such a mathematical relationship, and the progress of all hold display animations is controlled by one and the same hold animation timer according to the above relationship.

In the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), the frame number increases more slowly than the timer value of the hold animation timer increases (basically, the frame number can be obtained by dividing the timer value by a predetermined number. However, in order to make the progress speed of the animation faster, the frame number increases faster than the timer value of the hold animation timer increases (basically by multiplying the timer value by a predetermined number). (Relationship to obtain the frame number) may be used. For example, the timer value of the hold animation timer may be doubled or tripled, and the result may be controlled by dividing the remainder by 12 of the number of frames to obtain the frame number. Alternatively, the increase in the timer value of the hold animation timer and the increase in the frame number may be the same mode (for example, the remainder obtained by dividing the timer value by 12 is the frame number as it is).

In any case, due to the above-mentioned features, for example, there is a new start prize (special figure 2) in the state shown in FIG. 176 (a) (the state in which all the animations of the hold display are synchronized), and the new start prize is supported. Even if a new hold display (latest hold display) is started, the animation of this latest hold display is also synchronized with other hold displays from the beginning as shown in FIG. 176 (b). This is because from the time when a new hold display is started, this new hold display is also controlled based on the hold animation timer described above, so that the value of the hold animation timer at that time is, for example, 40, and another hold is held. If the display (for example, the hold display A) is the moment when the frame 10 is displayed, the new hold display (for example, the hold display A) also starts the display from the frame 10 based on the timer value 40. is there. By the way, if a new hold display is controlled by another timer without performing such control, the new hold display starts from the first frame 12, the next frame is frame 1, and the next frame is frame 1. 2 and the display will proceed, but this will not synchronize with other hold displays forever.
However, with the configuration of this example, with a simple configuration using one timer, the hold display of the animation is all synchronized from the beginning, and it is possible to realize the effect of holding display with an interesting animation that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. .. That is, when the animation is executed as the hold display, there is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable if the animation of one hold display and the other hold display is not synchronized, which can be solved. Moreover, since the animation of all the hold displays is managed by one hold animation timer, the control becomes easy.

Here, the operation of the hold animation timer and the like will be described. FIG. 179 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the hold animation timer. As shown in FIG. 179 (a), the hold animation timer stops the timekeeping operation during the customer waiting effect, for example, and performs the timed operation when there is a start prize during the customer waiting effect and the special figure fluctuation is started. Start anew. To start a new timekeeping operation means to start the timer value from 0 and increase the timer value with the passage of time. If the configuration is such that the timekeeping operation is newly started when a start prize is received during the customer waiting effect, a new hold display (including the display of hold during change) starts from the initial position (for example, frame 12 described above). Will be done. In this way, when the timekeeping operation of the hold animation timer is started, the hold display may be set to be executed from the predetermined initial position (first frame) of the animation.

Note that FIG. 179 (a) illustrates a mode in which the timekeeping operation of the hold animation timer is stopped at the start of the customer waiting effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of holds is 0 and the special figure fluctuation is stopped. At that point, the hold animation timer may stop the timing operation, and the timing operation may always be stopped while the special figure fluctuation is stopped. The flowchart of FIG. 180, which will be described later, has such an aspect. Further, the hold animation timer may be in a mode in which the clock operation is always continued, for example, during the activation of the effect control device 300, without stopping. Further, the value of the hold animation timer is not limited to the mode in which the value continues to increase, and may return to 0 when a predetermined upper limit value is reached, and may increase from 0 again.

Next, FIGS. 177 and 178 show other display examples of hold display (starting memory display) by animation using a timer.
First, FIG. 177 (a) shows the same mode (type) of the hold display even when there are a plurality of modes in which the cycle time of the animation operation is different (in other words, the apparent speed of the animation operation is different). A display example is shown in which a hold animation timer is shared to control all hold displays. In this display example, the number of holds is, for example, 3 (1 for special figure 1 and 2 for special figure 2), and a person (or a predetermined character) is inside the circle including the hold display for holding during fluctuation. An animation display that walks along the circumference (hold display A; one cycle is, for example, 4 seconds), or an animation display in which a person (or a predetermined character) runs along the inner circumference in a circle (hold display B; one cycle is, for example, 2). This is a display example in which the hold display is performed by (seconds), and the animations of the hold display (including the variable hold in this case) having the same cycle time are synchronized. In this case, only the latest hold display is performed on the high-speed hold display B, and all other hold displays (including the variable hold) are performed on the low-speed hold display A and are synchronized.

Then, even when there are a plurality of types of hold displays having different cycle times in this way, the progress of the animation of all hold displays is performed based on the same hold animation timer according to the relationship shown in FIG. 179 (b) described above. If the configuration is controlled, the effect of facilitating control can be obtained. As already described in the explanation of FIG. 179 (b), even if the same hold animation timer is used, the result of multiplying this timer value by a predetermined number or dividing this timer value by a predetermined number (that is,). If the progress of the animation display frame is controlled based on the multiplication or division calculation (the result), the cycle time of the animation is different (that is, the speed of the animation movement is different). Display control can be achieved based on the same timer value.

Next, in FIG. 177 (b), in addition to the hold display of the animation similar to the display example of FIG. 177 (a), the animation display is performed as a preview effect display of the variable display of the decorative large symbol (special figure). This is an example. In this case, both the left and right symbols of the large decorative symbol are stopped at "3", and the reach action in which only the medium symbol of the large decorative symbol is slowly changing is being executed. By the way, even in such a reach state, all the decorative small patterns are displayed in a changing state. Then, as a special notice effect in the reach action, a large circle is displayed around the display position where the medium pattern of the decorative large pattern is variablely displayed, and an animation display in which "Tiger Taro" runs along the inner circumference of this large circle. Is being done. Then, the animation display in which the "tiger tiger" runs is also controlled based on the common hold animation timer as in the hold display B, for example.
In this way, the hold animation timer common to the hold display may be used to control the effect display other than the hold display (such as the notice effect display of the variable display game), so that the effect other than the hold display can be easily performed. At the same time, it becomes possible to easily synchronize or link the effects other than the hold display with the hold display.

Next, FIG. 178 is a display example in which the display of the new hold display mode is executed based on the same hold animation timer even if the hold display mode is changed due to the effect mode switching.
First, in the display example shown in FIG. 178 (a), there are two pending numbers (one special figure 1 and one special figure 2), and for example, in a state where the "mountain mode" effect is performed. In the visible area of the display unit 41a, the background image of the mountain is displayed in a large size. Correspondingly, for example, the above-mentioned hold display B is executed. The progress of these hold displays is controlled based on the one hold animation timer described above. Note that FIG. 178 (a) shows the moment when the special figure stops at "9,3,4", and the decorative small symbol also stops at "9,3,4".

Then, FIG. 178 (b) is a display example of a state in which the effect mode is switched after the state shown in FIG. 178 (a), the effect mode is switched to the "sea mode", and the next variable display game is started. is there. In this case, the number of holdings is 1 (1 for special figure 1 and 0 for special figure 2), and the background image in the sea is displayed large in the visible area of the display unit 41a, for example, a large number of fish. An image for swimming effect (which may be an animation) is displayed, and for example, the above-mentioned hold display B (however, an animation in which a fish swims along the inner circumference of a circle, not a person) is displayed as a hold display corresponding to the "sea mode". It is running. The progress of these hold displays is continuously controlled from before the effect mode is switched based on the one hold animation timer described above. That is, even if the mode of the hold display is switched by the effect mode switching, the hold display of the new mode after the effect mode is switched is not executed from the first frame of the animation (for example, the first frame of the movie). Based on the correspondence relationship as described with reference to FIG. 179 (b), the display is started from the frame corresponding to the value of the hold animation timer at that time. For this reason, it is possible to realize the effect mode switching that is not uncomfortable for the player with easy control.
As another aspect, when the effect mode is switched, the hold animation timer is cleared (reset) and the timekeeping operation of the hold animation timer is restarted from 0, so that the hold display animation after the effect mode is switched is the first frame ( For example, it may be displayed from the first frame of the movie). In this case, the player can see the hold display in the new display mode corresponding to the new effect mode after switching from the beginning, and the effect is enhanced in that respect.

Next, FIG. 180 is a hold effect setting process which is an example of a flowchart for realizing the effect of the hold display shown in FIGS. 176 to 178 described above.
This hold effect setting process is performed, for example, in both step D214 (special figure 1 hold information setting process) and step D218 (special figure 2 hold information setting process) in the one-shot command process of the effect control device 300 shown in FIG. This is a process executed every time a hold number command is received from the game control device 100.

When this hold effect setting process is started, as shown in FIG. 180, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is changing (that is, whether or not the variable display game of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is being executed). If (step E241) is not being executed (step E241; NO), it is determined whether the number of holds indicated by the latest received hold number command has increased from the previous time (step E242).
If the number of holds has not increased (step E242; NO), the number of holds is 0 and there is no hold during fluctuation, so a return is made (this process ends). On the other hand, when the number of holds increases (step E242; YES), a new hold display due to a new start winning should be executed. Therefore, performing a hold animation effect as this new hold display is, for example, a variable effect. It is determined whether or not the setting is made in the setting process (step D405) or the look-ahead symbol system command process (step D184) (step E243). Here, the hold animation effect means the effect of the hold display by the animation shown in FIG. 176 and the like.

Then, when it is not set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E243; NO), a setting process is performed to display the non-animated changing hold image at the changing hold position. (Step E244), then return. "Non-animated" means not animated.
On the other hand, when it is set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E243; YES), the timekeeping operation of the hold animation timer is started from 0 (step E245), and then the set animation (step E245). The setting process of displaying the image on hold during change of (animation) at the position of hold on change based on the hold animation timer is performed (step E246), and then the image is returned. Here, "displaying based on the hold animation timer" means, for example, determining the animation frame to be displayed from the value of the hold animation timer based on the relationship shown in FIG. 179 (b) described above, and then determining the animation frame. It means to advance the display.

On the other hand, when the determination result in step E241 is changing in the special figure (step E241; YES), it is determined whether the number of holds indicated by the latest received hold number command has increased from the previous time (step E247).
Then, when the number of holds increases (step E247; YES), a new hold display due to a new start winning should be executed. Therefore, performing a hold animation effect as this new hold display is, for example, a variable effect. It is determined whether or not the setting is made in the setting process (step D405) or the look-ahead symbol command process (step D184) (step E248).

Then, when it is not set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E248; NO), a setting process is performed to display the non-animation hold image at a position corresponding to the number of holds (step E248; NO). Step E249), then return.
On the other hand, when it is set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E248; YES), the hold image of the set animation (animation) is being displayed as the animation to be synchronized. Based on the same hold animation timer as the hold of, the setting process for displaying at the position corresponding to the number of holds is performed (step E250), and then the return is performed. The process of step E250 is not limited to displaying the same animation image as the preceding hold display, and for example, as shown in FIG. 177 (a) above, an animation image of a different type from the preceding hold display is displayed. You may set to display.

If the number of holds has not increased as a result of the determination in step E247 (step E247; NO), it is determined whether the number of holds indicated by the latest received number of holds commands has decreased from the previous time (step E252).
Then, when the number of holds has not decreased (step E252; NO), the number of holds has not changed, so the process returns without doing anything.
On the other hand, when the number of holds decreases (step E252; YES), it means that a hold shift has occurred. Therefore, the currently changing hold images are deleted, and the display positions of the remaining hold display images are changed. The setting process of shifting to the next position toward the middle hold position is performed (step E253), and then the return is performed.
Here, in step E253, when the effect mode is switched, the process of changing the display mode of the hold display to the one corresponding to the effect mode after the switch is performed. As a result, for example, the hold display mode is switched as shown in FIG. 178.

As described in FIG. 180 as Note 1), in steps E244, E246, E249, and E250, whether the hold display to be set for display corresponds to special figure 1 or corresponds to special figure 2. It is done by distinguishing between. That is, if the hold display to be set for display corresponds to, for example, special figure 1, the image having the feature as special figure 1 (for example, the white-painted image described above) is set separately so as to be displayed.
Further, as described as Note 2) in FIG. 180, in step E253, the frame-shaped image surrounding the pending hold is not erased.
Further, as described as Note 3) in FIG. 180, although not shown, when the number of reservations is 0 and the special figure fluctuation is completed (for example, when the determination result in step E242 is negative). ) Is configured to delete the image on hold during fluctuation (the image in the frame-shaped image) and to end the timing operation of the hold animation timer.

In the examples after FIG. 176 described above, the mode in which the animation of the pending hold is also synchronized has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the animation is performed using the same timer only between the hold displays other than the pending display. May be synchronized and the display of pending pending may be controlled separately.
Further, in the above description, the description is based on the premise that the control of the hold display is newly started when the corresponding start prize is received. For example, on the display layer, the number of animations corresponding to the maximum number of holds is displayed. It is also possible to always execute the hold display by. For example, on the display layer, the hold display by the number of animations corresponding to the maximum hold number is always executed in synchronization, and other images are displayed on the front side for the hold display corresponding to the amount larger than the actual hold number. Then (or set the transparency of the hold display to 100%) to hide it so that it cannot be seen by the player, and stop (hide) the hiding as necessary when the number of hold display increases due to the start prize. Control may be performed so that the hold display is actually shown to the player (by erasing the image or reducing the transparency of the hold display). In this case, the type of animation to be executed at the time of hiding is set to, for example, a specific basic type (for example, for special figure 1 and low-speed hold display A), and when it is actually shown, it is painted white to black as needed. It may be controlled by changing to for special figure 2 or changing the low-speed hold display A to, for example, the high-speed hold display B.

Next, the invention concept that can be extracted or developed from the above-described examples will be described below.
(Invention concept (1))
In this embodiment, as described in step D434 and the like and FIGS. 101, 145 to 149, the control means (effect control device 300) that controls the display means (display device 41) to produce a variable display game is , The image of the identification information (for example, the number that constitutes the design of the decorative special figure) and the image of the effect information (for example, a specific character with an animal motif (for example, the above-mentioned Tiger Taro C7)) overlap (the display position is). When executing an effect display with a certain state (matching state), if the image of the effect information is displayed as the back side in the overlapping portion, the image for the effect (for example, a movie) including the image of the effect information is included and is displayed on the entire screen, for example. When the image of the effect information (the image of M1) is arranged on the back side of the image of the identification information (for example, the image of the right symbol KTR or the like) and the image of the effect information is displayed as the front side in the overlapped portion, the image for the effect is used as the identification information. A function of arranging an image (for example, the image GM1) obtained by partially copying a portion of the effect image including the image of the effect information on the back side of the image of the identification information on the front side of the image of the identification information. Have.
Note that "arranging on the back side" means arranging and displaying on a different display layer on the back side, and "arranging on the front side" means arranging and displaying on a different display layer on the front side. Is. Here, the display layer is a layer that determines the context (display priority) of whether to display as the front side or the other side on the screen (in this embodiment, for example, a motion layer). Means.

As a result, it is possible to easily perform a dynamic effect in which the image of the specific effect information is switched to the back side or the front side with respect to the image of the identification information and overlapped with the image, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Moreover, the control of this effect keeps the effect image including the effect information image behind the identification information image even if the context of the effect information image and the identification information image is different. Only when the information image is displayed as the front side, an image obtained by partially copying the part (s) including the effect information image in the effect image is arranged on the front side of the identification information image. It can be realized with simple control. Further, since only the part including the image of the specific effect information in the effect image arranged on the back side is arranged on the front side, at least the area other than the area overlapping with the part including the image of the specific effect information is arranged. Is surely visible, and there is an advantage that the image of the identification information (and other images arranged on the back side including the identification information) is not unnecessarily obstructed by the image on the front side.

The invention concept (1) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information and a control means for controlling the display means are provided, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that can generate various states
The control means is
When executing an effect display in which the image of the identification information and the image of the effect information different from the identification information are at least partially overlapped in the display area (screen) of the display means.
When the image of the effect information is displayed as the back side in the overlapped portion, the effect image including the image of the effect information is arranged on the back side of the image of the identification information.
When the image of the effect information is displayed as the front side in the overlapped portion, the effect image is arranged behind the image of the identification information, and the portion including the image of the effect information in the effect image. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a function of arranging an image obtained by partially copying (s) of the identification information on the front side of the image of the identification information.
Here, the effect image may be a still image or a moving image (for example, an image of a predetermined frame of the moving image).
Further, the effect image means an image when the image data (still image or moving image data) for effect stored in a predetermined storage means (image ROM 322 in this embodiment) is drawn as a whole. , Not necessarily limited to what is displayed on the entire screen.

Further, in the present embodiment, the control means (effect control device 300) semi-transparently arranges an image (an image obtained by copying a portion of the effect image including the effect information image) arranged on the front side of the identification information image. It can be displayed as a state. As a specific example, for example, the effect code (effect 1 code, effect 2 code) of the motion table shown on the lower side of FIG. 149 can be used to control the chord in a semi-transparent manner. This has the advantage that the visibility of the identification information image is secured to some extent even in the part where the image arranged on the front side and the image of the identification information overlap, and the image arranged on the front side and the production image arranged on the back side. In addition, the image of the identification information and the like are overlapped with each other to change the color and density of the image of the effect information and the identification information, so that the effect of enhancing the interest can be obtained.

The above configuration is represented as follows as a subconcept (1-2) of the invention concept (1).
The control means is
A gaming machine characterized by having a function of arranging an image obtained by copying a portion of the effect image including the image of the effect information as a semi-transparent image on the front side of the image of the identification information.

The background of the above invention concept (1) and the like will be described below.
Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a display device capable of displaying a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information, and can generate a state advantageous to the player according to the result of the variable display game. Are known.
In this type of gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-192622, as an effect at the time of the variable display game, various effects including a notice suggesting the result of the variable display game and the like are provided. This is done with the display device or the like.
By the way, in this type of gaming machine, the production is diversified, but for example, a more dynamic and interesting production is required.
The invention concept (1) and the like of the present application have been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a high degree of interest in gaming, and this object is realized.

(Invention concept (2))
In this embodiment, as described in step D434 and the like, FIG. 145, FIG. 146, FIG. 148, FIG. 150, FIG. 151 and the like, control for controlling the display means (display device 41) to produce a variable display game is performed. The means (effect control device 300) is an image of identification information (for example, a number constituting a pattern of a decorative special figure) and an image of effect information (for example, a specific character with an animal motif (for example, the above-mentioned tiger taro C7)). When executing an effect display in which the images overlap with each other, when the image of the effect information is displayed as the back side in the overlapped portion, the effect image (for example, the image of the movie M1) including the image of the effect information is identified. When the effect information image is displayed on the back side of the information image and the effect information image is displayed as the front side in the overlapped portion, the effect image is arranged on the back side of the identification information image and the effect image is displayed. It has a function of arranging the identification information on the front side of the image as a semi-transparent shape.

As a result, it is possible to easily perform a dynamic effect in which the image of the specific effect information is switched to the back side or the front side with respect to the image of the identification information and overlapped with the image, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Moreover, the control of this effect keeps the effect image including the image of the effect information arranged behind the image of the identification information even if the context of the image of the effect information and the image of the identification information are different. Only when the information image is displayed on the front side, it can be realized by simple control that the effect image is translucently arranged on the front side of the identification information image. In particular, since the image cutting operation (partially copying operation) as in the invention concept (1) does not occur, the processing load of the control means can be reduced. In addition, since the production image is translucently arranged on the front side, the visibility of the identification information image (and other images arranged on the back side including the identification information) is also ensured. it can. In addition, the effect image arranged on the front side, the effect image arranged on the back side, the identification information image, and the like overlap each other, and the colors of the effect image (including the effect information image) and the identification information image, etc. The effect of changing the concentration and increasing the interest can be obtained.

The invention concept (2) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information and a control means for controlling the display means are provided, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that can generate various states
The control means is
When executing an effect display in which the image of the identification information and the image of the effect information different from the identification information are at least partially overlapped in the display area (screen) of the display means.
When the image of the effect information is displayed as the back side in the overlapped portion, the effect image including the image of the effect information is arranged on the back side of the image of the identification information.
When the image of the effect information is displayed as the front side in the overlapped portion, the effect image is arranged on the back side of the image of the identification information, and the effect image is made translucent to display the identification information. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of arranging it on the front side of an image.

(Invention concept (3))
In this embodiment, as described in step D444 and the like, FIGS. 102, 155 (b) to 157 (b), 159 to 161 and the like, the identification information (for example, “1” to “1” to A plurality of effect information (for example, a character such as "Torataro" that is set for each identification information and is different for each identification information) that is not (the number "9") is displayed on the screen 41a of the display means (display device 41). The mode or result of the variable display game of the special figure (presence or absence of reach action in this embodiment) depending on the combination of the displayed effect information among the plurality of effect information displayed in an area different from the variable display of ) Can be executed (for example, an effect of notifying the occurrence of reach). As a result, the appearance rate as a stop symbol is lower than that in the case where the notification effect is performed by, for example, the identification information and the additional information added to the identification information (for example, the character added for each number of the decorative special figure). Information and the like can also appear in the notification effect, and an easy-to-understand and dynamic effect can be made, which can improve the interest of the game.

The invention concept (3) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information and a control means for controlling the display means are provided, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that can generate various states
The control means is
A plurality of effect information other than the identification information is displayed in an area (plural places) different from the identification information display area in which the variable display of the identification information is performed in the display area (screen) of the display means, and the plurality of effect information is displayed. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying or suggesting (notifying) the mode or result of the variable display game by combining the displayed effect information.
The effect information may be used as additional information added to the identification information, or may not be the additional information.
Further, the "identification information display area" corresponds to the above-mentioned variable display area H1, and the "area different from the identification information display area" corresponds to the above-mentioned main screen area.

The background of the invention concept (3) will be described below.
Conventionally, for example, as a notification effect for notifying the occurrence of reach, those disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-136516 are known. This is to execute the reach generation notification effect in the notification mode according to the type of the attached character when the reach state occurs during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol (variable display of the identification information). Specifically, as described in, for example, FIG. 102 and paragraph 0453 of the same publication, the type of attached character (additional information) added to the stop symbol (for example, "1", "2") in the reach state. If the character is a male character, the message "Double reach!" Is displayed, and if the character is a female character, the message "Double reach!" Is displayed to notify the reach occurrence.

In this way, in the conventional notification effect, the character (effect information) for the notification effect is arranged around the identification information (for example, "1", "2", etc.) constituting the decorative special figure and is integrated with the identification information. Since it is displayed only as an image of additional information that is displayed in a variable manner (or stopped display), there are the following problems. That is, for example, since there is a considerable difference in the appearance rate between the types of symbols displayed as stop symbols in the reach state (that is, the types of identification information), symbols with a low appearance rate (for example, "7" which is a probabilistic symbol). There is a problem that the player can rarely see the notification effect of the attached character added to. Further, there is a problem that characters (directing information) other than the additional information cannot be seen. Further, since the image of the character involved in the notification effect is only displayed together with the identification information as additional information, there is a problem that the content of the notification effect is difficult to understand. For example, in the case of the specific example of the above publication, the player may misunderstand that the display "Double reach!" Corresponds to the female character, and the type of character corresponding to the display of the notification effect. However, there was a problem that it was difficult for the player to understand the contents of the production.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of effect information other than the identification information is displayed in an area different from the variable display of the identification information, and the notification effect is notified or suggested (notified) by the combination of the displayed effect information. Therefore, the effect information having a low appearance rate as a stop symbol (for example, a character such as "Torataro C7" used as additional information of the probability variation symbol "7" having a low appearance rate) can also appear in the notification effect. It is also possible to make the production information that is not the additional information of the decoration special figure appear, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game and to make the notification effect easy to understand and dynamic. In particular, as in the present embodiment (FIG. 156, etc.), the variable display area H1 for displaying the variable display of the identification information is arranged in the corner of the screen 41a, and the remaining area in the screen is larger than the variable display area H1. In a mode in which the effect information for the notification effect is displayed in a large area (main screen area), a more understandable and dynamic notification effect becomes possible.
The subconcept (3-2) of the above-mentioned invention concept (3) is expressed as follows.
The control means is
In the notification effect, the identification information display area for variable display of the identification information is arranged in the corner of the display area (screen), and the remaining area in the display area has a larger area than the identification information display area. A gaming machine characterized by displaying the effect information in a large area.

Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 157 (c) and the like, a movable accessory (for example, a movable accessory 700) capable of moving with respect to the display screen 41a of the display device 41 is provided, and the movable accessory is provided. An image of the effect information (for example, an image of the rope C17 described above and an image of the rope C17 being pulled by a tiger taro C7; the image of the rope C17 being pulled by the effect control device 300, which is a control means of the above. It has a function of displaying the interlocking image) on the display screen 41a. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect related to the character and the display, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

The above configuration is represented as follows as a subconcept (3-3) of the invention concept (3).
A movable accessory that can move with respect to the display area (screen) of the display means is provided.
The control means is a gaming machine having a function of displaying an image of the effect information (the interlocking image) that changes in association with the operation of the movable accessory in the display area of the display means.

Further, the movable accessory 700 of the present embodiment is viewed from the front (that is, viewed from the player), and the display screen 41a is such that at least the decorative portion 701 (main portion for producing the effect) covers a part of the display screen 41a. The in-screen arrangement state (corresponding to the standing state or the diagonally raised state) located in front of the display screen 41a and the out-of-screen arrangement located in a place where the entire or substantially the entire body including the decorative portion 701 does not cover the front surface of the display screen 41a. It is possible to move to a state (corresponding to the initial state). As a result, when performing an effect that operates in conjunction with the interlocking image, the accessory 700 is placed in the screen arrangement state so that the main part of the accessory 700 is reliably positioned in the player's field of view. Therefore, it is possible to surely show the player the effect linked with the movable accessory and the display. Further, when the movable accessory and the interlocking image are not interlocked with each other, if the accessory 700 is placed outside the screen, the field of view of the player paying attention to the display screen 41a is not obstructed. , It is possible to show the player a display effect using the entire display screen 41a.

The above configuration is represented as follows as a subconcept (3-4) of the invention concept (3).
When viewed from the front, the movable accessory has an in-screen arrangement state in which at least a main portion for producing an effect covers a part of the display area and is located in front of the display area, and the whole or abbreviated including the main portion. A gaming machine characterized in that it can move to an off-screen arrangement state where the whole is located in a place that does not cover the front surface of the display area.

Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 165 (c) and the like, the effect control device 300, which is a control means, is provided with an accessory (for example, the upper accessory 801) capable of emitting light in addition to the display device 41. A light emission interlocking image (an image of a character such as a tiger taro holding a predetermined item) including predetermined light emission effect information (for example, a rose flower which is a predetermined item) is displayed in the main screen area as an image of the effect information. , It has a function of causing the accessory to emit light in conjunction with the display of the light emission interlocking image. As a result, the effect of the light emission of the accessory is performed in conjunction with the display of the effect information by the display means, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

The above configuration is represented as follows as a subconcept (3-5) of the invention concept (3).
In addition to the display means, a accessory capable of emitting light is provided.
The control means has a function of displaying a light emission interlocking image including predetermined light emission effect information as an image of the effect information, and causing the accessory to emit light in conjunction with the display of the light emission interlocking image. Machine.

(Invention concept (4))
Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 146 (b) and 146 (c), the identification information (for example, the numbers “1” to “9”) constituting the decorative special figure and the identification information are used. It is possible to temporarily change the production information to suggest reliability (notice) in response to the positional relationship of the display position with the non-production information (for example, a character such as "Torataro"). For this reason, it is possible to produce a novel and dynamic effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The invention concept (4) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information and a control means for controlling the display means are provided, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that can generate various states
The control means is
During the variable display game, in addition to the identification information, effect information other than the identification information is displayed in the display area (screen) of the display means, and the display positional relationship between the identification information and the effect information changes. Is feasible and
In the effect display, when the display positional relationship between the identification information and the effect information becomes a predetermined positional relationship, at least a change in the display state or display mode of the image displayed in the display area including the effect information is generated. Is possible,
A gaming machine having a configuration capable of suggesting the mode of the variable display game that progresses thereafter or the result of the variable display game that is determined thereafter depending on the presence or absence or mode of the change in the effect display.
Here, the effect information may be used as additional information added to the identification information, or may not be the additional information.
Further, the "suggestable configuration" means a so-called noticeable configuration, for example, the probability of occurrence of each of various aspects of the variable display game that is selected by lottery and may proceed thereafter ( The setting of the lottery probability) (specifically, the setting of the type of the data table used for the lottery (for example, the advance notice distribution table used in the above-mentioned steps D426 and D429)) is changed before the lottery. It is a configuration that is set differently depending on the presence or absence or mode of. With this configuration, the player can empirically predict, for example, the mode of the variable display game that is likely to progress thereafter from the presence or absence or mode of the change, and the interest of the game is enhanced. The same applies to the "suggestable configuration" for the result of the variable display game to be determined thereafter. For example, a table used for a lottery to determine the presence / absence or mode of the change (for example, the advance notice distribution table) has already been established. A configuration that is set in a table with different contents according to the result of the variable display game that has been determined (for example, in the case of a big hit, a table with a relatively high probability that the change is selected is used and is out of order. In the case of, a table with a relatively high probability that the change is selected is used, which can suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the effect execution with the change will result in a big hit. ). With this configuration, the player can empirically predict the result of the variable display game, which is likely to be determined after that, from the presence or absence or mode of the change, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

The change may be, for example, a change in the mode (display color, display size, etc.) of the character as the effect information, or a change in the type of character as the effect information. However, the change may be such that the character as the effect information disappears, or the entire image including the character as the effect information may be in a blackened state (blacked out state). Further, the above change occurs when the display positional relationship between the identification information and the effect information is in a predetermined positional relationship, and returns to the state before the change when the predetermined positional relationship is lost. However, for example, it may be configured to occur when the display positional relationship between the identification information and the effect information becomes a predetermined positional relationship, and once changed, the state after the change is maintained.
Further, the predetermined positional relationship may be a state in which the display positions are close to each other within a predetermined distance, a state in which the display positions match at least in a part (a state in which the displays overlap at least a part), or a display. As a position range, one may be completely within the other image.

(Invention Concept (5))
Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 154, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort and suggest reliability by providing a time difference in the same movie to be superimposed or by making a symmetrical image. For this reason, it is possible to produce a novel and dynamic effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The invention concept (5) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information and a control means for controlling the display means are provided, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that can generate various states
The control means is
During the variable display game, in the display area (screen) of the display means, it is possible to execute an effect display by a moving image in which the display position of the effect information other than the identification information changes.
In the effect display, a plurality of the same moving images can be displayed by superimposing them on the front and back of the screen with a difference in playback timing or inverted state.
The configuration is characterized in that the mode of the variable display game that progresses thereafter or the result of the variable display game that is determined thereafter can be suggested depending on the presence or absence or mode of the difference in the reproduction timing or the inverted state in the effect display. Game machine to be.
The effect information may be used as additional information added to the identification information, or may not be the additional information.
Further, the "suggestable configuration" means a so-called noticeable configuration, for example, the probability of occurrence of each of various aspects of the variable display game that is selected by lottery and may proceed thereafter ( The setting of the lottery probability) (specifically, for example, the setting of the type of the data table used for the lottery (for example, the advance notice distribution table used in steps D426 and D429 described above)) is the difference before the lottery. It is a configuration that is set differently depending on the presence or absence or mode of. With this configuration, the player can empirically predict, for example, the mode of the variable display game that is likely to progress thereafter from the presence or absence or mode of the difference, and the interest of the game is enhanced. The same applies to the "suggestable configuration" for the result of the variable display game to be determined thereafter. For example, the table used for the lottery to determine the presence / absence or mode of the difference (for example, the advance notice distribution table) has already been established. A configuration that is set in a table with different contents according to the result of the variable display game that has been determined (for example, in the case of a big hit, a table with a relatively high probability that the difference is selected is used and is out of order. In the case of, a table with a relatively high probability that the no difference is selected is used, which can suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the effect execution with the difference will result in a big hit. ). With this configuration, the player can empirically predict the result of the variable display game, which is likely to be determined thereafter, from the presence or absence or mode of the difference, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

(Invention Concept (6))
Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 162, 163, etc., additional information (added to the numbers, etc., which are the symbols of the decorative special figure) that are added to the identification information of the decorative special figure and are uniformly displayed in a variable manner. It is possible to execute an effect display in which the character) jumps out from the identification information display area (variable display area H1) where the variable display of the identification information is performed to the main screen area. Is absent (the display of the additional information integrated with the identification information disappears and disappears), and the identification information in which the additional information does not pop out is displayed in a variable manner with the additional information added. And, not limited to the SD mode, the additional information that pops out is configured to produce some effect. For this reason, it is possible to produce a novel and dynamic effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when the popped out additional information is absent (not displayed) in the identification information display area, it becomes clear that the specific additional information is popped out and the type of the popped out additional information is more interesting. Easy-to-understand production can be realized.

The invention concept (6) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information and a control means for controlling the display means are provided, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that can generate various states
The control means is
During the variable display game, the variable display of the identification information is executed in the identification information display area set as a part of the display area (screen) of the display means, and the variable display is integrally added to the identification information. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect display in which the additional information that has been added moves from the identification information display area to the outside of the identification information display area.

Further, the subconcept (6-2) of the above-mentioned invention concept (6) is expressed as follows.
The control means is
At the time of the effect display, the additional information moved from the identification information display area is not displayed in the identification information display area, while the additional information not moved from the identification information display area is identified. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to perform variable display integrally with the corresponding identification information in the information display area.
Further, the subconcept (6-3) of the invention concept (6) is expressed as follows.
The control means is
At the time of the effect display, the identification information display area is arranged in the corner of the screen, and the additional information is displayed in the remaining area in the screen having a larger area than the identification information display area. A game machine featuring.

(Invention Concept (7))
Further, in this embodiment, as described in FIGS. 155 (b) to 157 (b) and the like, it is possible to notify or suggest a time change or the end of the period by displaying a background with a change indicating the passage of time. That is, the control means (effect control device 300) scrolls the first parameter (road and surrounding scenery) indicating the passage of time on the screen 41a of the display means (display device 41), for example, during the variable display game of the special figure. It is possible to display a changing background including a second parameter (an image of how it progresses in the morning, day, evening, and night), and it is possible to express the passage of time by displaying the background. At the same time, for example, the end of the predetermined period (for example, the period of the reach generation notification effect) can be notified or suggested by changing the second parameter in conjunction with the end of the predetermined period in the variable display game. For this reason, it is possible to produce a novel and dynamic effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this embodiment, instead of simply expressing the passage of time and the end of the period with one type of parameter (changing image), the passage of time is expressed with two types of parameters, and the period ends with one of the parameters. Because it suggests, complex, interesting and dynamic production becomes possible.

The invention concept (7) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information and a control means for controlling the display means are provided, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that can generate various states
The control means is
In the display area (screen) of the display means, it is possible to display a changing background including the first parameter and the second parameter indicating the passage of time, and the second parameter is changed in conjunction with the end of a predetermined period of the effect. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to notify or suggest the end of the predetermined period by allowing the player to do so.
The background with the change may be displayed during the variable display game, or may be displayed during a period other than the variable display game. The period during which the variable display game is not in progress includes, for example, a state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit state) when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, or a state before the start of the variable display game (so-called customer). There is a waiting state). Further, the background with the above change is not limited to the one displayed on the display layer for the background.

(Invention Concept (8))
Further, in this embodiment, as described in FIGS. 165 (a), 165 (b), etc., reach occurrence or big hit occurs depending on the presence or absence and mode of the difference in the form (pose, etc.) when the characters are displayed together. It is possible to suggest reliability (notice) such as. As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The invention concept (8) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information and a control means for controlling the display means are provided, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that can generate various states
The control means is
During the variable display game, it is possible to execute an effect display in which a plurality of effect information other than the identification information is displayed at a plurality of locations in the display area (screen) of the display means, and the effect information displayed at the plurality of locations can be executed. A gaming machine having a configuration capable of suggesting the mode of the variable display game that progresses thereafter or the result of the variable display game that is determined thereafter, depending on the presence or absence or mode of the difference in form.
The effect information may be used as additional information added to the identification information, or may not be the additional information.
Further, the "suggestable configuration" means a so-called noticeable configuration, for example, the probability of occurrence of each of various aspects of the variable display game that is selected by lottery and may proceed thereafter ( The setting of the lottery probability) (specifically, for example, the setting of the type of the data table used for the lottery (for example, the advance notice distribution table used in the above-mentioned steps D426 and D429)) is the effect before the lottery. The configuration is set differently depending on the presence or absence of a difference in the form of information or the mode. With this configuration, the player can empirically predict the mode of the variable display game that is likely to progress thereafter from the presence or absence or mode of the difference in the form of the effect information, and the interest of the game is enhanced. .. The same applies to the "suggestable configuration" for the result of the variable display game to be determined thereafter. For example, a table used for a lottery to determine the presence or absence or mode of a difference in the form of the effect information (for example, the advance notice distribution). The configuration (table) is set in a table having different contents according to the result of the variable display game that has already been determined (for example, in the case of a big hit, there is a probability that a difference in the form of the effect information is selected. A relatively high table is used, and if it is out of order, a table with a relatively high probability that no difference in the form of the effect information is selected is used, whereby, for example, there is a difference in the form of the effect information. It is a configuration that can suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of becoming a big hit by executing the production). With this configuration, the player can empirically predict the result of the variable display game, which is likely to be determined afterwards, from the presence or absence or mode of the difference in the form of the effect information, and the interest of the game is enhanced. ..

(Invention concept (9))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 163 (c) and 165 (c), the effect information (for example, a character such as the tiger lock C8) different from the identification information (design of the decorative special drawing) is displayed in a predetermined display mode. When displayed in (display color, display size, display position, pose, whether or not a predetermined item is held, etc.), the mode of the accessory (light emitting state) is linked to the display of this display mode. , Operating state, operating position, etc.) can be changed, and it is also possible to suggest reliability (notice) such as reach generation and big hit. As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The invention concept (9) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information and a control means for controlling the display means are provided, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that can generate various states
In addition to the display means, it has an accessory capable of changing its mode (light emitting state, operating state, operating position, etc.).
The control means is
It is possible to execute an effect display in which the effect information other than the identification information is displayed in the display area (screen) of the display means, and the mode of the accessory is changed in conjunction with the display mode of the effect information in the effect display. A game machine characterized by having a function of causing information.
The effect information may be used as additional information added to the identification information, or may not be the additional information.

(Invention Concept (11))
Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167, it is possible to reduce the image of a plurality of objects including the decorative large pattern of the special figure. In this effect, if the reduction ratio is different for each object. It is possible to make it. As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved. Moreover, it has the effect of holding the required size for each object. In addition, information that may affect the game, specifically, the above-mentioned hold display, hold number display, decorative small symbol, right-handed instruction display, etc. (the fourth symbol may be included) should not be reduced. As a result, the notification function of these images (the function of notifying the player of the number of holds and the like) can be sufficiently maintained even during the reduction effect. That is, the information that is likely to affect the game is excluded from the reduction target and is not reduced, and the character information that becomes difficult to see if the reduction target object is excessively reduced (for example, dialogue display, fluctuation number display) is reduced. Since the size is reduced, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding or overlooking the information and adversely affecting the game, and to prevent the player from feeling tired or uncomfortable.

The invention concept (11) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information (for example, a display device 41) and a control means for controlling the display means (for example, an effect control device 300) are provided, and the result of the variable display game is provided. In a game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to the player when the predetermined result is obtained.
The control means is
It is possible to execute a reduced display effect in which the image of the target object including the identification information (for example, a decorative large pattern) displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means is reduced.
As the reduced display effect, a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect having a different reduction ratio for each object.
Alternatively, the above configuration is expressed as an invention concept (11a) and an invention concept (11b) as follows.
(Invention Concept (11a))
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information (for example, a display device 41) and a control means for controlling the display means (for example, an effect control device 300) are provided, and the result of the variable display game is provided. In a game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to the player when the predetermined result is obtained.
The control means is
It is possible to execute a reduced display effect in which the image of the target area including the range displaying the identification information (for example, a large decorative symbol) in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means is reduced.
In the reduced display effect, among a plurality of objects displayed in the target area, only the objects to be reduced are reduced, and the objects not to be reduced are not reduced.
(Invention Concept (11b))
As the reduced display effect, a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect having a different reduction ratio for each object to be reduced.
The identification information includes the first identification information to be reduced (for example, a large decorative symbol) and the first identification in a normal state (a state in which a special display such as the reduced display effect is not performed). The second identification information (for example, a small decorative symbol) that is displayed smaller than the information and is displayed separately from the first identification information (displayed at a different position as a different object) so that the player can always see it. ), And the object not subject to reduction includes at least the second identification information.

(Invention Concept (11-1))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 167 (a), the display angle during or after the reduction of the image to be reduced in the reduction display effect may be changed to a different angle for each object. Can be enhanced. The image to be reduced may be displayed in a state in which it is three-dimensionally moved so as to be tilted in the front-rear direction, and the display angle may be different for each object including the change in the display angle in the front-back direction. As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The invention concept (11-1) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information and a control means for controlling the display means are provided, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that can generate various states
The control means is
It is possible to execute a reduced display effect in which the image of the target area including the range displaying the identification information in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means is reduced.
As the reduced display effect, a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect in which the display angle of the image to be reduced differs for each object.

(Invention Concept (11-2))
Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 167 (b), between the image of the area to be reduced and the image of a new background or the like located around the image of the area to be reduced during the reduced display effect. It is possible to provide contrast (for example, difference in brightness, difference in color, etc.). By providing the contrast in this way, the reduced image becomes easy to see, and the display effect becomes more impressive. As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The invention concept (11-2) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information and a control means for controlling the display means are provided, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that can generate various states
The control means is
It is possible to execute a reduced display effect in which the image of the target area including the range displaying the identification information in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means is reduced.
When executing the reduced display effect, a contrast (for example, a difference in brightness, a difference in color, etc.) is created between the image to be reduced and the background image located around the area where the reduced image is displayed. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to carry out the effect to be provided.

(Invention Concept (11-3))
Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 167 (c), the image to be reduced is displayed semi-transparently at the time of the reduced display effect, and a new background image or another effect is displayed behind the image to be reduced. It is possible to display a transparent image. As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The invention concept (11-3) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information and a control means for controlling the display means are provided, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that can generate various states
The control means is
It is possible to execute a reduced display effect in which the image of the target area including the range displaying the identification information in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means is reduced.
When the reduced display effect is executed, the image to be reduced is displayed semi-transparently, and the background image or another effect image can be seen through behind the image to be reduced. A game machine to play.

(Invention Concept (11-4))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 168, it is possible to produce an effect in which the images of a plurality of objects including the decorative large pattern of the special figure are enlarged, and in this effect, the enlargement ratio may be different for each object. It is possible. As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved. Moreover, there is an effect that an appropriate size can be maintained for each object. In addition, information that may affect the game, specifically, the above-mentioned hold display, hold number display, decorative small symbol, right-handed instruction display, etc. (the fourth symbol may be included) should not be expanded. As a result, the notification function of these images (the function of notifying the player of the number of holds and the like) can be sufficiently maintained even during the expansion effect. That is, the information that is likely to affect the game is excluded from the enlargement target and is not expanded, and the character information that becomes difficult to see if the object to be enlarged is excessively enlarged (for example, dialogue display, fluctuation number display) is expanded. Since the size is reduced, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding or overlooking the information and adversely affecting the game, and to prevent the player from feeling tired or uncomfortable.

The invention concept (11-4) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information (for example, a display device 41) and a control means for controlling the display means (for example, an effect control device 300) are provided, and the result of the variable display game is provided. In a game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to the player when the predetermined result is obtained.
The control means is
It is possible to execute an enlarged display effect in which the image of the target object including the identification information (for example, a decorative large pattern) displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means is enlarged.
As the enlarged display effect, a game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect having a different enlargement ratio for each object.

(Invention Concept (11-5))
Further, in the present embodiment, the display angle during or after the enlargement of the enlarged image in the enlarged display effect may be different for each object, which can enhance the interest. The enlarged image may be displayed in a state in which it is three-dimensionally moved so as to be tilted in the front-rear direction, and the display angle may be different for each object including the change in the display angle in the front-back direction. As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The invention concept (11-5) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information and a control means for controlling the display means are provided, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that can generate various states
The control means is
It is possible to execute an enlarged display effect in which the image of the target object including the identification information displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means is enlarged.
As the enlarged display effect, a gaming machine characterized in that an effect in which the display angle of the enlarged image differs for each object can be executed.

(Invention Concept (11-6))
Further, in the present embodiment, during the enlarged display effect, the enlarged image is displayed semi-transparently, and a new background image or another effect image can be seen through behind the enlarged image. It is possible. As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The invention concept (11-6) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information and a control means for controlling the display means are provided, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that can generate various states
The control means is
It is possible to execute an enlarged display effect in which the image of the target object including the identification information displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means is enlarged.
A game characterized in that, at the time of the enlarged display effect, an enlarged image is displayed semi-transparently, and an effect in which a background image or another effect image can be seen through behind the enlarged image can be executed. Machine.

(Invention Concept (11-7))
Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 168 (b) and 168 (c), when the enlarged display effect is performed, the decorative large pattern (identification information) is variably displayed in the enlarged image. Is possible. As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The invention concept (11-7) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information and a control means for controlling the display means are provided, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine that can generate various states
The control means is
It is possible to execute an enlarged display effect in which the image of the target object displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means is enlarged.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect of varyingly displaying the identification information in an enlarged image at the time of the enlarged display effect.

(Invention Concept (12))
Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171 and the like, when the animation display (moving display) is performed as the hold display, the image data of the preceding hold display (still image data for each frame of the animation). Alternatively, it is possible to copy the image data for each frame of the animation obtained by expanding the moving image data) and perform the subsequent hold display including the latest hold display. In other words, it is possible to execute the subsequent hold display using the same image data for each frame of the preceding hold display and animation (for each frame of animation). As a result, all the hold displays of the animation are synchronized, and it is possible to realize the effect of the hold display by the highly interesting animation that is not uncomfortable for the player. That is, when the animation is executed as the hold display, there is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable if the animation of one hold display and the other hold display is not synchronized, which can be solved. As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The invention concept (12) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means can be executed on condition that there is a start winning (a winning of a game ball in the starting area). A game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when the result of a variable display game is a predetermined result.
A start storage means (game control device 100) that extracts determination information regarding the execution of the variation display game based on the start prize and stores it as the start memory of the variation display game.
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control is performed to execute the corresponding variable display game from the one that has won the start first, and the variable display game is executed in response to the execution of the variable display game. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) that controls erasing one start memory corresponding to the variable display game, and
As a start storage display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start storage means, animation at a plurality of locations (multiple positions in the display area) according to the number of the start memories. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying in the display area.
The effect control means
When a plurality of start memories for executing the animation display are generated, the image data of the animation display of the previous start memory (advance hold) corresponding to the previous start prize is copied for each animation frame (that is, for each animation frame). Then, the game is characterized in that the animation display of the subsequent start storage (subsequent hold) is performed using the copied image data (that is, the same image data for each frame as the animation display of the previous start memory). Machine.
Here, the subsequent start memory (subsequent hold) includes at least the latest start memory (latest hold) corresponding to the new start prize.
Further, "the image data of the animation display of the previous start memory is copied for each animation frame, and the copied image data is used to display the animation of the subsequent start memory" means, for example, moving image data. When the animation is displayed by using, "the same image based on the image data for each frame of the animation developed from the predetermined moving image data for the animation display of the previous start memory is displayed in the display area. At the same time as displaying at the position where the animation display of the start memory of is performed, it is also displayed at the position where the animation display of the subsequent start memory is performed. "

(Invention Concept (12-1))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 170, it is possible to copy the image data of the preceding hold display from the time of the hold shift and perform the subsequent hold display including the latest hold display. As a result, all the hold displays of the animation are synchronized (see Fig. 170 (c)) except until a new start prize is generated and the next hold shift is made, which is highly interesting for the player. It is possible to realize the effect of holding display by animation. That is, when the animation is executed as the hold display, there is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable if the animation of one hold display and the other hold display is not synchronized, which can be solved. As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved. Since the above copy is performed from the time of the hold shift, the latest hold hold display is executed from the beginning as illustrated in FIG. 170 (b) at the start of the latest hold hold display corresponding to the new start prize. Therefore, a state that is not synchronized with the hold display of the advance hold temporarily occurs, but this also has the effect of improving the interest as a kind of production.

The invention concept (12-1) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means can be executed on condition that there is a start winning (a winning of a game ball in the starting area). A game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when the result of a variable display game is a predetermined result.
A start storage means (game control device 100) that extracts determination information regarding the execution of the variation display game based on the start prize and stores it as the start memory of the variation display game.
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control is performed to execute the corresponding variable display game from the one that has won the start first, and the variable display game is executed in response to the execution of the variable display game. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) that controls erasing one start memory corresponding to the variable display game, and
As a start storage display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start storage means, animation at a plurality of locations (multiple positions in the display area) according to the number of the start memories. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying in the display area.
The start storage means ranks and stores the start memory in the order of occurrence, and stores the start memory.
The variable display game control means is associated with the execution of the variable display game corresponding to the oldest start memory (start memory by the earliest start winning) among the start memories stored in the start storage means. , It is a configuration that performs shift processing (so-called hold shift processing) that advances the order of the remaining start memory one by one.
The effect control means
While executing the animation display of the previous start memory (advance hold) corresponding to the previous start prize, the subsequent start memory (subsequent hold) corresponding to the new start prize and the animation display should be performed. When the above occurs, the animation display of the subsequent start memory is started from the beginning regardless of the previous start memory, and then from the time when the shift process is performed, the previous start memory (advance hold) is described. The image data of the animation display is copied for each animation frame (for each animation frame), and the copied image data (that is, the same image data for each frame (for each frame) as the animation display of the previous start memory) is copied. A gaming machine characterized in that it is used to display the animation of subsequent start memory (subsequent hold).

(Invention Concept (12-2))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 171, the image data of the preceding hold display is copied from the time of the new start winning prize (the time when the animation display of the subsequent hold is started), and the subsequent hold display is included. It may be configured to display the hold of. With this configuration, all the hold displays of the animation are synchronized from the beginning (see FIG. 171 (b)), and it is possible to realize the effect of the hold display by the highly interesting animation that is not uncomfortable for the player. That is, when the animation is executed as the hold display, there is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable if the animation of one hold display and the other hold display is not synchronized, which can be solved. As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved. Especially in this case, since all the hold displays of the animation are synchronized from the beginning, the effect is high.

The invention concept (12-2) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means can be executed on condition that there is a start winning (a winning of a game ball in the starting area). A game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when the result of a variable display game is a predetermined result.
A start storage means (game control device 100) that extracts determination information regarding the execution of the variation display game based on the start prize and stores it as the start memory of the variation display game.
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control is performed to execute the corresponding variable display game from the one that has won the start first, and the variable display game is executed in response to the execution of the variable display game. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) that controls erasing one start memory corresponding to the variable display game, and
As a start storage display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start storage means, animation at a plurality of locations (multiple positions in the display area) according to the number of the start memories. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying in the display area.
The effect control means
While executing the animation display of the previous start memory (advance hold) corresponding to the previous start prize, the subsequent start memory (subsequent hold) corresponding to the new start prize and the animation display should be performed. When the above occurs, the image data of the animation display of the previous start memory (advance hold) is copied for each animation frame (for each animation frame) from the start of the animation display of the subsequent start memory. The feature is that the animation display of the subsequent start storage (subsequent hold) is performed using the copied image data (that is, the same image data as the animation display of the previous start memory for each frame (frame)). Game machine to be.

(Invention Concept (13))
Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, in order to synchronize the animations of all the hold displays (including the hold during fluctuation in this case), all the hold animation timers, which are the same timers, are used. It is possible to control the progress of the animation of the hold display of. Due to this feature, for example, there is a new start prize (special figure 2) in the state shown in FIG. 176 (a) (the state in which all the animations of the hold display are synchronized), and a new hold display corresponding to the new start prize is displayed. Even if (latest hold display) is started, the animation of this latest hold display is also synchronized with other hold displays from the beginning as shown in FIG. 176 (b). As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.
In particular, with this configuration, with a simple configuration using one timer, the hold display of the animation is all synchronized from the beginning, and it is possible to realize the effect of the hold display by the animation, which is not uncomfortable for the player. That is, when the animation is executed as the hold display, there is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable if the animation of one hold display and the other hold display is not synchronized, which can be solved. Moreover, since the animation of all the hold displays is managed by one hold animation timer, the control becomes easy.

The invention concept (13) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
On condition that there is a start winning (a winning of a game ball in the starting area), it is possible to execute a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed by the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means. A game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to the player when the result of the display game is a predetermined result.
A start storage means (game control device 100) that extracts determination information regarding the execution of the variation display game based on the start prize and stores it as the start memory of the variation display game.
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control is performed to execute the corresponding variable display game from the one that has won the start first, and the variable display game is executed in response to the execution of the variable display game. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) that controls erasing one start memory corresponding to the variable display game, and
As a start storage display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start storage means, animation at a plurality of locations (multiple positions in the display area) according to the number of the start memories. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying in the display area.
The effect control means
It has one start storage animation timer (holding animation timer) which is a timer for managing the progress of the animation display, and the start storage animation timer is constantly updated while at least one of the animation displays is being executed. When there are a plurality of the start memories that are held as such and perform the animation display, the gaming machine is characterized in that the progress of the animation display of the plurality of start memories is managed by the start memory animation timer.
Here, "managing the progress of the animation display of a plurality of start memories by the start memory animation timer" means, for example, a frame (frames after the first) in the middle of the animation display of the preceding start memory. When a subsequent start memory due to a new start prize occurs during execution, the animation display of the subsequent start memory is performed in the first frame based on the value of the start memory animation timer for which the timekeeping operation is already in progress. This means that the animation display is started and advanced from a frame (frames after the first frame) corresponding to the value of the timer after the first frame).
Further, the start storage animation timer (hold animation timer) can also be called a start storage animation control timer (hold animation control timer). Further, as described with reference to FIG. 179 (a), the start memory animation timer (hold animation timer) may be in a mode of constantly updating (always continuing the timekeeping operation) even if there is no start memory (hold), or the start may be started. When there is no memory (hold) (that is, when the number of holds is 0), the update may be stopped (timekeeping operation is stopped).

It should be noted that the animation display has a plurality of modes in which the speed of the animation display (the apparent speed of the movement of the animation image) is different (when the range of the movement in which the animation makes a round is the same, in other words, the time of the round cycle is different. There is also a configuration in which the progress is managed by one start memory animation timer for these plurality of modes (types). For example, as described with reference to FIGS. 177 and 179 (b), for a specific mode (type), the frame switching of the animation display is performed at a speed corresponding to a change in the value of the start memory animation timer itself on a one-to-one basis. (Frame advance) is advanced, and for other modes (for example, the above-mentioned hold display A and hold display B) in which the speed of the animation display is different from that of the specific mode, the value of the start storage animation timer is changed to the speed. Corresponds to a one-to-one change in the value obtained by multiplying the corresponding coefficient (for example, 1/2, 1/4, 2, 3, ...) (For example, the value obtained by calculating the multiplication or division by a predetermined number). By advancing the frame switching (frame advance) of the animation display at a speed, a plurality of modes in which the speeds of the animation display are different may be realized by one timer (starting memory animation timer).
The invention concept (13b) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The animation display has a plurality of modes in which the speed (or one-round cycle time) of the animation display is different.
The effect control means
By advancing the animation display of each mode based on the value obtained by multiplying the value of the start memory animation timer by a coefficient as necessary, one start memory animation can also be performed for a plurality of modes in which the speed of the animation display is different. A gaming machine characterized in that the progress is managed by a timer.

(Invention Concept (13-1))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 178, even if the hold display mode changes due to the effect mode switching, it is possible to execute the display of the new hold display mode based on the same start memory animation timer (hold animation timer). Is. The progress of the hold display is continuously controlled based on one hold animation timer even before the effect mode is switched. That is, even if the mode of the hold display is switched by switching the effect mode, the hold display of the new mode after the effect mode is switched is not necessarily executed from the first frame of the animation (for example, the first frame of the movie). , The display is started from the frame corresponding to the value of the hold animation timer at that time based on the correspondence relationship as described with reference to FIG. 179 (b). For this reason, it is possible to realize the effect mode switching that is not uncomfortable for the player with easy control. As a result, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The invention concept (13-1) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
On condition that there is a start winning (a winning of a game ball in the starting area), it is possible to execute a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed by the display area (display unit 42a) of the display means. A game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to the player when the result of the display game is a predetermined result.
A start storage means (game control device 100) that extracts determination information regarding the execution of the variation display game based on the start prize and stores it as the start memory of the variation display game.
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control is performed to execute the corresponding variable display game from the one that has won the start first, and the variable display game is executed in response to the execution of the variable display game. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) that controls erasing one start memory corresponding to the variable display game, and
As a start storage display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start storage means, animation at a plurality of locations (multiple positions in the display area) according to the number of the start memories. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying in the display area.
The animation display is
The display mode or animation operation differs depending on the production mode,
The effect control means
It has one start memory animation timer (hold animation timer) which is a timer for managing the progress of the animation display, and the start memory animation timer is continuously updated even when the mode is switched to start a new effect mode. A gaming machine characterized in that the progress of the animation display newly started in response to a new effect mode when the mode is switched is also managed by the start memory animation timer.
Here, "the progress of the animation display newly started in response to the new effect mode when the mode is switched is also managed by the start memory animation timer" means, for example, corresponding to the new effect mode when the mode is switched. With respect to the newly started animation display, the first frame (first), unless the value of the timer specifies the first frame, based on the value of the start memory animation timer for which the timing operation is already in progress. This means that the animation display is started and progressed from the frame (frames after the first frame) corresponding to the value of the timer after the frame (frame).

(Invention Concept (13-2))
As another aspect of the animation display at the time of mode switching, as described in FIG. 178 (b), the start storage animation timer is cleared (reset) at the time of mode switching, that is, the start storage at the time of mode switching. The timekeeping operation of the animation timer is started from the beginning, the progress of the animation display is managed by the start memory animation timer that started the timekeeping operation from the beginning, and the animation display is started from the beginning when the mode is switched. There may be. In this case, the player can see the hold display in the new display mode corresponding to the new effect mode after switching from the beginning, and the effect is enhanced in that respect. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The invention concept (13-2) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
On condition that there is a start winning (a winning of a game ball in the starting area), it is possible to execute a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed by the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means. A game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to the player when the result of the display game is a predetermined result.
A start storage means (game control device 100) that extracts determination information regarding the execution of the variation display game based on the start prize and stores it as the start memory of the variation display game.
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control is performed to execute the corresponding variable display game from the one that has won the start first, and the variable display game is executed in response to the execution of the variable display game. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) that controls erasing one start memory corresponding to the variable display game, and
As a start storage display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start storage means, animation at a plurality of locations (multiple positions in the display area) according to the number of the start memories. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying in the display area.
The effect control means
It has one start memory animation timer (hold animation timer) which is a timer for managing the progress of the animation display, and when the mode is switched to start a new effect mode, the start memory animation timer is cleared and the timekeeping operation is started from the beginning. A gaming machine characterized in that the progress of the animation display, which is started and newly started in response to a new effect mode when the mode is switched, is also managed by the start memory animation timer.
Here, "the progress of the animation display newly started in response to the new effect mode when the mode is switched is also managed by the start memory animation timer" means, for example, corresponding to the new effect mode when the mode is switched. This means that the newly started animation display is started from the first frame (first frame) and progressed based on the value of the start storage animation timer that is cleared (reset).

(Invention Concept (13-3))
Further, in this embodiment, as described in FIG. 177 (b), in addition to the hold display of the animation, when the animation display is performed as, for example, a notice effect display incidental to the variable display of the decorative large symbol (special figure), The animation display of the effect related to this variable display is also controlled based on the common hold animation timer.
In this way, for controlling the effect display other than the hold display (such as the notice effect display of the variable display game), the hold animation timer common to the hold display may be used, and then the effect other than the hold display can be controlled. At the same time, it becomes possible to easily synchronize or link the effects other than the hold display with the hold display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The invention concept (13-3) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
On condition that there is a start winning (a winning of a game ball in the starting area), it is possible to execute a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed by the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means. A game machine capable of generating a state advantageous to the player when the result of the display game is a predetermined result.
A start storage means (game control device 100) that extracts determination information regarding the execution of the variation display game based on the start prize and stores it as the start memory of the variation display game.
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control is performed to execute the corresponding variable display game from the one that has won the start first, and the variable display game is executed in response to the execution of the variable display game. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) that controls erasing one start memory corresponding to the variable display game, and
An effect display (for example, a notice effect display) related to the variable display of the identification information can be executed in the display area, and the start is started by the display means corresponding to the start memory stored in the start storage means. As a storage display (so-called hold display), an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing animation display at a plurality of locations (multiple positions in the display area) according to the number of start memories in the display area. With,
The effect control means
A game characterized in that it has one start memory animation timer (hold animation timer) which is a timer for managing the progress of the animation display, and also manages at least a part of the progress of the effect display by the start memory animation timer. Machine.

Next, a modification of each invention of the present application will be described.
First, the effect display (the effect display in which the image of the identification information of the variable display game and the image of the effect information overlap at least partly) in the invention concepts (1) and (2) is not limited to the reach start effect. For example, it may be performed as an effect before the start of reach (the first half of the decorative special figure changes), it may be an effect performed as an effect during the reach action after the start of reach, or it may be performed while waiting for customers. It may be a production of.

In addition, the effect display (notification effect by combining identification information and different effect information) in the invention concept (3) is not limited to the presence or absence of reach action, and notifies the subsequent effect flow or the branch destination (transition destination) of the game flow. Or it may be suggestive. For example, this effect display may be performed as a part of the reach action, and may function as a notice effect indicating the development destination of the reach effect thereafter.
Further, the effect information displayed in the effect display in the invention concepts (3) and (8) is not two (two places) but three or more (three or more places), and the effect displayed in these three or more places. It may be a mode of notifying or suggesting the presence or absence of reach action by a combination of information or a difference in form. For example, the effect information may be displayed in each of the three columns of left, right, and middle, as in the design of the decorative special drawing.
Further, the display of the effect information in the effect display in the invention concepts (3) and (8) may include a variable display in which the type of the displayed effect information changes, or an embodiment that does not include the variable display (for example). , A mode in which the display is stopped and displayed without changing the type of effect information that has been started).

Next, the scope of application of the invention described in the present application will be described.
(1) The game machine can be applied not only to the example as in the embodiment but also to the enclosed ball type game machine even when the game is played using the game ball.
(2) It is not limited to game machines that use game balls, but is also applied to so-called pachislot machines (slot machine game machines that rotate) that play games using coins (or medals). Can be done.
(3) Display devices such as display devices for decorative special drawings are not limited to display devices using liquid crystals, but display devices using bendable materials such as organic EL, cathode ray tubes, dot LEDs, 7-segment LEDs, and electronic paper. Any member can be used as long as the content can be changed to produce the effect.

The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
4 Front frame (main body frame, game frame)
5 Glass frame (front frame)
9 Production button (operation means)
9a Touch panel (operation means)
11 Launch operation handle (operation unit)
11a Touch switch (contact detection means)
12a Upper speaker (directing means)
12b Lower speaker (directing means)
14 Logo display 16 Ball rental button 20 Game board 26 Ordinary variable prize device (ordinary electric accessory: Fuden)
26a Starting winning opening (second starting opening, starting area)
26b Opening / closing member (opening / closing door, starting port opening / closing means, starting area opening / closing means)
27 Variable winning device (special variable winning device)
27a Grand prize opening 27b Opening and closing member (opening and closing door)
32 General figure start gate 35 Collective display device (display means, special figure display means, general figure display means)
41 Display device (directing means, display means, special figure display means, general figure display means)
41a Display unit (display screen, display area)
42 board decoration device (directing means)
43 Frame decoration device (directing means)
44 board production device (production means)
55 External information terminal board 100 Game control device (control device, control means)
101 Game microcomputer 101A CPU
101B ROM
101C RAM
120 1st start port switch (start port 1 switch)
121 2nd start port switch (start port 2 switch)
122 Gate switch 123 Winning opening switch 124 Large winning opening switch 126 Magnetic sensor 127 Panel radio wave sensor 200 Payout control device 211 Glass frame (front frame) open detection switch 212 Front frame (main body frame) open detection switch 300 Production control device (control device) , Control means)
311 CPU
311a RAM
312 VDP
321 PROM
322 image ROM
326 RAM
327 FeRAM (backup memory)
338 Volume SW
339 LED for setting confirmation
500 Power supply device 600 Start port distribution device 607 Special figure 1 Start port (1st start port, start area)
608 Special Figure 2 Starting port (2nd starting port, starting area)
700 Movable accessory 701 Decorative part 801 Upper movable accessory (movable accessory, luminescent accessory)
802 Left side movable accessory (movable accessory)
803 Right side movable accessory (movable accessory)
H1 variable display area (identification information display area)

Claims (1)

A game machine capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed in the display area of the display means on condition that a start prize has been won.
A start storage means that extracts determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the start prize and stores it as start memory of the variable display game.
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control for executing the variable display game is performed, and one start memory corresponding to the variable display game corresponds to the execution of the variable display game. Variable display game control means that controls the elimination of
The start memory display corresponding to the variable display game being executed can be used as the variable start memory display to execute an animation display in which the animation of a predetermined cycle is repeated in the variable start memory display area, and is stored in the start storage means. It is provided with an effect control means capable of executing an animation display in which an animation of a predetermined cycle is repeated in a start memory display area as a standby start memory display corresponding to the start memory.
The start storage means ranks and stores the start memory in the order of occurrence, and stores the start memory.
The variable display game control means ranks one of the remaining start memories as the variable display game corresponding to the oldest start memory among the start memories stored in the start storage means is executed. It is a configuration that performs shift processing that moves up one by one.
The effect control means
The variable start memory display can be displayed in a special mode different from the standby start memory display, and the animation display in the special mode is synchronized with the animation display of the standby start memory display. It is possible to display
When a new start memory is generated while executing the animation display of the waiting start memory display corresponding to the previous start memory, regardless of the mode of the animation display of the waiting start memory display corresponding to the previous start memory. In response to the occurrence of the new start memory , the animation display of the standby start memory display corresponding to the new start memory is executed from the beginning.
Corresponding to the execution of the shift process, the waiting start memory display corresponding to the new start memory using the same image as the animation display of the waiting start memory display corresponding to the previous start memory . By performing the animation display, the animation display of the waiting start memory display corresponding to the previous start memory and the animation display of the waiting start memory display corresponding to the new start memory can be synchronized. possible der is,
It is possible to change the display mode of the variable start memory display and the standby start memory display according to the effect mode.
Even when the presentation mode is a display mode of the change in the start memory display and the standby starting memory display is changed is switched, Ru can der to perform animation display for the same period as before A game machine characterized by that.

Images